Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Reference
Guide
October 2003
Landmark
R2003.12.0
ii
Landmark
Contents
Documentation .............................................................................................
Starting Z-MAP Plus from the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu ...................
10
10
11
11
11
12
R2003.12.0
Contents
iii
Landmark
Introduction continued
OpenWorks ........................................................................................................
13
13
14
14
15
16
17
Using Z-MAP Plus with OpenWorks for the First Time ............................
19
20
22
SeisWorks ..........................................................................................................
24
StratWorks .........................................................................................................
26
Stratamodel ........................................................................................................
27
TDQ .....................................................................................................................
28
PetroWorks ........................................................................................................
29
30
30
30
30
R2003.12.0
Contents
iv
Landmark
31
32
Session .........................................................................................................
32
33
34
Basemap .......................................................................................................
34
36
37
38
39
45
46
46
46
46
47
47
47
47
47
48
Session .........................................................................................................
48
48
49
49
R2003.12.0
Contents
Landmark
50
51
52
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
65
66
67
68
68
70
70
File ............................................................................................................
70
71
71
72
73
74
74
R2003.12.0
Contents
vi
Landmark
85
85
86
Info ......................................................................................................................
89
90
Report ......................................................................................................
91
92
92
93
94
94
96
99
R2003.12.0
Contents
vii
Landmark
File continued
Directory Paths .................................................................................................. 108
MFDs ............................................................................................................. 110
ZGFs .............................................................................................................. 111
Data Files ...................................................................................................... 112
Session Files ................................................................................................ 112
Format Files .................................................................................................. 114
Color Tables ................................................................................................. 115
Macro Files ................................................................................................... 115
Import ................................................................................................................. 116
ASCII (Import) ............................................................................................... 117
Before You Start to Import ASCII Data ................................................. 119
Input and Output Files for the Import Option ....................................... 120
If You Have a Format File ....................................................................... 121
If You Have a Format Description ......................................................... 121
If You Do Not Have a Format File .......................................................... 122
Grid File to MFD/OW .................................................................................... 129
Disk File to ZGF ............................................................................................ 130
CPS-1 File to MFD ........................................................................................ 131
Print Menu Options ........................................................................................... 131
CGM ............................................................................................................... 132
Graphics File Name ................................................................................ 134
Picture Name ........................................................................................... 134
Unit Type ................................................................................................. 134
Graphics Features .................................................................................. 134
Picture: W and H ..................................................................................... 134
R2003.12.0
Contents
viii
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
ix
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xi
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xii
Landmark
Features
Overview ............................................................................................................. 219
Basemap (Basemap Features Dialog Box) ..................................................... 223
Basemap Features Buttons ......................................................................... 225
Cross Section .................................................................................................... 226
Cross Section Features ............................................................................... 226
Horizons .................................................................................................. 226
Map Features ................................................................................................ 232
Overlay Pictures ................................................................................................ 233
Input Graphics File ....................................................................................... 235
Input Picture ................................................................................................. 235
R2003.12.0
Contents
xiii
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xiv
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xv
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xvi
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xvii
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xviii
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xix
Landmark
Features continued
Picture Assembly .............................................................................................. 370
Select Graphics File ..................................................................................... 370
Select Picture ............................................................................................... 370
Select Features ............................................................................................. 370
Cutline, Division ........................................................................................... 371
Create Frame ................................................................................................ 371
Modify Frame ................................................................................................ 372
Delete Frame ................................................................................................. 374
R2003.12.0
Contents
xx
Landmark
Modeling
Overview ............................................................................................................. 385
Shared Gridding Parameters ...................................................................... 388
Control Grids ................................................................................................ 389
Data Hulls ...................................................................................................... 390
Setting the Radius of the Ball used to Create the Convex Hull .......... 391
Search Radius .............................................................................................. 392
Extrapolation Distance ................................................................................ 392
Refinements .................................................................................................. 393
Flexing Parameters ...................................................................................... 393
Point Gridding Plus ........................................................................................... 394
Overview ....................................................................................................... 395
Point Gridding Plus Support Utilities ......................................................... 398
Using Point Gridding Plus ........................................................................... 399
Fault Processing ..................................................................................... 400
Fault Geometry ....................................................................................... 400
Profile Contouring and Point Gridding Plus ........................................ 400
Using Point Gridding Plus with Vertical Separation Faults ................ 401
Point Gridding Plus Parameters ................................................................. 401
Basic Tab ...................................................................................................... 401
Input Files ................................................................................................ 402
Gridding Parameters .............................................................................. 404
Output Panel ........................................................................................... 413
Advanced Tab ............................................................................................... 413
Smoothing Panel .................................................................................... 413
Other Controls Panel .............................................................................. 414
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxi
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxii
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxiii
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxiv
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxv
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxvi
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxvii
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxviii
Landmark
Modeling: Trend Fit Gridding: Output Grid Name, Primary Parameters continued
Minimum and Maximum Z Values ......................................................... 505
Input Grid (Blocking) Parameters ............................................................... 506
X and Y Block Factors ............................................................................ 506
Mean Information Display ...................................................................... 506
Residual Display ..................................................................................... 506
Trend Surface Grid ............................................................................................ 507
Using Trend Surface Gridding .................................................................... 508
Factors Affecting Trend Gridding Accuracy ........................................ 508
Block Averaging ..................................................................................... 512
Output Grid Parameters ......................................................................... 512
Limiting Z Values .................................................................................... 513
Boolean Grid ...................................................................................................... 515
Constant Grid ..................................................................................................... 516
Polynomial Grid ................................................................................................. 517
User-Defined Filter ............................................................................................ 519
Flexing ................................................................................................................ 520
Major Types of Flexing ................................................................................ 521
Effects of Flexing on Surface Form ............................................................ 522
Set FLEXING Parameters Dialog Box ......................................................... 523
Input Grid ................................................................................................. 523
Faults ....................................................................................................... 523
Output Grid Name, Mask Use ................................................................ 523
Flexing Parameters ................................................................................. 524
Control Points ......................................................................................... 529
Z-field (Control Pts) ................................................................................ 530
Grid .......................................................................................................... 530
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxix
Landmark
Operations
Overview ............................................................................................................. 531
Calculator ........................................................................................................... 536
Introduction to the Calculator ..................................................................... 538
Grid Operations ................................................................................................. 539
Single Grid Operations ................................................................................ 540
Input Grid ................................................................................................. 540
Operation ................................................................................................. 541
Output Grid Name and Constant Value ................................................ 543
Faults ....................................................................................................... 543
Dual Grid Operations ................................................................................... 544
Grid A and B ............................................................................................ 545
Operation ................................................................................................. 545
Output Grid Name, ZNON, and AOI ....................................................... 547
Antilog Base 10 (from Grid) ........................................................................ 548
Blank Grid ..................................................................................................... 549
How Blank Grid Works ........................................................................... 550
Input Grid ................................................................................................. 550
Select Polygon File ................................................................................. 550
Output Name and Parameters ............................................................... 550
Resample Grid .............................................................................................. 552
How Resample Grid Works .................................................................... 553
Input Grid ................................................................................................. 553
Select Faults ............................................................................................ 553
Output Grid Name and Parameters ....................................................... 554
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxx
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxxi
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxxii
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxxiii
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxxiv
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxxv
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxxvi
Landmark
Operations continued
Coordinate Transformations ............................................................................ 686
Spheroid ........................................................................................................ 689
Projection ...................................................................................................... 689
Defining Where Projection Surface and Spheroid Intersect ............... 691
TRANSFORM COORDINATES Dialog Box Options .................................. 692
Input File .................................................................................................. 692
Set Direction of transformation ............................................................. 692
Input Y/Latitude Field ............................................................................. 692
Input X/Longitude Field .......................................................................... 692
Output Name and Transformation parameters .................................... 692
Set Projection for Transformation ........................................................ 693
Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields) ............................................. 700
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees .................................................................. 701
DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS CONVERSION Dialog Box Options .... 702
Input File .................................................................................................. 702
Output File, Algorithm, Parameters ...................................................... 702
DMS Latitude Field ................................................................................. 703
DMS Longitude Field .............................................................................. 703
Latitude Field .......................................................................................... 703
Longitude Field ....................................................................................... 703
Line Generalization ........................................................................................... 704
LINE GENERALIZATION Dialog Box Options ............................................ 705
Input File .................................................................................................. 705
Output File, Algorithm, Parameters ...................................................... 706
Z Field ...................................................................................................... 709
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxxvii
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxxviii
Landmark
Macros
Overview ............................................................................................................. 737
User Macros .................................................................................................. 737
Quick-look ..................................................................................................... 738
Graphics ........................................................................................................ 739
Operations .................................................................................................... 739
Geophysics ................................................................................................... 740
Utilities .......................................................................................................... 740
Execute Macro ................................................................................................... 741
Fill in Macro Parameter Defaults ................................................................ 742
View Parameter Panels, Change/Assign Parameter Values .................... 742
CARM
Overview ............................................................................................................. 743
Volumetrics ........................................................................................................ 745
How Volumes Are Computed ...................................................................... 746
Volumetrics Report ...................................................................................... 747
Volumetrics Dialog Box Options ................................................................ 749
Input Grid ................................................................................................. 749
Select Faults ............................................................................................ 750
Select Vertex File .................................................................................... 751
Output Name and Parameters ............................................................... 751
Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics ..................................................................... 760
Surface Correction ............................................................................................ 761
R2003.12.0
Contents
xxxix
Landmark
CARM continued
Water Saturation Averaging ............................................................................. 762
Requirements for Performing Water Saturation Averaging ..................... 763
Water Saturation Averaging Dialog Box Options ..................................... 764
Formation Grids (Formation Structure) ................................................ 764
Porosity Curves ...................................................................................... 765
Water Saturation at OWC ....................................................................... 765
Elevation at OWC .................................................................................... 765
Intermediate Grid Porosity Increment .................................................. 766
Intermediate Grid Height Increment ...................................................... 766
Intermediate [Check] Grid Output File Name ....................................... 766
Intermediate Grid Master File ................................................................ 766
Average Water Saturation Output File Name ....................................... 766
Average Water Saturation Output Master File ..................................... 766
Area/Depth Plot .................................................................................................. 767
Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons) ...................................................................... 769
Quick Volumetrics (40 Polygons) .................................................................... 770
Tools
Overview ............................................................................................................. 771
Spawn Unix Process ......................................................................................... 772
System Window ................................................................................................. 773
Raise .............................................................................................................. 773
Log Output .................................................................................................... 773
Always On Top ............................................................................................. 773
R2003.12.0
Contents
xl
Landmark
Tools continued
Process Logging ............................................................................................... 774
Logging Option ............................................................................................ 775
Log File Name ............................................................................................... 775
System Switches ............................................................................................... 776
Parameter Unlocking Mode ......................................................................... 776
Diagnostic Messages Displayed ................................................................. 777
Display Picture When Opened .................................................................... 777
Graphics Background Mode ....................................................................... 778
Units .............................................................................................................. 778
Graphics Window Configuration ................................................................ 778
Confirm Exit .................................................................................................. 778
Iconify Console on Macro Execution ......................................................... 779
OW Sort Order ................................................................................................... 779
Sort Hierarchically by Key Fields ............................................................... 779
Sort By Date .................................................................................................. 780
SIL Debug Print Switch ..................................................................................... 780
R2003.12.0
Contents
xli
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xlii
Landmark
Appendix E. Import/Export
Transferring Data In or Out of an MFD ............................................................ 827
Introduction .................................................................................................. 827
Common Terms ...................................................................................... 828
Import/Export File Format ................................................................................. 829
Beginning and Ending Symbols ................................................................. 829
Comment Symbols ....................................................................................... 830
History Symbols ........................................................................................... 830
File Description Parameters ........................................................................ 831
General File Description Parameters .................................................... 831
Non-Grid File Parameters ...................................................................... 832
Grid File Parameters ............................................................................... 833
Field Description Parameters ..................................................................... 834
Example ................................................................................................... 834
Non-Grid Field Description Parameters ............................................... 834
Grid Field Description Parameters ........................................................ 839
Parameters for Line 1 ............................................................................. 839
Parameters for Line 2 ............................................................................. 842
Parameters for Line 3 ............................................................................. 843
Lattice Field Description Parameters ................................................... 844
Parameters for Line 1 ............................................................................. 844
Parameters for Line 2 ............................................................................. 846
Format File ......................................................................................................... 847
Examples ...................................................................................................... 847
Non-Grid Examples ................................................................................ 847
Grid Examples ......................................................................................... 849
R2003.12.0
Contents
xliii
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xliv
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Contents
xlv
Landmark
Glossary
Z-MAP Plus Glossary ........................................................................................ 905
Index ....................................................................................................................
R2003.12.0
Contents
937
xlvi
Landmark
Introduction
R2003.12.0
Landmark
Documentation
The Z-MAP Plus documentation set includes the following PDF-format
documents.
R2003.12.0
Landmark
Never use the kill window or Close option to remove the Z-MAP Plus xterm
window from your monitor. This window must remain active during the
Z-MAP Plus session, or serious problems will result.
R2003.12.0
Landmark
error messages
Watch This Window.
Messages appear to let
you know when one
process is finished and
you can continue to the
next.
The menu bar is located at the top of the window. Click any menu
name to display a drop-down list of options.
R2003.12.0
The display area is the primary working area for graphics. Maps
and cross sections appear in this area. You can resize the display
area. The image readjusts automatically to fill the available space,
while maintaining the maps aspect ratio. This means the
relationship between the x and y coordinates is consistent. You can
detach the display area from the menu bar and display these two
elements on separate monitors.
Landmark
The status area is located below the display area. Watch the status
area for helpful prompts and parameter values for current
processes.
The following illustration shows the menus in the Z-MAP Plus menu
bar.
R2003.12.0
Landmark
Inactive Options
The Edit and View options are initially inactive and appear dimmed. These
options control the display of graphics. The options become active if you attach
or create a graphics file.
Shortcut Icons
Zoom In
Window
Zoom Out
View
functions
Full Display
Re-display
Display List
Pan
Color Table
Edit
functions
Color Indices
Raise System
Window
Toggle
Background
Color
Tools
functions
Process
Interrupt
Undo
Redo
R2003.12.0
Landmark
Workflow Icons
The icons in the workflow toolbar are shortcuts to some frequently used
functions. The icons are organized from left to right in a rough
approximation of a typical Z-MAP Plus workflow.
Attach ZGFs
Picture Open
Basemap
Features
Point Gridding
Plus
Save to
SeisWorks
Attach
MFDs
File Manager
Contouring
Calculator
Open
SeisWorks Data
R2003.12.0
Icon Name
Attach MFDs
Attach ZGFs
Picture Open
File Manager
Basemap Features
Contouring
Calculator
Save to SeisWorks
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Landmark
2.
You can now select Z-MAP Plus or a related application from the
Applications menu of the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu.
You can run only one Z-MAP Plus session at a time from a single working
directory.
Although you can display multiple OpenWorks Command Menus that are
each set to read different databases, Z-MAP Plus does not allow
concurrent access to its parameter file (LASPRM.ZCL). To run multiple
Z-MAP Plus sessions simultaneously, you must reset the WORKGROUP
environment variable to another directory.
R2003.12.0
Landmark
You can now display the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu by entering:
ZMAPPlus
R2003.12.0
10
Landmark
control points
grids
faults
lineal features
text
ZGFs manage picture files, including these elements:
maps
cross sections
three-dimensional displays
R2003.12.0
At amy one time, you can have a maximum of four MFDs attached
to a Z-MAP Plus session.
11
Landmark
You can set MFDs to allow only read-only access, which permits
multiple users to use the MFDs, but prohibits anyone from adding
files to them. Lock files are not created for read-only MFDs.
You can have only one ZGF attached to a Z-MAP Plus session at
any one time.
R2003.12.0
12
Landmark
OpenWorks
If you use OpenWorks with Z-MAP Plus, Z-MAP Plus has a direct
connection with the data stored for the OpenWorks project. You do not
need to perform special import and export operations to retrieve and
send data to OpenWorks. This topic contains a brief overview of
OpenWorks, and examines the connection between OpenWorks and
Z-MAP Plus.
Overview of OpenWorks
OpenWorks is a computer environment built on a comprehensive
exploration and production database. You can use various OpenWorks
utilities to import, export, manage, and display data.
An Oracle relational data structure sits at the foundation of OpenWorks.
The Oracle database is composed of tables that group related
information. OpenWorks stores four kinds of data that you can use in
Z-MAP Plus:
All Z-MAP Plus operations can be performed using data from either the
traditional binary MFD data files, or using data directly from the
OpenWorks database.
R2003.12.0
Introduction: OpenWorks
13
Landmark
You can use MFDs with the OpenWorks database in the following
ways:
To optimize data access and retrieval speeds, you can copy data
from OpenWorks to an MFD for temporary storage.
The MFD datatypes (such as DATA and FALT) are stored with the data
so Z-MAP Plus can filter the data for display in dialog boxes.
The instructions in this section assume that your project data is already
loaded into the OpenWorks database. For more information about data
loading, see the OpenWorks Geodata Loading guide.
R2003.12.0
Introduction: OpenWorks
14
Landmark
Once you select a project and interpreter, the Z-MAP Plus Command
Menu reflects the settings, as shown in the following example:
The upper part of the dialog box refers to data stored in a Z-MAP Plus
MFD. The lower part of the dialog box lists all the available grids in the
current OpenWorks project. The column headings are described in the
following table:
R2003.12.0
Column
Explanation
Geo Name
Geo Type
Attribute
Type
Interpreter
Introduction: OpenWorks
15
Landmark
If you use a function in Z-MAP Plus that requires faults or pointsets, the
input dialog box is similar, except that faults and pointsets are shown as
options instead of grids.
Saving Files to the OpenWorks Project
You can use functions that output pointsets, grids, and faults to store
data directly in the OpenWorks project. These functions include an
OpenWorks option for Output MFD, as shown in the following
example.
Once you select OpenWorks for output, the OW button next to the
Output File Name option. When you click the OW button, the following
dialog box appears:
With this dialog box, you can fill out the information that OpenWorks
requires to properly store your grid, pointset, or fault data in the
database. This dialog box uses default values based on the input
parameters specified.
R2003.12.0
Introduction: OpenWorks
16
Landmark
Once stored in the database, you have immediate access to the data. the
previous dialog box showed an example of storing a pointset in the
OpenWorks database. As you can see from the following picture, the
pointset becomes immediately available as potential input for a gridding
operation.
Typical Workflows
There are really no typical workflows for Z-MAP Plus. How you use
this versatile program depends on your data, your objectives, and your
work style. You might consider the approaches suggested in the
following diagram and adapt them when you are ready. This work flow
assumes that you have already created the project and loaded data into
the database.
R2003.12.0
Introduction: OpenWorks
17
Landmark
Workflow for a
Comprehensive
Z-MAP Plus
Session
Evaluate well data and make a list of all wells of special interest
(for example, those with a particular log suite).
R2003.12.0
Introduction: OpenWorks
18
Landmark
When you start subsequent sessions with the same project, fewer steps
are required. You already have an interpreter designation in the project,
and your prioritized list of interpreters remains in effect.
R2003.12.0
Introduction: OpenWorks
19
Landmark
pointsets
grids
For example, if you pick Top A, other interpreters can see the pick and
use it to create gridded surfaces. However, only you can alter the pick.
If no interpreters are defined in a project, the interpreter LGC is
automatically created and selected as the current interpreter.
R2003.12.0
Introduction: OpenWorks
20
Landmark
Browse lets you view data in the database but you cannot edit it.
Interpret lets you add your own data, edit it in, and delete it from
the database.
Management lets you edit data created by anyone working in the
project. Generally only a project manager has this level of access.
Changing the Owner of an Interpreter Designation
To change an interpreter (and all of its associated data) from one user account
to another, do as follows:
1. Log in with the user account to which you want to change the interpreter.
2. In the Interpreters tool, delete the interpreter.
3. Add the same interpreter initials. The user account you are logged into is
now listed as the current owner.
R2003.12.0
Introduction: OpenWorks
21
Landmark
MFDs The MFD is the storage device for all types of data files
that Z-MAP Plus uses and some data files that other Landmark
applications use. Z-MAP Plus can write data to MFDs and read it
from them.
This topic covers the means of integrating data between Z-MAP Plus
and the following Landmark applications:
To create grids in Z-MAP Plus that you can export to TDQ, you must set
the Depth Type and Depth Units so that TDQ can recognize the output
grid.
R2003.12.0
22
Landmark
Z-MAP Plus
Grid, contour, and edit surfaces.
Perform surface and data operations
Pointset Builder
StratWorks
Use grids created with advanced
Z-MAP Plus gridding algorithms.
Access zone attribute grids.
PetroWorks
Access zone attributes created from
calculated logs for gridding in Z-MAP Plus.
SeisWorks
Access pointsets, grids, horizons,
faults, and shot points.
Stratamodel
Transfer MFD grids, pointsets, and faults.
TDQ
Access grids and polygons.
R2003.12.0
23
Landmark
SeisWorks
pointsets, well
traces,
centerline faults,
fault polygons,
horizons/grids
Z-MAP Plus
OpenWorks
database
MFD
grids, pointsets,
well traces,
centerline faults,
fault polygons
grids, pointsets,
centerline faults,
fault polygons,
horizons
(converted to grids)
Save in
database
SeisWorks
Open in
Z-MAP Plus
Of the data types SeisWorks can export, Z-MAP Plus can use the
following ones:
Shotpoint values imported into Z-MAP Plus do not match the seismic
survey line names in SeisWorks 3D surveys. The shotpoint values refer to
the 3D Line Number value.
R2003.12.0
Introduction: SeisWorks
24
Landmark
Fault Heave Data is stored in the FALT data type and includes
fault heave or fault throw information associated with the horizon.
This file contains the following fields: x, y, segment ID, delta z
throw, and fault gap (heave).
R2003.12.0
Introduction: SeisWorks
25
Landmark
StratWorks
Z-MAP Plus
maps
grids
pointsets
well traces
centerline faults
fault polygons
grids
pointsets
centerline faults
fault polygons
OpenWorks
database
MFD
ZGF
pointsets
centerline faults
fault polygons
grids
pointsets
well traces
centerline faults
fault polygons
grids
maps
StratWorks
R2003.12.0
contour grids
display grid profiles along any section
perform grid operations, such as multiplying an isopach grid by a
porosity grid
produce hardcopy
Introduction: StratWorks
26
Landmark
Of the variety of data that StratWorks can export, Z-MAP Plus can use
the following:
Fault polygons, which are stored in a FALT file type in the MFD,
include (x, y, and segment ID) and are created with the StratWorks
MapView editing function.
Stratamodel
Z-MAP Plus
grids
OpenWorks
database
well traces
data file
MFD
grids
read only
well traces
Stratamodel
Introduction: Stratamodel
27
Landmark
TDQ
Z-MAP Plus
Set Depth Type
Set Depth Units
grids
centerline faults
OpenWorks
database
grids
fault polygons
data file
grids
fault polygons
grids
centerline faults
TDQ
You can import data from or export data to TDQ through the
OpenWorks database, or exchange grids and fault polygon data directly
through data files.
TDQ sees only depth or time grids, all other grid types are invisible. Be
sure you set the Depth Type and Depth Units by using the OpenWorks
Grid Output Specification dialog box.
R2003.12.0
Introduction: TDQ
28
Landmark
PetroWorks
In addition to the data you can write to and read from the OpenWorks
database, you can import reservoir production parameter data the
PetroWorks Summation module generates. Examples of reservoir
production parameter data include net pay and net reservoir rock, which
PetroWorks saves as zone attributes and stores in the OpenWorks
database. You can import this data from OpenWorks into an MFD and
use it to create grids and contour maps in Z-MAP Plus. (For more
information about PetroWorks, see the PetroWorks User Guide set.)
Z-MAP Plus
grids
pointsets
well traces
MFD
OpenWorks
database
reservoir
production
parameters
grids
pointsets
well traces
PetroWorks
R2003.12.0
Introduction: PetroWorks
29
Landmark
True Color
Z-MAP Plus now displays images in true color, no matter which
platform you use, provided your system is set to display true color.
When you print images or save them as CGM files, a standard 256-color
palette is still used.
R2003.12.0
30
Landmark
Overview
Use File menu options in the Z-MAP Plus window to manage
Z-MAP Plus files in the following ways:
Manager Start the File Manager utility (page 60). Use the File
Manager to cut, copy, paste, move, delete, and rename member
files in MFDs, pictures in ZGFs, Systems files, and OpenWorks
files. You can also compress and rename MFDs and ZGFs.
(Equivalent to the File Manager icon.)
R2003.12.0
Import Import various types of data into Z-MAP Plus and save
the data in an MFD or ZGF (page 116).
31
Landmark
Parameter files have the extension .ZCLPARMS. (Use all capitals or all lower
case for the extension, but do not use mixed case.) If you do not add the
extension, the program adds it automatically when you click OK. (For more
information about session file extensions, see page 68.)
For information about the target directory for the blank session file, see
Location for Saving Session Files on page 69.
R2003.12.0
32
Landmark
Master File
Select File New Master File (MFD) to display the CREATE
MASTER FILE dialog box, which you use to create a Master File
Directory (MFD). In the CREATE MASTER FILE dialog box, set the
parameters described in the following text.
Saving Scratch File Contents
R2003.12.0
33
Landmark
Fully qualified name (full path terminated by the file name and
extension) is no longer than 79 characters
No internal blank spaces
Terminated with the extension .ZGF or .zgf
If you do not add the extension, the program adds it automatically
when it creates the file.
If you do not enter a destination path, the ZGF is saved in the output path
specified in the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. If no
Directory Paths: ZGFs output path is specified, the file is saved in your
home directory.
Graphics File Header
This field is obsolete.
Basemap
Select File New Basemap to display the NEW MAP Creation
dialog box, which you use to create a new basemap. The following
workflow shows the main steps.
R2003.12.0
34
Landmark
Click the first button, Picture Name, AOI Types and Scale Types.
Specify parameters in the Picture NAME, AOI & Scale Type dialog box.
Existing data,
picture, contours
Define AOI
from...
User input
Yes
Is this a
projected
map?
No
Activate projection
Apply
R2003.12.0
35
Landmark
R2003.12.0
36
Landmark
Scale Type
You must set a scale for drawing the map so it corresponds
proportionally with real world distances. Use the Scale Type option to
specify how you plan to set the scale. You define the actual scale
measurements when you specify the AOI.
Click the Scale Type button in the Picture NAME, AOI & Scale Type
dialog box. From the drop-down list, choose an option to use as a basis
for the map scale:
Grid From the Select AOI Source file dialog box that appears,
select a grid to use as the AOI source.
R2003.12.0
Data From the Select AOI Source file dialog box that appears,
select an AOI source either an MFD dataset (from the top list)
or a DATA file (from the bottom list).
Contours From the Select AOI Source file dialog box that
appears, select a contour file to use as the AOI source.
37
Landmark
R2003.12.0
38
Landmark
Projection Parameters
You must specify projection parameters for the map. Click the
Projection Parameters button to display the Set up a Projection dialog
box. Use this dialog box to create projections for the new map from one
of the following sources:
a data file
an existing picture
user input
state plane
Projection from DATA or PICTURE
To use the projection from an existing data file or map, click the
Projection from DATA or PICTURE button. The Select Projection
Source Type dialog box appears, which you use to select the data file or
picture whose projection information you want to use. Click one of the
following buttons to display the appropriate list:
R2003.12.0
39
Landmark
Projection Code
To use a projection code to define the projection, click the Projection
Code button in the Projection Parameter SETUP dialog box. Select a
projection code from the list of codes that appears. The projection can
be Cylindrical, Conic or Planar Azimuthal. The available projections are
listed in the following text. For a complete description of each available
projection, see Map Projections on page 875.
Unlocking Parameters When Changing Projections
Landmark highly recommends that you unlock parameters before you change
projections in order to prevent AOI incompatibility.
.
R2003.12.0
40
Landmark
Spheroid
Once you select a projection code, select a spheroid code. Each spheroid
code corresponds to a reference spheroid a theoretical geometric
figure whose dimensions closely resemble the dimensions of the earth
for a particular area.
Click the Spheroid button in the Projection Parameter SETUP dialog
box. The Select Spheroid CODE list appears, which you use to choose
a defined reference spheroid or to select the USER-DEFINED option
and specify custom axes for the spheroid. Spheroid options are shown in
the following illustration.
For a complete description of each of the reference spheroids (including
the dimensions for the semi-major axis and the semi-minor axis of each
one), see Reference Spheroid on page 893. The program uses the two
axes to calculate the ellipticity for the map projection.
.
R2003.12.0
41
Landmark
Projection Parameters
Once you select a projection code and spheroid, click the Projection
Parameters button in the Projection Parameter SETUP dialog box to
display the Set Projection Parameters dialog box appears. The Set
Projection Parameters dialog box contains parameters required for the
specified projection. The parameters are context-specific, and may
include the following options:
Unit Code
Unit Factor
Reference Latitude
Reference Longitude
Central Meridian
R2003.12.0
42
Landmark
Reference Longitude
Reference Longitude, or Central Meridian, is the line of longitude
located at the center of a projection on which the projection is generally
based.
Longitude Scale Factor
The Longitude Scale Factor is a multiplier for reducing a distance
obtained from a map by computing the scale to the actual distance on the
datum of the map. For example, applying a scale reduction along the
central meridian of a transverse Mercator projection creates two lines of
true scale on either side of the central meridian.
False Easting
A value assigned a central meridian of a coordinate system to avoid the
inconvenience of using negative coordinates.
False Northing
A value assigned to the origin of Northings, or grid coordinates to avoid
the inconvenience of using negative coordinates.
Central Meridian
The line of Longitude located at the center of a projection on which the
projection is generally based. This parameter is also known as the
Reference Longitude.
Mapping Across the Dateline
Select whether or not the map crosses the international dateline. This is
a theoretical 180th meridian, the regions to the east of which are counted
as being one day earlier in their calendar dates than regions to the west
of the line.
Projection from STATE PLANE
The State Plane Coordinate System (SPCS) is used as a standard for
geodetic mapping across the United States and its territories. This
system which is used by the United States Geologic Survey (USGS),
dictates the parameters used by the projections.
NAD27 and NAD83 Projection Systems
Z-MAP Plus now explicitly supports both NAD27 and NAD83
coordinates and provides a means of converting latitude/longitude
coordinates between the two datums.
R2003.12.0
43
Landmark
Units used by the NAD27 state plane projection system are in U.S. survey feet.
Units used by the NAD83 state plane projection system are in metric units.
If you click either NAD27 or NAD83, a list appears that consists of all
50 states, Samoa, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands and the Old and New
regions for Michigan. Select the option you want.
Select Region
A list of regions associated with the selected state appears. Depending
on the state, regions are listed as East, West, North, South, Central, or
by number, such as Region 1, Region 2, and Region 3.
Activate Projection
Select this option to activate the currently defined projection
parameters. These parameters remain in effect until you select the
Deactivate Projection option or reactivate and change the current
projection parameters by reselecting the Activate Projection option.
Deactivate Projection
Select this option to deactivate a projection when you wish to generate
a picture using northing/easting parameters.
R2003.12.0
44
Landmark
Cross Section
Select File New Cross Section in
the Z-MAP Plus window
Horizons, baseline
Apply
R2003.12.0
45
Landmark
R2003.12.0
46
Landmark
Line Number
If a file contains more than one line, enter the line number to use as the
baseline.
AOI from Existing Picture
You can define the area of interest (AOI) by finding another cross
section with an appropriate AOI.
You can use this option to define the cross section AOI by using the AOI
of an existing cross section. The ZGF you select is used to build a list of
available pictures you can select. The list of available ZGFs reflects the
ZGFs in the specified ZGFs: Directory Paths (described on page 111).
If the needed ZGF is not listed, check the directory path settings.
In the list of pictures that appears, select a cross section to use for
determining the AOI of the new cross section.
AOI from User Input
Once you have selected the desired horizons, and selected the baseline
to use, select the AOI from User Input option. The program will display
the defaults for the horizontal and vertical axes limits. You may then use
this dialog box to define the maps offsets and the vertical and horizontal
scales.
Horizontal and Vertical Minimums and Maximums
The horizontal axis limits are defaulted as the length of the baseline with
the horizontal minimum set to zero. The vertical axis limits are defaulted
to cover the range of all the Z-values in the selected grids.
To draw the cross section with the same horizontal scale as a contour
map, the horizontal axis scale must be the same as the X and Y scales
used to generate the contour map.
Vertical variation can be exaggerated by making the vertical axis scale
smaller than the horizontal axis scale.
Offsets and Scale
Specify the area above, below, to the left, and to the right of the border
that you want to reserve for map labels and other information.
R2003.12.0
47
Landmark
Session
Select Open Session to display the SELECT Session File dialog box,
which you use to select and open a .ZCLPARM (or .zclparm) file.
Parameter values are reset from the selected file.
The SELECT Session File dialog box contains a list of the previously
created parameter files contained in the directories specified in the
Session tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. If the list is empty, check
the settings in the Directory Paths dialog box, as described on page 112.
MFD Open/Close
You can select MFDs to open or close from a list of the MFDs located
in paths specified by the Directory Paths for Master Files setting. (For
more information about this setting, see Directory Paths on
page 108.)
You can have a maximum of four MFDs attached to a session at a time.
If you select more than four MFDs to attach, only the first four are
attached, and an error statement appears in the system window.
Attach MFDs Icon
Clicking the Attach MFDs icon is equivalent to selecting the MFD Open/
Close menu option. The Attach MFDs icon is located at the top of the
Z-MAP Plus window:
R2003.12.0
48
Landmark
ZGF Open/Close
Select Open Graphics File to attach a graphics file (ZGF) and
automatically detach the currently attached ZGF. The program searches
for all ZGFs in the directories specified by the Directory Paths setting.
Attach ZGFs Icon
Clicking the Attach ZGFs icon is equivalent to selecting the ZGF Open/Close
menu option. The Attach ZGFs icon is located at the top of the Z-MAP Plus
window.
As soon as you select a file, the list disappears and the selected file is
attached. You can attach only one graphics file at a time.
Picture Open
Select Open Picture Open to select a picture (map or cross section)
you want to view and modify. If the picture you want is not listed in the
dialog box that appears, check the status area to verify that the
appropriate ZGF is attached. Once you select a picture, the status area
displays the picture name.
Picture Open Icon
Clicking the Picture Open icon is equivalent to selecting the Picture Open
menu option. The Picture Open icon is located at the top of the Z-MAP Plus
window.
If this is the first time you have selected the File Open
Picture Open option, the Edit and View menus are inactive. Once you
select or create a map or cross section, these menus are activated and no
longer appear dimmed.
If the Tools System Switches Display Picture When Opened
option is set to Yes, the selected map or cross section is drawn
automatically. If not, you must select View Full Display or click the
Full Display icon.
R2003.12.0
49
Landmark
SeisWorks
If you use Z-MAP Plus with OpenWorks, you can import and
automatically grid SeisWorks horizons (.hzd, .hts, or .hzd_glb files) so
they are accessible in Z-MAP Plus.
To open a SeisWorks horizon as a grid in Z-MAP Plus, click the Open
SeisWorks Data icon or select File Open SeisWorks in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
Two dialog boxes are associated with the SeisWorks Open option:
R2003.12.0
50
Landmark
2.
Specify the domain in which the horizon was saved: Select either
the Time or Depth radio button in the Domain area. (The program
does not perform time-to-depth or depth-to-time conversions.)
3.
Required: Specify the type of location for saving the new grid by
selecting the MFD or OpenWorks radio button in the Output area.
4.
Click OK.
The Seismic Project Selection dialog box closes. The Import From
SeisWorks dialog box appears immediately in either MFD mode
or OpenWorks mode, depending on the specified Output setting.
R2003.12.0
51
Landmark
Import From
SeisWorks
dialog box,
configured to
save a horizon to
an MFD and
automatically
generate a grid.
Use the Import from SeisWorks dialog box to specify which horizons to
import, the types of output to create, and the conversion settings.
The Import from SeisWorks dialog box contains three sections:
R2003.12.0
52
Landmark
Horizons Section
The Horizons section of the Import from SeisWorks dialog box contains
the following options:
Select Horizons
Required: Create a list of one or more horizons to import. The seismic
line data in horizon files will be converted and stored in the specified
MFD or in the OpenWorks project as one or more DATA files. A
separate DATA file is created for each selected horizon. (Separate files
may also be created for the various types of output you select.)
Click the Select Horizons: List button and use the Multiple Horizon
Selection dialog box that appears for selecting horizons to importin
much the same way you would select horizons if you were working in
SeisWorks. The Horizon Choices list contains all the horizons in the
selected seismic project. For 3D seismic projects, the listed file types are
.hzd or .hts files. In 2D seismic projects, the listed files are of type
.hzd_glb.
To create a horizon list from scratch, move one or more horizons to the
Horizon Selection list (on the right side of the dialog box) by clicking
horizon names in the Horizon Choices list, then clicking the top arrow
icon between the two lists. The selected horizon names move to the
Horizon Selection list and the values in the counter boxes above both
lists are updated.
To automatically select the horizons in a previously saved list, click the
Open List button. In the Horizon Set File Open dialog box that appears,
complete the following steps:
1.
2.
R2003.12.0
53
Landmark
When you finish selecting a list and display mode, click OK.
To restrict the contents of the Horizon Choices list of the Multiple Horizon
Selection dialog box, use the standard Search/Filter String box at the top of
the dialog box. In the string, you can use the wildcards * (all characters), ? (any
single character), and [ ] (multiple terms) as described in the following
examples:
*
Searching for test* locates the first horizon name that begins with test.
Filtering for test* restricts the list contents to show only horizon names that
contain the string test. The string test*depth finds horizon names that begin
with test, end with depth, and have any characters in between.
The string test? will find a horizon named test2, but not one named test22,
because the wildcard ? represents a single character.
[ ] The string test[hrz,HRZ]* finds horizon names that begin with testhrz or
testHRZ.
The string test[a,b.c] finds horizon names that begin with testa, testb, or testc.
The string test* ?hrz *2 finds horizon names that begin with test, end with 2,
or consist of a single character followed by hrz.
Saving the Current List To save the current Horizon Selection list,
click the Save List button. In the Horizon Set File Save dialog box that
appears, enter a new list name or select a list file to overwrite.
How the Converted Data Is Stored
Horizon files contain seismic line data and are stored in the target MFD as
DATA type files. A separate file is created for each horizon. The new DATA files
retain the name of the original horizon with .DAT appended to the end of the file
name. The data file contains the following fields:
X
R2003.12.0
Line Name
Z Value
Shotpoint Number
54
Landmark
R2003.12.0
55
Landmark
If you select the Variable Shift radio button, variable shifts are
applied to the horizons before the file is imported.
If you select the Constant Shift radio button, the constant shift
currently active for the seismic project is applied to the horizons
before the file is imported.
Output Options
The lower part of the Horizons section of the Import from SeisWorks
dialog box contains options for specifying the types of output to
generate.
Select all the check boxes that correspond to output types you want to
generate. You must select at least one output type. The output options
are described in the following text:
R2003.12.0
56
Landmark
You can also convert a fault plane to a horizon in SeisWorks (Faults Convert
Fault to Horizon) before you import it to Z-MAP Plus. This approach enables
you to separate the fault plane data from the sum total of project fault plane data.
R2003.12.0
57
Landmark
The contents of a SeisWorks mapping file are separated by data type and
written to three files during the conversion. All three file types are
named after the original .dts file name. For example, if you import a
mapping file named lowsand, the following three Z-MAP Plus files are
generated:
New File Extension
File Type
File Format
.dtsCpnt
control points
X, Y, Z
.dtsShot
shot lines
X, Y, Z, Line Name
.dtsFalt
fault polygon
X, Y, SegID
Shot point numbers are not imported, but you can use shot lines files to
perform line gridding or to post lines on basemaps.
Output Manual Contours
To import data from SeisWorks manual contour files (.mcf) into a
Z-MAP Plus CNTR file, select the Output Manual Contours check
box and click the List button.
MFD Output Section
If you displayed the Import from SeisWorks dialog box in MFD mode,
the dialog box contains an MFD Output section, which has the following
options.
R2003.12.0
58
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Geo Type To specify a Geo Type for the output, click the
Geo Type button and choose a value from the drop-down list. The
list contains all the Geo Types associated with the current
OpenWorks project. The Geo Type is typically a geologic
characterization, such as STRAT UNIT (stratigraphic unit).
Geo Name Use the Geo Name box to specify a geo name value
for the imported data. To enter one of the standard values, click the
Geo Name button and select one of the standard values from the
drop-down list. To use a custom value, highlight or double-click
the default value (UNKNOWN) and enter a value from the
keyboard. In OpenWorks, the geo name refers to a geological unit.
Depth Units Displays the depth units setting specified for the
OpenWorks project. You cannot change the Depth Units value
directly.
Grid Name If you select the Generate Grid check box, the
Grid Name box becomes active, enabling you to specify a name
for grids you create from the imported data. The default name is
UNKNOWN. To overwrite an existing name, click the Down arrow
and select a name from the drop-down list. To specify a unique
name, edit the name displayed in the Grid Name box. The Grid
Name list contains all the grids in the current OpenWorks project.
59
Landmark
File Detail
pane
Pane size
controls
Buttons
In the File Manager, you can easily manage almost every type of file you
create in Z-MAP Plus. Macro files (.ZCLMAC files) are the exception.
You can use File Manager to manipulate the following file types:
OpenWorks, MFDs, ZGFs, .FMT, .TBL, .ZEQ, and DATA files.
The remainder of this topic describes the components of the
Z-MAP Plus File Manager dialog box. For detailed information about
File Manager operations and tabs, use the context-sensitive help system
accessible by clicking the Help button in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager
dialog box.
R2003.12.0
60
Landmark
R2003.12.0
61
Landmark
Rename MFD/ZGF
Cut
Compress MFD/ZGF
Rename File/
Picture
Delete
Copy
Paste (shown in
inactive state)
If you position the cursor over an icon, its name appears. All the icons
have counterpart options in MB3 menus.
How the Cut, Copy, and Paste Operations Work Together
The Paste icon becomes active only after you perform a Cut or Copy operation.
In fact, the Cut and Copy operations are not executed until the Paste operation
is performed. Once you click the Paste icon after performing a Cut, the file
disappears from its original location. If you select another file in the File Listing
pane after you perform a Cut or Copy operation and the follow-up Paste
operation, the Cut or Copy operation is canceled. File Manager has no
"clipboard" storage.
You can paste files into a ZGF or MFD only if you have write access to the file.
If the ZGF or MFD is read-only, you can see and attach the file, but you cannot
add any data to it.
R2003.12.0
62
Landmark
R2003.12.0
63
Landmark
Drag-and-Drop
Use drag-and-drop to move or copy files from the File Listing pane to
the directory tree. You can drag-and-drop the following file types to
these locations:
Select the MFDs or ZGfs tab in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager
dialog box. The selected tab appears in front.
2.
In the Directory pane (at the left), select an MFD or ZGF. The
selected MFD or ZGFs contents appear at the upper right.
3.
In the File Listing pane (upper right corner of the dialog box),
highlight the names of the items you want to move or copy.
4.
5.
R2003.12.0
When you reach the target ZGF or MFD icon, drop the item(s) by
releasing the mouse button (and the Control key, if you are
dragging in copy mode).
64
Landmark
Directory Pane
The Directory pane is the tree display at the left side of the Z-MAP Plus
File Manager dialog box. The Directory pane display changes as you
switch tabs, to display the related objects at the highest level of the file
system.
If you select an icon in the Directory pane, the items contents are listed
in the File Listing pane at the dialog boxs upper right.
The following table describes the contents of the Directory pane for each
tab:
Tab
OpenWorks
When you first select the OpenWorks tab, the tree is collapsed and
only the current project folder icon is visible. If you select the
project folder icon, the tree expands to show the project
subdirectories. To display the contents of a subdirectory in the File
Listing pane, select the subdirectory folder icon. (For example,
subdirectory contents may include faults, grids, contour sets,
control points, polylines, deviated wells, and lattices.)
MFD
ZGF
All ZGFs in the defined directory paths are listed (not just the
currently attached ZGF). Each ZGF is represented by a folder
icon. To display a ZGFs pictures in the File Listing pane, select
the ZGF icon.
System
If you select an MFD or ZGF in the Directory pane, the Compress and
Rename MFD/ZGF icons become active, enabling you to display a
dialog box for compressing or renaming a selected MFD or ZGF.
Compressing Files from the File Menu
You can also display the dialog box for compressing an MFD or ZGF by
selecting an option in the File Compress menu (as described starting on
page 154).
R2003.12.0
65
Landmark
To select a file or picture in this pane, click the row once with MB1.
Triangle Map is the selected picture in the sample above. When you
have selected an OpenWorks, ZGF or MFD, the File Detail pane
becomes active and displays information about the selected file or
picture. The Rename File, Cut, Copy, Paste (after a Cut or Copy
operation), and Delete icons also become active when a file is selected
in this pane.
Sort File Lists
You can sort any of these file lists by the column headings. Each column
heading is on a toggle button. Click the column heading button you want
to use to sort and the information is rearranged in either descending or
ascending order.
OpenWorks files are initially displayed in the order set by using the
Tools OW Sort Order option.
Resize Columns in File Listing
You can resize the column widths in the File Listing dialog box by
clicking MB2 on the boundary line between the columns and dragging
the boundary line. To resize columns, the cursor must be located over
table boundary lines, not column heading boundary lines.
R2003.12.0
66
Landmark
R2003.12.0
To resize the height of the panes in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager dialog box,
use the small square Resize icon between the panes. Drag the Resize icon up or
down with any mouse button until the panes are the appropriate height.
67
Landmark
Parameter files have the extension .ZCLPARMS. (You can use all capitals or
all lower case letters for the extension, but not mixed case.) If you do not add
the extension, the program adds .ZCLPARMS automatically when you click
OK.
If you enter a non-standard extension, a warning message appears in the
system window (similar to the following example).
BRINKLEY.XYZ - HAS A NON-STANDARD EXTENSION
FILE HAS BEEN NAMED: - BRINKLEY.XYZ.ZCLPARMS
In this situation, the file is saved as renamed on most systems.
You can load a parameter file only if it has a .ZCLPARMS or .zclparms
extension. Otherwise, the file is not included n the SELECT Session File list.
If you use an existing file name (for example, Brinkley.ZCLPARMS) and
specify the extension in the opposite case (for example, Brinkley.zclparms),
the original file is not overwritten. A copy of the file is saved with the
specified extension.
R2003.12.0
68
Landmark
R2003.12.0
69
Landmark
Save As Command
You can use the File Save As options to save Z-MAP Plus data in
disk filesmaking the data accessible in other Landmark programs.
The Save As options are:
ASCII (Export)
Use the ASCII (Export) option to save a file from an attached MFD as
a formatted ASCII file. You most often use this option to make data
available for import to other programs, but you can also use it to convert
data between file types. (In most cases, however, you can perform
file-type conversions by using the Operations File Conversion
option.)
You have a choice of formats for the output file: Use either a previously
created format or automatically generated formats (derived from the
formats of the source file fields). You can also automatically create
formats for grids. Additionally, you can include a format description
header at the top of the output file. Files created with automatically
generated formats and introductory format description headers can be
re-imported into Z-MAP Plus in their original form.
To use the ASCII (Export) option as the first step in converting data
between file types, use the default values to create the export file and
include a format description header at the top of the file. Edit the file
type specified in the header and use the edited format to import the file.
(For more information, see Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827.)
File
From the list of files that appears, select a file to transfer to a formatted
disk files. You can export any file stored in an MFD.
R2003.12.0
70
Landmark
Format File
A list of formatted disk (ASCII) files whose names end with .FMT or
.fmt appears.
Definition of Terms: Format File and Format Name
The format file is a standard text file consisting of one or more formats.
A format is a series of lines describing what is to be exported and in what
format. Each field that is to be output is described in the format. To learn
more about the format (format group in ZCL), see Appendix E. Import/
Export on page 827 or Import on page 116. You do not need a
format file to export a Z-MAP Plus file. The format can be created
automatically.
If your format file is not listed, make sure the Format tab of the
Directory Paths dialog box points to its location.
Format Name
From the list of formats that appears, select the format that defines the
the output file and the fields included in the file.
R2003.12.0
71
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Header (default value) Place the format used to export the file
on top of the output file.
72
Landmark
Group ID Character
The group ID or format ID character is used to define the beginning and
end of the format information that goes on top of the output file when
Header is selected. The default character is @.
For a discussion of what formats and the group ID character are, see
Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827 or Import on page 116.
Comment ID Character
The comment ID character is used to identify lines of text that are treated
as comments if the header format is used to import a file. The default
character is !. When the header format is generated automatically,
comments describing the date and time and file from which it was
created are output to the header. If an existing format is used, whatever
comments it contains are output to the header.
For a discussion of what formats and the comment ID character are, see
Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827 or Import on page 116.
History ID Character
The history ID character is used to identify lines of text that are stored
as history information if the header format is used to import a file. When
the format is generated automatically, no lines of history are output to
the header. If an existing format is used, whatever history information it
contains is output to the header. The default character is +.
For a discussion of what formats and the history ID character are, see
Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827 or Import on page 116.
CPS-1 File
Use the CPS-1 File option to execute the EXPORT-CPS-FILE macro.
This macro exports a member file from an MFD to a CPS SAVE file.
You can export an original or extended file.
For more information about this macro, see the Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual EXPORT-CPS-FILE or
the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.
Macro Name
EXPORT-CPS-FILE
Macro Type
.ZCLMAC
Purpose
This macro exports a member file out of an MFD to a CPS SAVE file.
You can export an original file or an extended file.
R2003.12.0
73
Landmark
Description
As input, you must specify a member file of the type GRID, DATA,
VERT, FALT, or CNTR.
Results
header
group
primitive
modal
Unless otherwise specified, all angles are in decimal degrees from the
positive x axis; all x and y are in drawing units ($DU, either REAL or
PLOT); heights and line parameters are in plot units.
R2003.12.0
74
Landmark
Header Record
Each picture has a header record. ZGF flat files have 16 types of header
records, described in the following table.
Record
Type
Column
Format
Description
$AX
13
410
1125
2630
A3
A7
F15.0
F15.0
$AX axes
unused
semi-major axis
semi-minor axis
$BN
13
410
A3
A7
$BN boundary
boundary type; one of:
GEO
lat/long
BNDING rectilinear
minimum latitude
minimum latitude
maximum latitude
maximum longitude
minimum x
minimum y
maximum x
maximum y
projection system zone
$CL
$CO
R2003.12.0
1120
2130
3140
4150
5160
6170
7180
8190
9194
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
I4
13
410
1120
A3
A7
F10.0
2130
F10.0
3140
F10.0
4150
F10.0
13
410
1120
2130
3140
4150
5160
6170
7180
8190
A3
A7
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
75
Landmark
Record
Type
Format
Description
$DM
13
4
A3
I1
$DM dimension
number of dimensions for plot; for now 2
(two-dimensional) is the only valid
number
$DU
13
A3
$GR
13
4100
A3
A97
$GR grid
type of grid, one of:
UTM projection (see $PR) must be
TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
STATE PLANE
USER
$OR
13
410
1120
2130
A3
A7
F10.0
F10.0
$PN
13
A3
$PR
R2003.12.0
Column
4100
A97
13
4100
A3
A97
$PR projection
projection type, one of:
ALBERS EQUAL AREA
AMERICAN POLYCONIC
AZIMUTHAL GNOMONIC
AZIMUTHAL ORTHOGRAPHIC
AZIMUTHAL STEREOGRAPHIC
BIPOLAR OBLIQUE CONIC CONFORMAL
CASSINI-SOLDNER
SINGLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
DOUBLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
MODIFIED POLYCONIC
NEW ZEALAND MAP GRID
GENERAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
OBLIQUE TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
STANDARD MERCATOR
UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
VAN DER GRINTEN I
76
Landmark
Record
Type
Format
Description
A3
A2
A3
A7
F10.0
$RO rotation
unused
rotation angle. For now, this value is always
0.0.
$RU real units
real units for projected coordinates, one of:
IN inches
FT feet
YD yards
MI miles
NM nautical miles
M meters
KM kilometers
US user-supplied
units factor, units per meter
$PU
13
45
$RO
13
410
1120
$RU
13
45
A3
A2
620
F15.0
$SC
R2003.12.0
Column
13
410
1120
A3
A7
F10.0
$SC scale
unused
scale, absolute ratio between real and plot
coordinates, ignoring units
77
Landmark
Record
Type
Column
Format
Description
$SH
13
4100
A3
A97
$SH spheroid
spheroid type, one of:
USER-DEFINED
AIRY 1858
AUSTRALIAN NATIONAL
BESSEL 1841
CLARKE 1858
CLARKE 1866
CLARKE 1880
EVEREST 1830
FISCHER 1960
FISCHER 1968
GHANA NATIONAL
GRS-80
HAYFORD 1909
HELMERT
HOUGH 1956
INTERNATIONAL
IUGG 1967
IUGG 1975
KAULA 1961
KRASSOVSKY 1940
MALAYAN EVEREST 1830
MERCURY
MERCURY MODIFIED
SOUTH AMERICAN 1969
WGS-72 1972
WGS-84
$ZN
13
A3
4100
R2003.12.0
A97
78
Landmark
Group Record
Group records mark the start of a particular category of records (for
example, contours and well data). The next occurrence of a group record
closes the previous group, so groups cannot be nested. The three types
of group records are described in the following table.
Record
Type
Column
Format
Description
$CR
13
45
610
A3
A2
A5
$CR contour
unused
contour type. For now, this is always ZYCOR.
$WL
13
410
1118
A3
A7
A7
$GE
13
A3
Primitive Record
Primitive records are used to describe information about four types of
graphics features. Graphics primitive records contain information about
hidden tags, including LGB type codes, lines, symbols, and text. Each
of the four primitive record types is explained in the following table.
Record
Type
$HT
Column
Format
Description
13
A3
46
I3
7100
$PL
R2003.12.0
A94
13
A3
A1
510
1120
A6
I10
79
Landmark
Record
Type
$SY
$T
Column
Format
Description
13
49
10
1120
2130
3140
4150
5160
A3
I6
13
A3
46
I3
710
1120
2130
3140
41100
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
A3
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
A60
color table
text color
line color
colorfilled polygon
clipping window
These records are explained in the following topic.
R2003.12.0
80
Landmark
Color Table
Immediately following the picture name record is a $HT record that
defines the color representation table.
Code
Changes
Text
$HT 30ZGTSTC
Line
$HT 30ZGTSLC
Marker/Symbol
$HT 30ZGTSMC
Polygon Fill
$HT 30ZGTSFC
For each of the four elements in the table above, the FORTRAN format
is 1x,13.
R2003.12.0
81
Landmark
Colorfilled Polygon
This color code identifies the polygon whose index is being set. It has
the following format:
$HTNNNZGTCUL
where NNN is an integer from 1 to 999 that represents a colorfilled
polygon. It is read with the following FORTRAN format, where
ICOLOR is the color index. NPTS is the number of vertices on the
polygon, and ZMIN and ZMAX are not used.
READ (LTEMP, 750) ICOLOR, ZMIN, ZMAX, NPTS
750 FORMAT (20X, I10, 2F15.5, 7X, I3)
The polygon vertices following are read with the format (10F10.0).
Each hidden tag can have a maximum of 40 points stored. Larger
polygons are stored in a series of $HT groups.
Clipping Window
This code determines whether the posted graphics on the ZGF picture
are clipped. You can use this code to limit posted graphics to a given
areafor example, to keep contours inside the map border or to limit
posted border labels to a small area outside the map border. The code
has the following format:
$HTNNNZGTWND
where NNN is an integer from 1 to 999 that flags the activated or
deactivated status of a clipping window for posted graphics. It is read
with the following FORTRAN format:
READ(LTEMP,210)MODE, NUMVTX, IPLOT
210 FORMAT (14X, I1, 1X, I15, 1X, I10)
READ(LTEMP,230)(XCORS(I),YCORS(I),I=ISTART,IEND)
230 FORMAT (14X, 8F10.0)
R2003.12.0
82
Landmark
Modal Record
Modal records set parameters for lines or text, as described in the
following table.
Record
Type
$LF
$TX
Column
Format
Description
13
49
A3
A6
10
A1
1120
F10.0
2130
3140
4150
F10.0
F10.0
A10
2130
3140
F10.0
F10.0
14
56
726
A3
A7
A7
27
A1
2830
3140
4150
R2003.12.0
A3
F10.0
F10.0
83
Landmark
Non-Command Records
Two types of records are not commands: continuation and point records.
A continuation record can only occur immediately following a hidden
tag ($HT), text ($T), or another continuation record. It is FORTRAN
format A100 and uses columns 1100.
A point record can occur only immediately after a hidden tag ($HT), text
($T), or continuation record, and follows this format:
Column
110
1120
2130
3140
4150
5160
6170
7180
8190
91100
R2003.12.0
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Descriptio
n
first x
first y
second x
second y
third x
third y
fourth x
fourth y
fifth x
fifth y
84
Landmark
SeisWorks File
If you run Z-MAP Plus with OpenWorks, you can save grids as horizons
for use in SeisWorks. To begin this operation, click the Save to
SeisWorks icon or select Save As SeisWorks File in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
To complete this operation, you use the following two dialog boxes:
R2003.12.0
85
Landmark
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click OK to save the settings, close the dialog box, and display the
follow-up dialog box the Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog box.
Grid Selection
Horizon Specification
R2003.12.0
86
Landmark
Grid Selection
Grid Required: Specify the name of the source grid to convert to a
horizon. Click the Grid: Select button to display a list of grids in
currently attached MFDs or in the current OpenWorks project.
Highlight the name of the grid you want to convert. The dialog box
closes immediately. You return to the Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog
box, which displays the name of the selected grid file in the Grid box.
Fault To include the data from a fault file associated with the target
grid, click the Fault: Select button. Use the Select A Fault File dialog
box that appears for specifying the fault file. The Select A Fault File
dialog box displays a list of all the faults in the attached MFDs and in
the OpenWorks project. Highlight the name of the associated fault
whose data you want to include. The dialog box closes immediately.
You return to the Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog box, which displays
the name of the selected fault file in the Fault box.
Horizon Specification Pane
R2003.12.0
87
Landmark
To restrict the contents of the horizon list of the Select A Horizon Name dialog
box, use the standard Search/Filter String box at the top of the dialog box. In
the string, you can use the wildcards * (all characters), ? (any single character),
and [ ] (multiple terms) as described in the following examples:
*
Searching for test* locates the first horizon name that begins with test.
Filtering for test* restricts the list contents to show only horizon names that
contain the string test. The string test*depth finds horizon names that begin
with test, end with depth, and have any characters in between.
The string test? will find a horizon named test2, but not one named test22,
because the wildcard ? represents a single character.
[ ] The string test[hrz,HRZ]* finds horizon names that begin with testhrz or
testHRZ.
The string test[a,b.c] finds horizon names that begin with testa, testb, or testc.
The string test* ?hrz *2 finds horizon names that begin with test, end with 2,
or consist of a single character followed by hrz.
When you finish specifying the source grid name, target horizon name,
and any other options you want to use, click OK or Apply in the
Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog box. If you specified an existing horizon
name, a confirmation message box appears and asks if you want to
overwrite the original file. Once the file is created, a message appears in
the system window.
Merged SeisWorks Projects
Although Z-MAP Plus treats the projects that comprise a merged SeisWorks
project as separate, you can still save a grid to the merged SeisWorks project
(such as a 2D3D project). For example, save the grid to the 2D project
component, then use the same output horizon name to save the grid to the 3D
project component. You can view and interpret the two output files as a single
horizon in a SeisWorks merged session.
R2003.12.0
88
Landmark
Info
Use the File Info options to view information about Z-MAP Plus
files, grids, and graphics.
The options include:
R2003.12.0
89
Landmark
The Master File Directory icon (located at the top of the Z-MAP Plus window)
corresponds to the File Info Master File Directory option.
R2003.12.0
90
Landmark
Report
Report choices refer to the extent of information you would like
presented about the files listed. The Summary option tells you how may
records are allocated for the scratch file and for each MFD, and how
many of the (allocated) records have been used. The Partial option lists
the following information about each file: When the file was created, the
number of fields, the number of words per record, the number of data
records, and the minimum and maximum X and Y Coordinates. In
addition to the information in the Partial listing, the Full option lists the
field name, the data type, the default format, the first word, the number
of words, and the ZNON value for each field.
File
Type
DATA
Full Report
Partial Report
Summary
Report
file name
data type
MFD
size
file name
data type
MFD
size
GRID
R2003.12.0
91
Landmark
GRID
DATA
CNTR
FALT
VERT
TEXT
TRIA
XSEC
grid
data
contour
fault
line
text
trilat triangulation lattice
cross section
WLOG
DWEL
MCRO
LSLT
LPST
SSEC
CELL
PCEL
well log
deviated well
macro
selected line name
posted line name
seismic section
block-centered cell
point-centered cell
Match on Characters
Use this feature to enter a character string to match to the first characters
in a file name. The File Directory utility lists all the matching file names
in the currently attached OpenWorks files, MFDs and scratch file.
This feature matches the first characters in the first word of a file name.
You can enter one or more unique characters to view the data or grid
statistics for a subset of the available files.
For example, if you enter W, file directory information appears in your
process window for all files that start with W.
Unix is Case-Sensitive
Unix names are case-sensitive. You must enter capitalize characters correctly.
R2003.12.0
92
Landmark
File Listing
Select File Info File Listing.
The File Listing option displays no more than 100 words that match the input
criteria. If more than 100 words are available, an error message in the system
window informs you of the number of words left out.
R2003.12.0
93
Landmark
Input File
Field Formats
Windowing Parameters
Input File
Select the file to list.
Listing Type, Records, and Output File
Use this dialog box to specify whether you want to create an automatic,
full, or partial listing of files. The File Listing option also enables you to
specify the file title, output file, lines per page, and which records are
affected by the partial listing constraints.
Listing Type
Use the Listing Type parameter to control whether the listing is
automatically generated, and, if not automatically generated, which
method to use for subsetting the listed records. Possible choices include:
Automatic (default value) List all records and all fields of the
dataset. The Automatic listing uses the print formats stored with
each field of the file, unless you have just changed the formats in a
previous listing. If you have changed the print formats in a
previous listing, Automatic file listing uses the changed formats.
While in Automatic file listing, you cannot select fields, formats,
column headings and widths. You also cannot window data fields.
R2003.12.0
Full List all the records, but maintain control over which fields
are listed and their format.
Line Name List all records whose names in the Line Name
Field match the name you enter in the Line/Area Name parameter.
You control which fields are listed and their format.
Area Name List all records whose names in the Area Name
Field match the name you enter in the Line/Area Name parameter.
You control which fields are listed and their format.
94
Landmark
Window List all records whose values in the fields selected for
windowing fall inside specified minimum and maximum values for
those fields. You can use the intersection of a maximum of ten
window fields. You control which fields are listed and their format.
R2003.12.0
95
Landmark
R2003.12.0
96
Landmark
Delete
You can delete any field in the Destination list. With the Delete button
depressed, click the fields you want to delete from the output file.
Insert
To use the Insert button, pick a field in the Destination List and click
the button. The currently selected field in the Source List is inserted
above the targeted field in the Destination List.
Field Formats
Enter the print format to use for each selected field. The print formats
are specified in FORTRAN format notation. The defaults are taken from
the width and number of decimal places specified for each field in the
file being listed. The default values are usually acceptable. However, if
you want a specific look for each column, you must change the default
formats.
Valid FORTRAN format notation includes:
Character Field (A Format) Use the number of words, the letter A,
then the maximum number of characters allowed in the column. The
number of characters must be a multiple of four. The text in an A format
field is left justified.
Example:
Text in field (13 characters) =
FORTRAN format
=
Output
=
Column positions
=
Base of Muddy
4A4
Base of Muddy
----------------
On most systems, it is preferable to leave an empty space for the sign (positive
or negative) even if all values in the field are positive.
R2003.12.0
97
Landmark
Example:
Number in field
FORTRAN format
Output
Column positions
= 4398.455
= F10.4
=
4398.4550
= ----------
= 4392.455
= E15.5
=
.43925E+04
= ---------------
Example:
Number in field
FORTRAN format
Output
Column positions
= 4392.455
= E15.3
=
.439E+04
= ---------------
Example:
Number in field
FORTRAN format
Output
Column positions
= 4392.455
= E15.7
=
.4392455E+04
= ---------------
R2003.12.0
98
Landmark
Example:
Number in field
FORTRAN format
Output
Column positions
= 4392.455
= G15.5
=
4392.5
= ---------------
Example:
Number in field
FORTRAN format
Output
Column positions
= 4392455000000000.0
= G15.3
=
.43925E+04
= ---------------
Example:
Number in field
FORTRAN format
Output
Column positions
= - 0.0000000004392455
= G15.7
=
-.4392455E-07
= ---------------
R2003.12.0
99
Landmark
R2003.12.0
100
Landmark
Grid Listing
Select File Info
Grid Listing
Select
listing
type
Grid listing
Printer contour
Both
Specify all grid listing
and printer contour
parameters
Set windowing
parameters?
Yes
Enter minimum and maximum
row and column values
Apply
R2003.12.0
101
Landmark
Grid Listing displays the contents of a grid on the screen. The fields and
their associated values are listed. You control the names of columns and
the order in which values are displayed. File Listings and Grid Listings
can also be routed to an ASCII file.
Use Grid Listing to perform these tasks:
Input Grid
Windowing Parameters
Input Grid
Select an grid to be listed from the list of grids that appears.
Listing Type, Format
Use this selection to specify:
Both Print both the grid listing and the printer contour.
Printing the grid listing to an output disk file is optional. However, the
listing is always displayed to the screen.
R2003.12.0
102
Landmark
Format
For each field you have selected to list, you should specify the print
format. This parameter is expressed in FORTRAN format notation. (See
the discussion on FORTRAN format notation under Field Formats on
page 97.)
Labeling Mode
This parameter refers to labeling rows and columns, and is needed when
the listing type is Grid Listing. There are two options:
do not label the rows and columns of the gridonly output the
grid node values
label the rows and columns of the grid
R2003.12.0
103
Landmark
Windowing Parameters
Use the Window capability to look at a part of the grid instead of the
entire grid. As mentioned earlier, minimum and maximum row and
column numbers are used to determine the limits of the windowed area.
You can select the grid size by identifying:
Data Statistics
You can generate data statistics for a field in any currently attached data
file. The statistics you can display include number of Y locations and
ZNONs, minimum and maximum X-, Y-, and Z-values, the range, mean,
standard deviation, and root mean square of the Z-values, and the fields
ZNON value.
Select Data File
From the list of non-grid files presented, select the file that contains the
field you want to use as input for displaying data statistics.
Select Field
From the list of fields presented, select a field to use as input for
displaying data statistics.
R2003.12.0
104
Landmark
Grid Statistics
You can generate statistics for any available grid. The statistics you can
generated include X and Y grid increment, number of rows, number of
columns, ZNON nodes, real-valued nodes, maximum and minimum X,
Y, and Z values, and the range, mean, standard deviation, root mean
square, and relative variance of the Z values. In addition, some of the
data collection parameters used during gridding are provided.
Select Input Grid
A list of Grids on the currently attached MFDs, OpenWorks database,
and the scratch file is presented. Point to and click the grid for which you
want statistics to be calculated. As soon as you select a grid, the statistics
are calculated and results appear in the Z-MAP Plus xterm window. Use
the scroll bar to the right of the window to review the data.
File/Picture Information
A report is generated describing the contents of a graphics file. The
report indicates the number of pictures on the file. For each picture, the
report includes name, X and Y limits and ranges, map scale, plot
dimensions in inches, and what graphics features are on the picture. You
can control how much of this information is displayed for each picture
and whether the output is written to a formatted disk file.
Input Graphics File
From the list of ZGFs that appear, select the ZGF whose contents you
want to view. The list of ZGFs reflects the contents of the directories
specified in the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. If the file
you want is not listed, check the Directory Path settings.
R2003.12.0
105
Landmark
Information Specifications
Use this dialog box to control whether picture headers (summary
statistics) and picture element (graphics features) lists appear in the
report. You can also specify the name of a file on for writing the output.
Show Picture Headers
Controls whether the picture header is output to the listing. The header
includes X and Y limits and ranges, map scale, and plot dimensions in
inches. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Show Headers (default value) Display the header information for
each picture on the graphics file.
Dont Show Headers Do not show the header information for each
picture.
Show Picture Divisions
Controls whether a list of graphics features is generated. Possible
choices for this parameter include:
Show Divisions (default value) Display a list of graphics features
for each picture on the graphics file.
Dont Show Divisions Do not display a list of graphics features for
each picture.
Enter ZGF Information Output File
Enter the name of the formatted disk (ASCII) output file that will
contain the graphics file information. The length of the fully qualified
name (full path terminated with the file name and extension) is limited
to approximately 50 characters. In ZCL, the fully qualified name can be
a maximum of 79 characters long, cannot contain blank spaces, and
should follow your operating systems text file conventions.
If you do not enter the full path for the output file, the file is saved in the
output path specified in the Data tab of the Directory Paths dialog box.
If no Directory Paths: Data output path is specified, the default location
becomes the directory you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus
(called the home directory).
If you do not enter an extension for the file name, the program adds the
.DAT extension when it creates the file. (For example, if you enter the
file name LISTING, the name is changed to LISTING.DAT.
R2003.12.0
106
Landmark
Macro Name
ZGF-SUMMARY
Macro Type
.ZCLMAC
Purpose
projection information
Description
Results
Macro Name
LIST-CPS-FILE
Macro Type
.ZCLMAC
Purpose
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
107
Landmark
Directory Paths
Select File Directory Paths in the
Z-MAP Plus window
master
files
graphics
files
data
files
session
files
format
files
color
tables
macro
files
R2003.12.0
108
Landmark
All files found during searches are used to build lists of files for you to
select from when running Z-MAP Plus options. The output paths tell
Z-MAP Plus where to write files it creates.
Importance of Using Standard Extensions
To enable the program to find the appropriate files to display in dialog box lists,
the file names must have the correct extension. Throughout this section, note the
file extensions required for each file type. Extensions are preceded by a dot (.),
as in MFD, .ZGF, .DAT, .ZCLPARMS, .FMT, .TBL, .GRIDMAC, .OPERMAC,
.PICMAC, .UTILMAC, and .SYSMAC.
The Directory Paths dialog box is easy to use. In each tab, click the
Browse button to locate directories you need and highlight the
directories.
To build a directory path, select the appropriate tab for the file type (for
example, MFDs or ZGFs). You can specify a maximum of four input
paths, each pointing to a different directory. For all file types (except
macro files) you can also specify an output path, a location for writing
files. The default input and output paths point to the current directory
(the directory you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus, represented
by the dot slash ( ./ ) symbol.
Click the Browse button beside each path to bring up the Select a
Directory dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify a path.
Click the Apply to all button beside each path to copy that directory
path to all tabs in the dialog box. This is helpful if the project files are
stored in common directories.
Comprehensive HTML Help is available for this topic by clicking the
Help button in the lower right corner of the Directory Paths dialog box.
The remainder of this section defines the file types listed on the tabs.
R2003.12.0
109
Landmark
MFDs
Z-MAP Plus processes require various types of data. Examples of data
types include:
R2003.12.0
110
Landmark
ZGFs
Graphics files store pictures used by Z-MAP Plus. Pictures are a
collection of graphics features (or graphics segment types), such as
borders, contours, control point symbols, seismic line segments,
user-defined polygons, and labels. Some operations give you the option
of treating all the graphics features in a picture as a single feature, or of
keeping the individual features separate so you can manipulate them
individually.
The ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box instructs the program
which locations to search for the graphics files that will be accessible in
Z-MAP Plus. You can set paths to many graphics files, but you can only
have one ZGF attached to the session at a time. If you select Open
Graphics File, the list that appears contains all the ZGFs found in the
specified directory paths for ZGFs. Select the ZGF you want to attach.
The new selection immediately overrides any previous selection.
Automatic Link to OpenWorks ZGFs
Z-MAP Plus automatically adds a path to the OpenWorks picture area for the
current project if you are connected to OpenWorks and if there is a blank line in
your ZGF Directory Paths settings. This is designed to facilitate access to
OpenWorks files. To eliminate this automatic connection, fill all four paths with
other paths or the same path multiple times.
Pictures you create or edit during a Z-MAP Plus session are stored in the
attached ZGF. To display pictures stored in another ZGF, select
Open Graphics File, and select the appropriate ZGF.
In the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box, you can specify a
maximum of four input paths and one output directory path. You do not
need to specify any paths unless you want to use ZGFs that are not in
your home directory (or you want to save ZGFs in a custom location). If
you use a common location to define one of the input and output paths,
in later sessions it will be easier to find the ZGFs you create.
Naming Conventions
The program searches only for graphics files that end in .ZGF or .zgf, so you
must use one of these extension when name graphics files. Otherwise, the ZGFs
are inaccessiblethey do not appear in dialog box lists.
R2003.12.0
111
Landmark
Data Files
Directory Paths for Data Files allows you to build up to four input
directory paths and one output directory path for data (ASCII) files.
A directory path tells Z-MAP Plus which directories to search when
looking for data files. You need not build any paths since the default
input and output paths point to your current directory (directory you
were in when you started Z-MAP Plus). However, if the data files you
want are not on your current directory, you must build a path to point to
them. You should probably make one of the input paths the same as the
output path so you can easily locate newly created DATA files the next
time you start Z-MAP Plus.
Importance of Using a Standard Extension
The program searches only for DATA file names that end in .DAT or .dat, so it
is very important to use this convention. Otherwise, the DATA files do not
appear in dialog box lists and are not accessible in Z-MAP Plus.
Session Files
Z-MAP Plus processes offer a range of session (parameter) choices for
users. Many processes can execute using defaults once the user selects
the input data for that process. Required parameters either have a gray
background or are indicated by a gray square surrounding the parameter
entry area. As users increase their desire to shape the outcome of a
process such as gridding or contouring, they can supply more of their
own data. Users can also try different sorts of constraints on a process to
explore different interpretations of their data.
Session files store parameter settings entered during a Z-MAP Plus
program run. Parameter settings include information such as which
MFDs and which ZGF you have attached, the Area of Interest of all your
pictures, and the values you last entered for Flexing Parameters.
R2003.12.0
112
Landmark
Z-MAP Plus stores all parameter settings for your current session into
the LASPRM.ZCL and LASPRM.ZCL2 files. Each time you click the
OK, Apply and Save buttons in a dialog box that is not associated with
a macro, parameter settings are written to one of the LASPRM files. If
you do not load a saved session file for your current session,
Z-MAP Plus restores the parameter settings by using the LASPRMS
files.
LASPRMS Corruption
If you experience unexpected program termination, exit Z-MAP Plus, delete the
LASPRM.ZCL and LASPRM.ZCL2 files, and restart the program.
You may want to create specialized session files. If you have more than
one project, you may want to create a session file for each of them. With
project-based session files, you can set up gridding and modeling
parameter values to reflect the different geologic structures in various
areas. You also might want to save a session that yielded a certain
interpretation, and create another session file to compare the way
different parameters affect the result of a process. If you are not getting
the expected results, you may occasionally want to create a blank
LASPRMS file and start parameter definition all over.
Naming Conventions
The program searches only for files that end in .ZCLPARMS or .zclparms, so
you must name your files with this extension.
R2003.12.0
113
Landmark
Format Files
The Directory Paths dialog box can point to format files that have been
saved (or exist as external diskfiles). Format files describe the general
nature of the each data type, the fields in the data file, and the
configuration of the rows and columns. Here are a few of the more
common ways to create and use format files in Z-MAP Plus:
Use any ASCII editor such as vi, ed, or emacs to create a format
file. The field descriptions required by a format file vary depending
on the data type. For a description of the required fields for a
format file, and how to construct a format file, see Structuring
Files for Transfer into a Master File on page 850. Appendix D
provides examples of format files for all major data types.
Include the format description at the top of the data file you wish
to import or export.
The Format Files option allows you to build up to four input directory
paths and one output directory path for format files. A directory path
tells Z-MAP Plus which directory to search when looking for format
files. You need not build any paths, since the default input and output
paths point to your current directory (directory you were in when you
started Z-MAP Plus). However, if the format files you want are not on
your current directory, you must build a path to point to them. You
should probably make one of your input paths the same as your output
path so that a newly created format file can be found in the next
execution of Z-MAP Plus.
Naming Convention for Format Files
Z-MAP Plus searches only for files with an .FMT or .fmt extension, so you
must use this convention when you name format files.
R2003.12.0
114
Landmark
Color Tables
A color table defines the color of each feature in a picture, such as the
picture contours, border, seismic line symbols, or well symbols. The
color tables associated with pictures you create or import into
Z-MAP Plus are external disk files.
.
Naming Convention
The program searches only for color table files that have the extension .TBL or
.tbl, so use one of these extensions when you name color table files.
To create custom color tables, use the Edit Color Tables Write
option.
To enable the program to locate specific color table files, specify their
paths in the Color tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. You can specify
a maximum of four input directory paths and one output directory path
for color tables. The input directory paths instruct the program which
directories to search for color tables.
You are not required to specify any color table paths unless you put
custom color tables in a location other than the default location (the
directory you used to start Z-MAP Plus). The program does not require
an input path to find the default color table.If you make one of the input
paths the same as the output path, it will be easy to find newly created
color tables in the next Z-MAP Plus session.
Macro Files
A macro is a sequence of processes that are packaged to be executed as
a group. You can call many ready-to-execute macros directly from
Z-MAP Plus. You can also use the Z-MAP Command Language (ZCL)
to create custom macros. The Macro Reference Manual for
Z-MAP Plus / ZCL contains essential information about pre-defined
macros.
You can use the Macros tab of the Directory Paths dialog box to specify
a maximum of four input directory paths, which the program searches
when it creates macro lists to display in dialog boxes. You typically do
not need to specify macro paths the default path is the home directory
(the directory you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus). If you save
macro files to a different directory, specify the path that leads to them.
If you select Macros User Macros in the Z-MAP Plus window,
Z-MAP Plus searches the macro file directory input paths. Macros in
these paths are listed and become available for execution.
R2003.12.0
115
Landmark
Import
Use the File Import options to make data from other applications
accessible in Z-MAP Plus.
The following list shows the Import options, along with brief
descriptions of their results:
R2003.12.0
116
Landmark
ASCII (Import)
Select File Import from the
Z-MAP Plus window.
Yes
No
format file
Is format group in
a format file or at
top of data file?
R2003.12.0
117
Landmark
You can use the ASCII (Import) option to copy a formatted disk
(ASCII) file into an MFD. Once in the MFD, the data is available for use
in other Z-MAP Plus operations. Formatted files can have a maximum
width of 250 characters and can contain any number of lines (or physical
records).
Formatted files can also have any number of logical records (described
in the following paragraph). The maximum number of physical records
in each logical record is 10.
Physical and Logical Records It may be helpful to think of a logical
record as all the information associated with an x,y location. One x,y
location (logical record) can have 50 fields (or columns) of information.
The fields require several lines (physical records) to hold their values,
so a file may have several physical records for each logical record. To
import a formatted file, you must describe the position of each field
value in each physical record of the logical record.
To describe the input data to Z-MAP Plus, you use a format. A format
is a description of the general shape of the input data (such as number of
lines and number of physical records per logical record) and of each data
column to be copied (such as field name, field type, and beginning and
ending position in the file). The format can be:
R2003.12.0
118
Landmark
Determine the Format Situation with Respect to the Data. The options
you need to use depend on your situation. The main file/format
parameters are:
R2003.12.0
Disk File In The disk file that contains the data you want to
import into an MFD.
Disk File Out The disk file you have imported into an MFD. It
is the data you imported. A format description may have been
added to this file. The file name you assigned is the name of the
member file you created in an MFD.
Format File You either have an existing format file to use for
importing the disk file, or you construct one on-the-fly.
119
Landmark
R2003.12.0
120
Landmark
2.
3.
If the needed format file is not listed, make sure the Format tab of the
Directory Paths dialog box is set to locate the format files on your
system.
Select a Format Name
Select a format name from the list that appears. For a discussion of what
formats contain, see Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827.
If You Have a Format Description
If you have a format description, place it at the head of the data file. The
program reads the format description as it imports the disk file. You
Select a Disk File for Input, then supply an Output Name.
R2003.12.0
121
Landmark
Use the Data Display Control Options menu to scroll data to the
left, right, up, down, top, and bottom. You can also increase and
decrease the number of lines per record.
Use the Field Parameters dialog box to enter parameter values for
the format file.
Examine/Prepare Input File
Use this selection to describe the format of the data. This format is used
to import the data and is stored as a format file under a name you
specify. If you click Examine/Prepare Input File, two dialog boxes
appear: the Data Preview Window and the Data Display Control
Options menu.
If you already have a usable format file, do not create a format file.
Specify the existing format by clicking the Select a Format File button.
To end the process of defining format settings, click the Done button in
the Data Display Control dialog box. To abort the description process,
click the Cancel button.
R2003.12.0
122
Landmark
If the file you select to examine appears in reverse color, a format file is active
and is describing the file (possibly incorrectly). To deactivate the format file,
click Select A Format File and select the No Format option.
R2003.12.0
123
Landmark
R2003.12.0
124
Landmark
You define the position and other information about a column of data
(field) by using the cursor. First identify a column of values to describe.
In a line that contains one of the values, select the far left position of the
value (including blanks). Hold down the left mouse button and move the
cursor to the right until it is positioned where you want the value to end,
then release the mouse button. The included area and all equivalent
values in other records are highlighted. These value slots (in reverse
color) are entries in that field when the Z-MAP Plus file is created. The
cursor can also sweep from right to left to highlight values.
Once you mark a column of values with the cursor, the Field Parameters
dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to name and describe
that field. If what is highlighted in black is not what you want to be part
of this field, click the Cancel button on the Field Parameters dialog box
and re-highlight the column. Once you have named the field and have
changed other parameters, click the OK button to accept them. To
change parameter settings for a field after you apply the settings, click
the highlighted area, and the Field Parameters dialog box for that field
appears again.
Repeat the format defining process for all values you want to be fields
in the Z-MAP Plus file. You need to define only the data you want to
import. You can define data in any order, not necessarily left to right.
When you finish defining, select Save Format from the Action list.
R2003.12.0
125
Landmark
Line Disposition
This dialog box appears when you click a number in the column on the
left side of the Z-MAP Plus Data Preview Window. It allows you to
place a special character in front of particular lines in the input data file.
These characters cause the line to be treated either as a comment (which
the program ignores), or as history (which is stored with other
descriptive information about the imported file).
Do Nothing
Does nothing and returns you to the Data Display Control and Data
Preview windows.
R2003.12.0
Left causes the data preview window to move left across the data
until it reaches the left most column. The window moves 20
columns at a time.
Right causes the data preview window to move right across the
data until it reaches the right most column. The window moves 20
columns at a time.
126
Landmark
Field Parameters
Use this dialog box to define characteristics of the field created with the
data you highlighted in the data preview window. Field characteristics
include type, name, decimals, ZNON value, internal storage format, and
sort index. In addition, the dialog box also lets you define the type (such
as DATA or CNTR) for the file to be imported.
R2003.12.0
127
Landmark
You can use the first eight options in this dialog box to describe each
data field you highlight. The following table describes the choices
available for these options.
Available
Choices
Default
Description
FIELD TYPE
Over 70 possible
field types
Calculated based
on work flow
FIELD NAME
Any alphanumeric
character string
FIELD TYPE
INPUT DECIMAL
PLACE
Any integer
0 if left blank
ZNON VALUE
.1E+31
ALPHA ZNON
Any alphanumeric
character string
blank
PRINT WIDTH
SIGNIGICANT
DIGITS + 6, but
not less than 10
SIGNIFICANT
DIGITS
Width of
highlighted field
SORTING INDEX
0 - 10
Option
File Type
Select the type of file to create. All valid nongrid file types are available.
If you are importing a grid, you must build a format file outside of
Z-MAP Plus and select it by clicking the Select a Format button in the
Import Files dialog box (as described in Appendix E. Import/
Export on page 827).
R2003.12.0
128
Landmark
Action
Select one of the following actiosn to perform:
Save Format Use this option when you finish defining fields,
want to save the format and continue with the import operation.
Use this dialog box to save the format you have just built.
Required input values are the name of the format file (data
description) and name of the format in that file. The format file
name cannot contain blanks, and the format name cannot contain
commas.
Format File Name Specify the name of the ASCII disk file to
use for storing the format group.
R2003.12.0
129
Landmark
Macro Name
IMPORT-GRID
Macro Type
.ZCLMAC
Purpose
Description
For more information about File and Field Descriptor parameters, see
the appropriate appendix of the ZCL Operators Manual or see the
Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Results
R2003.12.0
130
Landmark
Macro Name
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE
Macro Type
.ZCLMAC
Purpose
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
131
Landmark
Macro Name
IMPORT-CPS-FILE
Macro Type
.ZCLMAC
Purpose
This macro imports a CPS SAVE file into an MFD. If the file is an
extended file, the information in the header is read and used. If it is not
an extended file, you are asked to enter the header information.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0
Other If you choose the Other option, you must exit from
Z-MAP Plus, then start the hardcopy process by selecting
Utilities Hardcopy or Hardcopy Batch from the Z-MAP Plus
Command Menu (page 138).
132
Landmark
CGM
Select File Print in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
Yes
You must create a CGM file
and/or select a plotter.
No
Select radio button to create
CGM file.
OK
OK
R2003.12.0
133
Landmark
R2003.12.0
134
Landmark
R2003.12.0
135
Landmark
Plot Parameters
Plot Parameters include these elements:
offsets
plot dimensions
scale factor
number of copies
cutline
Offsets
Enter a value for the Left, Right, Top and Bottom Offset areas. The
offset is the area around the picture which is not part of the picture. An
offset is a sort of margin around the picture.
Width, Height of the Plot
Indicate how large you would like the plot to be. You are specifying the
height and width of the plot.
Scale Factor
This option can increase or decrease the size of your picture.
Enter a percentage to use for scaling the plot size. For example, a scale
factor of 300 percent for a 10 x 11 plot creates a 30 x 33 plot.
Number of Copies
Indicate the number of copies you want. The default number of plots/
copies is 1.
Rotate
By depressing the Rotate radio button, you can rotate the picture relative
to the orientation of the plot. The default is NO (raised button).
Cutline
A cutline is a line which can be used to trim the plot. It is optional.
R2003.12.0
136
Landmark
R2003.12.0
137
Landmark
Other
Select File Print in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
Yes
Plot
specified
features?
No
Plot only cleared features.
All
Plot all features.
Apply
When you exit Z-MAP Plus, you are asked if you want to plot the
picture immediately.
R2003.12.0
138
Landmark
This hardcopy method requires that you supply the parameter values for
hardcopy. The plot a picture parameter file is used to create a plot. If the
you do not want to create a hardcopy at this time, the parameter file is
stored. It is used to create a plot when you select HDBAT.
Select Graphics File
Select a ZGF from the list that appears. The pictures in this file are
available for printing. The list reflects the directory contents as specified
in the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box (described on
page 111). If the ZGF you want is not listed, check the directory path
settings.
Select Picture
Select a picture from the list that appears. Part or all of this picture is
used when the option executes.
Plot Parameters
Use this dialog box to select a plotter device and to indicate whether to
plot all or selected features. The Plot Parameters dialog box also enables
you to specify these options:
number of plots
scale factor for adjusting plot size
whether the cutline is included
Number of Copies
Enter the number of copies of the picture you want. The default is 1.
Use Cutline
Controls whether a cutline is drawn on the plot. Possible choices for this
parameter are:
No Cutline (default value) Do not draw a cutline on the plot.
Cutline Draw a cutline on the plot.
R2003.12.0
139
Landmark
Device Type
Controls which plotter device is used. Possible choices for this menu
depend on the devices available at your installation. Click the parameter
input box and a popup menu shows which devices your systems
administrators attached to Z-MAP Plus.
Scale Factor
Enter a number to use for scaling the size of the plot. The dimensions of
the plot are multiplied by this number to determine the final size of the
plot. For example, a scale factor of 3 for a plot that is 10 inches by 11
inches would create a plot 30 inches by 33 inches. Similarly, if the scale
factor were 0.5 the plot would be 5 inches by 5.5 inches.
Plot Specified Features
Controls whether:
To select which features are or are not plotted, select the Choose
Features to Plot option.
Choose Features to Plot
A list of features on the picture is presented. Point to and click the
features you wish to plot or not to plot (depends on how you have set the
Plot Specified Features switch). The selected features appear as white
letters on a black background. You can toggle the features on and off
until you are ready to plot. Clicking Apply stores the current settings.
R2003.12.0
140
Landmark
Copy Files
Select File Copy in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
Apply
R2003.12.0
141
Landmark
You can copy existing files of any type from OpenWorks files, an
attached MFD, or the scratch file to any other attached MFD or to the
scratch file. The new file name be different from the old name even if
you are saving it in a different MFD. If you use the same name, the copy
occurs, but a warning message appears and tells you to copy the file with
the same name to another MFD.
The copy files command works on only one file at a time. If you want to
copy almost all of the files in one MFD to a new MFD, this is not the
way to do it. Instead, use the Unix system copy command to copy the
entire MFD, then use the File Delete Files option to delete
unwanted files from the new MFD.
Input File
Select an input file from the list of files that appears.
Output File Name and Master File
Use this dialog box to specify the name for the new file, the MFD to use
for storing it, and whether file history is carried along to the new file.
Output File Name
Enter the name of the file to be created; this name may be up to 24
characters long and may contain internal blanks. If you do not supply
this name, a forward slash is added to the old file name (for example, old
name TOP OF MUDDY, new default name /TOP OF MUDDY).
Output File Master File
When you click the parameter box, a popup dialog box appears and lists
OpenWorks, the MFDs, and the scratch file attached to your session.
Select the MFD or other destination to use for writing the output file.
Copy File History
The Copy File History parameter enables you to copy history
information from the original file to the new file. File history describes
what has happened to a file (for example, how the file was created, its
parameter settings, and files used). The history can potentially go back
many generations. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Do Not Copy (default setting) Do not copy the history from the
original file, instead make this copy event the first item in the files
history.
R2003.12.0
142
Landmark
Copy Pictures
Select File Copy in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
Yes
Maintain features
division on copied
picture?
No
Select single feature
Copy all features simultaneously.
Maintain division
Select features to copy.
Apply
R2003.12.0
143
Landmark
You can copy pictures from one ZGF to another. You can copy all or
some of the picture features. You can combine the copied features into
one graphics feature (LGB or Logical Graphics Block) or preserve them
as individual features. You can create a new ZGF to store the copied
picture.
Differences Between Copying and Overlaying Pictures
In the Overlay Pictures operation, the destination picture already exists, but
the Copy Pictures operation creates the destination picture.
Overlay Pictures can change AOI or scales. If you overlay contours from a
1:4000 scale map onto a map with a scale of 1:2000, the overlaid contours
are rescaled. Copy Pictures does not make these scale adjustments.
Overlay pictures can be used to send (overlay) features on a map with a
different AOI.
Copy works on all features. Overlay works on selected features inside the
map AOI.
R2003.12.0
144
Landmark
Input Picture
From the list of pictures that appears, select the picture you want to
copy. Part or all of this picture is used when the option executes.
Output Graphics File
From the list of ZGFs that appears, select a ZGF to use for saving the
copy. You can use the current ZGF or another existing ZGFor you can
create a ZGF to use. The list of available ZGFs reflects the contents of
the directories specified in the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog
box. If the needed ZGF is not listed, check the ZGF directory path
settings.
New Graphics File
Use this dialog box to name a new ZGF for storing the copied picture.
New Graphics File Name
Enter the name of the new ZGF for storing the picture copy. The full
path (with the file name and extension of .zgf or .ZGF) must not be more
than 65 characters long. The file name can contain blank spaces, and
must follow the file naming conventions for your operating system.
If you do not enter the full destination path, the file is written to the
Directory Output Path for Graphics. The default location is the directory
you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus. If you do not enter an
extension, the program adds the .ZGF extension when it creates the file.
(For example, if you enter the file name MARROW, the name is changed
to MARROW.ZGF.)
R2003.12.0
145
Landmark
Output Picture
Use this dialog box to specify the name for the copied picture.
Picture Name
Enter the name of the picture to be created. The name can be a maximum
of 64 characters long and can contain internal blanks.
Features Division
This dialog box allows you to combine individual graphics features
(contours, text, lines, etc.) into one graphics feature (for example, Index
Map) when a picture is copied. For most purposes you want to Maintain
Division of the features. Graphics features, sometimes referred to as
Logical Graphics Blocks (LGB), can be manipulated easily (deleted,
copied, etc.) when they are distinct features. When they are combined
into one graphics feature, that manipulation capability is lost. However,
because they are now one graphics feature they can be copied, deleted,
and so on as a single unit, which also has advantages.
Division of Features on Copy
Controls whether graphics features maintain their division or are
combined into one graphics feature (for example, Index Map). Possible
choices for this parameter include:
Features to Copy
A list of features appears. All features printed with black letters on a
white background WILL be copied. Features printed with white letters
on a black background will not be copied. If you point to and click a
feature, the feature is switched from white-to-black or black-to-white.
Once all of the features are set appropriately, click OK and the settings
are stored.
R2003.12.0
146
Landmark
Rename Files
Select File Rename in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
Apply
R2003.12.0
147
Landmark
You can rename files of any type contained in the attached MFDs or
scratch file. A renamed file is actually a copy of the old file saved under
a new name, followed by deletion of the old file. Because Rename is
done this way, it can be thought of as a Move with the ability to rename
during the move.
Input File
From the file list that appears, select an input file to use.
Output File Name and Master File
Use this dialog box to specify the new name for the file, the MFD to use
for storing it, and whether file history is carried along to the renamed
file.
Output File Name
Enter the new name for the file. This name may be up to 24 characters
long and may contain internal blanks. If you do not supply a name, a
forward slash is added to the old file name (for example, old name TOP
OF MUDDY, new default name /TOP OF MUDDY). If you enter a name
identical to the old one, Z-MAP Plus executes correctly, but you gain
nothing except to reposition the file to the end of the MFD.
Output File Master File
When you click the parameter box, a popup dialog box appears, which
lists the attached MFDs and the scratch file for the session. Select the
MFD to use for saving the output file.
Copy File History
Use this parameter to carry history information contained in the original
file along to the renamed file. File History describes what has happened
to a file (for example, how that file was created, parameter settings, and
files used). The history can potentially go back many generations.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
Copy History Copy the history as it appears in the original file and
add this Rename event to that file.
Do Not Copy (default value) Do not copy the history from the
original file, instead make this Rename event the first item in the files
history.
R2003.12.0
148
Landmark
Rename Pictures
Select File Rename in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
Apply.
R2003.12.0
149
Landmark
R2003.12.0
150
Landmark
Delete Files
Select File Delete from
the Z-MAP Plus window.
OK
R2003.12.0
151
Landmark
Delete Pictures
Select File Delete in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
OK
R2003.12.0
152
Landmark
This option allows you to delete pictures from a graphics file. Many
pictures can be deleted in one execution of Delete Picture. A verification
dialog box is presented to give you a second chance before deletion
occurs.
Select Graphics File
From the list of ZGFs that appears, select the ZGF that contains the
picture to deleteyou can select the currently attached ZGF (Use
Current Graphics File option) or any other ZGF in the list. (The name
of the currently selected graphics file appears in the Z-MAP Plus
window status area.)
The selection list contains all the ZGFs specified in the ZGFs tab of the
Directory Paths dialog box. The file you select is used to build the list of
pictures available for deletion. If the appropriate ZGF is not listed,
check the directory path settings.
Select and Delete Pictures
You can delete one or more pictures from a graphics file. One option is
to delete the currently active picture. The name of the currently active
picture appears in the Z-MAP Plus window status area.
A list of pictures in the selected graphics file appears. Point to and click
the pictures to delete. Pictures selected for deletion appear as white
letters on a black background. You can toggle these pictures on and off
until you are ready to perform the deletion. Clicking OK causes the
Delete option to execute.
Confirm Deletion(s)
Before the deletion occurs, the picture list is redisplayed and shows the
pictures selected for deletion in a black background. Clicking OK again
executes the deletion. A list of the deleted files appears in the
Z-MAP Plus System Window.
R2003.12.0
153
Landmark
Compressing Files
Compressing Master Files
Use the File Compress Master File (MFD) option to compress
any unused space that has accumulated in an MFD.
As you add data to an MFD, the file increases in size automatically. If
you delete data, however, the MFD does not automatically decrease in
size. The next time you add data, the data is written to a vacated part of
the MFD, provided the empty space is large enough to accommodate the
data.
If you delete several data files from an MFD, the MFD is likely to
contain a lot of wasted space. To reclaim unused space, compress the
MFD. Compressing is especially helpful for archiving MFDs that may
contain a lot of unused space.
By compressing an MFD, you actually copy its data to a new file. You
are asked to specify a name for the new MFD, but the file retains the
original internal name. To perform the compression operation, your
system must have enough available space for the new compressed copy.
Once the compression operation is complete, detach the old MFD from
the Z-MAP Plus session and delete it (at the operating system level). If
you do not perform these follow-up steps, the compression operations
results in even more wasted space.
Compressing Files in the File Manager
You can also display the dialog box for compressing an MFD or ZGF by
clicking the Compress MFD/ZGF icon in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager
dialog box.
R2003.12.0
154
Landmark
It is essential that the new, compressed MFD have a different name from the
input MFD. Otherwise the old MFD is overwritten.
R2003.12.0
155
Landmark
It is a good practice to check the first and last picture in a new ZGF before you
delete the old ZGF.
You can also display the dialog box for compressing an MFD or ZGF by
clicking the Compress MFD/ZGF icon in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager
dialog box.
R2003.12.0
156
Landmark
It is essential that the new, compressed graphics file have a different name from
the original ZGF, or the original ZGF is overwritten.
R2003.12.0
157
Landmark
Overview
Use the Edit menu options in the Z-MAP Plus window to perform the
following actions. (Edit menu options are active only if a picture is
selected.)
R2003.12.0
Data Editor (page 174) Edit and create data files in the
Edit/Create Data dialog box.
Color Table (page 209) Show the current Color Table display
and the Edit Color Table dialog box, which you use to open, save,
copy and edit color tables.
157
Landmark
Graphics Editor
Use the Graphics Editor options to delete or modify graphic elements in
the current map or cross section. The edits affect only the display. Data
files are not modified.
R2003.12.0
158
Landmark
Delete Features
Deletes all or some of the features in the current picture (such as text or
contours). A list of features will be presented for you to select from.
When you have chosen the features to delete, the selected features will
be deleted.
If you execute this option and then change your mind about what was
deleted, you can get all of the just deleted features back, if you go
immediately to Undelete Last Deleted Feature. Do not perform any
other procedure. Selecting Undelete Last Deleted Feature will restore
what was deleted, as long as no other options were executed between
deletion and undeletion.
R2003.12.0
159
Landmark
R2003.12.0
160
Landmark
Edit All Features and Edit Selected Features use exactly the same dialog
boxes and parameters.
Wrong item
found
New editing
parameters
Cancel edit
session
OK & return to
Z-MAP Plus main menu
Edit Selected Features Workflow
R2003.12.0
161
Landmark
Editing Procedures
On selecting Edit Edit Selected Feature, you are first given the
opportunity to choose which features will be available for editing in this
session. The Select Item menu appears and you have the following
options:
Edit Text
Edit Lines
Edit Markers (Symbols)
Edit Area (color-filled areas)
When Edit Text or Edit Markers appears you will be able to select
Move, Copy, Delete, or Change Parameters. When Edit Lines or Edit
Area appears, you will be able to select Delete or Change Parameters. If
you want to change the position of a line, then go to Edit Edit/
Create Data.
You can select the appropriate action from the menu that appears. If you
choose Change Parameters, another dialog box will appear with all the
attributes of the feature displayed. Make the desired changes and once
the edit has taken place, the Select Item menu and prompt will appear
again. If you did not like the edit, then select Undo Last Edit. If you want
to abort all the edits made since entering this Edit option, then select
Cancel Edit Session.
R2003.12.0
162
Landmark
R2003.12.0
163
Landmark
If you cannot find the feature, try to select the feature again, window in
to make it easier to find, or re-enter Edit, Edit Selected Features and
select only the graphics feature you want to modify.
New Editing Parameters
To prevent the previous edit action from being applied to the next
selected picture element, select New Editing Parameters. The select
item with the cursor or pick a menu option prompt appears. Select a
feature. An appropriate edit dialog box (i.e., Edit Text, Edit Line, etc.)
will appear. Select an editing option.
If you selected the feature before selecting New Editing Parameters, and
wanted to change the edit action, then select Undo Last Edit. The
element will be changed back to its previous form. Now select New
Editing Parameters, then select the item and apply the editing action.
Cancel Edit Session
If you click the Cancel Edit session button, you cancel all the edits
made since you entered the Edit option. If you only want to abort the last
edit, select Undo Last Edit.
R2003.12.0
164
Landmark
Edit Text
You can display the Edit Text dialog box from Edit All Features and
Edit Selected Features. Use the Edit Text dialog box to move, copy,
delete, and change parameters (such as size, color, and font) of the text
you have selected. You return to the Select Item menu after the edit is
performed.
Move Text and Copy Text
Use the Move Text option to move text to a different position. You can
enter x,y coordinates for the new position or use the cursor to select a
position.
Use the Copy Text option to place a copy of a text string in the picture.
You can enter x,y coordinates for the text position or use the cursor to
select a position.
Key In Location
Key In Location enables you to enter the x,y coordinates for the new
position of the selected text. This x,y position refers to the lower left,
lower right, or center of the text as specified when this text was last
placed on the picture.
R2003.12.0
165
Landmark
Delete Text
Change Parameters
Click the Change Parameters button to display a dialog box for
changing any of the following attributes for the currently selected text
string: Angle of rotation, font, height (size), color, and the text string.
Color To select the text color, enter the color index number or
click the color button.
To select the color index from the color table, enter a number from
0 to 255.
Click the button next to the Color box, and the Select a Color
Index dialog box appears. Select the color you want from the color
buttons. Use the scroll bar to see other color indices and their
associated colors.
If the color table is the default Z-MAP Plus color table, the first
eight color indices and their associated colors are as shown in the
following table.
Color Index
0
1
2
3
4
5
R2003.12.0
Color
Background color (usually black)
Foreground color (usually white)
Red
Green
Blue
Cyan
166
Landmark
Color Index
6
7
8
Color
Magenta
Yellow
Orange
To look at the color table settings for the current picture, select
View Color Color Table.
String New text can be entered to replace the text you have
selected. This may be up to 80 characters long and may contain
internal blanks. You can use upper and lowercase characters with
all fonts except Plain.
Edit Lines
Use the Edit Lines dialog box to delete or change the parameters of the
selected line (such as line type, color, and symbol).
Delete Line Segment
Delete Line Segment will delete the portion of the line you have
selected. No dialog boxes are displayed when this happens.
If you change your mind and do not want to delete this portion of the
line, select Undo Last Edit on the Select Item dialog box and the line will
be restored. The Undo procedure only works if nothing else has been
selected since the deletion.
Change Parameters
Use the Change Parameters option to specify the line pattern, color,
length, spacing, and direction of hachures; length and spacing of dashes;
type and height of the posted symbols; each line vertex; and the weight
of bold lines.
Line Color To select a color for displaying the line, use one of
these methods:
Color Index Value Enter a color index value from 0 to 255
to select the color.
Color Button Click the color button. In the Select a Color
Index dialog box that appears, select a color from the standard
palette. To see other color indices and their associated colors
use the scroll bar.
R2003.12.0
167
Landmark
To see the first eight color indices and colors in the default
Z-MAP Plus color table, see page 172.
To see the current pictures color table settings, select View
Color Color Table.
R2003.12.0
No Symbol
Plus
168
Landmark
Square
Diamond
Triangle
10
Asterisk
26
Dry Hole
28
Gas Show
30
Gas
48
Oil
50
60
Oil Show
62
Edit Markers
In the Edit Markers dialog box, choose Move, Copy, Delete, and
Change Parameters (such as size, color, and symbol) for the currently
selected Marker (symbol).
Move Marker and Copy Marker
Use the Move Marker option to select a new position for the selected
marker by entering x,y coordinates. Use the Copy Marker option to enter
x,y coordinates for the position of a copy of the selected marker.
R2003.12.0
169
Landmark
Delete Marker
To delete the selected marker, select the Delete Marker option. The
deletion occurs immediately.
To restore the deleted marker, click the Undo Last Edit button in the
Select Item dialog box. This only works if nothing else has been selected
since the deletion.
Change Parameters
Change Parameters enables you to specify the marker type (symbol
code), its size, and color.
Marker Type
To replace the current marker symbol, enter the number of the new
marker you want to use. This defaults to 1.
Some standard symbol code numbers and their associated symbols
include:
Symbol (Marker) Code
R2003.12.0
Symbol
No Symbol
Plus
Square
Diamond
Triangle
170
Landmark
Symbol
10
Asterisk
26
Dry Hole
28
Gas Show
30
Gas
48
Oil
50
60
Oil Show
62
For examples of the markers in the extended set used in Z-MAP Plus,
see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns on page 791.
R2003.12.0
171
Landmark
Marker Size
You can enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.) which defines the size of
the Marker. This defaults to 0.07 cm.
Marker Color
To select the color for displaying the marker, use one of these methods:
The following table shows the default Z-MAP Plus color tables first
eight color index values and their associated colors.
Color Index
Color
Red
Green
Blue
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Orange
To see the current pictures color table settings, select View Color
Color Table.
R2003.12.0
172
Landmark
Edit Area
Use the Edit Area dialog box to delete or change the color of the
currently selected area.
Delete Fill Area
Delete Fill Area immediately changes the selected color-filled area to
the background color.
To restore the deleted fill area, select Undo Last Edit in the Select Item
dialog box. The restoration takes effect only if you have not performed
any other action since the deletion.
Change Parameters
Use the Change Parameters setting to delete or change the color in the
currently selected area.
Fill Color
To select a color to use to display the Fill Color marker, enter the color
index number or click the color button. To select the color index from
the color table, enter a value from 0 to 255.
If you click the color button next to the entry field, the Select a Color
Index dialog box appears. Select a color in the Select a Color Index
dialog box. To see other color indices and their associated colors, use the
scroll bar.
To see the default Z-MAP Plus color tables first eight color indices and
their associated colors, see the table on page 172.
To see the current pictures color table settings, select View Color
Color Table.
R2003.12.0
173
Landmark
Data Editor
The Data Editor displays the Edit/Create Data dialog box. This dialog
box enables you to edit and create data files. You can see the changes
you are making to the data file reflected in the picture displayed. Any
data in the Area of Interest (AOI) of the present picture and on the
attached MFDs or OpenWorks can be edited. Both data used to create
the currently displayed picture and data not used to create the picture (on
attached MFDs or OpenWorks) can be edited.
In order to begin editing or creating data, you must have a picture
currently active. If one is not active, you may select to work on an old
picture or create a picture.
You can select the files you want to edit, or you can allow the program
to select the data files on which your current picture is based. Each file
used to create the current picture will automatically be selected.
Unless you cancel the editing session, the results of the editing session
are reflected in the MFD and ZGF. The following types of data can be
edited or created:
Control Points
Seismic Data
Contours
Faults
Profiles
It is very important to save your work often when editing, especially when
during extensive editing sessions. It is very easy to corrupt an MFD during
complex editing sessions; so SAVE OFTEN!
R2003.12.0
174
Landmark
Points
Using your cursor on the currently displayed picture, you can edit
control point data, such as Well Data and Seismic Data. You may
window, pan or zoom in on any point while editing.
Options include:
Cursor Move
View/Edit
Area Edit
Undo
Delete
Undelete
Create Point
Select File
Select Fields
Display Parameters
Autoset Parameters
Cursor Move
Use the Cursor Move option to graphically reposition one or more
control points in your currently displayed picture.
If you select Cursor Move, the Cursor Move dialog box appears,
followed by the prompt:
SELECT POINT TO MOVE OR DISMISS
Select a control point to move by clicking it. A dialog box appears,
followed by the prompt:
INPUT NEW X,Y LOCATION
Position the cursor at the target location for the control point and click.
The control point automatically moves to the new location. The Cursor
Move dialog box and the SELECT POINT TO MOVE OR DISMISS
prompt appear. You can reposition another control point or exit the
Cursor Move mode by selecting OK. The changes you made to your
data file during the editing session are saved automatically when you
close the Edit/Create Data menu.
R2003.12.0
175
Landmark
View/Edit
Use the View/Edit option to edit values of points along the currently
selected line. If you select a point, all the points data values are
displayed. You can then perform a keyboard edit on any of the points
values.
The following prompt appears:
SELECT POINT TO EDIT OR DISMISS
Once you select a point, a dialog box appears and reports current
information about the selected control point. If you have selected to edit
certain fields of information (under Select Fields), only those fields are
displayed. You can change the value for any field that appears, then
click OK to save the edits, or click Cancel to close the dialog box
without saving changes. The selected control point is highlighted during
editing.
Area Edit
When Area Edit is selected, you can edit all of the control points in an
area that you specify. Area Edit can edit all points inside or outside a
polygon or the current view (portion of the picture currently displayed).
Area Edit has the following capabilities:
deletion of points
blanking (converting to ZNON) all, one, or currently selected
Z-fields
change one Z-field to a constant value
These features are particularly useful when you are trying to set all of
the control points in an area to a constant, such as a ZNON. For example,
you may have the end of a seismic line that has totally invalid time
values, and you want to set all of the shotpoints equal to ZNON in order
to create a reasonable grid despite the bad values.
There are several options under Area Edit:
R2003.12.0
176
Landmark
Delete Points
R2003.12.0
177
Landmark
Fill Value
The fill value is the Z-Value that you wish to assign to the points in the
area you have selected for editing. For example, you may want to make
all values in the area ZNONs. The fill value would then the value you
have defined for null data.
Area to Edit
You can perform editing operations either Inside or Outside the
polygon you have defined.
Edit Field
A list of fields appears. Select the field which contains the point values
you wish to change.
Select Point File
You may select datasets which have already been selected for editing.
For example, your active picture may have been built using both a
seismic shotpoint data file and a well control point file. Your selection
will determine whether the editor applies the area edit to the seismic data
or to the well data.
Undo
Undo enables you to restore the last edit you performed to the way it was
before editing. Undo will undo the last point edit, such as a cursor move
or a view edit. If you invoke undo while editing points using area edit,
and the editor does not restore the points, you can recover these points
by selecting Edit Edit Create Data Cancel Edit.
Delete
Delete will omit a control point that you select with the cursor from your
edited datafile. If you decide that you didnt really want the control point
deleted, you may put it back by selecting undelete.
Undelete
Undelete brings back a control point you deleted. The control points
that have been deleted will be highlighted, and you may select one to put
back. The control point is then put back into your edited datafile.
R2003.12.0
178
Landmark
Create Point
Use the Create Point option to add one or more points to the existing
file.
Place the cursor at the target location for the new control point. A dialog
box appears with information about the fields that you have stored with
this dataset. The location is filled in automatically, but you specify the
Z fields and other information you want to save with the new control
point. Select OK to save the information that you have typed in, or
Cancel to return to the Point edit menu and not save the new control
point. If you would like to enter all of the information for the new
control point, you may select the option Key X, Y to enter the location
of the new data point as well as any additional fields that you would like
to save with it.
Key X, Y
You can use the Key X, Y option to enter values for the x,y location of
the new point. You can also enter values for the point fields, such as the
Z field and Well ID File.
X-field Enter the value for the X coordinate of the new point.
Y-field Enter the value for the Y coordinate of the new point.
Z-field Enter the value for the Z field of the new point.
Field Values Field names for the fields on the point dataset you
are editing also appear on the Key X, Y dialog box. Assign a value
appropriate to each of the fields listed, e.g., Z-value or Well ID. Up
to 10 fields can appear on one dialog box. Values for up to 50 fields
can be assigned.
Select File
Select File enables you to select a file for adding a point, i.e., it answers
the question: Which edit file (file selected for editing) gets the new point
written to it?
On this menu you are selecting among datasets which have already been
selected for editing. For example, your active picture may have both
seismic shotpoint data and well control point data posted on it. Your
selection will decide whether the editor applies the area edit to the
seismic data or to the well data.
R2003.12.0
179
Landmark
Select File
Select File is useful for getting an additional file to edit. For example,
your active picture may have had seismic shotpoint data posted, but you
may want to edit the well data values in addition to the seismic data
values.
Select File enables you to select a file for adding a point, i.e., it answers
the question: Which edit file (file selected for editing) gets the new point
written to it?
You may select datasets which have already been selected for editing.
For example, your active picture may have been built using both a
seismic shotpoint data file and a well control point file. Your selection
will decide whether the editor applies the area edit to the seismic data or
to the well data.
To remove a dataset from editing, you must use the Select Files option
on the Edit/Create Data main menu.
Select Fields
Select Fields enables you to select the point dataset you want to edit, and
the fields on that dataset which you want to edit.
Select Fields
A list of fields is presented. You can choose to edit all fields, or one or
more fields. Select Fields limits the fields displayed for View/Edit. This
option is helpful for datasets with more fields than will fit on a dialog
box (ten). Select Fields gives you the chance of viewing only those
fields you are interested in editing, and if at all possible, to view them
on one dialog box.
Select File (for Field Selection)
If you are editing two datasets, such as a seismic dataset and a well
control point set, you must say which file the fields are coming from. If
you are editing only one dataset, you need not Select File.
R2003.12.0
180
Landmark
Display Parameters
Use the Display Parameters option to see the options for displaying
control point information for the current map. This option is useful if
you have not posted your control points on the map, but would like to
see them now in order to edit them. (This option only changes the
posting of point data in the editor. This option under Line Posting
actually changes the picture.) The Display Parameters options are:
Select Fields
Sizes/Colors
Locations
Select File
Post Symbol/Value Options
Select Fields
Use the Select Fields option to select a field, such as a Z field to post on
the picture around the control point.
Sizes/Colors
Use the Sizes/Colors option to choose a symbol number, size, color, and
a value (Z field) size and color for the points that you are posting. Sizes
are expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).
R2003.12.0
Symbol Size This is the size of the symbol you are posting with
your points. The value for Symbol Size is expressed in plotter units
(in./cm.).
181
Landmark
Locations
Location enables you to select where you would like to see any selected
field values posted in relation to the symbol.
A list of fields on the file you are editing appears. For each field you
have selected to post, indicate where you would like the value to appear.
The choices are to post the value Above, Below, Right, or Left of the
symbol.
Select File
Select File enables you to select the dataset for which you want to
establish display parameters.
Post Symbol/Value Options
Post Symbol/Value Options enables you to select if and where symbols
and values are posted. You can choose not to post symbols or values, to
post symbols and values for selected points, to post the symbol and not
the value, or to post the symbol and field value for every control point.
No Posting. No symbols or values will be posted.
Symbol Only. Symbol Only will post a symbol at the location of all
points, but will not include values for fields around the symbol.
Selected Points. Selected Points will post a symbol at the location of
all points. When a point is selected for editing, specified fields may be
displayed. You will specify fields to display in Select Fields.
All. All will post a symbol and specified field values for every control
point on the file.
Once all of your posting parameters have been set up the way you would
like them, you may select Symbol Only, Selected Points, or All. Select
No Posting to get out of the posting option without posting any values
on your map. When you select one of the options on the Post Symbol
Value Options dialog box, you will return to the Posting dialog box
where you can Apply your posting choice.
The posting you do in the editor is temporary as far as your picture is
concerned. The changes to the dataset are permanent, but when you exit
your editor, the posting parameters go back to the way they were on the
picture when you started the editing session.
R2003.12.0
182
Landmark
Autoset Parameters
Use the Autoset Parameters option to specify defaults for creating
points.
You can specify values by selecting the files used to create a particular
picture. The Autoset feature is useful for many sorts of editing tasks and
can be used for all data types. The Autoset capability is useful both if
you are creating a dataset or are editing/adding to an existing dataset.
Autoset works with control points, vertex data, and fault files.
Autoset can be invoked from Point Edit, Line Edit, and Create Data.
Select Type
Like the Select File options, Select Type is a choice among already
selected files. It answers the question: For which type of file do you
want to set Autoset Parameters?
Once you select a file for Autoset Parameters, The program computes
values for new points in the file according to the new parameter values.
Set File Parameters
This dialog box enables you to Autoset Extra Fields and to Snap
Vertices to point locations if you wish to do so.
Autoset Extra Fields
The Autoset File Parameters feature provides the option to Autoset
Extra Fields. This feature will enable the editor to pick up a value
(usually a Z-value) from a grid or control point on which the picture was
based. This feature is especially useful for adding synthesized control
points away from your data, and for creating digitized profiles.
Autoset Extra Fields enables the editor to set field values for new
points automatically. When inputting new points, the editor sets all
fields to default values. When using Autoset, the mapper will not be
asked to supply the values for the new points. Unless you specify how
to set the values using Set Field Parameters, the program will set the
field values to the ZNON for that field.
Snap Vertices to Point Locations
This feature will conform the vertices of your new data to the control
point file you have selected.
R2003.12.0
183
Landmark
R2003.12.0
184
Landmark
Select the contour line on the active map that you want to reshape.
X marks appear along the selected contour line, marking the points
on the line you can move.
2.
3.
The contour will be redefined and reshaped according to the point you
have chosen, the new destination you have chosen for the point, and the
points on the contour line which have remained fixed.
You can reshape lines by selecting and moving a reshaping point, or
point of inflection. Reshape Contours fits a curve through the three
closest reshaping points.
If you do not want to reshape the line using a marked point (a point of
inflection along the contour), you can add and delete points which are
able to be moved. To remove reshaping points which you do not want
to influence the shape of the new line, use the Add/Delete Points option.
The ability to add and delete reshaping points gives you more control
over the shape of the new contour. When you delete reshaping points,
a larger segment of the line can be reshaped. When you add reshaping
points, a smaller segment of the line can be reshaped.
The results of the reshape operation can be viewed immediately, and
changes can be made until the line fits with the desired interpretation.
The reshaped contour can now become input for other Z-MAP Plus
operations, such as Contour to Grid.
R2003.12.0
185
Landmark
Select Line
Use the cursor to select a contour line to reshape.
Move Point
A prompt appears directing you to select a point to move. Contours are
reshaped if you select a marked point of inflection to move, then select
the new location for the point of inflection. Use the cursor to select the
point to move in the contour line.
Add
This option enables you to add reshaping points to the contour line.
Adding reshaping points permits a smaller segment of the contour to
be reshaped.
Contours are reshaped when you choose a marked point of inflection to
move and select the new location for the point of inflection. The Add
Point feature enables you to reshape contour lines using points other
than the points of inflection. To add a point, use your cursor to input the
location of the new inflection (reshaping) point.
Delete
Contours are reshaped when you choose a marked point of inflection to
move and select the new location for that point of inflection. The Delete
Point feature enables you to eliminate points of inflection which you do
not want to use in reshaping the contour. To delete a point, use your
cursor to select the inflection point which you wish to omit. The Delete
Point feature enables you to reshape a larger segment of the contour line.
R2003.12.0
186
Landmark
Break
Use the Break option to cut a line into separate parts. For example, if you
accidentally cross a fault with a contour, you can break the contour at
the fault and delete the part of the contour that crosses the fault
incorrectly.
There are two ways that you can break a line:
Individually
At a Line
Individually means that you will be using the cursor to input a break
point on a line. When you select to break an individual line, the program
will prompt you to select a break point on a line. The program will place
an X in the spot you have selected with your cursor.
At a Line means that you may break a line where it intersects another
line. For example, you may decide to break all of the contours at a
coastline, so that you can later delete the contours that are onshore. This
option is especially useful when contours and faults have been digitized.
The tiny contour segments inside fault polygons need to be cleaned up
before going to contour gridding.
Type to Break
If you select to Break At a Line, you must select the Type of Line To
Break, and the dataset you want broken (for example, contours of grid
A or grid B, or fault set 1 or fault set 2). From the list of line types that
appears, select a line type to break at line intersections.
Break Keeping and Break Deleting
When you select to Break At a Line, you will then need to indicate
whether you want to keep or delete the shorter line segment of the
broken line.
When you select Break Keeping, the program will keep both segments
of the broken line.
Break Deleting will break the line and automatically delete the shortest
segment. Break deleting should only be used when the piece to delete is
obvious, such as a contour slightly crossing a fault line.
R2003.12.0
187
Landmark
Extend
Use the Extend option to continue an existing line (such as a contour or
fault line). For example, if contouring did not extend all of the contour
lines to the map border, you can use this option to make the contour lines
end neatly at the border.
When Extend is selected, you need to select a line to extend, then input
points where you would like the line to go. When your line is complete,
there are several options to end the line:
R2003.12.0
Delete Extra End Delete Extra End has the same effects as
End, except the part of the original line that was not extended is
deleted.
Delete Last Delete Last deletes the last point you input.
188
Landmark
End
Break/Connect
Attach to End
Delete Last
For a discussion of these options, see Extend on page 188.
Smooth
Smoothing will fit a curve through points that you have input when you
created a line.
When you select Smooth, a prompt appears directing you to do one of
two things:
Change Options
Use the Change Opts feature to change the smoothing defaults for each
data file you are editing. The default values for line types are:
R2003.12.0
189
Landmark
You need at least three points in order to smooth a line (two points
already is a smooth straight line). This is very useful when you are trying
to input fault data or contours because it will give them a smooth
appearance instead of a jagged straight line appearance.
The Smoothing Options dialog box lists the Line files subject to
smoothing. If you do not want to accept the defaults which are imposed
on each line type, you can indicate whether you want smoothing for each
of the line types.
Undo Last Edit
Undo Last Edit will give you back your original line before you
performed the last edit. This is useful if you discover that you make a
mistake in editing and really would like it back the way it was before
you tried to change it.
Delete
Delete is designed to eliminate a line (contour, or fault). To delete a line,
place the cursor on the line that you would like to delete and select it. If
you have deleted a line by mistake, you may select Undelete to get your
line back. Use OK when you are finished deleting lines.
Undelete
Undelete will retrieve a line that has been eliminated (deleted). If you
have deleted the wrong line for example, undelete will allow you to get
your line back. After undelete is selected, the lines that have been
deleted will be highlighted. You may select the line to put back with the
cursor. Use Dismiss when you are finished undeleting lines.
New Line
Us the New Line option to create a new line. If it is a contour, you will
also be asked to enter a value for the contour level. Sketch in the new
line using your cursor on the picture. If the smooth option is set to query,
you will need to decide whether to smooth the line. If the smooth option
is set to yes, the line will be smoothed automatically.
R2003.12.0
190
Landmark
All of a Type All of a Type will allow you to display all of the
lines that are the same type (e.g., all contour lines) with the same
end and with the same posting parameters.
R2003.12.0
191
Landmark
Autoset Parameters
Use the Autoset Parameters option to specify default values for new
lines.
The editors Autoset Parameters capability enables you to get values
from the files which are selected for editing. For example, a grid can be
used to determine Z-values for new points which you will input. The
Autoset feature is useful for many sorts of editing tasks and can be used
for all data types. The Autoset capability is useful both when you are
creating a new dataset and when you are editing/adding to an existing
dataset. Autoset works with control points, vertex data, and fault files.
You can invoke Autoset from Point Edit, Line Edit, and Create Data.
Select Type
Like the Select File options, Select Type is a choice among already
selected files. It answers the question: For which file do you want to set
Autoset Parameters?
Set File Parameters
Set File Parameters enables you to Autoset Extra Fields and to Snap
Vertices to point locations if you wish to do so.
R2003.12.0
192
Landmark
R2003.12.0
193
Landmark
Grid Nodes
Select this option to edit grid node values. Grid nodes are calculated in
the gridding option. You may change grid node values, or set grid nodes
equal to ZNON (null data value). When you edit grid nodes directly,
there is no need to re-grid (since this procedure is directly changing the
grid). After you select to edit grid nodes, the grid nodes will be drawn
on your screen.
Change Values
Select this option to change the value of a grid node. For example, if the
grid node had a value of 7543, and you would like it to have a value of
7500, select Change Values. You may then select the grid node whose
value you want to change. Select the grid node you want to edit with
your cursor. You will then see a dialog box that has the current value,
and you may enter the new value. The status area shows the values of
the surrounding grid nodes. You can change values for as many grid
nodes as you like. Select OK to save the changes, or Cancel if you do
not want the changes saved.
Interpolate Values
Select this option to see x, y, and z values for any point on the map. The
program interpolates values based on the values of the surrounding grid
nodes. The Z-value appears on the map. The information for the selected
point appears in the Z-MAP Plus System window.
Select Fault File
Select a fault file from the list that appears. Faults are needed only when
back interpolating surfaces cut by faults. When faults are used, grid
nodes are calculated using only data located on the same side of the
faults as the node. A Fault File must already be on the MFD in order to
be available for this option.
R2003.12.0
194
Landmark
Area Edit
The Area Edit option will change all of the grid nodes in an area. This is
especially useful for setting large regions of a grid to ZNON (null data
value). When area edit is selected, you may designate an area to edit
with the cursor, or you may select an existing polygon from a previously
created polygon file. You may also use the current view of the picture
on the screen as the area to edit if you do not want to use a polygon file.
You will then get a dialog box where you may enter the value (fill value)
that you would like the grid nodes in the area to have, and you may
select to change the grid nodes either inside or outside of the area that
you selected to edit.
Select Polygon File
You may select a polygon from an existing file as your area to edit, or
create a polygon by using the cursor on the map. The polygon may then
be used for an area edit.
Select Polygon
If a polygon already exists on a the active picture, you can select it.
Selecting the polygon will confine the grid node edit to the area enclosed
by the polygon.
Create Polygon
The purpose of Create Polygon is to allow you to define the area in
which they wish to edit grid node values. Using your cursor, draw a
polygon on your map. Values for points inside or outside the polygon
can be changed.
End And Close will complete the continuous perimeter of the polygon.
The first point of the polygon will become the last point, so that the
polygon is closed.
Delete Last will delete the last line segment you have drawn on the
picture.
Current View
You may use the portion of your map that is on the graphics screen as
the area to edit. If your entire map is still displayed, you may window
(or zoom in) on a smaller portion of the map and use that area as the
current area to edit.
R2003.12.0
195
Landmark
Set Parameters
This dialog box enables you to enter a replacement value for Z-values
inside the polygon.
Fill Value The Fill Value is the Z-value you want to enter for
the grid area inside or outside the polygon. For example, if you
would like all of the grid nodes inside the polygon to be replaced
by a ZNON, enter the value you are using as the null data value.
Select File
Use this to select a grid to edit, if the file that you selected from the main
Edit/Create menu is not the file that you really need.
Post Values
Post Values labels the grid nodes with their values. This is useful if you
have not previously labeled the grid node values on your map and need
to see the values in order to determine which ones to edit. You may
change how the grid node symbols and the Z-values appear and control
how much of the grid is posted, the symbol size, color, and symbol
number. If you would like to post values at only a few grid nodes, you
may select Selective Post and only display values for those grid nodes
that you select with the cursor.
Symbol Parameters
This dialog box enables you to set values controlling posted symbols.
R2003.12.0
196
Landmark
Value Parameters
This dialog box enables you to control the posting of grid symbols at
symbol locations.
Row, Rate, and Column Parameters First and Last Row, Row
Rate, First and Last Column, and Column Rate all refer to the
placement of grid node values in the rows and columns of the grid.
Starting and Ending Row, Row Rate, and Starting and Ending
Rate, all refer to the configuration of symbols in the rows and
columns of the grid. These parameters are useful if you would like
to display only a subset of grid nodes on your map. For example,
you may want to start with the 5th row and column of grid nodes
and end with the 20th row and column. You could choose to post
every 3rd row (Row Rate) to have an idea of the grid node values
in a problem area.
R2003.12.0
197
Landmark
Selective Post
Instead of using parameter values to select which grid nodes are to be
posted, you can select grid nodes to be posted with your cursor.
Create Data
Create Data uses an existing picture as a graphic aid to create data files.
The data you create using the editor will be stored in an MFD or
OpenWorks unless you use the Update Files option or Cancel Edit
option on the Edit/Create Data main menu.
Select Create Data if you would like to create a data file instead of
editing an existing file. You can create the following types of files:
Contours (CNTR)
Faults (FALT)
Polylines (VERT)
Profiles (DATA)
R2003.12.0
198
Landmark
Fault
Fault enables you to create a fault file. You will need to select faults as
the type of data to create, give the fault data a file name, select an MFD
or OpenWorks to write the file to, and describe any additional fields that
you have. You may use the cursor on your map in order to input the fault
data. You may also smooth out the created faults by answering Yes to
the menu that asks if you would like to smooth the line. If you would
like to leave the line just as you have drawn it, answer No to the
smoothing question. When creating a New Fault File, you can also
choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to Snap Vertices to Point Locations;
see Set File Parameters on page 192 for information about these two
options.
Polyline
Polyline enables you to create a line of data. You may enter lines for
coastlines, state or national boundaries, lease lines, etc. You will need to
select polylines as the type of data to create, give the line data a file
name, select an MFD or OpenWorks to write the file to, and describe
any additional fields that you have. You may use the cursor on your map
in order to input the line data. Polylines will not be smoothed until
smoothing options have been changed. When creating a New Line File,
you can also choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to Snap Vertices to
Point Locations; see Set File Parameters on page 192 for information
about these two options
Profile\
Profile enables you to create profile lines. Profiles are vertex lines that
also have a depth (Z) value, so they usually have X, Y, SEG ID, and Z
as their fields. Profiles are useful to input additional information in areas
where there is not enough data to create a reasonable surface model. For
example, if you have an isolated fault block with two wells, inputting
profile data will allow you to have enough data to create a reasonable
contour map in the area.
Once profile data has been created you may use it in gridding. A dialog
box will appear that will allow you to input the Z-value for each vertex
point that you enter. You will need to select profiles as the type of data
to create, give the profile data a file name, select an MFD to write the
file to, and describe any additional fields that you have. You may use the
cursor on your map in order to input the profile data. When creating a
New Profile File, you can also choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to
Snap Vertices to Point Locations; see Set File Parameters on
page 192 for information about these two options.
R2003.12.0
199
Landmark
Control Point
Use Control Point to create well or seismic data in the current map with
the cursor. You may also input several Z-fields if you would like to. You
will need to select control points as the type of data to create, give the
control point data a file name, select an MFD to write the file to, and
describe any additional fields that you have. You may use the cursor on
your map in order to input the control point data. When creating a New
Control Point File, you can also choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to
Snap Vertices to Point Locations; see Set File Parameters on
page 192 for information about these two options.
Field Descriptors
This dialog box enables you to describe fields on the file you are
creating. The values entered on this dialog box describe fields in
addition to the ones required by each of the specific data types being
created. Field description is not allowed for contour data. For new fault,
line, and profile files, you may describe up to eight fields in addition to
X, Y, and Segment ID. For control point files, you may describe up to
eight fields in addition to X and Y.
This dialog box can appear up to eight times, one time for each of the
additional fields you have specified for the new data you are creating.
Each of the parameter values should be set to match the specific field (1
8) which is being described.
Field Name This dialog box enables you to name one or more
of the fields you specified for the data you are creating. The
number of fields you can name depends on the number of fields
you specified in the Filename, Master File Name, and Number of
Fields dialog box. You can specify a as many as eight fields in
addition to the required fields for the kind of data you are creating.
Supply a Field Name for each of the additional fields which will
appear on the file you are creating. The dialog box will appear as
many times as there are fields to be described.
R2003.12.0
Field Type There are eight choices for Field Type: Z-value,
Text Size, Character Size, Symbol Code, Delta Z-Throw, Dip
Angle, Color, and Other Field Types. For each time the dialog box
appears assign the appropriate field type for each of the additional
fields in the data you are creating.
200
Landmark
Regrid
You can regrid:
R2003.12.0
201
Landmark
When using contour data, Regrid will use the CTOG (contour to grid)
algorithm to regrid. When possible, Regrid will use the same algorithm
and parameters that were used in building the original grid.
Set Limits
Set Limits enables you to select where you would like regridding to
occur. You may select a polygon file, then a polygon to limit the
regridding, or you may create a new polygon to control where
regridding will take place, You may also use the current view on the
screen as the area to regrid.
View Limits When you select View Limits, you are indicating
that you want to regrid in the area currently displayed on the
picture on your Graphics Display.
Set Flags After the area to regrid has been established, you can
determine how regridding will treat null values in the original grid,
and what regridding will do with regridded nulls. You also specify
whether the program regrids inside or outside the polygon you
have defined.
Replace Nulls in Grid with Regrid Values Replace Nulls
in Grid with Regrid Values will allow regridding to calculate a
good grid node value for grid nodes in the edited area that were
previously calculated as ZNONs (null data values).
Replace Values in Grid with Regrid Nulls Replace Values
in Grid with Regrid Nulls will allow regridding to replace grid
nodes in the edit area that previously had a data value with the
ZNON value.
R2003.12.0
202
Landmark
Select Regrid Contour File If you would like your regrid files
and fields to be based on a contour file, select the contour file to be
used.
Select Regrid Fault File If you would like your regrid files and
fields to be based on a fault file, select the fault file you want.
Select Regrid Profile File If you would like your regrid files
and fields to be based on a profile file, select the profile file you
want.
Select Regrid Point Z-field Select the Z-field from your Point
File which you wish to use in Regridding.
Auto Regrid
Auto Regrid will regrid your edited area using default parameters that
have been calculated based on your data.
R2003.12.0
203
Landmark
Manual Regrid
Manual Regrid enables you to enter your own parameters to control how
grid node values are calculated. You will be asked to select a gridding
method (line gridding, point gridding, etc.), and Gridding Parameters
(see help on gridding if you need further help on gridding parameters).
Not all gridding methods are valid with all data types. For example, the
only gridding method that works with contours is CTOG. You will only
be allowed to select a gridding method that is valid for the (current) data
selected for regridding.
R2003.12.0
204
Landmark
Select Data
To edit data you must have a picture to work with. Attach the ZGF that
contains the picture you want to edit. (You can attach the ZGF by using
the File New Graphics File(ZGF) option.) To edit the data used
to create the picture, you also must verify that the MFD that contains the
data is attached.
If the MFD that contains the data files which were used to create the
picture is attached, then the editor automatically selects the data files.
The Select Data option is on the main menu in case you would like to
select data files other than those on which your active picture was
created. If you only want to edit the control point data or the contour
data, Select Data can enable you to restrict your edits to these files.
If you Select Data from the Edit/Create main menu, these files will be
available for any of the types of data editing. If you enter a specific
editing application and want to add to your scope, you can Select Data
in that application.
Select Files For Editing
When you choose Select Data on the main menu, a dialog box appears.
The Select Files for Editing dialog box contains a list of Data Types that
can be edited:
Polyline
Contour
Fault
Grid
Point
Profile
Vertex
Select the data types you want. Files corresponding to these data types
on the currently attached MFDs or OpenWorks are now available for
selection. Items already selected appear in reverse color. Click to clear
the selection for data types you do not want to edit.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. A Fault File
must have been previously constructed in order to be available for this
option.
R2003.12.0
205
Landmark
The editor works with the Segment ID field on the profile data. Profiles
are like cross sections that have X, Y, and Z-values at each digitized
point along the cross section. Straight line connections are made
between these X-Y-Z points along each profile. The straight line
connections that intersect Contour Gridding search lines create
Intersection Points for use during the gridding process. These profiles
are commonly used to more adequately control gridding between or
away from contours, near faults, and in areas of rapid gradient changes.
Update Files
When you exit the editor, edited files are automatically written to the
MFD or OpenWorks and the picture is updated. The default file name is
the same as the input file name with a version identifier added. The
default MFD is the one that contained the original data. Select Update
Files to change the default names and MFDs or to force an intermediate
version of the data to be written.
Normally, using the editor does not require selecting the update files
option.
Select Files
A list of files known to the editor for the current editing session is
presented. The files known to the editor were selected either because the
current picture is based on them, or because you specifically selected the
files for editing. You can choose to update one or more files, or all files.
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want.
Output Filenames/Master File
If you select Output Filenames/Master Files, a dialog box appears.
You must name an output file and a destination (an MFD or
OpenWorks) for each output file created in the editing session. You
specify the output file name by entering an alphanumeric string from the
keyboard. These names may be up to 24 characters long and may
contain internal blanks. Select the Output Master File from a list. Click
the box to the right of the parameter to view the list of the attached
MFDs, a scratch file, and OpenWorks. Select the destination (the MFD
or OpenWorks) to use for storing the output file.
R2003.12.0
206
Landmark
Cancel Edit
Select Cancel Edit in order to quit from an editing session and not save
any files. Cancel Edit will cancel the changes made to one or more
datasets. A list of the currently edited files is displayed. Select the files
for which you want to cancel the changes you have made during this
editing session. If you click OK, editing on selected files will be
cancelled. The files selected under the cancel function will return to
their condition prior to the start of the editing session. You may then
continue editing with the original data or exit the editor without the
selected files being updated.
R2003.12.0
207
Landmark
Color Overview
The colors assigned to each feature or part of a feature, such as lines,
text, polygons, etc., are stored in the pictures color table. Use the Color
Table option to perform color editing by displaying and modifying the
color table.
If you select the Color Table option in Z-MAP Plus, the Color Table
display and the Edit Color Table dialog box appear. Select colors (one
by one) to edit from the Color Table display, and perform the edit in the
Edit Color Table dialog box. The results appear in the Color Table
display.
This topic begins with an overview of how Z-MAP Plus determines
color for a specific feature. This is followed by a description of the Edit
Color Table dialog box. Next, you will find a general explanation of the
Edit Color Table dialog box. If you are familiar with the basics
regarding color graphics and the color table, turn to the discussion of the
Color Editing options that begins with Set Color Mode RGB or HLS on
page 213.
The fundamental units of graphics are called primitives. Z-MAP Plus
supports four types of graphic primitives:
line strings
symbols
text
polygons
Each primitive has an attribute called color.
Rather than identifying the color of a primitive directly, color is
identified indirectly as an index into a table of available colors. The
Z-MAP Plus color table is indexed from 0 to 255, and supports 256
colors. Each entry to the table is described using the Red, Green, Blue
(RGB) color model.
Although colors can be defined in either the RGB or Hue, Lightness and
Saturation (HLS) model, HLS parameters are converted to and stored as
RGB parameters in the color table. The RGB model describes color as
three numbers in the range of zero to one. These three numbers indicate
the relative amounts of red, green and blue that are added together to
obtain the color. HLS describes color by the angle of hue (from 0 - 360
degrees) and the percentage of lightness and saturation (from 0 - 100%).
R2003.12.0
208
Landmark
Color Table
To display the color table, click the Color Table icon or select Edit
Color Table in the Z-MAP Plus window.
The color table can have a maximum of 256 colors. The first eight
standard Z-MAP Plus colors follow:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
background (black/white)
normal foreground (white/black)
red
green
blue
cyan
magenta
yellow
Each color cell in the table has an assigned index number. The colors in
the table are assigned to indexes zero through seven. These color
associations may only be valid the first time you enter the program. The
color table for all future sessions is based on the changes made in the
previous session.
R2003.12.0
209
Landmark
HLS
COLOR
R2003.12.0
Red
Green
Blue
Hue
% Lightness
% Saturation
Blue
50
100
Magenta
60
50
100
Red
120
50
100
Yellow
180
50
100
Green
240
50
100
Cyan
300
50
100
Black
N/A
N/A
Grey
N/A
199*
White
N/A
100
N/A
210
Landmark
The Color Table display has 16 rows and 16 columns. To calculate the
index number for a cell you want to change, add the number on the left
side of the row to the number at the top of the column:
Example:
The cell in the eighth row and seventh column is
Color Index 119: 112 + 7 = 119
R2003.12.0
211
Landmark
Status line
Prompt line
Action menu
R2003.12.0
212
Landmark
Status/Prompt
The status line and prompt line guides you through the action options.
The instructions are action-specific. For example, if you select Display
you see:
Status: Display from
Prompt: Identify first color
Next, select a cell in the Color Table display. You see:
Status:
Display from
Prompt: Identify second color
The underscored area in the status line contains the number of the first
color cell to be displayed.
Set Color Mode RGB or HLS
You can select either RGB or HLS color mode in the Edit Color Table
dialog box. RGB is the default mode.
Edit
If you select the Edit option, the RGB or HLS color descriptors for the
specified color index appear. In addition to viewing the current
descriptors, you can redefine these values, changing the display color.
By moving the sliders, you can adjust the selected color index.
The RGB scroll bars for altering the amounts of red, green and blue in a
specified color index are shown in the following example detail:
R2003.12.0
213
Landmark
Display
To view all of the colors in the color table, select the Display option.
Then select the first and last cells in the color table, and all of the colors
stored in the color table appear. If your terminal supports fewer than 256
colors, the program approximates any unsupported colors you request to
be displayed. For example, pink might appear as red.
If the program supports fewer than 256 colors (say it supports only 128
colors), the program first blanks out the colors originally displayed on
the map, then one by one it blanks out the first 128 colors in order to
display colors in cells 129 through 255.
To display a series of colors, select the first and last cells in the sequence
you wish to display. For example, to display the colors in cells 1 through
200, select cell 1 and cell 200.
Copy
Use the Copy option in the Edit Color Table dialog box to copy the color
associated with one index in the color table to another color index
position. For example, lets say you copy the color for Index 1 to Index
12. Index 1 and Index 12 have the same color as a result.
Interpolate
You can linearly interpolate the color descriptor values in a specified
range on the color table. Since linear interpolation produces gradual
shading along the specified color range, this option is most often applied
to Colorfill or to data posting to help visualize the difference between
Z-values.
You can interpolate color descriptor values in either RGB or the HLS
mode. To interpolate directly, use RGB. To interpolate in hue around the
spectrum, use HLS.
R2003.12.0
214
Landmark
HLS Interpolation
WHITE
Saturation
100
100
Red 120
Lightness
75
60
Hue
180
Green 240
0 Blue
50
300
25
BLACK
R2003.12.0
215
Landmark
RGB Interpolation
CYAN
(0, 100, 100)
BLUE
(0, 0, 100)
WHITE
(100, 100, 100)
MAGENTA
(100, 0, 100)
E
AL
AY
GR
SC
GREEN
(0, 100, 0)
BLACK
(0, 0, 0)
YELLOW
(100, 100, 0)
RED
(100, 0, 0)
R2003.12.0
216
Landmark
The color table uses the default values the first time you start Z-MAP Plus. If
you change the color table, the changes are saved when you exit from the
program. The next time you start Z-MAP Plus, the most recent color table is
used. Remember you can save color tables to separate files and reload them.
R2003.12.0
217
Landmark
Color Indices
To execute the Color Indices operation, select the Color Indices menu
option or click the Color Indices icon in the Z-MAP Plus window.
When you invoke Color Indices, a list appears that shows the map
graphic features you can display. Features may include borders, labels,
contours, title blocks, and the north arrow. When you select a feature to
modify its color index, the SELECT Default COLOR INDICES dialog
box appears. Enter a color index number for one of the following
components or click the swatch to select a new color from the color
table:
Swatch
R2003.12.0
218
Landmark
Features
Overview
Use the Features menu options control what is displayed in the display
area of the Z-MAP Plus window. This option is active only if a picture
is selected (currently active).
The Features menu includes options for these tasks:
R2003.12.0
Features: Overview
219
Landmark
Overlay Pictures
Use the Features: Over Pictures option to overlay one or more features
from one picture onto another picture (page 233).
Contouring
The Features: Contouring menu contains six contouring method
options:
Lines
Use the Features: Lines option to post lines from data files, or for
drawing lines on a picture freehand (page 252).
Text
The Features: Text menu contains two options:
R2003.12.0
File Text Add text to the picture by using a file as the text
source (page 272).
Key Text Add text to the picture by entering it from the
keyboard (page 273).
Features: Overview
220
Landmark
Grid Nodes
Use the Features: Grid Nodes option to place symbols and optional
grid values at each node location. While grid node values are not
normally marked on finished maps, grid editing is sometimes facilitated
by having a work map which shows all grid values (page 275).
Polygons
Use the Features: Polygons options to add polygons to a map. This
menu contains three options:
R2003.12.0
Features: Overview
221
Landmark
Surveys (Canadian)
Z-MAP Plus supports many types of Canadian surveys (on Solaris and
IRIX platforms):
Post DLS & NTS SurveysPosts DLS and NTS lines and labels
on an existing picture. You must supply both areas present to use
this option (page 365).
Projection Box
Use the Features: Projection Box option to execute the
POST-PIC-STATS macro and post AOI and Projection on a map
(page 369). (For more information about this macro, see the Macro
Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.)
Picture Assembly
Use the Features: Picture Assembly option to assemble many any
pictures on one picture. Control is provided for features selected,
position, and size for each picture to be assembled (page 370).
R2003.12.0
Features: Overview
222
Landmark
To activate the options in any of the Basemap Features dialog box tabs, select
the Post radio button.
Once you select the Post radio button, an asterisk appears beside the tab name
to indicate that it is active. Next time you click OK or Apply All, the features
on all the active tabs are added to the map.
Select the tab for the type of feature you want to add. The tab
appears in front.
2.
Select the Post radio button at the top of the tab. The tabs option
become active.
3.
4.
Click the Apply button at the bottom of the dialog box to add the
feature described in the current tab. You can also specify features
on multiple tabs, then click the OK or Apply All button to add all
the tabs features simultaneously.
For details about the parameters, click the Help button in the Basemap
Features dialog box. The context-sensitive help system window appears.
R2003.12.0
223
Landmark
R2003.12.0
224
Landmark
Unlock
Clear
Set to AOI
Label [N/E] and Label L/L] tabs: Resets all parameter values on
the current tab to either the values derived from the map AOI or to
any default setting that is pre-defined. (For example, the Top /
Bottom Label Min and Side Label Min values are reset to
AOI-specific values. The Label Mode and Label Placement values
are reset to default values.)
Reset
Resets all parameter settings on the current tab to their saved values
(the values that were set the last time you clicked the OK, Apply,
Apply All, or Save All button).
R2003.12.0
OK
Adds the active features (features on tabs with the Post check box
selected) and closes the Basemap Features dialog box.
Apply All
Adds the active features and leaves the Basemap Features dialog
box open.
Save All
Saves all the current settings without adding any features. The
saved settings appear the next time you click the Reset or Reset All
button.
Unlock All
Clear All
Resets parameter values on all tabs to their default settings (if any).
The settings related to the AOI are derived from the current picture.
Other settings may be derived from the most recently saved display
parameter values.
Reset All
Resets parameter values on all tabs to their saved values (the values
that were set the last time you clicked the OK, Apply, Apply All, or
Save All button).
Cancel
Help
225
Landmark
Cross Section
The Features Cross Section option is divided into two suboptions:
Map Features
horizons
wells
Cross-section Horizons generates a cross-section curve from a specified
grid and identifies that curve by a name.
Cross-section Wells projects wells onto a cross section and displays
them as sticks on the section. The well name and other data can be
displayed at the top of each stick.
Horizons
You can select a maximum of ten horizons to display in the cross
section. If you select the Cross Section Features option after you create
a cross-section plot, the program remembers the cross-section horizons
and baseline used to generate the picture. If another picture is generated
before the cross-section features are placed on the map, however, you
must specify the baseline and the horizons.
Baseline
The baseline marks the location where the cross section is constructed.
Select the baseline file from a vertex file that is in the Area of Interest
(AOI) of the grid profiles and is on an MFD. The grid profiles appear
along the baseline if you create a cross section. The baseline defaults to
the one selected for AOI setup. You can create a baseline by selecting a
map, then selecting the Edit Edit/Create Data option, and choosing
to create a vertex line.
R2003.12.0
226
Landmark
The vertex file should be composed of a set of x,y points in the baseplane
of the input grids, which, when connected by line segments, marks the
baseline for the cross section. This baseline is the source for all possible
points where cross-section values must be computed. Closely spaced x,y
points along the baseline are the locations where the surface values are
computed.
If you want to post wells on a line of section, the horizon must lie within
the minimum and maximum range of the cross section, and the
bandwidth must be large enough so the well can be projected onto the
line of section.
Select Baseline File
A list of vertex files is presented. Select the file you want. This file is
used as the cross-section baseline.
Horizons
Cross sections are made from grids. Surface values at closely spaced x,y
points along the baseline are computed by back interpolation from the
input grids. This gives a point d,z on the cross-section axes where d is
the distance along the baseline from the first point and z is the value of
the surface at x,y. These are connected by line segments to depict the
cross-section curve. The back interpolation scheme used for cross
sections is the same one used for contouring; therefore, cross sections
intersect contour elevations at the expected points along the baseline.
The cross-section curve between contour elevations reveals how the
gridded surface behaves between contours.
Select Input Fields (Ordered Selection)
The ordered selection panel is required when you have the option of
determining the order in which field labels or symbols will be posted, or
the order in which fields will be printed on a report.
Horizon Labels
Labels are strings of, at most, 20 characters that are used to distinguish
one surface from the next on a stacked or composite cross section. The
labels or names will default to the name of the horizon selected to
generate the curves or they may be input using a keyboard.
A dialog box appears, listing each of the selected grid files. Enter the
label for each horizon that will appear on the cross section.
R2003.12.0
227
Landmark
Faults
Input grid profiles can include fault data. If this is the case, include the
fault data when you make the cross section.
Faults are digitized curves that have a discontinuous (faulted) surface.
In computer mapping, curves with a discontinuous surface are called
fault traces. The x,y points along a fault must be sequentially digitized,
so that connecting the points with line segments adequately reconstructs
the fault trace. Faults can either be single curves (denoting vertical faults
or very small fault throws) or double-sided curves (indicating the
amount of throw on the fault). For double-sided curves, a trace is
distinguished from the next trace in the dataset by a unique fault number
that follows each of the x,y points along a fault. When processing a
faulted surface, you must enter the corresponding fault data for that
surface. Select the fault files in the same order as you selected the
corresponding horizons.
Select Input Fields (Ordered Selection)
The ordered selection panel is required when you have the option of
determining the order in which field labels or symbols are posted, or the
order in which fields are printed on a report.
Horizon Parameters
Horizon Parameters include:
Line Number
Labeling Size
R2003.12.0
228
Landmark
Coarse
1
Medium
4
Fine
8
Very Fine16
(sampling rate)(number of points representing cross section
curve)
Using Fine, for example, causes the process to interpolate up to eight
points across a grid cell. Fewer points are generated if the baseline cuts
across a corner of the cell. Most cross sections are adequately made
using the default of Medium. The Very Fine rate may be required for
extremely rough surfaces However, the finer the grid sampling rate, the
greater the processing time.
Grid Sampling Distance
You can specify sampling in cross sections as a distance as well as a rate.
Specify the distance (in engineering units) over which you want the
sampling to occur.
Output Files
You can save a maximum of ten cross-section files that contain the x,y,z
sample points created for the associated grid when making the cross
section. Use this panel to give each of the cross-section files a file name,
and to assign each of the output files to either OpenWorks or an MFD.
Output cross section file name (Up to 10 Files)
Enter the name of the files to be created. The names can be a maximum
of 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks.
Master File Directory for Output file X
Click the Master File Directory for Output File box to display a list
that contains the option Openworks, the MFDs attached to the
Z-MAP Plus session, and the session scratch file. Select the destination
MFD to use for saving the output file.
R2003.12.0
229
Landmark
Wells
Wells should be selected if you would like to post the well data that lies
within a user-specified bandwidth of the cross-section baseline. The
wells that do not fall directly on the baseline will be projected onto the
baseline at right angles, as long as they fall within the bandwidth
specified for your baseline. You may also post any field of data that is
stored with your well data, for example, the well name and the depth
fields.
Baseline
The Baseline marks the linear location where the cross section is
constructed. Wells can be projected onto the baseline within a
user-specified bandwidth (distance).
From the list that appears, select a file to use as the cross section
baseline. This should be the same file you selected under Horizons.
Well Data
From the list of data files that appears, select the control point file that
contains the well to add to the cross section. A field will be selected from
this file and used as input when the option executes.
Horizons
If you select Horizons from the Wells menu, a symbol is posted at each
selected horizon. You choose the horizons you want from the fields
found on the input Well Data File.
Select Input Fields (Ordered Selection)
The ordered selection panel is required when you have the option of
determining the order in which field labels or symbols will be posted, or
the order in which fields will be printed on a report. Label Horizons
Label Horizons
All selected horizons can be labeled with one data field. A panel will
appear for each of the horizons you have selected. You will choose one
label field for each of these horizons. Horizon Labels default to the grid
name of each selected horizon. The Horizon Labels will be written in the
right margin (offset).
R2003.12.0
230
Landmark
Label Wells
Using Label Wells, you can label the first selected horizon with several
data fields. The ordered selection panel determines the order of the
labeled data fields on the map.
Select Input Fields (Ordered Selection)
The ordered selection panel is required when you have the option of
determining the order in which field labels or symbols will be posted, or
the order in which fields will be printed on a report.
Label Parameters
Use the Label Parameters table to control labeling by using the
following parameters:
Line Number The line number comes from the Baseline File
for Wells. Enter the line number on the Baseline file you want to
use for cross-section display.
R2003.12.0
231
Landmark
Post Z-field value Label control points with field values. You
can include or omit Z field values in the label:
Zvalue Labels Posts Z value labels.
No Zvalue Labels Posts no Z value labels.
Map Features
If you select Features Cross Section Map Features, the Cross
Section Map Features dialog box appears. This is a tabbed dialog box
that is very similar to the Basemap Features dialog box described on
219, with these exceptions:
R2003.12.0
232
Landmark
Overlay Pictures
Display the picture to be overlaid, then select
Features Overlay Pictures.
Maintain features
on overlay?
Yes
No
Use
cutline (from
input picture on
output picture?
Yes
No
Use no cutline.
Apply.
To verify results, select Picture, pick output picture, then select Full Display.
R2003.12.0
233
Landmark
You can overlay one or more features from a picture on another picture.
Here are a few guidelines to help you use the Overlay Pictures option:
AOI The AOI of the new picture is the output pictures AOI. If
the output pictures AOI is smaller than the input picture, only the
area of the input picture that intersects the AOI of the output
picture is overlaid (as shown in the following illustration).
Input Picture
Output Picture
To produce results,
the input picture AOI
must intersect the
output picture AOI.
R2003.12.0
234
Landmark
To view the overlaid features, you must reselect the output picture.
Select File Open Picture Open or click the Picture Open
icon.
Color The color table of the output picture overrides the color
table of the input picture. This can cause problems, for example, if
you overlay a colorfilled picture on a posted data picture. The
colorfill may display differently because the colorfilled picture
features are now using the color table for the posted data.
Input Picture
Click the Input picture button. In the dialog box that appears, select a
picture to overlay. The first option is Use Current Picture. The list also
includes all the pictures in the selected Input Graphics File.
The name of the current picture is reported in the status area at the
bottom of the Z-MAP Plus window.
R2003.12.0
235
Landmark
Output Picture
Click the Output picture button. In the dialog box that appears, select
a picture you want to use as the foundation layer for overlaying features.
The list contains the pictures in the selected Output Graphics File.
Overlay Parameters
Click the Overlay parameters button. In the dialog box that appears,
you can specify whether you want to combine all of the graphics
features to be overlaid into a single feature, and to control whether the
output picture cutline is drawn on the output picture. Graphics features,
sometimes referred to as Logical Graphics Blocks (LGB), can be
manipulated easily when they are distinct features. (For example, they
can be easily deleted or copied.) If features are combined into one
feature, that manipulation capability is lost. However, because the
features are combined, they can be copied, deleted, and so on as a single
unit, which also has advantages.
Maintaining Feature Divisions
R2003.12.0
236
Landmark
Use Cutline
Click the Use cutline button and select an option from the drop-down
list. The options control whether the cutline from the input picture is
drawn on the output picture. The choices for this parameter are:
Features to Overlay
Click the Features to Overlay button. In the dialog box that appears,
select the features you want to overlay from the input picture to the
output picture. The selected features are highlighted. You can toggle
features on and off until you are ready to click OK and set the feature
selection.
Resetting the Overlay Picture Values
You can return the Overlay Picture dialog box to its original settings at any time by
clicking the Reset button.
R2003.12.0
237
Landmark
Contouring
Z-MAP Pluss contouring capability is divided into Contouring,
Contour Old, Fast Contour, 3D Fishnet Plot, Shaded Relief, and Color
Scale.
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
238
Landmark
Fast Contour
Enables you to execute the FASTCONTOURMAP macro. This macro
builds a grid and then generates a contour map from the selected Z-field
on your data file. For more information about this macro, see the Macro
Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.
3D Fishnet Plot
Executes the FISHNET-PLOT macro. This macro creates a fishnet plot
of a gridded surface. You are allowed to designate the angle from which
to view the surface.
Shaded Relief
Allows you to create a shaded relief map also known as a brightness
grid.
Color Scale
Draws a color scale relating a series of color indices to a variation in
some quantity. This option is used primarily for placing a color scale bar
on a map with color-filled contours, but almost any quantity variation
can be shown in this way.
Contour
Contouring generates annotated contours from either a grid or digitized
contour data. These annotated contours are included as part of the
information contained on a contour map. Contour lines are drawn across
an area of equal elevation or equal time values.
Use the Contours option to perform these tasks:
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
239
Landmark
Set the lowest and highest contour level for the map.
Basic Specify the name of the input grid file, the contour
interval, minimum and maximum depths, and general posting
parameters.
Output Files Save the file that contains the contour descriptive
data separately from the picture.
Contour Old
The Contour Old option generates annotated contours from either a
grid or digitized contour data.
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
240
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
241
Landmark
Very Fine. Contours generated with this sampling density are the
smoothest possible; however, this sampling rate requires the
greatest amount of processing time.
It is important to note that the finer the curve sampling density, the more
points that must be contoured. This results in a longer contouring
process. While in some cases, it may be necessary to apply the finest
curve sampling density to ensure that all surfaces are contoured
smoothly, the trade-off between processing time and smoothness should
be considered.
Output Contour File Name, OpenWorks, and Output Master File
Specify the name of the file to be created. The name can be a maximum
of 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks. Next, you must
select either OpenWorks or the destination MFD for storing the data.
Select the destination MFD from the list of attached MFDs and scratch
file. These files are listed in a popup window that appears when you
click the parameter box. The program will default to Master File 1, as
listed in the status area.
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
242
Landmark
Contour Labels
Hachured Contours
Dashed Contours
Character Height
Decimal Positions
Colorfilled Contours
Features: Contouring
243
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Label Value Scale Factor Enter the desired scale factor. The
contour curve labels will be multiplied by this value. For example,
if your data was in seconds but you would like milliseconds
output, a scale of 1000 would output correct labels.
Features: Contouring
244
Landmark
Contour Report
Once interactive contouring begins, a contouring index table appears in
the Status/Report window. The contouring index table contains four
types of information:
Index The index value reports how many contours have been
processed and how many remain to be processed.
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
245
Landmark
Fast Contour
Use the Fast Contour option to execute the FASTCONTOURMAP
macro. This macro builds a grid and then generates a contour map from
the selected Z-field on your data file.
For more information about this macro, see the Macro Reference
Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.
Fast Contour builds a grid and then generates a contour map from the
selected z field on your data file.
You are asked to specify the following input values:
well dataset
z field on the well dataset
a fault dataset (optional)
contouring interval (optional)
ZGF name and picture name
3D Fishnet Plot
Creates a fishnet plot (also known as a perspective map) of a gridded
surface by using the FISHNET-PLOT macro. Fishnet plots often reveal
surface detail that is not be apparent in a conventional contour map. You
can specify the angle for viewing the surface.
You must specify the following information:
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
246
Landmark
Shaded Relief
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
247
Landmark
Input Grid From the list of input grids that appears, select a
grid to use as input.
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
248
Landmark
The conversion factor has two uses. First, if the X,Y values are in
meters and the Z values are in feet, a conversion factor of 3.048
converts the meters to feet, putting the X, Y, and Z values in the
same units for a realistic picture.
Second, you can use the conversion factor to apply a vertical
exaggeration to the Z values. The state of Florida is hundreds of
miles long but only 165 feet high. Without adding a vertical
exaggeration, a relief map of Florida would have noting to show.
Also, some maps may have units that are not convertible. For
example, X and Y in meters and Z in milligals. In cases where it is
not desirable (or possible) to use a realistic conversion factor, try a
conversion factor approximately equal to 4 times the range in Z
divided by the range in X.
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
249
Landmark
Contour Setup
1.
2.
3.
Color Table
The general procedure is as follows. Select Edit Color Table. For the
contour range indices you specified, select the lowest index and give it
a dark color. Select the highest index for the contours and give it a light
color. Interpolate between these two indices to create a continuous
change from dark to light.
Suggested colors for interpolation:
Dark gray: (0, 10, 0) HLS Light gray:(0, 77, 0) HLS
Contour the darkest shades (lowest points on the grid) first, following
with the progressively lighter shades (higher points on the grid).
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
250
Landmark
Color Scale
Color Scale draws a color bar relating a series of color indices to a
variation in some quantity. This option is used primarily for placing a
color scale bar on a map with color-filled contours, but almost any
quantity variation can be shown in this way. Color Scale uses the
COLOR-BAR macro to create the scale.
To create a color scale, you must have a graphics file and a picture
attached to your Z-MAP Plus session. To see the resultant color bar in
Z-MAP Plus, you must select Display Full Display after you create
the color scale.
You are asked to supply the following elements:
See the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL for detailed
descriptions of each parameter for COLOR-BAR. To display this
information, select Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and
locate the topic for COLOR-BAR.
R2003.12.0
Features: Contouring
251
Landmark
Lines
You may draw lines on your current map after retrieving line data from
an input dataset. The Lines option may be used to display all types of
lineal data that are not normally associated with Z-values, including:
lease polygons
cultural data such as roads, etc.
land grids
fault traces
many other types of x,y data
line type
scaling units
line clipping option
where to place symbols at vertex locations
symbol code
symbol size
If the line is dashed, you can specify the length of the dash, as well as
the length of the gap.
There are two ways to draw lines on an active picture from the
Features Lines option:
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
252
Landmark
This option allows you to post lines on a currently active picture. Lines
can be posted from vertex, fault, and profile data. You may select from
a list of seven graphical representations or up to 20 line patterns.
Select Data
Select a file from the list of files available in the OpenWorks project and
the attached MFDs. This file is used as input when the option executes.
Fields to Post
A list of fields is presented. You may select up to two fields to post. (If
you select more than two fields from the list, the program will not
recognize any of the fields you have attached.)
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
253
Landmark
Use these options to control line color and pattern. You can specify line
parameters manually, or use fields to control the line color and pattern.
General Line Parameters
This panel enables you to control line type, dash length and dash gap,
hachure length, gap, and direction, line weight and line color. These
parameters do not affect the Line Type Patterns.
Line Type
This menu allows you to choose the type of line you want to draw in
connecting the points. Select on the graphical representations of the
desired Line Type, or choose to establish Line Type by Pattern number
or vary the line patterns by Z-field.
Line Pattern Number
This is the pattern number for drawing lines. Enter a number from 1 to
20. (For examples, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Dash Length One
This value is required only if you have chosen a dashed line as the Line
Type for lines. This number represents the length in plotter units
(in./cm.) of the first dash in the dash pattern for drawing lines. The
default length for the first dash is 0.07 in. or 0.18 cm.
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
254
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
255
Landmark
Hachure Length
This value is required only if you have chosen a Line Type of Hachure.
This number represents the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the
hachures in the pattern for drawing primary lines. The default Hachure
Length is 0.05 is or 0.13 cm.
Hachure Direction
This direction is the direction of the hachures relative to the line. Left
means to draw the hachures on the relative left side of the line, and
Right means to draw the hachures on the right side of the line. The
default direction is Left.
Line Weight
This number represents a multiple of the normal line width for drawing
lines. The thicknesses range from 1 to 8, and the default Line Weight is
1. The larger the weight, the bolder the line will be.
Color Mode
There are three methods for defining the color of the primary lines:
Index, Field, and Z-field.
Index refers to the number of the color in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
Field refers to the number of the Line Color Field. The line color field
must be present on the input data file.
Z-field will vary color by Z-field. When color is to vary by Z-field, the
program allows you to specify the value change in Z-field required to
change the color of primary lines.
Color Index
The color index is a number from 0 to 255 in the Z-MAP Plus color
table. The color index refers to the settings for the currently active
picture. To choose a color index for lines, click the color box. A palette
of the 256 colors appears. You can change the color index of the lines
by clicking the color you want.
Choose Color Field for Line Color
A list of the field names for color fields is presented. These color fields
are taken from the input line data file. Select one of the fields listed.
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
256
Landmark
None
Divide
Increment
Increment+Start
Units of Measure for Z-Values
While the examples in this text refer to feet, Z-values can be expressed in any
data unit, such as meters, miles, etc.
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
257
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
258
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
259
Landmark
Symbol Parameters
Use this panel to control line symbol parameters, including:
Symbol Code
Select Field
Color Field
Symbol Color
Symbol Size
General Symbol Parameters
Use this panel to control the following symbol parameters:
Posting Method
Symbol Code
Symbol Color
Symbol Size
Posting Rate
Posting Method for Symbols and Labels
This method determines whether symbols and labels are posted for no
points (Omit), for All points, or for Select points.
Determine Symbol Code by
There are three ways to determine the symbol code associated with the
lines. The Omit option means that no symbol will be posted. Symbol
Field refers to a symbol field on your input file. The Symbol Number
option lets you enter the Symbol Code number to determine the symbols
posted for lines.
Symbol Code Number
Enter the Symbol Code Number for the symbol you want to use. (For a
list of Symbol Codes, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns, starting on page 791.)
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
260
Landmark
Field means that a field on your input file specifies a color for
each symbol.
Value uses the size of the symbol in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default values are 0.07 in. and 0.18 cm.
Symbol Size
This number is the symbol height in plotter units (in./cm.).
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
261
Landmark
Posting Rate
The Posting Rate for symbols is the divisor of the number of points. A
posting rate of 1 means that every point will be posted. A posting rate of
5 means the first point and then every fifth point will be posted along a
line.
Choose Symbol Code Field
This is the name of the field containing the symbol code of the symbol
to be posted.
Choose Select Field
This panel allows you to choose a field to use as the posting Select Field.
A list of fields on your input line file appears. Choose the field you want
to use as the posting Select Field. At any point where this field is not
defined (= ZNON), a symbol will not be posted.
Choose Color Field for Symbol Color
This is the Color Field used to determine the color for the posted
symbol.
Vary Symbol Color Parameters
This panel allows you to vary the color of the symbol posted. Color can
be varied by choosing a starting color index, the number of color levels,
method of defaulting the Z-table for color levels, the Z-increment for
defaulting, and the start Z-value for defaulting. The purpose of this
feature is to allow the mapper to show a gradual increase in a Z-value by
representing a defined change in Z as a color in a given range. For
example, every change of 50 data units could be represented by a
slightly darker shade of blue.
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
262
Landmark
While the examples in this text refer to feet, Z-values can be expressed in any
data unit, such as meters, miles, etc.
None indicates that you do not want to default the color variation.
When you choose not to default the color variation, the program
requires that you input maximum Z-values for each color change.
(User input required)
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
263
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
264
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
265
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
266
Landmark
Labeling Parameters
This panel allows you to determine labeling parameters for fields.
Control is allowed for: label rate, color mode and color index, font,
number of decimals, height and location of the symbol. You can
determine these label parameters for one or two fields, and you can
determine the labeling parameters for each of two fields independently.
Label Rate for All Fields
The Label Rate refers to the frequency with which posted points are
labeled. A Label Rate of 1 means that all posted points are to be labeled.
A Label Rate of 5 means that the first posted point will be labeled, and
every fifth point after will be labeled.
Color Mode
There are three ways to determine the color of the labels:
Index, Symbol, and Line.
Index refers to the number of the color in the Z-MAP Plus color
table.
Symbol refers to the color of the posted symbol to be labeled.
Line refers to the color of the succeeding line segment.
Color Index
If you chose the Index option for Label Color Mode, you must assign a
color index to determine label color for the current field. To see a palette
of the Z-MAP Plus color table, click the color box. Click the color you
want for the current fields label.
Label Font
The Label Font is the font in which labels for this field are to be printed.
The choices are shown at left.
Number of Decimals
This number refers to the number of places to the right of the decimal to
post for the field.
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
267
Landmark
Height of Label
This value refers to the height of the label, in plotter units (in./cm). The
label represents the current field. The default label heights are 0.07 in.
or 0.18 cm.
Location of Label
There are two options for locating a label on a line. The label can be
posted to the Right of the line or it can posted to the Left of the line.
Data Units/Clip Mode
This panel allows you to determine the data units in which the
coordinates of the points are expressed, and whether data outside the
AOI border is displayed or clipped.
Data Units
The coordinates of the points on the lines are expressed in data units.
Data Units can be either user units or plotter units. The default value is
user units.
User units are engineering or user coordinates such as feet.
Plotter units are inches or centimeters.
Clip to Border Mode
This option refers to what the program is to do with points on the line
file which lie outside the AOI border of the current picture. When you
select Noclip, the lines are displayed beyond the border of the map.
When you select Clip, the program will not display the data outside the
border.
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
268
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: Lines
269
Landmark
Line Parameters
When you click Contours, Faults or Polylines, a Line Parameters panel
appears. For an explanation of most of the line parameters, refer to
General Line Parameters on page 254.
For all line types, you can set preferences for line color, line pattern, and
hachures.
For Contours, there is an option to label and set label intervals.
For Contours and Faults, there is a Smoothing option which enables you
to smooth or not smooth the hand-drawn graphics feature.
Drawing Lines and Line End Options
You are able to draw the lines on the active picture as soon as you click
OK in the Line Parameters dialog box. Click Button 1 at the location for
starting the first line, then click at each vertex location for that line.
When you have set all the points for the line, choose an End Option.
End Options
Once you click OK in the Line Parameters dialog box, the End Options
dialog box appears. There are three options for ending the line:
Delete Last deletes the last point you input (and the line connecting that
point to the previous point, if any) in the current line. It will not delete
points from lines that have been ended with End Open or End Closed.
R2003.12.0
End Open ends the current line at the last point input.
End Closed ends the current line and connects the last point input
to the first point input.
Features: Lines
270
Landmark
Text
Enter from Features in
Z-MAP Plus window
Keyboard
Key &
Cursor
Cursor
Only
Below
Last
Text Workflow
Text allows you to add text anywhere on your map. Text is required to
make a finished map. Different types of text that frequently appear on
maps include lease names and related information, names of roads,
rivers, etc., township-range indices, indicators for target areas, etc. All
of these types of text can be placed on your map with this process. For
example, you could name the map Top Cretaceous Structure Map, and
add a second line of text below the title (Below Last) that reads Offshore
Louisiana. Text has a source (either a text file or keyboard entry), a font
(type of lettering), a location, a color, and a rotation. To locate text, use
the keyboard only, the cursor only, or the cursor and keyboard together.
R2003.12.0
Features: Text
271
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Select Text File A list of files is presented. Select the file you
want. This file will be used as input when the option executes. If
you do not have a text file, you must create one in order to use this
feature.
Select Y-field This option allows you to select a Y-field for the
y location of the text.
Select Text Field This option allows you to select the field that
contains the text to be posted.
Select Font Field This option will allow you to select a font
(text style) if there is a font field on your input text file.
Select Size Field This option allows you to choose a size for
your text characters if your input text file has an entry for this field.
Features: Text
272
Landmark
Keyboard
Key & Cursor
Cursor Only
Below Last
Keyboard
If you select Keyboard, a dialog box appears, which you use to enter a
text string and its location.
R2003.12.0
Text Enter the text string you want to appear on the map.
Features: Text
273
Landmark
Text Enter the text string as you want it to appear on the map.
Cursor Only
The entries for cursor placement are Text, Font, and Color Index.
Text Enter the text string as you want it to appear on the map.
Below Last
The entries for Below Last are Text, Font, and Color Index. The location
of the text string is below the previously chosen text string.
R2003.12.0
Features: Text
274
Landmark
Grid Nodes
Select Features Grid Nodes to place symbols and optional grid
values at gird nodes. Grid values do not typically appear on finished
maps, but you may want to show grid values while you edit a grid.
Exercise caution when you post grid node values: A dense grid can
easily result in unreadable, overlapping grid values. Such grids also take
more time to display, since drawing numbers takes much longer than
drawing lines or other types of map features.
To post grid node values, specify these parameters in the Post Grid Data
dialog box:
the grid
the symbol to mark the node location
symbol height
whether to mark ZNON (null data) locations
whether to post grid values
the rate to write grid values
the number of decimal positions for each value
an area within the grid to post
R2003.12.0
Symbol Size Use the Symbol Size box to define the symbol
size in plotter units (in./cm.). The default value of 0.07 in. (0.18
cm.) is adequate to mark the locations and produce legible grid
values. Increasing the size increases the probability that values will
overlap.
Features: Grid Nodes
275
Landmark
Labeling Parameters
Click the Labeling Parameters button to display the Set Labeling
Parameters dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify whether or not to
post the grid values, the number of decimal positions in the grid values,
the rate at which to display grid values, and what portion of the grid you
want to display.
R2003.12.0
Starting Row (of posted rows) and Starting Column (of posted
columns) If only a portion of the grid is required, you may use
the starting row and column indices to limit the displayed locations
and values. The defaults display the full grid.
276
Landmark
Polygons
The Features Polygons menu contains these options:
Color-filled Polygons
Lease Polygon Drawing
Shaded Polygons
Color-filled Polygons
To fill polygons with a solid color, select Features Polygons
Color-filled Polygons.The EXECUTE MACRO:POLYGON-FILL
dialog box appears. You specify the following parameters.
R2003.12.0
Features: Polygons
277
Landmark
line shading
hachuring
text
color
You are required to supply:
The Area Identification field for both the text dataset and the vertex dataset
must be the same data type and have the same field width.
R2003.12.0
Features: Polygons
278
Landmark
Shaded Polygons
Fills a set of polygons with hachured lines. Use this option to hachure
shade fault polygons that have been converted to a vertex file.
Before you can use this option, you must have a picture displayed. The
shaded vertex file is added to the current picture.
Reselect the Current Picture
When you use the Shaded Polygons macro, you must reselect the current
picture by clicking the Picture Open icon. The shaded polygon becomes
visible when you select View Full Display or click the Full Display icon.
X (EASTING)
Y (NORTHING)
SEG I.D.
Optionally, you can specify a color index field for the hachured line.
You are also asked to make these specifications:
R2003.12.0
Features: Polygons
279
Landmark
symbol code
select field
color field
symbol color
symbol size
The following text describes the parameters in the Symbol Parameters
dialog box.
R2003.12.0
280
Landmark
posting method
symbol code
symbol color
symbol size
posting rate
Select. Post symbols only at points whose select field value is not
null. any Z-field can be a select field. You will choose Field under
the Choose Symbol Code Field panel.
R2003.12.0
Omit. You can Omit the symbol for posted points. If you want to
retain or suppress labels with posted data points, you can do this
under Label Parameters.
281
Landmark
Field means that a field on your input file specifies a color for each
symbol.
Z-field refers to the number of the Z-field on the input data file to
which the symbol color is tied. Determining color by Z-field will
result in a change of colors when the Z-value of the control point
changes (by a user-defined amount).
R2003.12.0
282
Landmark
VALUE uses the size of the symbol in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default values are 0.07 in. and 0.18 cm.
Symbol Size
This is the symbol height in plotter units (in./cm.).
Posting Rate
The Posting Rate for symbols is a divisor for the number of points. A
posting rate of 1 means that every control point will be posted. A posting
rate of 5 means that every 5th control point will be posted.
Choose Symbol Code Field
Click the Choose Symbol Code Field button to display the Select
Symbol dialog box. If the input file contains a symbol field, use this
option to post a symbol for a point based on the symbol field.
Choose Select Field
Click the Choose Select Field button to display the Select Field to use
as Posting Select Field dialog box. This dialog box contains a list of
fields in the input line file. Choose a field to use as the posting Select
Field. (The posted control points are based on this field.)
Choose Color Field for symbol color
This is the color field used to determine the color for the posted symbol.
A list of the field names for color fields is presented. These color fields
are taken from the input line data file.
R2003.12.0
283
Landmark
R2003.12.0
284
Landmark
R2003.12.0
285
Landmark
R2003.12.0
286
Landmark
R2003.12.0
287
Landmark
Labeling Parameters
Use this selection to determine the parameters for labeling fields, for
setting the rate at which to post labels, and for selecting color fields.
Field Parameters
This panel allows you to determine labeling parameters for fields.
Control is allowed for:
color mode
color index
font
number of decimals
height (of label)
location (of label)
You can determine the labeling parameters for each field selected for
labeling independently.
Color Mode
There are three ways to determine the color of the symbol: by the color
Index, by the Symbol, and by the Field.
Index refers to the color index for the color in the Z-MAP Plus
color table.
Field refers to a field of data stored with the control point data that
lists a color index for each control point.
Color Index
If you choose the Index option for Color Mode, you must assign a color
index from the color table to determine label color for the current field.
The color index is a number from 0 to 255 which represents a color in
the Z-MAP Plus color table. The color index refers to the settings for the
currently active picture.
R2003.12.0
288
Landmark
Field Font
The Field Font is the font in which Labels for this field are to be printed.
The choices are:
Number of Decimals
This number refers to the number of places to the right of the decimal to
post for the field. Up to 12 decimal places are allowed.
Height of Label
This value refers to the height of the label, in plotter units (in./cm). The
label represents the current field. The default label heights are 0.07 in.
or 0.18 cm.
Location of Label
There are two options for locating a label on a line. The label can be
posted to the Right of the line or it can posted to the Left of the line.
Labeling Rate
The Labeling Rate refers to the rate at which posted control points are
labeled. A label rate of 1 means that every point is labeled, a label rate
of 3 means that every 3rd point in the file is labeled.
R2003.12.0
289
Landmark
Color Fields
This panel is a list of color fields found on your input control point data
file. Select the color field you would like to use for your label. This
parameter is used only when Color Mode is set to Field.
R2003.12.0
290
Landmark
Deviated Wells
R2003.12.0
291
Landmark
Well Trace Posting includes posting points along the well trace. The
capabilities of each component are outlined in the following table.
Well Trace Posting
(Intermediate)
Symbol Uses:
same symbol at all
wells
different symbols
based on symbol code
field
Symbol uses:
same symbol at all
wells
different symbols
based on symbol code
field
Posted fields can have different sizes, fonts, decimal places, and/or positions.
R2003.12.0
292
Landmark
Each of the three major parts of a deviated well data file has fields to
post and symbol and labeling parameters. The Top and Bottom
components have been documented under three headings: Top/Bottom
Fields to Post, Top/Bottom Symbol Parameters, and Top/Bottom
Labeling Parameters. Parameter settings for the top do not have to match
bottom hole parameters. The Well Trace component of the data has
three additional parameter types: Line Mode/Scale Mode, Well Trace
Parameters, and Scale Field.
The Top, Bottom, and Well Trace components of the deviated well each
has a Fields to Post panel. This panel is the Ordered Select panel new to
Z-MAP Plus.
Each component also has parallel panels for symbol and labeling
parameters. The parameter panels for all three components are identical
for symbol posting and labeling.
You will most likely want to vary the color coding for symbols and
labels according to whether they belong to the top, bottom, or well trace
component. You can also color code points according to the variation in
a selected Z-field.
R2003.12.0
Select Field
Symbol Field
Symbol Size Field
Symbol Color Field
Z-field used to control
Symbol Size
Color Fields for Labels
Z-field used to control
Symbol Color
293
Landmark
Select Data
A list of DWEL (deviated well) data files appears, including the
OpenWorks Current Well List. This file will contain the deviated wells
that you would like to post. If you select from the OpenWorks Current
Well List, the selected well list becomes a DWEL file for use in
Z-MAP Plus, however DWEL files cannot used by other applications.
R2003.12.0
Symbol Code
Select Field
Color Field
Symbol Color
Symbol Size
294
Landmark
R2003.12.0
295
Landmark
Z-field refers to the number of the Z-field on the input data file
to which the symbol color is tied. Determining color by Z-field
will result in a change of colors when the Z-value of the
control point changes (by a user-defined amount).
Posting Rate The Posting Rate for symbols is the divisor of the
number of top/bottom fields. A Posting Rate of 1 means that every
top/bottom field on the data file will have a symbol posted. A
Posting Rate of 5 means that every 5th field will have a symbol
posted.
R2003.12.0
296
Landmark
R2003.12.0
297
Landmark
R2003.12.0
298
Landmark
R2003.12.0
299
Landmark
Color Mode There are three ways to determine the color of the
symbol:
Index refers to a number in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
When you enter a number, the a box containing that color on
the color index appears to the left of the entry. Using Index as
the method of posting means that all of the labels will be
posted with this color index.
Symbol allows you to determine the color of a text label
based on the type of symbol it labels. You do this by selecting
the symbol code number you want from the Z-MAP Plus
Extended Symbol Set, which provides symbols for posting oil
wells, shotpoints, for example. (For examples of these
symbols, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Field means that the label color to use is read from a color
field in your input dataset.
R2003.12.0
300
Landmark
Color Index If you choose the Index option for Color Mode,
you must assign a color index from the color table to determine
label color for the current field. The Color Index is a number from
0 to 255 which represents a color in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
To see the color palette, select the Color Box. Select the color you
want for the current field's label.
Font The Font is the font in which labels for the Label Field are
to be printed. The choices are shown at left.
Labeling Rate
The Labeling Rate refers to the rate at which posted top/bottom fields
are labeled. A label rate of 1 means that every posted top/bottom field is
labeled, a label rate of 3 means that every 3rd posted field is labeled.
Color Fields
Color Fields presents a list of color fields. Select the color field for the
top/bottom label color. The Select Color Field for top/bottom label color
will appear for as many fields whose color mode was set to Field.
R2003.12.0
301
Landmark
Pattern Number
Solid
Single Dash
Double Dash
Triple Dash
Hachured
Vary the Pattern by Z-field
Omit
R2003.12.0
302
Landmark
R2003.12.0
303
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Line Type This menu allows you to choose the type of line you
want to draw in connecting the points. Select on the graphical
representations of the desired line types, or choose to establish line
type by Pattern number or vary the line pattern by Z-field.
304
Landmark
Color Mode There are three methods for defining the color of
the primary lines:
Index refers to a number in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
When you enter a number, the a box containing that color on
the color index appears to the left of the entry. Using Index as
the method of posting means that all of the lines will be posted
with this color index.
Field means that a field on your input file specifies a color
for each line.
Z-field refers to the number of the Z-field on the input data
file to which the line color is tied. Determining color by Z-field
will result in a change of colors when the Z-value of the line
changes (by a user-defined amount).
R2003.12.0
305
Landmark
R2003.12.0
306
Landmark
R2003.12.0
307
Landmark
R2003.12.0
308
Landmark
R2003.12.0
309
Landmark
Line Type Use the Line menu allows you to choose the type of
line you want to draw for the well trace. Select on the graphical
representations of the desired line types, or choose to establish line
type by Pattern number or vary the line pattern by Z-field.
R2003.12.0
310
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Color Mode There are three methods for defining the color of
the primary lines. See Color Mode There are three methods for
defining the color of the primary lines: on page 305.
311
Landmark
R2003.12.0
312
Landmark
R2003.12.0
313
Landmark
Posting Rate The Posting Rate for symbols is the divisor of the
number of well trace fields. A Posting Rate of 1 means that every
well trace field on the data file will have a symbol posted. A
Posting Rate of 5 means that every 5th well trace field will have a
symbol posted.
R2003.12.0
314
Landmark
R2003.12.0
315
Landmark
R2003.12.0
316
Landmark
R2003.12.0
317
Landmark
Label Rate for All Fields This is the rate at which posted fields
along the well trace will be labeled. A Label Rate of 1 means that
all posted fields will be labeled; a Label Rate of 3 means that every
3rd posted point will be labeled.
Color Mode There are three methods for defining the color of
the well trace labels. For a discussion of these methods, see Color
Mode There are three methods for defining the color of the
primary lines: on page 305.
Color Index If you choose the Index option for Color Mode,
you must assign a color index from the color table to determine
label color for the current field. The color index is a number from 0
to 255 which represents a color in the color table. The Color Index
refers to the settings for the currently active picture. To view the
color palette, select the color box. Select the color you want for the
current field's label.
Font The Font is the font in which labels for this field are to be
printed. The choices are shown at left.
R2003.12.0
318
Landmark
Tick Length The Tick Length is the length of the tick mark,
expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).
R2003.12.0
319
Landmark
Label Color Index If you choose the Index option for Color
Mode, you must assign a color index from the color table to
determine label color for the current label. The Color Index is a
number from 0 to 255 which represents a color in the color table.
The Color Index refers to the settings for the currently active
picture. To view a palette of the color table, select the color box.
Select the color you want for the current label's label.
Label Font The Label Font is the font in which labels for this
field are to be printed. The choices are shown at left.
Clip to border mode Points on the line file that lie outside the
Area of Interest (AOI) of the current picture may be cut off at the
border or extend beyond the border of the map. The options are:
Clip Clip the data at the map border.
Noclip Display data beyond the map border.
R2003.12.0
320
Landmark
2D Seismic
Post Seismic Line Data Dialog Box
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
321
Landmark
Data
This is the data file which contains the seismic data which you would
like to post on the map. Labeling and posting options will be applied to
this seismic data file. A list of data files is presented. Select the data file
you want.
Shotpoint Numbers
Shotpoint numbers for both data files need to be ordered and contiguous in
each line. To do this, use the Operations Data Operations Sort Data
option.
Z-field
A list of fields is presented. If you do not want to post Z-values along
with seismic shotpoints, select None - use no field.
Shotpoints to Post
Click the Shotpoints to Post button in the Post SEISMIC LINE Data
dialog box. In the Select Shotpoints to POST dialog box that appears,
you can specify the following input values:
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
322
Landmark
Selection Mode
The Shotpoints to Post panel enables you to determine which shotpoints
on the input file to post on the map. The next two options on the Post
Seismic Data main menu will determine how points already posted on
the map will be labeled.
The available methods available for shotpoint symbol posting are
described in the following text.
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
323
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
324
Landmark
labeling mode
label orientation
starting location
minimum separation
Shotpoint Labeling Mode
The five options available for shotpoint symbol labeling are on the
parameter menu. Each is described in the following text.
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
325
Landmark
Label Orientation
The Shotpoint Label Orientation has two components. The first
component is the location of the shotpoint number label relative to the
seismic line. The second component is the angle of rotation which the
label has. The angle of rotation can be specified in relation to the seismic
line or in relation to the x axis of the map.
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
326
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
327
Landmark
Z-value Orientation
The Z-value Orientation has two components. The first component is the
location of the Z-value label relative to the seismic line. The second
component is the angle of rotation which the label has. The angle of
rotation can be specified in relation to the seismic line or in relation to
the x axis of the map.
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
328
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
329
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Label Rotation Angle There are two reference points for label
rotation angle: the seismic line and the x axis of the map. When
you chose your labeling mode in the Labeled Shotpoints and
Labeled Z-values panels, you selected a Label Orientation. The
Label Rotation Angle refers to your choice of the line or the x axis
as the point of reference.
ZNON Value This number is the null data value for the field
being posted.
Features: 2D Seismic
330
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Name Rotation Angle There are two reference points for label
rotation angle: the seismic line and the x axis of the map. When
you chose your labeling mode in the Labeled Shotpoints and
Labeled Z-values panels, you selected a Label Orientation. The
Label Rotation Angle refers to your choice of the line or the x axis
as the point of reference.
Features: 2D Seismic
331
Landmark
Select Method
Select Method enables you to select which seismic lines to post:
R2003.12.0
All Will post all seismic lines on an input file and output the
line names to a posted line list dataset.
Only Will post only those lines which you select. Selected lines
will appear on the active map. Selected line names are written to
the selected line list dataset. They are marked as posted in the
posted line list dataset.
Except The excluded lines are written to the selected line list
dataset and are not posted. All the lines except the excluded lines
will be posted.
Features: 2D Seismic
332
Landmark
Posted Line Dataset Name This is the name of the new posted
line dataset.
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
333
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
334
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
335
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Start Color This is the number of the color in the color table
where the varying of symbol colors is to begin. The number of
color levels beyond this value will determine the range of symbol
colors available.
Label Font The Label Font is the font in which labels for this
field are to be printed. The choices are shown at left.
Features: 2D Seismic
336
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: 2D Seismic
337
Landmark
3D Seismic
Compared with 2D Seismic, the 3D Seismic posting option has
additional capabilities and improvements in seismic line data posting.
You can use 3D Seismic to:
R2003.12.0
Post seismic lines (track line) and shotpoints for both 3D surveys
and 2D seismic data.
Vary the color, size, font of line names, line numbers, and
Z-attribute labels based on select criteria.
Vary the type, color and size of shotpoint symbols and labels based
on selected criteria.
Vary all of the above mentioned parameters for line names or line
numbers and shotpoint labels according to range criteria.
Features: 3D Seismic
338
Landmark
Shotpoint number
3D survey name
3D line number
3D shotpoint number
X
Y
Z conditionally required. It is needed for color, size, and
Z-value labeling modulation
Shotpoint Numbers
Shotpoint numbers for both data files need to be ordered and contiguous in each
line. To do this, use the Operations Data Operations Sort Data option.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
339
Landmark
Primary
Secondary
Tertiary
2D
Line Name
Line Number
Shotpoint Number
Shotpoint Number
(none)
(none)
3D
3D Survey
3D Survey
3D Line Number
3D Shotpoint Number
3D Shotpoint Number
3D Line Number
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
340
Landmark
Choose Fields
The parameters in this panel are defined in detail in the following text.
Each of the Choose Field options in this panel display a dialog box that
lists fields of a given type (such as text size, color, font) when these
fields are present on the input seismic data file.
Fields which control posting of data include the Z-value field, the
selection field, the shotpoint reshot field, the discontinuity field, and the
modulation field. All the other fields on the Choose Fields menu are
fields which will affect some graphical attribute of posted data, such as
the color, line pattern, or line weight of a posted seismic line, the text
color, size, and font of survey names, line names, and shotpoint
numbers; the color, type, and size of shotpoint symbols.
The following fields can be chosen if present on the input seismic line
data file:
R2003.12.0
Z-value Field
Color Field
Selection Field
Discontinuity Field
Modulation Field
Selection Field When not all seismic data are to be posted, this
field will determine which lines and surveys to post. The only valid
select field for 2D seismic data is line name or line number. The
only valid select field for 3D seismic data is 3D survey name.
Features: 3D Seismic
341
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
342
Landmark
Shotpoints to Post
This option brings up a Shotpoints to Post panel. The Shotpoints to Post
panel allows users to determine whether to post All, None or some of
the shotpoints. The some options consist of the Rate and Divide
methods.
Use the Shotpoints to Post dialog box to specify the following input
values:
the starting point on the seismic line for posting shotpoint symbols
Symbol Posting Method
The options for symbol posting method are All, Rate, Divide, and None.
For Rate and Divide, (as well as for All) the first and last shotpoints on
the seismic line are always posted.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
343
Landmark
Field The symbol will be the size indicated by the field type
symbol size on the input seismic line data file. If there is more than
one symbol size field on the input seismic data file, the user will be
able to select the size field.
Symbol Size
This parameter is for use when the Symbol Size Mode is Size. Enter the
size, in plotter units (in./cm.), for the posted shotpoint symbols.
Discontinuity Ratio
This parameter is used only when you have answered Yes to Use
Discontinuities? on the General Posting Parameters menu. The
Discontinuity Ratio is the Discontinuity Symbol Size Ratio. The value
you enter will result in the scaling of the posted shotpoint symbol size
wherever the shotpoint falls within a discontinuity (unconformity).
Rate To Post (Divisible By)
This parameter is required when the shotpoint symbol posting mode is
Rate or Divide.
This is the shotpoint symbol posting rate. A rate of 2 will post symbols
for the endpoints and for every other shotpoint, e.g., 1, 3, 5, 7, etc.
Starting Location (Divisible Bias)
The starting shotpoint number is a bias added to the shotpoints on each
seismic line before rate or division are performed. The divisible bias is
the starting shotpoint number on each seismic line where shotpoint
posting is to begin. Shotpoints are posted according to the following
equation: Integer=(Shotpoint+Bias)/(Divide Rate). Each shotpoint
position that meets these conditions with an integer is posted.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
344
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
345
Landmark
R2003.12.0
All will result in all shotpoints on the data file having a Z-value
label posted on the active picture.
Rate will result in the posting of a label for every Rateth posted
shotpoint. A Z-value label will also be posted at the starting
location (the first shotpoint symbol which is to be labeled).
Features: 3D Seismic
346
Landmark
Bias
Prior to posting the Z-value label, you can add a bias value can to the
Z-value. The posted Z-value label will reflect the biased Z-value.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
347
Landmark
Scale
Prior to posting the Z-value label, you can scale the Z-value by a value.
The posted Z-value label will reflect the scaled Z-value.
Number of Decimals
This is the number of decimals to the right of the decimal to be posted
in the Z-value label.
Line Name Parameters
This option brings up a panel which allows the user to control how a
seismic line name (or number) is posted. The location, angle of
orientation, text font, size and color can be controlled using this panel.
Name Location
There are eight possible locations for the seismic line name.
Both will result in the line name being printed at the beginning and
ending shotpoints, parallel to the seismic line.
Start will result in the line name being printed at the beginning
shotpoint, parallel to the seismic line.
End will result in the line name being printed at the ending
shotpoint, parallel to the seismic line.
East will result in the line name being printed at the easternmost
position on the seismic line, parallel to the line.
West will result in the line name being printed at the westernmost
position on the seismic line, parallel to the line.
Name Orientation
The line name can be oriented parallel to the track line or parallel to the
X-axis of the picture.
R2003.12.0
Line. The line name will be oriented parallel to the track line it
labels.
Features: 3D Seismic
348
Landmark
Name Font
The choices for text font are shown at left.
Name Size
This is the size of the text in plotter units (in./cm.).
Name Color
This is the color of the seismic line name. Clicking the color box will
bring up a color widget comprised of 256 colors. Select the color you
want for the seismic line name.
Name Angle
Taking the shotpoint nearest the line name as the pivot point, the Name
Angle is the value in degrees counterclockwise to be added to the
original line name angle.
Track Line Parameters
These parameters affect both 3D and 2D seismic lines.
These parameters allow the user to control how a posted seismic line
(track line) will be drawn. The connectivity mode allows a decision on
whether to use all shotpoints in drawing a seismic line or only those
points which have posted shotpoint symbols.
The discontinuity pattern allows a different line pattern to appear for
segments of a seismic line which fall within a discontinuity.
The normal pattern refers to the normal line pattern for the seismic line
(For a list of the line patterns and their associated numbers, see
Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on
page 791.)
Number break and distance break allow a track line to be broken up into
several segments by applying tests to consecutive shotpoints.
The value for number break refers to the difference in value between any
two posted shotpoint numbers. The user specifies a difference between
shotpoints number values. If the difference between two consecutive
values exceeds this value, then the program will show the break in the
track line.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
349
Landmark
The value for distance break refers to the distance between shotpoints.
If the distance between shotpoints exceeds this value, then the program
will show the break in the track line.
Connectivity Mode
The options for connectivity mode are Posted and All.
All will result in drawing the track lines between all shotpoints,
even shotpoints not selected for posting.
Discontinuity Pattern
You can alter the appearance of the line in areas where a discontinuity
(unconformity) is present. Consult the section Appendix C. Symbols,
Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on page 791. Select the number for
the line pattern to draw if a discontinuity is present.
Normal Pattern
You can select the line pattern you want for the track line. If you wish
to distinguish between a normal pattern for the track line and a pattern
indicating a discontinuity, select one line pattern for normal, and another
line pattern to indicate a discontinuity.
The line patterns and their corresponding numbers appear in Appendix
C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on page 791.
Line Weight
You use this parameter if the Line Pattern Type for track line is bold (1).
The Bold line width factor is a multiple of plain line widths. The values
is a number from 18, with the default value set at 2.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
350
Landmark
Number Break
This parameter sets up a value difference test between any two
consecutive shotpoints on a track line. If the value entered exceeds this
difference, the track line will be broken between those shotpoints.
The value for number break refers to the difference in value between any
two posted consecutive shotpoint numbers. The user specifies a
difference between shotpoints number values. If the difference between
two consecutive values exceeds this value, then the program will show
the break in the track line. A value of 0 will insure that a continuous
track line will be drawn regardless of any difference in shotpoint
number values.
Distance Break
This parameter sets up a distance test between any two consecutive
shotpoints on a track line. If the value entered exceeds this distance, the
track line will be broken between those shotpoints.
The value for distance break refers to the distance between shotpoints.
If the distance between shotpoints exceeds this value, then the program
will show the break in the track line. A value of 0.0 will insure that a
continuous track line will be drawn regardless of the distance between
shotpoints.
3D Survey Name Parameters
These parameters allow control for the location of the survey name, the
font, size, and color of the text, and the angle of rotation for the survey
name.
Survey Name Location
There are eight location options for 3D Survey Names.
Both+Line Post the 3D survey name parallel to, and above, the
first seismic line in the survey, and parallel to, and below, the last
seismic line in the survey.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
351
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
352
Landmark
Rate results in the posting of the first and last track line in the
survey, and every Rateth track line. The calculation of the Rateth
line begins with a user-specified start track line number. A rate of 1
would result in all track lines being posted; a rate of 2 would result
in every other track line being posted.
Divide results in the posting of the first and last track line in the
survey, and each track line whose number (plus a user-specified
bias), is evenly divisible by the divide value.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
353
Landmark
All will result in posting names for all posted 3D survey lines.
Rate will result in the posting of line names for the first and last
track line in the survey, and a line name for every posted Rateth
track line. The calculation of the Rateth line begins with a starting
posted line number which the user supplies. A rate of 1 would
result in posted names for all posted track lines. A rate of 2 would
result in posted names for every other posted track line.
Divide will result in the posting of line names for the first and last
track line in the survey, for each posted track line whose number
(plus a user-specified bias), is evenly divisible by the divide value.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
354
Landmark
Color Mode Color Mode determines how the color settings for
track lines and shotpoint symbols are set.
Value Set the color of track lines and shotpoint symbols by
selecting a color value.
Field Vary the color of track lines and shotpoint symbols by
field type. Select a color mode field for a particular graphics
feature (such as symbol color) from the input seismic data file.
To select a color field, select the Color Field option in the
Choose Fields menu.
Z-field Vary the color of track lines and color/size of
shotpoint symbols by Z-attribute field. The size and color are
determined by the Z-range table and Color and Symbol Size
table. The starting color index is the starting color for
modulated field values. The color changes one index for each
modulation level.
If the color or size of a posted object is to vary with the change in a
specific Z-value, the user can specify how many levels of variation
(modulation levels) are reflected in posting.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
355
Landmark
Starting Color Index The starting color index is the color you
assign to the first level of the Z-range table. Each level up from the
first Z-field level results in posting with the next highest color.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
356
Landmark
Select Operator
The operators set up a comparison between data values (such as
shotpoint numbers, line names, z attribute values) and a user-specified
text or numeric mask. The mask excludes values which do not satisfy the
requirement when the operator is applied to it. The values that fail to
satisfy the operator/mask are not posted.
The operators are:
Null Post attributes whose field value equal to the ZNON (null
value) for the field.
Between Post all values which are between the lowest and
highest end of the lexical or numerical range defined by the masks.
Endpoints are included.
Outside Post all values which do not fall within (which are
outside of) the range of the lowest and highest lexical or numeric
values. Endpoints are not included.
The Value of the field must be of the same type (numeric or character)
as the field being tested.
Textual Selection Mask 1
For the unary operators (EQ, NE, LT, LE, GT, GE), enter a text string
which is to be a constant. Wildcards may be used in textual masks
(except for the first character of the string).
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
357
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
358
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Type In. When you select Edit Z-range Values, a series of panels
will appear, allowing you to enter the minimum value for each
level in the Z-Range table. Changes in posted items (color or size)
will occur when each level is reached.
Features: 3D Seismic
359
Landmark
Z-Range Increment
When the Z-Range Table Creation Method is Divide, Inc or Inc+Start,
you must enter the value of the increment between modulation levels.
Z-Range Start
When the Z-Range Table Creation Method is Inc+Start, you must enter
the starting value. The increment will then be added to the start value to
create each additional modulation level.
Symbol Size Range Creation Parameters
To set a range for the size of symbols on the current map or cross
section, create a Symbol Size Range table.
Click the Symbol Size Range Creation Parameters button in the
Modulation Parameters dialog box to display the Symbol Size Range
Creation Parameters dialog box. Use this dialog box to set up a Symbol
Size Range table. The Z-Symbol Size table sets out minimum and
maximum value for varying symbol size.
Z-Attribute modulation is defined in the Z-Range table. Symbol Size
modulation is defined in the Symbol Size Range table.
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
360
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Starting Symbol Size This is the size of the symbol for the first
modulation level in the table. The units are expressed in plotter
units (in./cm.) If the modulation field fails to satisfy any of the
values of the mod field on the Z-Range table, it is posted with the
starting symbol size (and starting color).
Features: 3D Seismic
361
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Features: 3D Seismic
362
Landmark
Surveys (Canadian)
Z-MAP Plus supports picture creation and survey posting for many
types of Canadian surveys:
Post DLS & NTS Surveys Posts DLS and NTS lines and labels
on an existing picture. You must supply both areas present to use
this option.
Z-MAP Plus supplies default files for defining DLS and NTS surveys. To
substitute custom survey definition(s), follow these steps:
1. Name the custom file(s) that contain the DLS.BIN or ZNTS.DAT surveys.
2. Set the appropriate environment variable:
R2003.12.0
363
Landmark
R2003.12.0
364
Landmark
To use this option, the current map must include both NTS and DLS areas.
type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter
boundaries
R2003.12.0
365
Landmark
either the North East and South West corners and the North West
and South East corners of the survey
type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and Quarter borders
R2003.12.0
366
Landmark
input data file for the old latitude and longitude data in the type
fields
new field names for the output latitude and longitude fields
name of the target data file and MFD for writing the output
This option calls the NADCONV macro. (For more information, select
Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the topic for
NADCONV.)
R2003.12.0
367
Landmark
type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter
boundaries
line type and width of each line
type of labeling for the lines
size and font of the labels
This option calls the POST-NTS macro. (For more information, select
Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the topic for
POST-NTS.)
R2003.12.0
368
Landmark
Projection Box
This option posts AOI and Projection information for a map.
The Projection Box option posts a box on a map showing all the picture
information such as picture name, scale, projection, etc. This box is
always 3 inches by 5 inches (same height as the default title block). The
projection box can be placed to the left of the title block by specifying
the position of the lower right corner of the projection box in map units.
You must select an existing ZGF.
This option calls the POST-PIC-STATS macro. For more information,
select Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the
topic for POST-PIC-STATS.
R2003.12.0
369
Landmark
Picture Assembly
In Picture Assembly, you can take several existing pictures of one or
more surfaces (for example, a contour map, a 3D perspective map and a
cross section) and compile them into one presentation picture. The
component pictures of the assembly can be drawn from more than one
graphics file.
Before you select the Picture Assembly option, you must create and
define the limits for a new assembled picture (map or cross section). To
create a map, select File New Basemap. Each picture in the
assembled picture is enclosed in a frame that you define and resize.
Select Picture
Click the Select Picture button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to
display a list of all the pictures in the specified ZGF. Select an input
picture to place in the assembly.
Select Features
Click the Select Features button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to
display a dialog box that lists the features in the selected picture. Select
the features that you want to draw on the assembly. The default behavior
is to select all the features.
R2003.12.0
370
Landmark
Cutline, Division
Click the Cutline, division button in the Picture Assembly dialog box
to display the Division, Cutline Parameters dialog box. Specify input
values for the following options:
Use cutline Click the Use cutline button and select one of these
options from the list:
Cutline. Add a cutline around the input picture. This places a
solid line around the outside border offsets.
No Cutline. Omit the cutline from the input picture.
Create Frame
Click the Create Frame button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to
display the Create Frame dialog box. Use this dialog box to create a
frame for a picture you are placing in the assembly.
Key Frame Click the Key Frame button in the Create Frame
dialog box to display the Location, Height and Scale dialog box.
Enter coordinates and parameters from the keyboard for the
position, scale, and height of the frame:
Lower Left X and Y Coordinates You can specify the
location for placing the picture by entering the values for the
x,y coordinates of the lower left corner of the location. Until
you select OK, the frame you are creating repositions its lower
left corner wherever you click the mouse button in the
Z-MAP Plus window display area. This enables you to
reposition the frame graphically.
R2003.12.0
371
Landmark
Modify Frame
Once you create the index map frame, you can click the Modify Frame
button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to display the Modify Frame
dialog box. Use this dialog box to change any of the previously input
parameters, then click OK.
R2003.12.0
Select Corner Select the corner of the frame that you want to
move. The frame changes colors. Using the cursor, select the new
location for the corner of the selected frame.
Next Frame This option takes the cursor to the next component
frame on the active picture. From this position you can select the
modifications you want to make to the frame (location, height,
width, cutline, division, features). You can select Next Frame as
many times as you like before you click OK in the Modify Frame
dialog box.
372
Landmark
Key Location This panel enables you to enter values for the
location, scale, and height of the frame. This method can be used
instead of the cursor method of making modifications.
Lower Left X and Y Coordinates You may specify the
location of the picture being placed on the assembly by
entering the values for the x,y coordinates of the lower left
corner.
Scale Enter a number to scale the size of the picture being
placed on the assembly. The dimensions of the input picture
will be multiplied by this number to determine the size of the
picture placed on the assembly.
Height Height overrides the Scale value. Enter the height in
plotter units (in./cm.).
Change Width Move the cursor to the left or the right of the
frame. When you change the width, the frame is rescaled.
R2003.12.0
373
Landmark
Use Cutline You can put a cutline around each picture being
placed on the assembly.
Cutline. Select this option to place a cutline around the
picture being placed on the assembly.
No Cutline. Select this option to prevent a cutline from being
placed around the picture being placed on the assembly.
Delete Frame
Once you create the index map frame, you can click the Delete Frame
button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to display the Delete Frame
dialog box. Use this dialog box to select a frame to delete. You can also
restore a frame you have deleted.
R2003.12.0
Next Frame This option takes the cursor to the next component
frame in the active picture. You can select Next Frame as many
times as you like before you click OK in the Delete Frame dialog
box.
374
Landmark
Overview
Use the View menu options to control the way maps and cross sections
appear in the Z-MAP Plus window display area including which
features appear, whether the entire image is visible, and whether
changes appear automatically.
View options are active only if the display area currently contains a map
or cross section. (The Switch Screens option is active only if the display
area is split from the menu bar and you are using a dual monitor system.)
A summary of the View menu options follows.
R2003.12.0
Zoom In Enlarge part of the image to fill the display area. The
image enlarges as soon as you select a centerpoint.
Zoom Out Reduce the image in the display area. The image
becomes smaller as soon as you select a centerpoint.
375
Landmark
Display List
Use the Display List option to select the graphic features you to display
in the next redrawing operation (such as Zoom In, Zoom Out, Window,
Pan, Re-display, and Full Display). This capability is useful for
expediting work on complex pictures. For example, when you view a
complex map as a whole, you can hide elements that take a long time to
redraw. When you zoom in on a part of the map, you can include those
elements.
To view the display list, select View Display List or click the
Display List icon (shown at left).
The SELECT GRAPHICS FEATURES dialog box appears. The display
list in the dialog box shows all the graphic features in the current map or
cross section, such as borders, control points, contours, text, and title
block. By default, all features are selected (highlighted) and are set to be
included in the next redrawing operation.
To clear a selection, click the element. Elements that are not selected are
omitted from redrawing. Omitted elements are still part of the map or
cross section, they are just rendered temporarily invisible.
R2003.12.0
376
Landmark
Zoom In
Use the Zoom In option to enlarge a part of the current map or cross
section. To zoom in, follow these steps:
1.
2.
To return the display to it previous size, click the Zoom Out icon
(described on page 378). To return the display to its original size and
orientation, click the Full Display icon (described on page 382).
R2003.12.0
377
Landmark
Zoom Out
Use the Zoom Out option to reduce the size of the currently displayed
current map or cross section. To zoom out, follow these steps:
1.
Select View Zoom Out or click the Zoom Out icon (shown at
left).
The prompt LOCATE POINT TO ZOOM ABOUT appears in the
status area.
2.
For information about cancelling an ongoing redraw operation, see page 377.
R2003.12.0
378
Landmark
Window
Use the Window option to define an area of the current map or cross
section and enlarge it to fill the display area. To execute a Window
operation, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Click to select a corner and drag to define the area (the window)
you want to include in the display. (In some applications this
action is called drawing a rubber band around an area.)
The image in the window expands to fill the display area.
Only the features currently selected in the display list appear.
(To view the display list, select View Display List.) By default,
all features are selected in the display list and are included in the
new display. If you have cleared any feature selections, they are
not included in the Window operation.
To return the display to its original size and orientation, click the
Full Display icon (described on page 382).
Cancelling an Ongoing Redraw Operation
For information about cancelling an ongoing redraw operation, see page 377.
R2003.12.0
379
Landmark
Pan
Use the Pan option to shift the current map or cross section within the
display area, so you can see an adjacent part of the image. This option is
useful for chasing lines or data across a map you have enlarged with
the Zoom In option.
To pan, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
To return the display to its original position, click the Full Display icon
(described on page 382).
Cancelling an Ongoing Redraw Operation
For information about cancelling an ongoing redraw operation, see page 377.
R2003.12.0
380
Landmark
Re-display
Use the Re-display option to refresh the current display (whether it
shows all or part of a map or cross section). If you have added features
since the last redrawing operation, the features are added to the display
(and are the only items redrawn). If you have not made any changes, the
display reloads unchanged.
To execute a Re-display operation, select View Re-display or click
the Re-display icon (shown at left).
The display updates immediately. Only the features currently selected in
the display list appear. (To view the display list, select View
Display List.) By default, all features are selected in the display list and
are redrawn. If you have cleared any feature selections, they are not
included in the Re-display operation.
Cancelling an Ongoing Redraw Operation
For information about cancelling an ongoing redraw operation, see page 377.
R2003.12.0
381
Landmark
Full Display
Use the Full Display option if you have used the Zoom In, Zoom Out,
Window, or Pan option, then want to redisplay the map or cross section
at its original size and placement.
To execute a Full Display operation, select View Full Display or
click the Full Display icon (shown at left).
The current map or cross section returns to its original size and
placement. Only the features currently selected in the display list appear.
(To view the display list, select View Display List.) By default, all
features are selected in the display list and are redrawn. If you have
cleared any feature selections, they are not included in the Full Display
operation.
Cancelling an Ongoing Redraw Operation
For information about cancelling an ongoing redraw operation, see page 377.
R2003.12.0
382
Landmark
Auto Display
Use the Auto Display option to set Z-MAP Plus to add new features to
the display dynamically (on) or add new features only on demand (off).
If Auto Display is on, Z-MAP Plus performs a Re-display operation
each time you add or change a feature. If Auto Display is off, the display
updates only if you perform one of the redrawing operations (such as
Re-display, Full Display, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Window, or Pan).
To toggle Auto Display on or off, select View Auto Display. The
system window reports the status change for the Auto Display option, as
shown in the following example. (The appearance of the option in the
View menu does not change.)
R2003.12.0
383
Landmark
Switch Screens
Use the Switch Screens option to switch the active picture display from
one monitor to the other. The Switch Screens option is useful if you run
multiple OpenWorks applications simultaneously.
The Switch Screens option is available only if you use dual monitors and
the Z-MAP Plus graphics window is split from the menu bar.
Splitting Screens Before Switching
The Switch Screen option is inactive (and appears dimmed) unless you split the
Z-MAP Plus window so the display area is separate from the main menu. After
the split, you can move the display area between monitors.
To split the Z-MAP Plus window, use one of the following methods:
1 Select Tools System Switches. Select Separate from the Graphics Window
Configuration list. Exit from Z-MAP Plus and restart it.
2 Edit the MappingLauncher.dat file by entering the following command on a new
line (or edit the existing zmapplussh line to include the -m option):
Applications:
ZMAP Plus
zmapplussh -m &
R2003.12.0
The color editing dialog boxes appear on the same monitor as the
Z-MAP Plus window.
384
Landmark
Modeling
Overview
Surface modeling, or gridding, is one of the most important functions in
Z-MAP Plus. Many functions in Z-MAP Plus use grids as input or
produce grids as output. A good introduction to gridding terminology
and the gridding process is available in the Z-MAP Plus Users Guide,
accessible by selecting Help Online Manuals User Guide.
Simply put, a grid is a set of regularly distributed points that are
calculated or estimated from an input set of control points. Control
points represent real data that has been collected and is not regularly
distributed.
The gridding methods are designed to work with point data, grids,
digitized contours, seismic lines, or other line oriented data.
A summary of available Modeling menu options follows.
Point Gridding Plus Provides all the functionality available in Point
Gridding and supports new features that enhance the geologic accuracy
of faulted structure models. Point Gridding Plus honors the input fault
geometry data, so it creates more accurate horizon models than
traditional structure modeling programs. Used in combination with
Profile Contouring, Point Gridding Plus provides high quality maps of
faulted surfaces.
Point Gridding Provides nine algorithms for building grids from
point (x, y, z) data. The algorithms are: Least Squares, Projected Slopes,
Weighted Average, Closest Point, Distance, Isopach, Bounded Range,
Linear Trend, and Moving Plate. You can use faults as barriers when
you build grids.
Contour Gridding Builds a grid from digitized contours. The
algorithm takes advantage of the information content in the digitized
contours to produce the grid faster and honor the contours exactly. You
can use faults only as barriers when you build grids.
R2003.12.0
Landmark
Many applications for trend surface grids exist. For example, you can
generate residuals and a trend surface from a velocity grid. After you
examine the residuals, you can identify high velocity, pull-up areas.
For detailed information about this macro, see the
TREND-ANAL-GRID topic in the Macro Reference Manual for
Z-MAP Plus / ZCL (Help Online Manual Macros Manual).
Boolean Grid Creates a grid with node values that equal either 0.0
or 1.0. Boolean grids are useful for mapping a formation that meets or
exceeds a criteria (for example, below, equal to, or above the Oil-Water
Contact level). For detailed information about this macro, see the
GRID-LT-EQ-GT topic in the Macro Reference Manual for
Z-MAP Plus / ZCL (Help Online Manual Macros Manual).
Constant Grid Creates a grid with node values that are all identical.
For detailed information about this macro, see the
EVAULATE-CONGRID topic in the Macro Reference Manual for
Z-MAP Plus / ZCL (Help Online Manual Macros Manual).
Polynomial Grid Evaluates a polynomial function over a
user-defined area and stores the results as a new grid. For detailed
information about this macro, see the EVAULATE-POLYN topic in the
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL (Help
Online Manual Macros Manual).
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Data Hulls
Search Radius
Extrapolation
Refinements
Cutoff
Smoothness
Modulus
# of Flex Passes
Flexing Type
Flexing Parameters
Control Grid
Point Gridding
Gridding Method
Contour Gridding
Trendform Gridding
Line Gridding Plus
Line Gridding
Flexing
X
X
X
X
The following topics describe the effect each of these parameters have
and how to use them to improve grids. The Boolean, Constant,
Polynomial, and User-Defined gridding methods do not use these
parameters.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Control Grids
You can use control grids to determine which grid nodes are initialized
in Point Gridding Plus, Point Gridding, and Line Gridding Plus. You can
designate a control grid to tailor the new grids node values. Each
gridding method can use information from the selected control grid in a
number of different ways. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None Do not use a control grid.
Flex Only Flex the control grid. To constrain flexing, Z-MAP Plus
uses any input control points and faults.
Grid Non-ZNONS Replace any non-null grid nodes in the control
grid with values. Determine the non-null values by using:
No null (ZNON) grid nodes are altered. This control option is useful for
ensuring that node values are calculated at the same node locations for
all project grids. You cannot perform any refinements. The output grid
has the same x,y limits and increments as the control grid.
Grid ZNONS Replace any null (ZNON) grid nodes in the control
grid with values determined by:
faults
No non-null grid nodes are altered. You cannot perform any
refinements. The output grid has the same x,y limits and increments as
the control grid, and the entire grid is filtered (both original non-ZNON
values and the newly calculated nodes).
Faults Only Set the program to create the specified output faults and/
or fault profile files. The Faults Only control option uses the control grid
and processes the input centerline fault file against it. No input control
point data is required.
Default AOI Choose the x,y limits and increments from the control
grid. This is the most common application of a control grid and
guarantees that the control grid and output grid cover the same area and
that their nodes are located at the same x,y positions.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Data Hulls
You can use data hulls to determine which grid nodes are initialized
(assigned a value greater than null or ZNON) in Point Gridding Plus,
Point Gridding, or Line Gridding Plus. Choose one of the four methods
(discussed in the following text) to determine which grid nodes are
initialized:
Data Distribution
Convex Hull
Concave Hull 1
Concave Hull 2
Data Distribution The Data Distribution method of determining the
gridding area is the method used in classic Point Gridding. The
gridding area is determined by basic gridding parameters, such as reach
or minimum number of control points that can be used to compute any
grid value.
Convex Hull The Convex Hull option sets Z-MAP Plus to grid
whenever possible inside the convex hull of the dataset expanded by the
Expand parameter you defined in the Secondary Parameters option. The
gridding is limited only by the Reach Parameter.
Convex Hull
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Concave Hull 1 The Concave Hull 1 option sets Z-MAP Plus to grid
whenever possible inside the convex hull reduced by concavities. The
concavities are determined by the radius. The size of an imaginary ball
rolled around the convex hull of the data determines the depth of the
concavities.
Concave Hull 2 The Concave Hull 2 option is similar to Concave
Hull 1, except that concavities are slightly deeper between initialized
grid nodes.
In this dialog box, the value of the radius is automatically set to five
times the grid increment. You can reset the radius of the ball to any value
between 1 - 5 times the grid increment. In this dialog you also name the
data hull you create.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Search Radius
The Search Radius parameter determines how far from a node the
gridding method should look to determine the value assigned to the
node.
The default radius is half the diagonal of the grid being calculated and
is usually much larger than necessary. Although it is better for the radius
to be too large rather than too small, a large radius increases gridding
time. Since only the closest points are used, significantly more data are
looked at than are actually used to calculate a nodes value. Most users
have found that significantly reducing the default value for the Search
Radius is the easiest way to speed the gridding process.
This is one of the primary parameters for controlling how far
extrapolations are carried away from the data. Reducing this to the point
where the search radius is smaller than the distance between data and the
edge of the map, or between data points, will cause ZNONs to be placed
in those unreached areas. This extrapolation control method will create
holes (ZNON areas) in void areas in the middle of data.
Extrapolation Distance
You can use the Extrapolation Distance parameter to set a distance from
the perimeter of the data to define an area in which you want to calculate
grid nodes. This parameter is applicable to Point Gridding Plus, Point
Gridding, Contour Gridding, Line Gridding Plus, and Line Gridding.
The default Extrapolation value is equal to the Search Radius value.
If Search Radius, Minimum Number of Points, Number of Sectors, or
any other node initialization parameters restrict node calculation to an
area smaller than the one defined by the Extrapolation setting, the
Extrapolation setting overrides the other parameters. In other words,
node values are calculated even if the other parameters are set to prevent
it. To avoid overriding other node initialization parameters, set the
Extrapolation Distance value to 0.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Refinements
Grid refinement is the process of cutting the gridding interval in half and
computing the new intermediate grid values from the original grid
values (also called resampling). When combined with grid flexing, this
process can substantially reduce gridding time because resampling and
flexing are significantly faster than calculating initial node values.
You can compare the process of starting coarse and refining to building
a regional surface form, then adding the local detail to it. The more
refinements you do, the more general that regional starting surface is.
More refinements can help create a better grid if there is a strong
regional component or if the data have large void areas that a coarse grid
could easily model.
Refinements can cause problems with grids that use a large number of
faults or have a few closely spaced faults. Make the initial grid
increment small enough to place a grid node between fault segments.
Flexing Parameters
Flexing, sometimes called filtering or relaxation, is used to
simultaneously smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary
purpose is to remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface
that are not supported by data. These irregularities are put in the surface
during initialization and are not desirable in the final surface model.
Flexing parameters are available in Point Gridding Plus, Point Gridding,
Contour Gridding, Trendform Gridding, Line Gridding Plus, Line
Gridding, and the Flexing Modeling menu options.
These parameters are described in detail with the final gridding method
in the section Flexing starting on page 520.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Select a Fault File name, if one is associated with the data file.
Yes
Do you want to
flex the grid?
No
No
Is algorithm
Projected
Slopes?
Yes
Select additional
fields.
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Overview
Point Gridding Plus has the functions available in Point Gridding, with
additional features that enhance the geologic accuracy of faulted
structure models. To display the Point Gridding Plus dialog box, click
the Point Gridding Plus icon (shown at left) or select Modeling Point
Gridding Plus in the Z-MAP Plus window. Use Point Gridding Plus in
combination with Profile Contouring to create high quality maps of
faulted surfaces.
Details about the parameters found on each of the Point Gridding Plus
dialog box tabs is available in the browser-based Help system. To
display this information, click the Help button in the Point Gridding
Plus dialog box. The remainder of this topic contains conceptual
information to help you achieve the best results with the program.
You can use Point Gridding Plus to perform these tasks:
Model fault faces that cut a horizon, given the fault geometry data.
This next topics describe Point Gridding Plus and its capabilities,
including information about these subjects:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
X
BED
X
BED
Key:
AE= projected vertical separation of beds
AC= throw
CB= polygon gap
(Tearpock and Bischke 1991. Published with the permission of the authors.)
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
By looking across the fault trace, Point Gridding Plus builds grids that
honor the vertical separation along the traces. As a result, a structure
model created by Point Gridding Plus has grid nodes initialized
accurately inside small fault blocks with few data points. The continuity
of structural features that are cut by faults is preserved across the fault
face. This is similar to hand contouring techniques.
Maintaining Classic Point Gridding Capabilities
Point Gridding Plus is designed to enhance classic point gridding and to
work correctly with the typical input data for point gridding. For
example, Point Gridding Plus builds structure models from point data
without faults, and builds structure models from point datasets
combined with fault polygons (cut-outs) without any fault geometry
data. As in classic point gridding, fault polygons without fault geometry
are treated as opaque barriers during grid initialization.
Gridding: Directionally Biased
Point Gridding Plus includes a biased gridding option. When the
program computes the initial value of a grid node with biased gridding,
the gridding code assigns higher weight factors to data points in the
direction of the trend than are assigned to data points in other directions.
If you use this option, you specify the strength of the desired trend and
a trend direction as an angle away from North.
Determining How Grid Nodes Are Initialized: Improved Methods
This gridding process also contains two additional methods for deciding
exactly which grid nodes are initialized:
With the other method, the program hugs the data distribution
more closely, and may even divide it into distinct clusters. If the
data is highly clustered, this last method enables you to divide the
input data into separate data hulls and grid only the nodes in each
cluster.
Kriging
Point Gridding Plus has a kriging feature a gridding technique that
uses well-defined models of a structures spatial correlation to produce
optimal structure models. The kriging feature is designed for users who
are familiar with geostatistics.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Use the Export to Z-MAP Plus utility to copy horizons, fault polygons,
fault regulars, and cartographic data into an MFD. Once the data is in an
MFD, you can edit, grid, and contour the data. This utility automatically
creates centerline fault traces that have x, y coordinates, vertical
separation, and fault gap values. This utility does not handle intersecting
faults. You must join faults at intersection points.
Fault Shrinker is a ZCL process that automatically converts traditional
fault polygons into fault centerlines. This process automatically resolves
the center point of intersection from intersecting fault polygons. If you
provide seismic data for the target horizon, Fault Shrinker automatically
captures fault vertical separation along a fault trace from the seismic
data. This option is available by selecting Operations Faults
Shrinker.
Profile Contouring is designed to work with faulted structure models
created in Point Gridding Plus. You can use this utility to contour both
the structure model and the fault faces that cut that model. Profile
Contouring makes use of profiles created by Point Gridding Plus (data
files containing X, Y, Z, and Segment ID fields) to guide contours
making the sharp directional changes required to pass accurately from
contouring across a fault face to contouring across the structure
model.This option is available by selecting Operations Faults
Profiler.
In Point Gridding Plus, you can grid a set of closed polygons in a vertex
file, then contour and colorfill either inside or outside the polygon
boundaries.
You can use data hull polygons you create in Point Gridding Plus to
control colorfill operations in Profile Contouring.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Point Gridding Plus can look across faults and use fault geometry along
fault traces during the gridding process. Point Gridding Plus enables you
to supply fault vertical displacement, and fault polygon gap or dip angle
data, to define fault geometry. The gridding process allows control point
values in one fault block to help determine grid node values in adjacent
blocks. Z-values assigned to grid nodes in the adjacent fault block are
normalized by the vertical separation of the faults separating the two
fault blocks. During grid initialization, Z-MAP Plus impresses the fault
vertical separation on the grid model, maintaining and refining this
vertical separation throughout the process of grid smoothing. When
geologic horizons are cut by normal faults, use of fault geometry data
adds significantly to the quality of gridded representations. Fault
polygon gap data or fault dip angle data combined with fault vertical
separation data can be used to produce realistic fault face
representations in gridded horizon models. While Point Gridding Plus
uses many of the same basic parameters as Point Gridding, output from
the Point Gridding Plus process does not duplicate the output of Point
Gridding. Point Gridding Plus uses improved versions of:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Fault Processing
Faults without vertical separation are treated exactly alike in the two
gridding processes, but Point Gridding Plus does not treat faults with
vertical separation as opaque barriers. Standard gridding algorithms
have difficulty with poorly initialized or undefined grid nodes inside
small fault blocks, but Point Gridding Plus does not. Point Gridding Plus
can replace the undefined grid nodes inside fault polygons
(characteristic of other gridding algorithms) with reasonable node
values modeling the fault face cutting the structure. The ease with which
Point Gridding Plus handles fault polygons can be especially useful
when you find, for example, that part of one of the horizon models
covered by your lease has ZNONs at equity determination time.
Gridding as if faults were opaque barriers produces incomplete and
inaccurate horizon models near faults for the following reasons:
Fault Geometry
Geoscientists measure fault throw, fault dip, and fault heave in a plane
perpendicular to the fault strike. Fault strike is the trend of a horizontal
line in the fault. Fault throw is the apparent vertical movement of the
fault in the plane. Fault dip is the angle of the fault face in the plane
measured down from the horizon.
Profile Contouring and Point Gridding Plus
Point Gridding Plus produces profile datasets optimized for use, in
combination with the output grid, which includes nodes that model the
fault field with Landmarks profile contouring model. Profile
contouring uses these datasets to produce accurate and visually pleasing
contour maps. By using throw gridding datasets optimized for work
with profile contouring, you can often avoid the expense of producing
and storing extremely fine-grid models.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Basic Tab
The Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab is divided into three sections:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Input Files
The following illustration shows the options in the Input files section of
the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
X-field Click the X-field button and select an x field to use from
the drop-down list.
Y-field Click the Y-field button and select a y field to use from
the drop-down list.
Seg I.D. Field Click the Seg I.D. Field button and select a
segment ID field to use from the drop-down list.
Throw Field Click the Throw Field button and select a delta-Z
throw field to use from the drop-down list. This field name is a
misnomer this field contains vertical separation values. This
field is required for incorporating fault geometry in Point Gridding
Plus.
Dip Angle Field Click the Dip Angle Field button and select a
dip angle field to use from the drop-down list. The dip angle
should always be greater than zero and less than or equal to 90
degrees. Either a dip angle field or a heave field is required for
Expanded Fault Computations.
Heave Field Click the Heave Field button and select a heave
field to use from the drop-down list. This field name is a
misnomer this field should contain fault polygon gap values.
Either a dip angle or heave field is required for Expanded Fault
Computations. If both a dip angle field and a heave field are
included in the input file, the heave field is the default selection,
and the dip angle field is ignored.
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Gridding Parameters
The following illustration shows the options in the Gridding Parameters
section of the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab.
Gridding Algorithm
You can choose any of ten gridding algorithms to use for the Point
Gridding Plus operation. A description of each gridding algorithm
follows.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
The first difference is the treatment of zero thickness data that are, in
effect, replaced by Z-values that will continue the local trend of the
thickness into the zero data area. The slope of this trend establishes
where the inferred zero isopach curve will fall in the area between zero
and non-zero data.
The second difference between the Least Squares and Isopaching
procedures is the minimum allowed Z-value of the grid. In the case of
the Isopaching procedure, there is effectively no lower bound to the
Z-values of the grid. This allows the slope of the surface to continue
downwards outside the zero contour. However, the reported grid
minimum which is stored in the grid header is always zero.
Bounded Range This method is used to grid data that has an upper
and/or lower bound to the Z-values, such as Net to Gross data. It uses
the Least Squares algorithm to calculate grid node values. However,
before grid node values are computed, values of control points that are
equal to the upper limit or equal to the lower limit are replaced with
estimated values above and below the limits, respectively. The resulting
grid will contain values above and below the limits. A contour map
made from this grid will have limit contours which pass between the
limit and real-valued control points. The Bounded Gridding process can
be altered (Curve Compression Factor) so that the limit contours move
closer to, or farther from, real valued control points. This algorithm
requires additional parameters to be set. See Algorithms Requiring
Additional Parameter Dialog Boxes on page 422.
Point Density Gridding This gridding option computes the density
of data points within distance Reach of each grid node. The value
returned at each grid node location is the number of data points found
within distance Reach divided by the area of the circle with radius
Reach. The grid model created by point density gridding may be used as
a rough estimate of the confidence which should be assigned to each
grid value in a grid of the same size created using another gridding
algorithm and the same value of the Reach parameter.
Kriging Kriging is a gridding technique that uses information about
the spatial continuity of a surface. Using randomly positioned point
data, Kriging produces a statistically optimal model of the surface.
Kriging is a difficult algorithm to use correctly, but it is better when you
know certain characteristics of the target surface, and when the surface
satisfies certain hypotheses. Kriging is similar to classical Least Squares
estimation with the covariances determined from a user-defined
function. This algorithm requires additional parameters to be set. See
Algorithms Requiring Additional Parameter Dialogs page 422.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Spherical
S(h) = C0 + C[1.5(h/R) .5(h/R)]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Linear
S(h) = C0 + C*h
Exponential
S(h) = C0 + C[1.exp(h/R)]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Gaussian
S(h) = C0 + C[1.exp(-h /R)2]where h<R
C0 + Cwhere h>=R
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
To qualify for Kriging, data must be able to fit into one of three
mathematical hypotheses:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
First select the control grid method from the drop-down menu. Next,
select the file to use as the control grid from the Select Input File dialog
box that appears.
Flex Only and Refinement Settings
If you choose the Flex Only method, the Refinements value is automatically
set to 0. For all other methods, the Refinements default value is 1.
To change the setting, triple-click the ZNON Value box contents in the
Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab. Enter a value from the keyboard. Use a
null value that is far outside any values found in the input data.
Search Radius
In the Search Radius box of the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab, enter
the radius for drawing a circle around the grid node being calculated.
Data points inside the circle are eligible for use in calculating the nodes
Z-value (expressed in map units). Typically, only the closest data points
are actually used. The default value is half the size of the grid.
Most users have found that, for large volumes of data, reducing the Search
Radius will speed up the gridding process dramatically.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
In the Refinements box of the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab, enter the
number of refinement passes you want the program to perform. The
initial grid increment is used to build the initial grid. The refinement
passes are then performed, with the grid resampled at half of the
previous increment value, after which the grid is flexed. This process is
repeated for the specified number of refinement passes until the final
grid increment is reached. The default Refinements value is 1, and the
range of valid numbers is 0 to 5.
The Refinements setting is common to many types of gridding methods,
and is described further on page 393.
Extrapolation Distance
Use the Extrapolation Distance box in the Point Gridding Plus: Basic
tab to specify the width of an extrapolation corridor around the data
perimeter. Grid nodes that fall inside the corridor are initialized with
values extrapolated from the nearby data points.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Smoothness Modulus
Use the Smoothness Modulus box in the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab
to specify the extent to which you want to smooth the grid. Note that the
more smoothing you apply, the less the grid honors the data points.
In the Smoothness Modulus box, you can enter any value between 0
and 1. The default setting is 0.2. With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing
pushes the surface away from the data, the program brings it back to
exactly honor the data. A value of 1 (one) produces the smoothest grid,
without regard for precisely fitting the grid to the data. With the default
value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes the surface away from the data, the
program brings it back at least 20% of the distance between the surface
and the data point. The Smoothness Modulus value affects the grid
nodes that are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to a number of gridding
methods. (For more information, see page 525.)
XMin, XMax, YMin, YMax
The XMin, XMax, YMin, and YMax values in the Point Gridding Plus:
Basic tab specify the AOI of the output grid. These values are the
minimum and maximum X and Y coordinate values of the output grid.
The default values are derived from the input data file. The default AOI
covers an area that is slightly larger than the smallest rectangle that
contains the input data (approximately 10% larger than the X/Y ranges).
If you specify a control grid, the control grid is used to supply these
values.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
You may want to round the values up to more even numbers. Do not
make the AOI any larger than required, however. The added grid nodes
increase the grid size and gridding execution time. In addition, remote
grid node values are more likely to have unrealistic values.
ZMin and ZMax
These values represent the upper and lower Z-values that appear in the
final grid.
These values default to numbers that are slightly smaller and larger
(10% of Z-range), respectively, than the smallest and largest data value
for the Z-field being gridded. This allows a small amount of overshoot
of grid values above or below data values. If you are using a control grid,
the control grid boundaries serve as the upper and lower boundary limits
for the Bounded Range algorithm.
XInc and YInc Grid
These values represent the gridding increment taken from the input
control point file. Grid increments represent the distance in the X and Y
direction respectively across the grid cell. These distances define the X
and Y gridding increments for your grid.
The increments default to the same value in both directions. If you are
using a control grid, these values default to those of the control grid.
For more information about X and Y gridding increments, see X and Y
Gridding Increments on page 493.
Experimenting with Different Increments
Many users find that altering grid increments has the most significant effect on
surface form and honoring data.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Output Panel
Output Location
From the drop-down Output Location list, select the attached MFD to
use for storing the grid (or use the OpenWorks project).
Output Grid Name
Name of the new grid file. These names can be up to 24 characters in
length, and can contain interval blanks. The default name supplied by
Z-MAP Plus adds a G/ to the value of the Z-field. This field is editable.
Number of Rows and Columns
As you set parameters in Point Gridding Plus, these fields display an
estimate of the size of the new grid. You can not change these values
directly. They are provided for your convenience.
Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab has two panels: Smoothing and Other Controls.
Smoothing Panel
The Smoothing panel parameters control grid flexing. You can use
flexing (sometimes called filtering or relaxation) to simultaneously
smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary purpose is to
remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface that are not
supported by data. These irregularities are put in the surface during
initialization and are not desirable in the final surface model.
Many gridding methods have smoothing parameters. For more details
about each of these parameters, see page 520.
Flexing Type
The Flexing Type button shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters, or no filter.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
This parameter is different from the Search Radius parameter, which is set in
the Primary Parameters dialog box.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Centerline Fault
To create a fault polygon from this
file, the centerline file must contain
x, y, seg ID, Heave, and Throw fields.
Filled Fault
Interpolates z-values along the edge of
the polygon;thus contouring across the polygon
to join contour levels is possible.
Expanded Fault
Defines a polygon filled with null
or ZNON values.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Least Squares
Weighted Average
Closest Point
Distance
Point Density
For these algorithms, the output data file eliminates points with ZNON
Z-values and points too far outside the Area of Interest (AOI) to be used
in gridding.
For the Projected Slopes Algorithm, this file holds the input data. In
addition, the output data file contains the DZ/DX and DZ/DY fields
used in gridding.
For Isopach or Bounded Range Gridding, this file holds the input data.
In addition, the output data file contains the modified bounding
Z-values.
For each output file to be produced by your execution of Point Gridding
Plus, select one of the attached MFDs or the scratch file. When you click
the parameter box, a popup menu appears, listing the MFDs and a
scratch file attached to the Z-MAP Plus session. Select the destination
MFD for storing the output file.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
If the type of data is Normal, Z-MAP Plus uses the Projected Slopes
Algorithm to calculate DZ/DX, DZ/DY, and assign a weight of one to
each data point on the grid.
DZ/DX Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in X, or the
first derivative in the X-direction. A list of DZ/DX Fields on your Input
Control Point file appears. Point to and click the field you want.
DZ/DY Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in Y, or the
first derivative in the Y-direction. A list of DZ/DY fields on your Input
Control Point file appears. Point to and click the field you want.
GRADIENT-WEIGHT Field
The Projected Slopes Algorithm assigns weights to the Z-values inside
a circular area around a node before averaging them. Z-values closest to
the grid nodes receive the greater weight. If you assign your own
weights, higher numbers receive the greater weight.
Data Type
Normal. This data type is appropriate for data that does not contain
gradient information (X, Y, Z).
Expanded. This data type is appropriate for data that does contain
gradient information and weights (X, Y, Z, DZ/DX, DZ/DY, W).
If your data type is expanded, you will have the option to supply
information about additional fields.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Projected Slopes
Isopach
Bounded Range
Kriging
Projected Slopes
Isopach
Bounded Range
Kriging
Compression factor
Semivariogram
Boundary tolerance
Semivariogram nugget,
sill, and range
Compression factor
X direction block
Y direction block
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Projected Slopes
Isopach
Bounded Range
Kriging
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Upper Z-bound
This number represents the upper bound in Z of the bounded range.
Lower Z-bound
This number represents the lower bound in Z of the bounded range.
Boundary Tolerance
Enter a value that will be used to test each control points Z-value to see
if it is close to a boundary limit (Z-minimum and Z-maximum).
Z-values in this tolerance of the upper or lower limits are treated as if
their values were equal to those limits. The tolerance defaults to zero.
An example of Boundary Tolerance
When gridding Net to Gross, the lower and upper limits might be zero
and one and the Boundary Tolerance .03. Then, any points with
Z-values between .03 and .03 are treated as if they were zero, and
points with Z-values between .97 and 1.03 are treated as if their values
were one. Because these control points are now considered to be at the
limits, they will be replaced with estimated values that are beyond the
limits before the grid is calculated.
Compression Factor
The value entered for the compression factor will force the boundary
between negative and positive grid node values (the zero contour when
mapped) either closer to or farther from real valued data points
(nonzeros). The zero thickness contour will be drawn closer to the
zero-valued data when this parameter is reduced during Isopach
gridding. The zero contour will be drawn closer to the non-zero data if
the compression factor is increased. The default (2) causes the curve to
pass approximately halfway between zero and non-zero data. The
allowed range is 0 to 5.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Select semivariogram
Spherical
Linear
Exponential
Gaussian
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Semivariogram
Semivariogram Nugget
Semivariogram Sill
Semivariogram Range
X-direction Block
Y-direction Block
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Semivariogram Models
The four semivariogram models are:
Spherical
S(h) = C0 + C[1.5(h/R) 0.5(h/R)]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Linear
S(h) = C0 + C*h
Exponential
S(h) = C0 + C[1.exp(h/R)]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Gaussian
S(h) = C0 + C[1.exp(h /R) 2]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Semivariogram Nugget
The Nugget is one of the three variables which defines the
semivariogram when using the Kriging capability provided by Point
Gridding Plus. The Nugget is the sum of measurement noise and
localized fracture effects which reduce the accuracy of any single
measured Z-value. A positive Nugget implies that a grid model created
using Kriging may not exactly honor the input Z values which are used
to define the model.
Semivariogram Nugget
Semivariogram Sill
In the picture above, 10 on the Y-axis represents the Nugget or the
distance between data points calculated by the Semivariogram when the
empirical distance is zero.
The Sill = the Nugget + 100, or 110.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Semivariogram Range
The Range is the user-specified distance between any two points in
space at which the correlation between the values of the two points is
assumed to reach a fixed and uniform minimum value. Range is one of
the three variables which define a semivariogram and must be specified
only when using the Kriging capability provided by Point Gridding.
X-direction Block
This is the block dimension in the X-direction used during Kriging. If
X-direction block value is zero, then point kriging is performed.
Y-direction Block
This is the block dimension in the Y-direction used during Kriging. If
Y-direction block value is zero, then point kriging is performed.
Output Kriging Error Grid File Name and Master File
The kriging error grid shows the estimated standard deviation of the
kriging horizon model. The Error Grid can show where more control is
needed or where the Kriging model cannot be trusted.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Point Gridding
Enter from Modeling in Z-MAP Plus
window
Select Z-field
Faults
Review Results/Gridding
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Overview
Point Gridding uses nearby x,y,z data to calculate values of nodes in a
grid. Any data set that has values at x,y locations and would be
reasonable to contour by hand can be gridded with this option. Input data
are referred to as randomly distributed, which means they need not be
digitized contours or line oriented data (seismic). However, data in those
formats are acceptable.
Point Gridding allows you to specify:
You can also force the size of a grid to match that of another grid or pass
values of a previously built grid through to the grid being built.
Grids are built in three stages:
Data and Parameter Input sets the control point file, Z-field, fault file,
and control grid to be used during the gridding process.
Grid Initialization computes the initial node values. You select from
nine algorithms. Each algorithm produces different results and is
designed for different data and geologic problems. The default is a Least
Squares algorithm. Once an algorithm has been selected, you may set
the primary and secondary gridding parameters and the data distribution
parameters before continuing to the Post Processing phase.
Post Processing refines and adjusts the initial values to more closely
honor data and to smooth the surface. To do this the grid is refined by
dividing the X and Y grid increments by 2, once or several times. Before
and after each refinement the surface (grid nodes) is filtered to smooth
it and tie to the data. You control how much refinement, smoothing, and
honoring of data is done. The default is one refinement and use of a
Biharmonic filter. A gridding report is output to the processing window
once this option is applied.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Control Points
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want. A field
will be selected from this file and used as input when the option
executes. The grid node values will be based on the control points
(usually depth values from wells).
Z-field
A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want.
Z-values in this field will be used when this option executes. Z-values
are usually depth or time values.
Faults
A list of fault files is presented. Point to and click the fault file you want.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. When faults
are used, grid nodes are calculated using only data located on the same
side of the faults as the node. A fault file must have been previously
constructed in order to be available for this option.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Least Squares
Projected Slopes
Weighted Average
Closest Point
Distance
Isopach
Bounded Range
Linear Trend
Moving Plate
These choices are discussed in the following text.
Least Squares (default) Each grid value is computed by fitting a
weighted planar least squares fit to the data in a circular area around the
grid node. The grid value is the Z-value of the plane at the grid location.
This method tends to smoothly pass through data with no sharp peaks
and over projection is possible. It is the most frequently used gridding
method as it works well for many types of surface data.
Projected Slopes At each control point, the program computes the
local slope (strike and dip) of the surface. These may be combined with
user-input slopes. Planar surfaces having these slopes are projected from
each data point into void areas. A grid nodes value is the average of the
distance-weighted Z-values of these planes at that node. Only data
inside a circular area around each node are used. This method tends to
exaggerate highs and lows. It is useful for monoclines where dips should
cause the surface to project above or below data values.
Weighted Average Each initial grid value is computed as the
weighted average of data in a circular area around the grid node. This
method flattens towards the regional average and consequently tends to
peak at highs and lows. It is considered good for equipotential type
surfaces.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Closest Point Each initial grid value is set equal to the value of the
control point that is nearest to the grid location. This method is
sometimes called the polygon method or discrete method. Normally it is
not reasonable to flex (filter) this grid. This algorithm is applied with
moderate to poor success on average lithology data (a number at a point
represents the lithology at that point). The degree of success improves
with more and better distributed data.
Distance Sometimes referred to as Distance to Closest Point, this
algorithm produces a grid whose values are the distance from each node
to the closest data point. Normally it is not reasonable to flex (filter) this
grid. This type of grid is used extensively in computer mapping to build
masking grids. A distance grid combined with a blanking grid operation
places ZNONs (null data) at grid nodes beyond or within a certain
distance of data. That modified distance grid can then be used to control
where gridding is done (Control Grid) or where filtering is done
(Masking Grid). The technique is useful for updating old grids with new
data.
Isopach This algorithm uses the Least Squares algorithm to calculate
node values. However, before node values are computed, every zero
valued control point is replaced with a negative estimated value. The
resulting grid will contain negatives where there is no thickness. A
contour map made from this grid will have a zero contour which passes
between the non-zero and zero control points. The Isopach Gridding
process can be altered (Curve Compression Factor) so that this contour
moves closer to, or farther from, real valued control points.
Bounded Range This method is used to grid data that has an upper
and/or lower bound to the Z-values, such as Net to Gross data. It uses
the Least Squares algorithm to calculate grid node values. However,
before grid node values are computed, values of control points that are
equal to the upper limit or equal to the lower limit are replaced with
estimated values above and below the limits, respectively. The resulting
grid contains values above and below the limits. A contour map made
from this grid has limit contours that pass between the limit and
real-valued control points. The Bounded Gridding process can be
altered (Curve Compression Factor) so that the limit contours move
closer to, or farther from, real valued control points.
Linear Trend This is the Moving Least Squares algorithm, except
that all data are weighted equally (Moving Least Squares weights by
distance). For unfaulted data, this has the effect of building a first order
trend grid. With faults, this algorithm produces first order trends in fault
blocks but will create very rough transitions from one block to the next.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Primary Parameters
After initializing grid,
enter from Primary
Parameters on Point
Proceed to
Secondary
Parameters on
Point Gridding Primary Parameters Workflow
The Primary Parameters dialog box allows you to specify:
X and Y limits
X and Y grid increments
maximum and minimum Z-values
distance to search when looking for data
how control grids are used (if used).
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Secondary Parameters
After setting primary parameters,
enter from Secondary Parameters
on Point Gridding main menu
specify the distance away from data which will force node value
calculation
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Flexing Parameters
After setting secondary
parameters, enter from Flexing
Parameters on Point Gridding
main menu
Biharmo
Laplacian
Combinati
None
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25000, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
Cutoff is a common flexing parameter used in many gridding methods.
For more information, see page 525.
Number of Refinements
Enter a value that represents the number of times the final grid intervals
are doubled when determining the settings for the initial grid increment
values. These initial grid increments will then be used to build an initial
grid, that initial grid will be resampled to half its grid increments and
then flexed. This process is repeated Number of Refinement times until
the final grid increment is reached. This defaults to 1 and the range of
valid numbers is 0 to 5.
Many gridding methods use refinement. For more information, see
page 393.
Number of Flex Passes
In the Number of Flex Passes box, enter the number of flexing passes to
execute (if the Control of Passes setting is FLEX = NUMPASS) or the
maximum number of flexing passes to execute (if the Control of Passes
button reads FLEX <= NUMPASS). The default value is 10.
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Smoothness Modulus
In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to many types of
gridding methods. To learn more, see page 525.
Control Grid
A list of grids is presented. Point to and click the grid you wish to use as
the control grid. This is an optional parameter. Information from the
control grid such as X and Y limits and increments, node values, and
ZNON locations can be used when gridding. (See Control Grid Usage
on page 439 in the Primary Parameters topic.)
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
If the data type is Normal, the program uses the Projected Slopes
algorithm to calculate DZ/DX and DZ/DY, and to assign a weight of one
to each data point in the grid.
DZ/DX Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in X, or the
first derivative in the X-direction.
DZ/DY Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in Y, or the
first derivative in the Y-direction.
Z-weight Field
The Projected Slopes Algorithm assigns weights to the Z-values inside
a circular area around a node before averaging them. Z-values closest to
the grid nodes receive the greater weight. If you assign your own
weights, higher numbers receive the greater weight.
R2003.12.0
ZNON POINTS = 0
7400.00 )
7500.00 )
7200.00 )
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
POINT NO.
MIN-X
MIN-Y
MIN-Z
AVG-Z
REL-Z
=
=
=
=
=
2896.12
2055.00
2025.00
440.595
0
83.95
1
15.06
93.81
88.33
2
3
0.99 0.00
6.19 0.00
11.67 0.00
4
0.00
0.00
0.00
5
0.00
0.00
0.00
6
0.00
0.00
0.00
7
0.00
0.00
0.00
Points Per Cell This row indicates the number of data points
per grid cell.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
By understanding the goals for each of these categories, you can see that
one category cannot be improved without degrading another. The goal
is to reach an acceptable compromise. The best way to learn how to do
this is practice.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Contour Gridding
Select Modeling Contour
Gridding in Z-MAP Plus window
Were
contours built
using faults?
Yes
No
Compute primary
parameters from
input data?
No
Yes
Flex the
grid?
No
Yes
Yes
No
Enter flexing
parameters
No
Honor point
data when
building grid?
Yes
Apply
Results of CTOG appear
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Overview
Contour Gridding, sometimes known as Contour to Grid (CTOG), is an
interpolation technique which builds a grid from digitized contours. The
algorithm uses knowledge that adjacent points of equal value were
digitized from a continuous contour line to build a grid that accurately
honors the digitized contours.
In addition to digitized contours, Contour Gridding can also use seismic
line data (profiles) and/or well data (scattered data). These profile and
scattered data may also be interpretive data created to control the form
of the grid to be built. Other controls on the gridding process include
faults, x,y,z limits, grid increments, filters, and upper and lower limits
during filtering.
Contour Gridding Algorithm
Contour Gridding first reconstructs the original contours by connecting
the sequentially digitized contour points with straight line segments.
This is the Error Check Contour File.
Then Contour Gridding constructs a network of four search lines, two
along rows and columns of the grid to be built, and two at 45 degrees to
those search lines which pass through node locations. Contour values
are stored with these search lines at every spot where the lines cross a
reconstructed digitized contour.
When it is time to calculate a value for a grid node, only the four search
lines that radiate from that node are used. For each line, the contour
crossing on either side of the node and nearest to it are used. A straight
line is fit between those two point and a value from that line is calculated
at the grid node location. This is done for the other three search lines and
the average of all four lines is used as the nodes initial value. After the
initialization, filtering is applied to these node values.
Contours
Select a data file from list of files of type DATA or CNTR (contour) that
appears. The file you choose is used as the digitized contour input file.
If this file is of type Marker or No Marker (as described in the following
topic), the first field of type Z-field is used as the digitized contour input.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Here the marker is nine 9s in the X field. The first record of the file is
assumed to have a marker in the X field and the second field is expected
to contain the Z value of the contour data that follows. The next two
records are X and Y coordinates for digitized points along the contour.
The next time nine 9s (Marker) is encountered in the X field will signify
a change in contour, and possibly a change in contour value.
Possible choices for this parameter are described in the following text.
The locations on either side of the + represent the X-field and Y-field
(e.g., X-field+Y-field for Marker+Marker). Although the notation
indicates which of the two fields is to contain the Marker, the fields need
not be in this order in the file.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Faults
A list of fault files is presented. Point to and click the fault file you want.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. When faults
are used, grid nodes are calculated using only data located on the same
side of the faults as the node. A fault file must have been previously
constructed in order to be available for this option.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Primary Parameters
Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
X and Y limits
ZNON value
search radius
extrapolation distance
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Horz+Vert Generate only two sets of lines, one along grid rows
and the other along grid columns.
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Extrapolation Distance
Enter a number representing the distance away from the data perimeter
within which grid node values can be calculated. All nodes beyond this
distance are assigned a ZNON value. The default is 2 times the grid
increment.
How the Data Perimeter is Determined
If a grid nodes search line has contour or profile intersections on both
sides of the node and the distance between those two intersections is less
than the Search Radius, then the intersections are used to Interpolate a
value for the node. If the search line has an intersection on only one side
of the node, or the distance between intersections exceeds the Search
Radius, then only one value is used to Extrapolate a value for the node.
When all of a nodes search line values are determined through
Extrapolation, then a test is run to determine if the node is greater than
Extrapolation Distance away from the closest intersection. If the node is
farther away than Extrapolation distance, it gets assigned a ZNON. If
any of the nodes search line values are determined by Interpolation,
then a value is calculated for the node.
Name of Intersection Point File
Enter the name of the file to create. The name can be a maximum of 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks. An Intersection Point
File contains the locations where the search lines intersect digitized
contours and, optionally, the profile data. The file is of type DATA
(X,Y,Z). It is commonly saved so that the generated grid can be filtered
more without having to go though the entire Contour Gridding process.
These are the points used during default filtering in Contour Gridding
(they are not the control points that you can also have Contour Gridding
use during filtering).
Master File for Point File
When you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, listing the
attached MFDs and scratch file. Select the destination MFD to use for
saving the output file.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Flexing Parameters
This dialog box allows you to select the type of flexing to perform, when
to stop flexing, how much to honor the data, whether contour/
search-line intersection points are used, and whether contour constraints
are used. This dialog box also enables you to specify an upper and lower
band (surfaces) within which the flexed surface must remain.
Flexing, sometimes called Filter or Relaxation, is used to
simultaneously smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary
purpose is to remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface
that are not supported by data. These irregularities were put into the
surface during initialization, and are undesirable in the final surface
model.
The Flexing parameters are common to many gridding methods. To
learn more, see page 520.
Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing Type shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters, or no filter. (For a description of the flexing types, see
page 524.)
Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
Number of Flex Passes
In the Number of Flex Passes box, enter the number of flexing passes to
execute (if the Control of Passes setting is FLEX = NUMPASS) or the
maximum number of flexing passes to execute (if the Control of Passes
button reads FLEX <= NUMPASS). The default value is 10.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Profiles
Select a data file from the list presented. You will have the option to
select a field from this file, which is used as profile input when the
option executes. This file is not required. Use profile input only if you
want to use the data to further control the surface as you build the grid.
Profiles may be used to control the shape of the surface in areas where
contours are sparse because the surface is relatively flat, or inside small
fault blocks where only one or two contours exist. Profiles are similar to
contours in that they must be digitized sequentially. However, unlike
contours, the Z-value is usually different for each point along the
profile. Contour Gridding uses profiles in the same general way as
contours. The intersections of cross-section baselines and profile lines
are computed, and Z-values from the profiles are used to further define
the shape of the network of cross sections. Then Contour Gridding uses
linear interpolation along the profile to determine the surface elevation
where the cross-section baselines and profiles cross.
A profile is a file of type DATA that contains either
X-, Y-, and Z-fields and special records that indicate the start of a
new profile
X-, Y-, and Z-fields, and a SEG ID field that indicates (by
changing ID) the start of a new profile
If a file contains X, Y, Z, and special records, the first record in the file
has a special number (Marker) in the X-field and dummy values (which
are ignored) in the Y-field and Z-field. Each time a marker of this type
is encountered, Contour Gridding assumes that a new profile is starting.
Files with these special records are generated by Landmarks digitizing
program Z-CAP.
Profiles are like cross sections that have X-, Y-, and Z-values at each
digitized point along the section. Straight line connections are made
between these x,y,z points along each profile. The straight line
connections that intersect Contour Gridding search lines create
Intersection Points for use during the gridding process. These profiles
are commonly used to more adequately control gridding between or
away from contours, near faults, and in areas of rapid gradient changes.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Z-Field (Profiles)
A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want. This
input field will be used when the option executes. Fields in this list were
picked from a previously selected file.
Control Points
A list of data files is presented. Point to and click the data file you want.
A field will be selected from this file and used as input control points
when Flexing executes. This file is not required and should only be used
when you want to honor point data (wells) when building the grid. To
see how these data are used, see Smoothness Modulus on page 462.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Trendform Gridding
The Trendform Gridding algorithm creates two-dimensional
grid-based surface models, while imposing geologic constraints on the
models and the contour maps produced from them.
The ability to impose geologic constraints is not shared by other
Z-MAP Plus gridding algorithms, and is the primary reason for using
Trendform Gridding instead of other gridding algorithms. The geologic
constraints are encoded in already existing grids called form grids. Form
grids communicate the geoscientists interpretations to the gridding
process and may include:
form grid
The most challenging part of Trendform Gridding is selecting the right
gridding bias value. You may need to experiment with several values
before you come up with one that produces the desired results.
This topic includes the following subtopics:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Isopach grids, which are also natural form grids because the same
geologic processes that shape the thickness of an isopach affect the
distribution of rock properties in that isopach.
User digitized contour data which has been gridded using Contour
Gridding (CTOG)
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Gridding Bias
The bias factor (which should always be a positive number) controls
how closely the gridding process honors the form grid. In general, the
larger the bias factor the closer gridding honors the form grid.
Faults in Trendform Gridding
You can specify one, two, or no fault sets to use in Trendform Gridding.
One of the fault sets is associated with the form grid. If the fault set is an
opaque barrier, it serves as a block to the movement of information
during gridding just as with any other Landmark gridding module. If the
set has embedded throw values, the values are used to remove the throw
from the input form grid, so the grid appears to be continuous. Use a
throw fault for gridding porosity or water saturation properties that are
expected to follow the pattern of a faulted structure grid before it was
faulted.
The second set of Trendform Gridding faults is associated with the
output dataset. Again, if these are opaque faults, they serve to block the
movement of information during gridding. If they are throw faults, data
points have their Z values adjusted when they are used to initialize grid
nodes across faults.
The advantage of using two input fault sets is apparent if you perform
conformable gridding of faulted surfaces. For example, suppose the
form grid is a structure grid obtained from seismic data and the
conformable surface is defined only in well picks. You can use the form
grid faults to remove discontinuities from the form grid and use the data
faults to add them to the output surface.
Recommendations
R2003.12.0
At the other extreme, results suffer when too little data is used. Do
not expect good results when you use a complex form grid
together with a dataset that contains three wells.
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
A very fine row and column spacing in the form grid may be
required to impose an interpretation on closely spaced data.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
When you create a confidence field, always use positive numbers (including
zero) for confidence factors. You can apply a confidence factor to each of the
z-values in the data file.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Viewing Results
To view the results of the Trendform grid, follow these steps.
1.
2.
When you contour a form grid, use the COARSEST setting for the Curve
Sampling Density option.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Model the fault faces cutting a horizon, given fault geometry data.
To understand the new types of fault files that Line Gridding Plus
generates, see the illustration on page 419 under Point Gridding Plus.
Line Grid Plus is a macro derived from the ZCL process
LINEGRIDPLUS. For detailed information about this macro, see the
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL. To display this guide,
select Help Online Manual Macros Manual, then find the
LINEGRIDPLUS topic.
In the Line Gridding Plus interactive macro dialog boxes, specify the
following information:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
First
Line Gridding
Plus Parameter
Dialog
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Output Type
The output type controls whether a grid is constructed, a line file is cut
by faults, the fault-cut line file is saved, or informs Line Gridding that a
line file has already been cut by faults. When gridding faulted line data,
each line must be broken (cut) when it crosses a fault. These sublines are
given distinct line names and stored in a new lines file. This prevents
line gridding from incorrectly interpolating across a fault. By default
this is done automatically when a fault file is selected.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
Cut+Save+Grid. Cut the input line file using the selected fault file,
save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), and build the grid
using the cut line data. This saved fault-cut line file can be used as the
input Line File if Line Gridding is rerun. The faults would still need to
be selected, and this parameter set to Already Cut.
Cut+Save+Nogrid. Cut the input line file using the selected fault file,
save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), but do Not build the
grid using the cut line data. This saved Fault-cut Line File can be used
as the input Line File when Line Gridding is used to build the grid. The
faults would still need to be selected, and this parameter set to Already
Cut.
Cut+Nosave+Grid (default). Cut the input line file using the selected
fault file, do Not save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), and
build the grid using the cut line data. If Line Gridding was to be rerun
with this same data the line file would again need to be cut with the
faults.
Already Cut. If you are using faults and the line file you are to grid has
already been cut and saved, you can use the saved version as the input
line file and avoid recutting the original lines. When using a saved
fault-cut line file you will still need to select the fault file since the
gridding process needs to know their location. Remember, dont use the
original line file, instead use the Fault-cut Line File as the input Line
File.
Distance Between Point to Cut Line
Enter a number for the maximum distance allowed between two
consecutive points on a line. If the points are farther apart than this
distance, the line is divided into two lines. Since these two points will
lie on separate lines, no interpolation is performed between them when
calculating intersection values between search lines and input data lines.
The default value is ten times the X increment.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
The terms Initial and Final gridding intervals are sometimes used. You
must provide the final gridding intervals. Z-MAP Plus determines the
initial gridding intervals, based on the number of specified refinements
:
Second Line
Gridding Plus
Parameter Dialog
Use the second parameter dialog box to set the following parameters.
X Min, X Max, Y Min, Y Max, Z Min, Z Max
Enter values to use as the output grids minimum and maximum X and
Y coordinate values. The default values for these parameters delineate
an area that is slightly larger (10% of the X or Y range) than the smallest
rectangle that contains the data. If you use a control grid, the default
values are derived from the control grid.
You may want to round the default coordinates to numbers more
appropriate for your project. However, do not make the area any bigger
than required, since the added grid positions will increase the gridding
time, and it may not be possible to compute realistic values if they are
too far from the data.
Enter values that represent the lowest and highest Z-values you want to
appear in the grid. These values default to numbers that are slightly
lower and higher (10% of the range), respectively, than the smallest and
largest data value for the Z-field being gridded. This allows a small
amount of overshoot of grid values above or below data values.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
This parameter is different from the Search Radius parameter which is set in the
Primary Parameters dialog box.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Extrapolation Mode
Extrapolation Mode controls whether grid nodes outside the data
perimeter are assigned Z-values up to the grid edges or just to a specified
distance from the perimeter. Possible choices for this parameter include:
X-Distance (default). Extrapolated values will be calculated away from
the data perimeter as far as the value entered in the Extrapolation
Distance parameter. Using this setting and setting the Extrapolation
Distance parameter to a very large number will have the same effect as
choosing Grid Edges.
Grid Edges. The Extrapolation Distance parameter are ignored and
node values calculated everywhere in the grid.
Third
Line Gridding Plus
Parameter Dialog
The third Line Gridding Plus dialog allows you to set the following
flexing parameters. The Flexing parameters are common to many
gridding methods. To learn more about how they work, see page 393.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Extrapolation Distance
Enter a number representing the distance beyond the perimeter of the
data within which grid nodes are forced to be calculated. The default is
equal to the Search Radius.
If search radius, minimum number of points, number of sectors, or any
other parameters restrict node calculation to less than this distance,
those parameters are overridden by this parameter. Override means that
node values will be calculated even if those other parameters would
prevent this from happening. To prevent this override, you need to set
the Extrapolation Distance to 0.
Minimum Number of Fault Crossings
In the data collection phase of gridding, this number refers to the
maximum number of fault crossings allowed between a data point and a
grid node
Gridding Extrapolation Limit Method
There are five possible methods to use with data hull extrapolations.
These methods are common gridding parameters and are defined on
page 392 in the Data Hulls description. The default is DATA
DISTRIBUTION which sets no limits.
Number of Refinements
Refinements halve the grid increment to allow you to achieve finer
detail for your map. Enter a value that represents the number of times
the final grid intervals are doubled when determining the settings for the
initial grid increment values. These initial grid increments are used to
build an initial grid, that initial grid will be resampled to half its grid
increments and then flexed. This process is repeated number of
Refinement times until the final grid increment is reached. This defaults
to 1 and the range of valid values is 0 to 5.
Refinements are used in many types of gridding methods, and are
described further on page 393.
Type of Flexing
This parameter controls which type of flexing is done (which filter is
used). The Type of Flexing parameter is common to many gridding
methods. To learn more, see page 524.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Smoothness Modulus
In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to many types of
gridding methods. To learn more, see page 525.
Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing Type shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters, or no filter. (For a description of the flexing types, see
page 524.)
Number of Flex Passes
In the Number of Flex Passes box, enter the number of flexing passes to
execute (if the Control of Passes setting is FLEX = NUMPASS) or the
maximum number of flexing passes to execute (if the Control of Passes
button reads FLEX <= NUMPASS). The default value is 10.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
Use the final parameter dialog box to set the Dip Angle Unit of measure
(either DEGREES or RADIANS) and the type of report printed to the
System window.
Report Type
You have three choices concerning the extent of the processing analysis
report: None, Partial, and Full.
None indicates that you do not wish to see the report.
Partial gives you a summary report.
Full gives you a full report.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Line Gridding
Overview
Line Gridding is an interpolation technique which builds a grid from
line data such as seismic, gravity, or bathymetric surveys. The algorithm
uses knowledge that adjacent points in the file, if they have the same line
name, represent a continuous profile along the surface. With this
knowledge, the algorithm can be an order of magnitude faster than the
Least Squares algorithm for the same data, and yet produce results of
comparable quality.
In addition to digitized line data, Line Gridding can also use randomly
scattered data, such as well data. Other controls on the gridding process
include faults, x,y,z limits, grid increments, filters, and upper and lower
limits during filtering.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Yes
Is surface
cut by
faults?
No
Define gridding
parameters or
accept defaults?
Define
Accept
Yes
Flex the
grid?
No
Apply
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Line File
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want. This file
will be used as input when the option executes. The line data file is a
control point file (seismic data) where data is ordered as consecutive
points along lines. It must have a line name field in order to distinguish
one line from another.
If faults are being used and a Fault-cut Line File was previously created,
then that file can be input here rather than in the original Line File. When
this is done, you must set the parameter Select Output Type to Already
Cut.
Line Z-field
Select the horizon (depth or time field) for which you are making the
grid. This input field will be used when the option executes. Fields in
this list were picked from a previously selected file.
Faults
A list of fault files is presented. Point to and click the fault file you want.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. When faults
are used, grid nodes are calculated using only data located on the same
side of the faults as the node. A fault file must have been previously
constructed in order to be available for this option.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
name of the line file modified by intersection with a the fault file
R2003.12.0
Cut+Save+Grid Cut the input line file using the selected fault
file, save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), and build
the grid using the cut line data. This saved fault-cut line file can be
used as the input Line File if Line Gridding is rerun. The faults
would still need to be selected, and this parameter set to Already
Cut.
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Already Cut If you are using faults and the line file you are to
grid has already been cut and saved, you can use the saved version
as the input line file and avoid recutting the original lines. When
using a saved fault-cut line file you will still need to select the fault
file since the gridding process needs to know their location.
Remember, dont use the original line file, instead use the Fault-cut
Line File as the input Line File.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Primary Parameters
This dialog box allows you to specify the X and Y limits, X and Y grid
increments, maximum and minimum Z-values, distance to search when
looking for data, the maximum separation distance between lines for
data to be interpolated, the extrapolation mode, and extrapolation
distance.
Most users have found that altering grid increments has the most
significant effect on surface form and honoring data. They have also
found that, for large volumes of data, reducing the Search Radius will
speed up the gridding process dramatically.
Minimum and Maximum X and Y Coordinates
Enter values to be used as the minimum and maximum X and Y
coordinates for the output grid. The default values for these parameters
delineate an area that is slightly larger (10% of X or Y range) than the
smallest rectangle that contains your data.
You may want to round the default coordinates to numbers more
appropriate for your project. However, do not make the area any bigger
than required since the added grid positions will increase the gridding
time and it may not be possible to compute realistic values if they are
too far from the data.
X and Y Gridding Increments
Enter numbers representing the distance in the X and Y direction,
respectively, across the grid cell. These define the X and Y gridding
increments for your grid. The increments default to the same value in
both directions. They are calculated as:
( XMax XMin ) ( YMax YMin )
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8 Number of Points
The default is usually smaller than desired, and was designed to try and
honor every shotpoint. Often, you will not want to honor every shotpoint
because of the inherent noise in the data. Grid intervals that place 2 or 3
shot points in a grid cell will sometimes produce a smoother more
appealing surface model.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Many mappers feel that the features of importance should control the
grid interval decision rather than the data. A good rule-of-thumb is to
select a gridding interval that is half the size of the smallest feature of
importance to your project. If you are interested in closures that are 100
feet across, choose a 50 foot gridding interval. However, do not make
the gridding interval any smaller than necessary, since gridding time
increases rapidly as cell size goes down (e.g. cutting the grid increments
in half will increase the compute time by a factor of about 4 for Point
Gridding and, although not as severe, will still have an impact on Line
Gridding).
The terms initial and final gridding intervals are sometimes used. You
must provide the final gridding intervals. Z-MAP Plus determine the
initial gridding intervals, based on the number of specified refinements.
Minimum and Maximum Z Values
Enter numbers representing the maximum and minimum Z-values for
the output grid. These values are defaulted to numbers that are slightly
smaller and larger (10% of Z-range), respectively, than the smallest and
largest data value for the Z-field being gridded. This allows a small
amount of overshoot of the grid values above or below the data values.
ZNON Value
Enter the value to be used as ZNON (null value) when this field is
written by Z-MAP Plus. This value can be any valid number supported
by your computer. It is best not to use a number between the minimum
and maximum value in the field, as this creates many problems when
building grids and when drawing contours from those grids. The
Z-MAP Plus default is 0.1E31.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Search Radius
This is not really used as a radius but as a distance. Enter the distance
(Search Radius) that is the maximum allowed separation between
search-line/data-line intersection points, along a search line. When two
adjacent intersections are spaced wider apart than the specified Search
Radius, no grid node values will be Interpolated for that search line
using those two intersections.
Instead, the closest of the intersections to the grid node are used to
determine an Extrapolated value (a line is fit between two intersection
points on that side and closest to the node and projected to the node). If
interpolated values can be generated for any of that nodes other search
lines, then this extrapolation is disregarded and the interpolation(s) are
used. If all of that nodes search line values are determined by
extrapolation, then those values will be averaged to determine the
nodes initial value.
The default value is half the diagonal of the grid.
Break Line Distance
Enter a number representing the maximum allowed distance between
two consecutive points on the same line. If the points are greater than
this distance apart, then the line will be separated into two lines. Since
these two points will then lie on separate lines, no interpolation will be
performed between these points when calculating intersection values
between search lines and input data lines. The default is ten times the
X-increment.
Extrapolation Mode
Extrapolation Mode controls whether grid nodes outside the data
perimeter are assigned Z-values up to the grid edges or just to a specified
distance from the perimeter. Possible choices for this parameter include:
X-Distance (default). Extrapolated values will be calculated away from
the data perimeter as far as the value entered in the Extrapolation
Distance parameter. Using this setting and setting the Extrapolation
Distance parameter to a very large number will have the same effect as
choosing Grid Edges.
Grid Edges. The Extrapolation Distance parameter will be ignored and
node values calculated everywhere in the grid.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Extrapolation Distance
Enter a number representing the distance away from the data perimeter
within which grid node values can be calculated. All nodes beyond this
distance are assigned a ZNON value. The default is 2 times the grid
increment.
How the Data Perimeter is Determined
If a grid nodes search line has search-line/data-line intersection points
on both sides of the node, and the distance between those two
intersections is less than the Search Radius, then the intersections are
used to Interpolate a value for the node. If the search line has an
intersection point on only one side of the node or the distance between
intersection points exceeds the Search Radius, then only one value is
used (the nearest) to Extrapolate a value for the node. When all of a
nodes search line values are determined through Extrapolation, then a
test is run to determine if the node is greater than Extrapolation Distance
away from the closest intersection point. If more than this distance, then
the node is assigned a ZNON. If any of the nodes search line values are
determined by Interpolation, then a value is calculated for the node.
Flexing Parameters
This dialog box allows you to select:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing Type shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters or no filter.
Biharmonic (default) Adjusts grid values so that the surface
resembles a rigid surface (like a handsaw) that bends slowly and
smoothly from one inflection point to another. This is sometimes called
a minimum curvature or minimum tension surface.
Laplacian Adjusts grid values so that the surface resembles a
balloon or soap bubble that comes quickly back to the average surface
position away from inflection points. Sticking your finger into a balloon
would cause the surface to dimple at your finger and quickly return to
its original form away from your finger. This is sometimes called a high
tension surface.
Combination This is a repeated application of first the Biharmonic
and then the Laplacian filter. Its results are not easily predictable, but
fall somewhere between Biharmonic and Laplacian, probably a little
closer to the Biharmonic, since it is the first filter applied.
Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
For information about how the Cutoff test works, see page 525.
Number of Refinements
Enter a value that represents the number of times the final grid intervals
are doubled when determining the settings for the initial grid increment
values. These initial grid increments will then be used to build an initial
grid. Next, that grid will be resampled to half its grid increments and
then flexed. This process is repeated Number of Refinement times until
the final grid increment is reached. This defaults to 0 and the range of
valid numbers is 0 to 5.
Number of Flex Passes
In the Number of Flex Passes box, enter the number of flexing passes to
execute (if the Control of Passes setting is FLEX = NUMPASS) or the
maximum number of flexing passes to execute (if the Control of Passes
button reads FLEX <= NUMPASS). The default value is 10.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Apply
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Overview
Trend Fit Gridding produces a grid of the regional components of a
surface such as the general dip or the major highs and lows. A trend grid
can be built using either data or another grid. The extent to which the
trend grid fits the data is controlled by the number of terms that are used
to compute the trend.
Once a trend grid has been built, it can be subtracted from a
conventionally built grid (point, line, or contour gridding) to create a
residual grid. The residual represents the local (small) variations of the
surface from the trend. Often these variations are masked by the regional
component, and consequently this technique can provide significant
geologic insight. The trend grid will itself often provide significant
geologic information.
Another application of trend grids is to assist in building grids of
complex geologic surfaces. Standard algorithms may have difficulty
modeling a particular surface form. If the trend can be removed from
that data, then those algorithms will often be able to effectively model
the residuals. The trend and residual grids can then be combined to
create the final surface grid
.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
X and Y limits
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Order
----0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
When computing a trend grid from an existing grid, you can block
average. Block averaging divides your grid into sets of blocks, each
containing an equal number of rows and columns. The grid nodes in
each block are averaged. These average values are used to determine the
trend fit instead of the individual grid nodes. This method reduces the
CPU time required to generate a grid, normally, without causing
significant changes in the results.
Trend gridding is sensitive to anomalous data values (spikes in the grid).
Block averaging can often reduce the effects of individual spikes.
X and Y Block Factors
Enter the number of grid columns (X Factor) and rows (Y Factor) to be
included in each block when building a trend from an input grid. Block
Averaging is always done when the input is a grid; however, the default
factor is 1, so averaging has no effect.
Mean Information Display
This option determines whether to display mean and standard deviation
information.
Display Mean will cause the information to be displayed.
No Display Mean will cause the information not to be displayed.
Residual Display
Residual Display determines whether the residual as a fraction of the
standard deviation is displayed.
Display ResidDisplays the information.
No Display Resid Does not display the information.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
You must execute the macro twice: once to view the histogram and determine
the correct number of terms and once again to perform the final trend analysis.
Typically, you would first look at a map of the residuals and a map of
the surface input grid on which contours from the trend grid have been
overlaid. Alternatively, you can display the residuals as colorfill and
overlay the contours of the input surface grid and trend grids. Using
either of these methods, localized high or low residual features, which
are geologically regarded as anomalies, can be easily identified.
Many application scenarios exist. For example, this macro may be used
to generate residuals and a trend surface from a velocity grid. On
examining the residuals, you could then identify high velocity, pull-up
areas
.
R2003.12.0
551
Landmark
This macro only uses grid files for input. When dealing with data files, you
must use Gridding Trend Gridding.
A grid containing a trend surface and a grid for the residual between the
input grid and the trend grid is created.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Spatial Distribution
The spatial distribution of the data is of primary importance in trend
gridding. Data that is evenly spaced throughout a field, as is grid data,
produces a trend that models the surface in a consistent manner. On the
other hand, data that is clustered, such as control point data, produces a
trend grid that resembles the structure of only the clustered areas. (You
have the option of inputting control point data when executing
Gridding Trend Gridding.) For this reason, the impact type data
can strongly affect the resulting trend grid.
Control Point Data In Trend Gridding
Trend grids generated from control point data are extremely sensitive to
the spatial distribution of the data. When the control points are evenly
spaced over the surface, the trend produced closely resembles the trend
produced from a a grid. However, if the control points are clustered, the
resulting trend differs from that produced from a grid.
Unlike the evenly distributed grid nodes, clustered control points
produce a trend that only accurately models those surface areas having
the highest concentration of control points.
Control point data is of greatest use when you wish to extend trend
analysis around a cluster of control points, or when you have a random
distribution of control points throughout the area. Also, because there
are typically fewer data points in a control point file than in a grid file,
processing time is less.
Control point data may be used as input when executing Modeling
Trend Gridding.
Grid Data in Trend Gridding
Trend grids generated from grid data more accurately reflect the overall
trend because the grid nodes are evenly distributed. However, grid data
files are typically large and can take a long time to process. For this
reason, interactive Trend Gridding gives you the ability to block
average. (The TREND-ANAL-GRID macro takes all the defaults found
in interactive Trend Gridding.)
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Number of Terms
Another consideration is the number of terms used in the trend fit. The
higher the number, the more flexion there can be in the trend surface and
the closer it fits the data. However, it also allows the trend surface to
climb or drop steeply in regions of low data concentration near the edge
of the grid. It is desirable to use the lowest number of terms that
adequately describe the surface.
When using evenly distributed data, a higher term number may be
selected to generate a trend model that closely fits the data. However, if
the data is not evenly distributed, the great amount of flexion from the
higher term numbers causes sporadic behavior in the trend.
Limiting the Number of Terms
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Block Averaging
Block averaging divides your grid file into a set of blocks, each
containing an equal number of rows and columns. The grid nodes in
each block are averaged to produce a mean z value for each block. These
mean values are used to determine the trend fit instead of the individual
grid node values. Block averaging drastically reduces the CPU time
required by the Trend Gridding Algorithm without significantly
changing the results.
UsING Trend Gridding For Block Averaging
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Limiting Z Values
Limiting the minimum and maximum z values of the grid eliminates
drastic overshoot of the grid values above and below the data values,
especially when you are using 3rd order, or higher polynomials. Set the
minimum z value slightly smaller than the smallest data value, and the
maximum z value slightly larger than the largest data value.
******
PROCESS DUALGRIDOPS
Apply operation SUBTRACT
USE
15508 ******
and
,
Grid statistics
on the residual
R2003.12.0
NUMBER OF ROWS
=
156
NUMBER OF COLUMNS
=
156
NUMBER OF Z-VALUE NODES
=
24246
NUMBER OF ZNON NODES
=
90
MINIMUM X COORDINATE
=
635550.00
MAXIMUM X COORDINATE
=
638650.00
MINIMUM Y COORDINATE
=
5441880.0
MAXIMUM Y COORDINATE
=
5444980.0
X INTERVAL BETWEEN COLUMNS
=
20.000000
Y INTERVAL BETWEEN ROWS
=
20.000000
MAXIMUM SURFACE VALUE
=
68.618958
MINIMUM SURFACE VALUE
=
-29.918396
SURFACE RANGE
=
98.537354
MEAN OF Z
= -0.15759882
ROOT MEAN SQUARE OF Z
=
16.731031
STANDARD DEVIATION OF Z
=
16.730289
RELATIVE VARIATION OF Z
=
-106.15745
ROOT MEAN SQUARE CURVATURE OF Z = 0.52230442E-02
****** PROCESS MACROEND
USE 15509 ******
****** PROCESS STOP
USE
55 ******
** NORMAL TERMINATION **
PROCESSING FINISHED PLEASE CONTINUE
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Polynomial
Order
Number
of Terms
Expression
A (Constant)
1st
2
3
x
y
2nd
4
5
6
x2
xy
y2
3rd
7
8
9
10
x3
x2y
xy2
y3
4th
11
12
13
14
15
x4
x3y
x2y2
xy3
y4
5th
16
17
18
19
20
21
x5
x4y
x3y2
x2y3
xy4
y5
6th
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
x6
x5y
x4y2
x3y3
x2y4
xy5
y6
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Boolean Grid
The Boolean Grid method creates a Boolean grid of 0.0s and 1.0s to
indicate where a formation lies at each node (as in the following
example, which shows a formation below, equal to, or above the Oil
Water Contact level). The Boolean Grid method calls the
GRID-LT-EQ-GT macro.
The Boolean Grid method reads an input grid and produces an output
grid in which each input node is replaced by a flag value that indicates
whether the input Z value is Less Than, Equal To, or Greater Than a
designated Z level value.
GRID-LT-EQ-GT takes the following input:
A grid file
Flag values
For more information about Boolean Grid parameters, see Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the
GRID-LT-EQ-GT topic.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Constant Grid
The Constant Grid method builds a constant grid from user-defined
input. This Constant Grid method calls the EVALUATE-CONGRID
macro.
You are asked to supply:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Polynomial Grid
Polynomial Grid evaluates a polynomial function over a user defined
area and stores the results as a new grid. The Polynomial Grid method
calls the EVALUATE-POLYN macro.
Polynomial trends of up to the 2nd order are possible with this process
(a maximum 9 term polynomial function in which the highest order of
term in the function is x2 or y2). The process produces a grid with the
node values being the values calculated by the polynomial. You can
control the AOI of the grid, as well as the x and y grid increments. You
can also input the coefficient for each of the corresponding terms in the
polynomial.
Use EVALUATE-POLYN to Create a Polynomial Trend Grid
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Degree of Polynomial = 1
Degree of Polynomial = 2
Minimum X & Y = 0
Maximum X & Y = 10
Grid Increment = 1
Where:
A grid with the requested AOI and grid increment and node values that
are resolved by the polynomial expansion using the supplied constant
and coefficients.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
User-Defined Filter
The User-Defined Filter method filters a grid by means of a user-defined
filter operator grid. The filter operator grid may originate either from a
GRID file on an attached MFD or as an external diskfile which is
imported.
The filter operator can possess ring symmetry. Ring symmetry means
that the values in the grid nodes that are equal distance from the
centerpoint of the grid are equal. The macro can handle up to 99 rings.
The input grid file may contain undefined values. These values may
exist in the grid itself or may be caused by faults crossing the grid. The
macro employs one of two methods to handle undefined values. If the
operator is ring symmetric, a ring-symmetric compensation method is
used; otherwise, an asymmetric compensation method is used. If no
compensation is desired, it may be turned off.
Specify the following input values:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Flexing
Enter from Modeling in
Z-MAP Plus window
Biharmonic
Laplacian
Both
Apply
Flexing Workflow
You can use flexing, sometimes called filtering or relaxation to smooth
small (high frequency) features on a grid. This smoothing process can at
the same time tie the surface to data points. You can choose from two
flexing methods (Biharmonic or Laplacian) or use a combination of the
two. Controls are provided for which nodes are flexed, how much the
data is honored, how much smoothing is done, upper and lower limits
for the output grid, and whether a constraint band (limit surface) above
and below the flexed grid is used.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Laplacian
---------
(1)
o
(1)
o
(2)
o
(-8)
o
(2)
o
(-8)
o
(20)
x
(-8)
o
(2)
o
(-8)
o
(2)
o
(-.25)
o
(1)
o
(-.25)
o
(1)
x
(-.25)
o
(-.25)
o
(1)
o
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
The grid that results from one pass of the template will not perfectly
satisfy the Biharmonic or Laplacian equation. This is because, even
though the center point of the template is adjusted to an optimum value,
the other nodes that were used to adjust that one were also adjusted.
Thus, second and additional passes of the filter are required to
progressively bring the entire surface closer to the desired form. How
close the surface gets to this form before it stops is controlled by you.
Flexing Parameters
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Flexing Parameters
This dialog box allows you to select the type of flexing to perform, when
to stop flexing, how much to honor the data, whether the surface is tied
to data while flexing, as well as upper and lower Z-values for the output
grid. Flexing parameters also lets you specify an upper and lower band
(surfaces) in which the flexed surface must remain.
Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing button shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
or both filters.
Biharmonic (default) Adjusts grid values so that the surface
resembles a rigid surface (like a handsaw) that bends slowly and
smoothly from one inflection point to another. This is sometimes called
a minimum curvature or minimum tension surface.
Laplacian Adjusts grid values so that the surface resembles a
balloon or soap bubble that comes quickly back to the average surface
position away from inflection points. Sticking your finger into a balloon
would cause the surface to dimple at your finger and quickly return to
its original form away from your finger. This is sometimes called a high
tension surface.
Combination This is a repeated application of first the Biharmonic
and then the Laplacian filter. Its results are not easily predictable, but
fall somewhere between Biharmonic and Laplacian, probably a little
closer to the Biharmonic, since it is the first filter applied.
Number of Flex Passes
In the Number of Flex Passes box, enter the number of flexing passes to
execute (if the Control of Passes setting is FLEX = NUMPASS) or the
maximum number of flexing passes to execute (if the Control of Passes
button reads FLEX <= NUMPASS). The default value is 10.
Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
The Cutoff test value is compared to a Maximum-Relative-Change
value Z-MAP Plus calculates. If the Maximum-Relative-Change is
lower than the Cutoff value, flexing stops.
The Maximum-Relative-Change value is the absolute value of one
minus the ratio of the maximum change in the surface on the previous
flexing pass to the maximum change in the surface on this flexing pass.
max change flex one
Maximum-Relative-Change = 1 -------------------------------------------------max change flex two
The number 1 is output for the Maximum-Relative-Change of the first
flexing pass since this equation cannot be solved after only one pass
through flexing. (Two flexes are required to make a relative change
comparison.)
Sometimes the Maximum-Relative-Change value stalls and fluctuates
around a number. For example, on one pass it may be .36, on the next
.35, the next .37, and so on. This is because flexing is trying to both
honor data and smooth the surface. Each time the surface is adjusted to
honor the data, it roughs up and then smooths back to approximately
(but not exactly) the same surface form. Therefore, it reaches a point
where the surface is still changing from flex to flex but not getting any
smoother.
Smoothness Modulus (0.0 to 1.0)
In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
2.
3.
For example:
o
+
Key:
o = eight nodes used to smooth
x = node that is thrown away
+ = value used
If more than one point is close to the grid node, the process is repeated
for each point and the results are averaged.
This process returns a Z-value at the grid node based on the control
points. This node value is averaged with the node value returned from
the flexing process. You control how the two values are averaged with
the Smoothness Modulus parameter. The Smoothness Modulus is used
to get a weighting value from a look-up table. That value is then used in
the following equation:
Zf + W Zc
Z = ------------------------------1+W
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
where:
Z = final node value
Zf = modified node value from flexing
Zc = modified node value from control points
W = weight from look-up table and Smoothness Modulus
The look-up table has the following form:
10,000
.25
W
---------10,000.00
50.00
10.00
1.00
.25
S.M.
--------0.00
.25
.50
.75
1.00
|x
|x
| x
| x
|
x
|
x
|
x
|
x
|
x
|
x
----------------------------------------------------0
.5
1
Smoothness Modulus
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
You can use a limiting band to remove small features created by noisy
data. Because the data creates the features, using the data prevents
removal of these features. This capability is often used to take the
wobble out of contours. A good first try for the values is to add and
subtract 20% of the contour interval used to display the surface. If the
contour interval were 10, then an upper bias of 2 and lower bias of 2
might produce desirable results.
All Changed Values Produce a Limiting Surface
The default values for all bias and mulitplier parameters produce no limiting
surface. If you change the value of any parameter, a limiting surface is created.
If you change the parameter value by manually entering the default value, a
limiting surface is also created. To flex the grid without limiting the node values,
do not change the value of these values in any way.
The following table illustrates the effects of positive and negative values
in the Upper and Lower Surface Bias and Multiplier fields:
Original
Node
Value
Filtered
Node
Value
Upper
Bias
Lower
Bias
Upper
Multiplier
Lower
Multiplier
Result
10
default
default
default
default
10
10
default
default
1.1
default
1.1
10
default
default
1.1
0.9
1.1
10
1.0
-1.0
1.1
0.9
1.1
-10
1.0
-1.0
1.1
0.9
-0.1
-1
-10
default
default
default
0.9
-1.1
-1
-10
1.0
-1.0
1.1
0.9
-2.1
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Modeling: Flexing
551
Landmark
Operations
Overview
Some remaining operations do not fall into the above groups and are
listed in alphabetical order, starting on page 675.
R2003.12.0
Operations: Overview
531
Landmark
Grid Operations
The Grid Operations are:
Data Operations
The Data Operations are:
R2003.12.0
Merge Data Combine two sorted input files of the same type
into a new merged output file.
Operations: Overview
532
Landmark
Fields Copy, rename, and delete fields from all nongrid files.
The field operations include:
Copy Only Selected Fields
Copy Original Fields and Additional Fields
Rename Fields
Delete Fields
Geophysical Operations
The Geophysical Operations options are:
R2003.12.0
Operations: Overview
533
Landmark
Faults
Remaining Operations
In addition to the grouped operations, Operations includes eleven other
options. Most of these options lend themselves to classification
according to their intended functions. The remaining operations include:
Back Interpolation
File Conversion
Coordinate Transformations
Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields)
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees
Line Generalization
Line Resampling
Surface Intersection
R2003.12.0
Operations: Overview
534
Landmark
Miscellaneous Operations
Miscellaneous operations include:
R2003.12.0
Operations: Overview
535
Landmark
Calculator
Select Operations Calculator to create a series of grid or data
operations and save that series to use again. All the options for each type
of operation (single and dual data, single and dual grid, and back
interpolation) are available on the calculator. Use the Calculator to
perform these tasks:
Set up equations that take values from one or more fields in a data
file and create a field of information in the data file (data
operations).
This topic is a brief introduction to the Calculator. Detailed information
for the Calculator is available by clicking the Help button in the
Calculator dialog box. The topic Using the Calculator describes all the
Calculator configurations and buttons.
For a list of functions for each operation type, see the following topics:
You can display the Calculator dialog box by clicking the Calculator icon.
R2003.12.0
Operations: Calculator
536
Landmark
Equations Panel
Input
Files, Grids,
and Fields
Select the
type of
Operation
Name the
New File
and/or
New Field
Move, Edit,
Delete, Insert Above
Buttons
R2003.12.0
Operations: Calculator
537
Landmark
2.
3.
Name the output file (for a grid operation) and the new field (for a
data operation). You can also use the Location box for specifying a
location for storing the new file.
4.
5.
When you have built all the equations you want to run, you can
save everything in the Equations panel to a .ZEQ file by clicking
the Save Equation button.
6.
To execute the operations, click Apply (to run the operation and
leave the Calculator dialog box open) or OK (to run the operation
and close the Calculator dialog box).
Detailed help is available if you select the Help button in the lower right
corner of the Calculator dialog box. The topic Using the Calculator
describes all the different configurations and buttons on the Calculator
in detail.
R2003.12.0
Operations: Calculator
538
Landmark
Grid Operations
R2003.12.0
539
Landmark
R2003.12.0
540
Landmark
Operation
If you click the Operation button, a list of mathematical operations
appears. The operation you select is applied to each of the values in the
input grid.
The single grid operations are:
R2003.12.0
SIN Calculate the sine of each node. Input grid node values
must be in radians.
COS Calculate the cosine of each node. Input grid node values
must be in radians.
TAN Calculate the tangent of each node. Input grid node values
must be in radians.
NORM For all nodes subtract the mean and divide by the
standard deviation.
541
Landmark
R2003.12.0
542
Landmark
R2003.12.0
543
Landmark
Select grid A
Select grid B
Gridin 1
Gridin 2
Union
Intersection
Gridin 2
Enter X and Y direction increments
Apply
544
Landmark
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Maximum
Minimum
Or
And
Cmplement
Clipmax
Clipmin
Blankmax
Blankmin
Mergehi
Mergelo
Azimuth
Grid A and B
Click the Grid A and Grid B buttons in the DUAL GRID
OPERATIONS dialog box. Select a grid for each from the list that
appeears. If the title at the top of the list says this is the A grid, it is used
as the first input grid when Dual Grid Operations executes. If it is the B
grid, it is used as the second input grid. If nodes of the two input grids
do not line up vertically (are nonconformal), by default the A grid is the
template and the B grid is resampled to match.
Operation
Click the Operation button in the DUAL GRID OPERATIONS dialog
box. Select an operation from the list of mathematical operations that
appears (the Select Dual Grid OPERATION list). The operation applies
to grid value pairs that have the same x,y location in both grids. The
result is placed in the new grid at the same x,y location. Nulls in either
input grid typically yield nulls in the output grid.
R2003.12.0
545
Landmark
MULTIPLY Multiply A by B.
DIVIDE Divide A by B.
R2003.12.0
546
Landmark
R2003.12.0
547
Landmark
Gridin1 (default value) Use the X and Y limits of the first grid
(grid A) to define the output grid limits.
Union Of the two input grids, use the lower of the X minimum
and Y minimum values and the higher of the X maximum and Y
maximum values to define the X and Y limits of the output grid.
R2003.12.0
548
Landmark
Blank Grid
Select Operations Grid
Operations in Z-MAP Plus
window
Which
type of
blanking?
Inside
Outside
Clevel
R2003.12.0
549
Landmark
Blank Grid uses a polygon or contour file to blank a grids nodes either
inside or outside those polygons or contours. Input to this option is a
grid, a polygon or contour file, and a value to replace all nodes that are
being blanked. The term Blank is used for this option because the
default replacement value is ZNON.
How Blank Grid Works
If using polygons, Blank Grid automatically adds another vertex to each
polygon so that the first and last vertex are coincident. Then, each grid
node location is checked against this polygon. If the node is inside (or
outside) the polygon its value is set to a value you supply.
If using contours, Blank Grid starts at the top left corner of the grid and
moves down each column of the grid. When it crosses a contour, it
begins to flag nodes as inside the contour. If it crosses the same contour
again, it stops flagging the nodes, and so on down the grid column.
Depending on the parameter settings the flagged values are all set to a
value you supply or to the value of the most recently crossed contour.
Special logic is added to ensure that the area of the contour that is
considered INSIDE encompasses the nodes that are higher than the
contour level for which the test is being made.
Input Grid
From the list presented, select an input grid to use when the Blank Grid
operation executes.
Select Polygon File
From the list of vertex and contour files presented, select a vertex file.
When the Blank Grid operation executes, polygons or contours in this
file are used to blank the grid.
Output Name and Parameters
Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
MFD to use for storing the grid (or use the OpenWorks project)
R2003.12.0
550
Landmark
Blank Value
Enter a value to replace all node values in the area being blanked. This
value can be any number that is valid for your operating system. The
default blank value is 1.E+30, the standard ZNON value.
Width of Boundary Tolerance
Designates the width of tolerance for your blanking polygon. Grid nodes
inside this distance of the boundary are considered to be on the
boundary. If this number is negative, Z-MAP Plus chooses a default
based on a query of the precision of the data and the hardware.
Points within tolerance are
Determines whether the edge of the polygon is inside or outside the
blanking boundary.
R2003.12.0
551
Landmark
Resample Grid
Select Operations Grid Operations
from Z-MAP Plus window
Enter AOI
R2003.12.0
552
Landmark
Resample Grid is commonly used to make one grids nodes line up with
the nodes of another grid. Operations between two grids can only be
done if the nodes of the two grids lie at exactly the same x,y locations.
Although resampling is automatically done when operations execute,
resampling before a long series of operations means that resampling is
only done once instead of at each operation. Resampling is also used to
create a finer grid from a coarser one or (vice versa) when the form of
the output grid must remain the same as the original grid.
How Resample Grid Works
The resampling process is not a shifting of node values from one
position to another. If a node in the new grid does not lie exactly on a
node from the input grid, then a value is calculated for that node using
the back interpolation process. The new value is determined by fitting a
mathematical surface to 16 grid nodes that surround that location.
Although the actual computation process is somewhat more complex,
the process can be thought of as defining a mathematical equation for
the surface in terms of X, Y, and Z (Z = aX + bY + c + ...). Then, by
substituting the X and Y coordinate of the desired location into the
equation, there remains only one unknown, Z, which is easily
determined. The process is more complicated with faults, since only grid
nodes on the same side as the x,y location can be used to calculate its
value.
If nodes in the grid lie outside the area of the input grid or in a ZNON
area, then those nodes are assigned ZNONs.
Input Grid
A list of input grids is presented. Click the grid which you want to use
as input into this process.
Select Faults
A list of input fault files appears. Click the fault file you want to use as
input for this process.
Include fault files only if you are building surfaces cut by faults. If you
use faults, grid nodes are calculated by using only the data located on the
same side of the faults as the node. Fault files are available for this
option only if they have been previously constructed.
R2003.12.0
553
Landmark
MFD to use for storing the grid (or use the OpenWorks project)
R2003.12.0
554
Landmark
ZNON Value
Enter the value to be used as ZNON (missing value) when the grid is
created. Nodes of the new grid are ZNON where ever they cover ZNON
areas of the input grid or lie outside the limits of the input grid. This
value can be any valid number supported by your computer. Never use
a number between the minimum and maximum value in the grid, as this
creates many problems when drawing contours from the grid. The
default is the same as ZNON of the input grid.
Grid to Data
R2003.12.0
555
Landmark
Grid to Data converts a grid to data. Nodes in the grid become records
in the data file. The output data file has three fields, X (Easting),
Y (Northing), and Z which contains the node values. You control what
the Z-field is named. The other two are named as indicated above. Only
one grid can be converted at a time, and ZNONs may or may not be
output. You can specify whether every, every second, every third, etc.
node is output. The counting starts in the upper left corner and works
top-to-bottom, left-to-right.
Grid to Data is commonly used to:
Create data for input to a program other than Z-MAP Plus (for
example, reservoir simulator). This is usually done by converting
the desired grid to data, then selecting File Save As to output
that data file to a flat (ASCII) file.
Input Grid
From the list presented, select a grid to use when the option executes.
Output Data & Field Name, Conversion Rate
Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
MFD to use for storing the file (or use the OpenWorks project)
R2003.12.0
556
Landmark
R2003.12.0
557
Landmark
Data Operations
R2003.12.0
558
Landmark
R2003.12.0
559
Landmark
R2003.12.0
560
Landmark
Scale
Bias
Square
Power
Sqroot
Root
Abs
Exp
Fix
Ln
Log10
Sin
Cos
Tan
Atan
NormMax
NormSig
Floor
Ceil
Norm
ClipMax
ClipMin
BlankMax
BlankMin
Reciprcl
ReplZNON
RedfZNON
Round
Input Data
From the list of data files presented, select the file that contains the field
to use as input when the option executes.
Input Field
A list of fields is presented. Select the input field you want.
Operation
A list of mathematical operations is presented. The selected operation is
applied to each of the values in the input field. Operations are:
R2003.12.0
561
Landmark
FIX Change the value to the right of the decimal point to .0.
FIX maintains the value of the integral and changes the mantissa
to .0.
ROUND Fix the value of the number to the nearest integer. 3.2
becomes 3. Rounding 3.7 yields 4.
CEIL The Ceil is the most proximate higher integer value. The
ceil for 3.2 or 3.7 is 4.
If null is the initial value, all operations except REPLZNON and
REDFZNON output null.
R2003.12.0
562
Landmark
Output Field
From the list presented, select a field for writing the operation results
when the option executes. You can replace an existing field or create a
field. If you create a field, you can name it with the default name or a
custom name.
New Field
Enter the name to store with the field. The name can be a maximum of
20 characters long and can contain internal blanks. The default name is
Z VALUE.
Output Data, Constant Value
If you click the Output Data, Constant Value button, the Name
OUTPUT Data & Field dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to
specify these parameters:
R2003.12.0
563
Landmark
R2003.12.0
564
Landmark
Yes
Assign new field name
and/or new field type
Is output
field a new
field
No
R2003.12.0
565
Landmark
Keep in mind that dual data operations operates on two existing fields
of the same file (pointset). If you want to perform an operation
between two fields residing in two different pointsets, use
Operations Data Operations Merge Data.
Dual Data Operations works on all types of record data, including
control points, faults, polygons, shotpoints, etc. These operations cannot
be applied to grids.
Operations include:
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Maximum
Minimum
Clipmax
Clipmin
Blankmax
Blankmin
Azimuth
Input Data
From the list of files presented, select a file that contains fields to use as
input when the option executes.
R2003.12.0
566
Landmark
R2003.12.0
MULTIPLY Multiply A by B.
DIVIDE Divide A by B.
567
Landmark
Output Field
From the list that appears, select a field to use for writing operation
results. You can replace an existing field or create a field. If you create
a field, you can name it.
New Field
Enter the name to store with this field when you create it. The name can
be up to 20 characters long and can contain internal blanks. The default
name is Z VALUE.
Field Type (if New Output Field)
If your Dual Data Operation creates a field, you must supply the field
type. A list of fields appears. Point to and click the field type you want.
The default new field type is Z VALUE. To use another type, you must
specify it by picking from the list of field types.
Output Data, ZNON
Use this dialog box to specify the new data file name, destination MFD
(or use the OpenWorks project), and the ZNON (missing) value to use.
R2003.12.0
568
Landmark
R2003.12.0
569
Landmark
Blank Data
Select Operations Data
Operations Blank Data
Inside
Outside
R2003.12.0
570
Landmark
Blank Data uses one polygon on a polygon file to blank values of a field
in a data file either inside or outside that polygon. Input to this option
includes:
a data file
a field
a polygon file
R2003.12.0
571
Landmark
Grid to Data
Identical to the Grid to Data process described on page 555.
R2003.12.0
572
Landmark
R2003.12.0
573
Landmark
The output data values must satisfy all the criteria you select. The record
order in the output dataset is unchanged from the input dataset, and sort
flags (in file headers of sorted files) are preserved.
Edits are performed in the following order:
Apply
Save
Cancel
Delete
Help
Apply
Select Dialog Box: To execute the Data Selection process, click the
Apply button in the Select dialog box. The process executes
immediately using the currently specified parameters for all edits whose
Edits to be Perform check boxes are selected (checked). If the dialog
boxes associated with those edits are still open and contain unapplied
parameter settings, the parameter settings are automatically applied. The
Select dialog box remains open, and the current parameter values are
saved to the LASPARM.ZCL file.
Applying and Saving
If you click Apply, the action executes and the Save dialog box remains open.
If you click Save, the action does not execute and the Save dialog box closes.
The current parameter settings are saved in both cases.
R2003.12.0
574
Landmark
Save
Select Dialog Box: To save parameter settings without executing the
Data Selection process, click the Save button in the Select dialog box.
The Select dialog box and subsidiary dialog boxes close, and the current
parameter values are written to the LASPARM.ZCL file.
Cancel
Subsidiary Data Selection Dialog Boxes: To close a data selection
dialog box without saving changes, click Cancel. The parameter
settings remain the same as when you first displayed the dialog box.
Help
To display the online Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual, click the Help
button in the Select dialog box or in one of the subsidiary data selection
dialog boxes.
Delete
Select Range Edit Equations Display Dialog Box: To delete
equations in this dialog box, select the DELETE check boxes next to the
equations, then click the Delete button.
Data Type
From the drop-down Data Type list, choose the type of file to use for
the Data Selection process. The data type you select determines which
files are available as source files (as described in Source File on
page 576).
You can apply Data Selection to the following file types:
R2003.12.0
575
Landmark
Output File
Enter the name of the output file to create in the Output File box. The
name can be up to 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks.
The file type is the same as the input file. If a file with the specified name
already exists, the last four characters of the name are replaced
automatically with a version number.
Output MFD
From the Output MFD drop-down list, select a destination MFD for
saving the output file. The list includes the currently attached MFDs, the
scratch file, and OpenWorks (if you are using OpenWorks).
Source File
Click the Source File button to display the Input List dialog box, which
you use to select an input file. The Input List dialog box displays all files
of the currently selected data type contained in the attached MFD(s) and
in the OpenWorks project. If no files match, a message appears and
informs you that no files are available.
Once you click on a file, it is selected immediately and the Input List
dialog box closes. You can change the selected file and data type at any
time. The selected file appears as white on black background. If you do
not see the file you want in the Input List dialog box, take these actions:
Use the scroll bar to view all the files in the dialog box.
Make sure the Data Type button displays the correct file type.
Make sure the appropriate MFD is attached.
Make sure the appropriate OpenWorks project is selected.
Edits to Perform
Select the edit(s) to perform. You can select multiple edits. The output
data values must satisfy all the criteria you select. To select edit types,
click the Edits to Perform check boxes next to the edit names. A dark
button is On; a light button is Off. If multiple edits are turned on, the
edits occur in the following order:
R2003.12.0
576
Landmark
If no edits are selected and you click the Apply button, a warning
message may appear, asking you to select an edit type. (If you do not
specify a source file, no warning message appears. Error messages
appear in the system window.)
Input Edit Parameters
To define parameters for an edit type, click the arrow next to the edit
type name. The primary data selection dialog box for the edit type
appears (Select Location Edit, Select Thinning Edit, or Select
Range Edit Equations Display). You can display and use multiple data
selection dialog boxes at the same time. If you select an edit type whose
dialog box is already displayed, nothing happens.
Location Edit
In the Select Location Edit dialog box, you specify a polygon source
or method to define the location edit. If you specify a method other than
None, a selection dialog box for the method appears automatically.
Records are selected from a dataset located inside or outside one or
several polygons that are collectively called the select area. Records on
the boundary of the select area are considered to be inside the select
area.
If this is the first time you have performed a location edit or if you
selected a blank Z-MAP Plus parameter file, this dialog box appears. If
you performed a location edit previously, the dialog box appears that
you used to define your most recent location edit.
R2003.12.0
577
Landmark
R2003.12.0
578
Landmark
XY
LL
XY & LL
Polygon(s) XY
use as is \
use as is
NA \ NA
use as is \
use XY
Polygon(s) XY
(rotated)
use as is \
use as is
NA \ NA
use as is \
use XY
Polygon(s) LL
uses input files projected parameters
trans LL+10% \
use as is
use as is \
use as is
use as is \
use LL
Polygon(s) LL
(rotated)
uses input files projected parameters
NA \ NA
Grid XY
use as is \
use as is
NA \ NA
use as is \
use XY
use XY+1% \
use as is
NA \ NA
use XY+1% \
use XY
use LL+1% \
use LL
use XY+1% \
use as is
use LL+1% \
use LL
use as is \
use as is
NA \ NA
use as is \
use XY
Picture LL (projected)
uses Input Files projected parameters
trans LL+10% \
use as is
use as is \
use as is
use as is \
use LL
Polygon(s) XY
(from VERT file)
use as is \
use as is
NA \ NA
use as is \
use XY
R2003.12.0
579
Landmark
XY
LL
XY & LL
Key:
modification.
use XY The file or select area source has
both
X/Y and Lat/Lon coordinates, only the X/Y
coordinates are used.
use LL The file or select area source has
both
X/Y and Lat/Lon coordinates, only the Lat/Lon
coordinates are used.
use XY+1% The X/Y coordinates of the
select area are expanded by 1% (add and
subtract 1% of the X and Y ranges to their
respective maximum and minimum values)
before being used by Location Edit.
Error Reporting
An error is reported and the Location Edit is not performed if the input file or
the select area source file does not contain projection parameters when they are
required. Projection parameter requirements are indicated in the Select Area
Coordinate Types column.
R2003.12.0
580
Landmark
R2003.12.0
581
Landmark
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is retained or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
R2003.12.0
Outside retains records that fall outside the boundary of the Select
Area.
582
Landmark
Yes retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area
boundary.
R2003.12.0
583
Landmark
R2003.12.0
584
Landmark
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is retained or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter are:
None
R2003.12.0
585
Landmark
Yes Retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area
boundary.
If the values in the Entry Box are newly entered and Apply was not clicked
before changing the coordinate input style, then the new values can be lost! To
avoid this problem, be sure to select Apply before changing this parameter.
R2003.12.0
586
Landmark
To enter a value, click the line and position and enter the number. You
must click each position you wish to enter (i.e., Tab, Arrow, and Return
keys do not advance the cursor input position). All maximums must be
larger than minimums of the same coordinate type. Order of the
polygons and blank lines does not affect the result.
Delete
Allows you to delete selected polygons from the Polygon Entry Box. To
identify polygons for deletion, click the button to the right of each
polygon you wish to delete. Those polygons with darkened buttons are
selected for deletion. To delete selected polygons, click the Delete
button at the bottom right corner of the Polygon Entry Box. Undeleted
polygons move up in the Entry Box to fill unused space.
Select - (X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
R2003.12.0
587
Landmark
This dialog box allows you to specify up to ten four-sided polygons, the
union of which define the Select Area for Location Edit. To specify,
type from the keyboard, the x,y coordinate of the lower left corner, angle
of rotation, and the width and height of each polygon.
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is retained or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
Outside retains records that fall outside the boundary of the Select
Area.
R2003.12.0
588
Landmark
Yes retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area
boundary.
R2003.12.0
589
Landmark
R2003.12.0
590
Landmark
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area in which data is kept or deleted.
Possible choices for this parameter are:
None
Area.
Outside retains records that fall outside the boundary of the Select Area.
R2003.12.0
591
Landmark
R2003.12.0
592
Landmark
To enter a value click the line and position and enter the number. You
must click each position you want to enter. (The Tab, Arrow, and
Return keys do not advance the cursor position). The order of polygons
and blank lines does not affect the result.
Delete
Use the Delete option to delete selected polygons from the Polygon
Entry Box. To identify polygons for deletion, click the button to the
right of each polygon you wish to delete. Those polygons with darkened
buttons are selected for deletion. To delete selected polygons, click the
Delete button at the bottom right corner of the Polygon Entry Box.
Undeleted polygons are shifted up in the Entry Box to fill deleted
positions.
Select - Polygons from File
R2003.12.0
593
Landmark
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
R2003.12.0
594
Landmark
For lines that cross the Select Area boundary, this parameter defines
whether an extra point on the line and outside the boundary is retained
(inside if records were retained outside). This is important for display
construction when retained lines are to be drawn up to the Select Area
boundary. This parameter has affect only with line-oriented data
(seismic DATA, FALT, VERT, SSEC, XSEC, and DWEL). Click
(darken) the appropriate button to:
Yes retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area boundary.
No does not retain an extra point.
Vertex File Containing Polygons
A list of the vertex files contained in the currently attached MFDs or the
OpenWorks project appears. Click the file containing polygons you
wish to use in the Location Edit. The selected file appears as white on
black background. You may change your selection at any time. If the file
you want is not in the window, scroll the window to see the rest of the
files. If you still do not see the file, check to see that the MFD that
contains the file is attached to the Z-MAP Plus session.
Polygon(s) for Location Edit
Controls whether all or selected polygons from the selected Vertices file
are use in the Location Edit. When Select Individual Polygons is turned
on a list of Segment IDs for all polygons in the file appears in the
Segment Identifiers window. Click (darken) the appropriate button to:
Use All Polygons in the File. The union of all polygons in the selected
Vertices file defines the Select Area.
Select Individual Polygons. Location Edit uses up to 10 polygons
from the selected Vertices file. These polygons are the ones that have
been highlighted in the Segment Identifiers window.
Segment Identifiers
A list of all Segment IDs on the selected vertices file is displayed when
Polygon(s) for Location Edit is set to Select Individual Polygons. Click
the polygons you want to use for the Location Edit. Although you can
click more than 10 polygons only the first ten (sequentially) highlighted
polygons are used.
R2003.12.0
595
Landmark
R2003.12.0
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
596
Landmark
R2003.12.0
597
Landmark
R2003.12.0
598
Landmark
Use this dialog box to select a DATA file from the attached MFDs or
from the files saved for the OpenWorks project. The minimum and
maximum values from coordinate fields in the selected data file define
the limits of the Select Area for this Location Edit.
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.
Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
R2003.12.0
599
Landmark
R2003.12.0
600
Landmark
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
R2003.12.0
601
Landmark
R2003.12.0
602
Landmark
Use this dialog box to specify how Thinning Edit is performed for
line-oriented data (such as seismic, fault, and vertex data). To perform a
Thinning Edit, specify the first record in the file you want to retain and
the frequency for the remaining retentions (for example, every second
or third). The specified records are copied to the output file. In this way,
you can reduce the number of records in a dataset without regard for
spatial distribution.
R2003.12.0
603
Landmark
Location
Thinning
Range
DATA (random)
Unsorted
Unsorted
Unsorted
DATA (seismic)
Conditionally sorted
Sorted
Unsorted
CNTR
Load Order
Load Order
Load Order
FALT
Load Order
Load Order
Load Order
VERT
Load Order
Load Order
Load Order
TEXT
Unsorted
Unsorted
Unsorted
SSEC
N/A
Load Order
Load Order
XSEC
N/A
Load Order
Load Order
DWEL
Load Order
Load Order
Unsorted
Key
Unsorted - The order of records in the file does not matter.
N/A - The operation is not performed by Data Selection.
Conditionally - If extra records outside the Select Area are to be retained, the file
must be sorted in line name, shotpoint order.
Sorted - The file must be sorted in line name, shotpoint order.
Load Order - The order of the records in the file should be as they were loaded or
generated.
Control Field
A list of fields that can be used for line-by-line thinning is presented. If
you wish to thin only certain lines then select one of these fields. If you
do not select a field from this list then all lines are thinned equally.
R2003.12.0
604
Landmark
If you select a field, the field value in each record is compared to one or
more masks you specify. If the line does not match any masks, the line
is passed to the output file without thinning. If the line matches a mask,
the thinning criteria is used to thin the line.
Thin Mode
Use the Thin Mode option to control how thinning is applied to each
line. Choices for this parameter are:
Operator
This parameter is active if a Control Field has been selected to force
thinning on a line-by-line basis. Thinning Edit enables you to select
lines from a dataset based on each records value in the field (typically
line name or segment ID). You can instruct Data Selection to compare
a fields value to a Value by using the following operators:
EQ Equal to value.
Notnull Not equal to the ZNON (missing value) for the field.
Use the following operatiors to test field values for membership in a
range bounded by value A and value B:
R2003.12.0
605
Landmark
Start Point
This parameter is only used if the Thin Mode value is Endpoints+Rate.
Specify the sequential position of the first file record that you want to
retain. This record is written to the output file. Continuously adding the
Retention Rate value to this number defines the sequential position of
the other records in the file that are retained.
If you have selected a Control Field, then you may specify up to 10 Start
Point values. Each value is applied only to those lines that match the
Line/Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT, LT,
etc.) determines the relationship between the records Control Field
value and the Mask.
Retention Rate
This parameter is only used if the Thin Mode value is Endpoints+Rate.
Specify the number to add repetitively to the Start Retention number in
order to define the sequential positions of file records to retain. (This is
the rate at which points are to be kept.)
If a Control Field is specified, you can specify a maximum of 10
Retention Rate values. Each value is applied only to the lines that match
the Line/Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT,
LT, etc.) determines the relationship between the records Control Field
value and the mask.
Additive
The Additive parameter is used only for seismic data and only if the
Thin Mode value is Endpoints+Divisible. Every Additive point on the
file that is evenly divisible by Divisor is kept.
If a Control Field is specified, you can specify a maximum of 10
Additive values. Each value is applied only to the lines that match the
Line/Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT, LT,
etc.) determines the relationship between the records Control Field
value and the mask.
Divisor
The Divisor parameter is used only for seismic data and only if the Thin
Mode value is Endpoints+Divisible. Every Additive point on the file
that is evenly divisible by Divisor is kept.
R2003.12.0
606
Landmark
R2003.12.0
607
Landmark
R2003.12.0
608
Landmark
R2003.12.0
609
Landmark
R2003.12.0
1.
2.
3.
610
Landmark
4.
R2003.12.0
akddd = not between, because the first character is below c and the
second is above j, even though the others are between c and j.
611
Landmark
Example 2
Assume you are testing for Outside and you provide:
Lower test mask = d%d* Upper test mask = j%j*
String being tested and result of test:
ddddd = not outside, because the first and third characters are
equal to the lower test mask.
dkddd = not outside, because the first and third characters are equal
to the lower test mask characters. The second character of the test
masks is a single character wildcard, therefore the second
character of the string is ignored.
ejdz = not outside, because the first and third characters are
between. The second and fourth characters are ignored, because
the second character of the test masks is the wildcard % and the
fourth character of the test masks is the wildcard *.
R2003.12.0
612
Landmark
This dialog box allows you to enter, display, edit, and delete Range Edit
equations. Up to 10 equations can be active. The equations are listed and
entered in a window with one equation per line. The equations consist
of four parts: field name, operator, value A, and value B. The equations
allow values in particular fields of a record to be compared to constants
to determine if the record should be retained.
To enter a new equation highlight an unspecified line in the equation
window. Whenever you request the creation of an equation or request to
change an existing equation, the Range Edit Equation Input dialog box
appears.
Clicking the position for Value A and Value B allows you to type entries
on those lines. When Apply is selected, the equations are saved. The
parts of this window include:
Field Name
This is a field name selected from a list of fields displayed on the Range
Edit Equation Input dialog box. Values in the field are compared to
Value A and Value B using the Operator (EQ, LT, GT, etc.) to
determine if the record should be retained.
Operator
This operator is used to compare a fields value in the record to Value A
or Value B to determine if the record should be retained. Valid
Operators include: EQ, NE, LT, LE, GT, GE, Between, Outside,
Notnull, and Null.
Value A
This is a constant numeric or alphanumeric value used to test the value
contained in the field of a record to determine if the record should be
retained. This constant is used with all Operators except Notnull and
Null.
Value B
This is a constant numeric or alphanumeric value used to test the value
contained in the field of a record to determine if the record should be
retained. This constant is used only with the Between and Outside
Operators.
R2003.12.0
613
Landmark
Delete
Allows you to delete lines (equations) from the Range Edit Equation
window. To identify lines for deletion, click the button to the right of
each equation you wish to delete. Those equations with darkened
buttons are selected for deletion. To delete selected equations, click the
Delete button at the bottom right corner of the window. Undeleted
equations are shifted up in the window to fill deleted positions.
Select - Range Edit Equation Input
You can use this dialog box to define or edit a Range Edit equation.
Selecting a Field displays parameters in the lower half of the dialog box.
Selecting Line Name displays Text A (and Text B, if the Operator
value is set to Between or Outside). Selecting any other Field opens
Value A (and Value B, if the Operator value is set to Between or
Outside).
Fields
A list of fields found in the Input file is displayed. Click the field you
wish to use to perform the test. The selected field appears as white text
on a black background. You may change your selection at any time.
Operator
The operators are defined in the Thinning Edit section. See Operator
on page 605.
R2003.12.0
614
Landmark
Click this popup menu and the available operators are displayed. In each
of the above tests, Value must be of the same type (numeric or character)
as the field being tested.
When you specify multiple Range Edit selections, they are applied in the
following way:
1.
2.
3.
Value A
Enter a numeric value that is to be the constant for operations EQ, NE,
LT, LE, GT, and GE. This value is also the lower constant for the
Between and Outside operations.
R2003.12.0
615
Landmark
Value B
Enter a numeric value that is to be the upper constant for operations
Between and Outside.
Text A
Enter a text string that is to be the constant for operations EQ, NE, LT,
LE, GT, and GE. This value is also the lower constant for the Between
and Outside operations. Wildcard characters (* for multiple
characters and % for single characters) can be used to define masks
for this text string. For a discussion of wildcard characters, see
Wildcard Characters Definition on page 609 and Wildcard
Characters Application on page 610.
Text B
Enter a text string that is to be the upper constant for operations Between
and Outside. Wildcard characters (* for multiple characters and %
for single characters) can be used to define masks for this text string. For
a discussion of wildcard characters, see Wildcard Characters
Definition on page 609 and Wildcard Characters Application on
page 610.
R2003.12.0
616
Landmark
Merge Data
Select Operations
Data Operations
Merge Data
Concatenation
Union
Intersection
Exception
Apply
R2003.12.0
617
Landmark
Use Merge Data to combine two sorted input files of the same type into
a new merged output file. You can concatenate, output the intersection
or union of the files, or create two files, one file being the intersection
and the other file being the exceptions. If the merge method is
intersection, union, or intersection with exceptions, then both input files
must be sorted using the same sort fields and both files must be of type
DATA.
Rules for the Input Files
The following constraints must be met by the files to be merged:
1.
2.
A file may only be merged with another file of the same type (for
example, DATA with DATA or VERT with VERT).
3.
4.
Neither of the two input files should contain more than one each of
the following field types:
X-field
Y-field
latitude
longitude
When searching for a match in the other input file, Z-MAP Plus
ignores the field name for the above four field types. Multiple X-,
Y-, latitude, or longitude fields on one file may cause unpredictable
results.
R2003.12.0
5.
6.
In order for two fields to be matched, they must also have the same
file type.
7.
Each matching field containing character data must have the same
number of characters in both files.
618
Landmark
The field width in the new field is determined by the number of characters in
Input Data A. If the field in Input Data B has more characters than the
corresponding field from Input Data A, the merged field truncates data from
Input Data B to match the number of characters in Input Data A.
R2003.12.0
619
Landmark
MFD to use for storing the file (or use the OpenWorks project)
UNION Create a file from two DATA files, which contains the
records common to both files and the records unique to each file.
R2003.12.0
620
Landmark
R2003.12.0
621
Landmark
UNION
Union outputs all records unique to the primary file, all records unique
to the secondary file, and all records that are common to both. Common
means that all sort fields that are common to both files and have the
same value in both files. Union can be applied only to files of type
DATA.
Example:
(X and Y fields are sort fields)
Primary File
|
Secondary File
|
X
Y
Top
Thick | Xcoor Ycoor Top
Net
---------------------------|---------------------------27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 |
27.3 75.8 4324.1 12.6
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 |
41.9 91.4 4112.8 33.3
54.2 23.4 1123.4 53.0 |
54.2 23.4 1111.3 38.4
Merged File
X
Y
Top
Thick
Net
-------------------------------------------27.3 75.8 4324.1
37.8
12.6
32.4 41.5 3345.1
47.5
1.E30
41.9 91.4 4112.8 1.E30
33.3
54.2 23.4 1111.3
53.0
38.4
INTERSECTION
Intersection outputs only records common to both the primary (A) and
secondary (B) input files. Common means that all sort fields that are
common to both files and have the same value in both files. You can
apply Intersection only to files of type DATA.
Example:
(X and Y fields are sort fields)
Primary File
|
Secondary File
|
X
Y
Top
Thick | Xcoor Ycoor Top
Net
---------------------------|---------------------------27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 |
27.3 75.8 4324.1 12.6
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 |
41.9 91.4 4112.8 33.3
54.2 23.4 1123.4 53.0 |
54.2 23.4 1111.3 38.4
Merged File
X
Y
Top
Thick
Net
-------------------------------------------27.3 75.8 4324.1
37.8
12.6
54.2 23.4 1111.3
53.0
38.4
R2003.12.0
622
Landmark
EXCEPTION
This is identical to the Intersection Merge Operation in that records
common to both the primary and secondary file are output to the merge
file. However, in addition, all other records of both files are output to the
exception file. You can apply Intersection only to files of type DATA.
Example:
(X and Y fields are sort fields)
Primary File
|
Secondary File
|
X
Y
Top
Thick | Xcoor Ycoor Top
Net
---------------------------|---------------------------27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 |
27.3 75.8 4324.1 12.6
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 |
41.9 91.4 4112.8 33.3
54.2 23.4 1123.4 53.0 |
54.2 23.4 1111.3 38.4
Merged File
X
Y
Top
Thick
Net
-------------------------------------------27.3 75.8 4324.1
37.8
12.6
54.2 23.4 1111.3
53.0
38.4
Exceptions File
X
Y
Top
Thick
Net
-------------------------------------------32.4 41.5 3345.1
47.5
1.E30
41.9 91.4 4112.8 1.E30
33.3
R2003.12.0
623
Landmark
Range Editing
Select Operations
Data Operations Range Editing
Entire dataset
Line match
Area match
Text match
Apply
R2003.12.0
624
Landmark
MFD to use for storing the file (or use the OpenWorks project)
R2003.12.0
625
Landmark
Scope of Edit
Controls whether the entire data set, or a subset based on Line name,
Area name, or a Text string is Range Edited. Whether inside or outside
was selected, only those records that meet the Scope of Edit criteria are
output. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Entire Dataset (default). Apply the range edits to the entire data set.
Line Match. Apply the range edits to all records whose value in the
Line Name Field (Field type 22) match the value you enter in the
Matching String for Limiting Scope of Edit. Records that do not match
are ignored for this edit.
Area Match. Apply the range edits to all records whose value in the
Area Name Field (Field type 23) match the value you enter in the
Matching String for Limiting Scope of Edit. Records that do not match
are ignored for this edit.
Text Match. Apply the range edits to all records whose value in the
Character Text Field (Field type 20) match the value you enter in the
Matching String for Limiting Scope of Edit. Records that do not match
are ignored for this edit.
Matching String for Limiting Scope of Edit
Enter the text string that is to be searched for when establishing the
scope of the edits. This string is compared to values in either a Line
Name, Area Name, or Character Text field. The Scope of Edit parameter
determines which is searched (it is set to either Line Match, Area Match,
or Text Match). If the Scope of Edit parameter is set to Entire Dataset,
this parameter has no effect. If this string does not match values of any
records in the file, nothing is written to the output file.
R2003.12.0
626
Landmark
Select Fields
The ordered selection dialog box is required when the user has the
option of determining the order in which field labels or symbols are
posted, or the order in which fields are printed on a report. The ordered
selection dialog box has two lists side by side. The left window is the
Source List. These fields are listed from your input data file. The right
window is the Destination List. When you click a field name from the
Source List, the field appears on the Destination List. By clicking a field
on the Source List, you indicate that you want to place that field on your
Output File.
The order of the fields on the Destination List determines the order of
the fields on the output file.
There are three mode buttons on the Ordered Selection dialog box:
Append, Delete, and Insert. These three buttons only affect the fields
on the Destination List. You can add (append), delete, and change the
order of (insert) the fields on the Destination List. Normally, the
Append button is the usual button to use when selecting fields to be
placed on the output file. Append is the default mode.
Append. To place a field on the Destination List, the Append button
must be depressed. Simply click the fields you want on the output file.
They appear on the Destination List.
Delete. You can delete any field on the Destination list. With the Delete
button depressed, click the fields you wish to delete from your output
file.
Insert. Insert allows you to pick a field on the Destination List and
Insert a field from the Source List on top of it.
Range Edit Field Mins and Maxs
This dialog box allows you to specify the minimum and maximum range
values for each field selected. The default values are the minimum and
maximum value of the selected fields. Records whose values fall inside
or outside (depends on Keep Values parameter setting) these limits are
written to the output file.
Specify Minimum for This Field
Enter a value that represents the lower limit for testing whether a record
should be kept or rejected. This limit is applied only to this field.
R2003.12.0
627
Landmark
Rotate Data
Select Operations
Data Operations
Rotate Data
Apply
R2003.12.0
628
Landmark
Applications
This option can be used as part of a series of steps which incorporates a
directional bias into a grid. Given that there is an angle (say N33E), and
bias (say 3:1), to the surface, the steps would be:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Convert the grid to data (name Z-field same as the original data
Z-field).
5.
6.
Rotate back to original position (33 degrees, use all other defaults).
7.
8.
Data rotation can also be used when an equally spaced data array, such
as 3D seismic data, is not oriented in the NS-EW direction. To do this,
import the data as control points, rotate so that the data is aligned
NS-EW, and build a grid. Contours from this grid are not in the original
datas coordinate system. To display the contours in that orientation,
contour the grid, save the contours as a contour file, rotate the contours
back to the original data orientation, and then contour again using the
rotated contours as input rather than the grid.
Input Data
A list of data files appears. A field is selected from this file and used as
input when the option executes. The X and Y coordinates of this file are
changed so that the data are rotated about a point per specified number
of degrees.
Output Data Name, Parameters
Use this dialog box to specify the name of the file, MFD to use for
storing the file (or use the OpenWorks project), angle of rotation,
coordinates of the rotation point, new coordinates for the rotation point
in the rotated system, and scale factor for the X and Y coordinates in the
rotated system.
R2003.12.0
629
Landmark
R2003.12.0
630
Landmark
Sort Data
Select Operations
Data Operations in
Z-MAP Plus window.
R2003.12.0
631
Landmark
R2003.12.0
632
Landmark
Field Operations
Use the Field Operations options to copy, rename, and delete fields from
all nongrid files. The file that contains the fields to be modified is never
changeda copy of the file is created.
Select Operations Data Operations
from Z-MAP Plus window
Copy only
selected
fields
Copy original
fields and
add additional
fields
Rename
fields
Delete
fields
R2003.12.0
633
Landmark
Select one of
two copy fields
methods
Yes
Change field name, type,
format and/or ZNON
Change
any field
parameters?
No
Apply
On screen report appears confirming copy fields
Save and return to
Z-MAP Plus window
Copy Fields Workflow
Selected fields can be copied from one file to a new file. During the copy
you can change the following:
fields name
R2003.12.0
634
Landmark
field type
stored format descriptors (FORTRAN format)
ZNONs
destination MFD or OpenWorks project
The fields source file is not altered. You name a new file and select the
output MFD.
Input File
A list of non-grid files is presented. Point to and click the file you want.
This file is used as input when the option executes.
Output File Name and Master File
Use this dialog box to specify the new file name, MFD to use for storing
it (or use the OpenWorks project), and whether file history is carried
along to the new file.
Output File Name Enter the name of the file to be created. The
name can be up to 24 characters long and can contain internal
blanks. If you do not supply a name, a forward slash is added to
the old file name (for example, old name TOP OF MUDDY or
new default name /TOP OF MUDDY).
R2003.12.0
635
Landmark
R2003.12.0
636
Landmark
Field name
FORTRAN format
R2003.12.0
637
Landmark
R2003.12.0
638
Landmark
Base of Muddy
A16
Base of Muddy
----------------
Even Multiples
R2003.12.0
= 4398.455
= F10.4
=
4398.4550
= ----------
639
Landmark
= 4392.455
= G15.5
=
4392.5
= ---------------
Example:
Number in field
FORTRAN format
Output
Column positions
= 4392.455
= G15.3
=
.439E+04
= ---------------
Example:
Number in field
FORTRAN format
Output
Column positions
= 4392.455
= G15.7
=
4392.455
= ---------------
R2003.12.0
640
Landmark
Rename Fields
Select Operations Data Operations
in Z-MAP Plus window
Apply
R2003.12.0
641
Landmark
Overview
Fields of any type in the selected file can be renamed. The process of
renaming is actually a copy of the old file to a new file, renaming the
fields in the process. All fields in the old file are copied to the new file;
only those fields selected are renamed. The original file is unaltered.
Input File
Select an input file from the list of files that appears.
Output File Name and Master File
Use this dialog box to specify the new file name, the MFD to use for
storing it (or use the OpenWorks project), and whether file history is
carried along to the renamed file.
R2003.12.0
Output File Name Enter the name of the file to create. The
name can be up to 24 characters long and can contain internal
blanks. If you do not supply a name, a forward slash is added to
the old file name (for example, old
name TOP OF MUDDY or new default name /TOP OF
MUDDY).
642
Landmark
Fields to Rename
A list of Fields is presented. Point to and click the Fields you want to
rename. Fields selected to be renamed appear as white letters on a black
background. You can toggle these fields on and off until you are ready
to rename.
Output Field Names
Names of the fields being copied can be changed. The default names are
the original field names.
New Field Name
Enter the new name to be stored with this field when it is copied. The
name can be up to 20 characters long and can contain internal blanks.
R2003.12.0
643
Landmark
Delete Fields
Select Operations Data Operations
in Z-MAP Plus window
Apply
To verify, select the output file name. When you select Fields
to Delete, it should have only the fields you did not delete.
R2003.12.0
644
Landmark
Input File
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want. This file
is used as input when the option executes.
Output File Name and Master File
Use this dialog box to specify the new file name and the MFD to use for
storing it (or use the OpenWorks project).
Output File Name
Enter the name of the file to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks. If you do not supply a
name a forward slash is added to the old file name (for example, old
name TOP OF MUDDY or new default name /TOP OF MUDDY).
Output File Master File
If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output file.
Copy File History
This parameter allows you to carry history information contained in the
original file into the file you are creating. File History describes what
has happened to a file (i.e., how that file was created, parameter settings,
files used, etc.). The history can potentially go back many generations.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
Copy History Copy the history as it appears in the original file and
add this copy event to that file.
Do Not Copy (default value) Do not copy the history from the
original file. Instead, make this copy event the first item in the files
history.
Fields to Delete
Select one or more fields to delete from the list that appears. The
selected fields are deleted immediately when Delete Fields executes. No
confirmation message box appears. Once you Apply field deletion, the
fields are deleted. However, since Z-MAP Plus never modifies an
existing file, you can go back to the original file to get a deleted field.
R2003.12.0
645
Landmark
Geophysical Operations
R2003.12.0
646
Landmark
an interpolation value
an extrapolation value
The seismic time file must be of type DATA, and it must contain Line
Name and Shotpoint Number fields. Sort the file first by Line Name and
then by Shotpoint Number with the Operations Data Operations
Sort Data option.
The coordinate reference file must be of type DATA, and it must contain
line name, shotpoint number, and x and y coordinate fields. Sort the file
first by Line Name and then by Shotpoint Number with the
Operations Data Operations Sort Data option.
This option calls the APPEND-XY macro. For detailed information
about parameters for this operation, select Help Online Manuals
Macro Manuals, then locate the APPEND-XY topic.
R2003.12.0
647
Landmark
This process produces a seismic dataset that contains the x and y values
for each grid node location, with a shotpoint number that is derived from
the y value and a line name that is derived from the x value.
Generating a Proper Sequential Line Name and Shotpoint Record
To generate a file that contains proper sequential line name and shotpoint
number records, you must implement the Data Enumeration macro twice on the
same file, entering the key field first for Line Name and second for Shotpoint
Number. Since this macro creates only Segment I.D. fields, you next need to
export the final file and import it reading in one of the Segment I.D. fields as the
line name and the other as the Shotpoint Number.
For example:
X (EASTING)
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
Y (NORTHING)
0.23600E+07
0.23620E+07
0.23640E+07
0.23660E+07
0.23680E+07
0.23700E+07
0.23720E+07
SHOT POINT
0.23600E+07
0.23620E+07
0.23640E+07
0.23660E+07
0.23680E+07
0.23700E+07
0.23720E+07
LINE NAME
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
0.28920E+07
Z VALUE
1999.2
2048.6
2121.3
2201.1
2278.5
2350.6
2424.1
R2003.12.0
648
Landmark
Make sure the depth units used in the velocity grid match the depth
units used in any supporting fault files or control point files.
Make sure the time units used in the velocity grid match the time
units used in the time horizon grid.
R2003.12.0
649
Landmark
Velocity Grid
Click the Velocity Grid button in the MIGRATION, REVERSE
MIGRATION dialog box. From the list that appears (the Select
VELOCITY GRID list), select a velocity grid to use. The depth units in
this grid must match the depth units used in supporting fault or control
point files. The time units must match those used in the selected time
horizon grid.
Time Horizon Faults
Optional: If the map has faults and you want to use a fault file for the
time horizon grid, click the Time Horizon Faults button in the
MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box. From the list that
appears (the Select TIME HORIZON FAULTS list), select a fault file to
use. If the fault file contains Z-fields, the Z-field units must be consistent
with the time units in the time horizon grid.
Velocity Faults
Optional: If the map has faults and you want to use a fault file for the
velocity grid, click the Velocity Faults button in the MIGRATION,
REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box. From the list that appears (the
Select VELOCITY FAULTS list), select a fault file to use. If the fault
file contains Z-fields, the Z-field units must be consistent with the
velocity units in the velocity grid.
Control Points
Optional: To use control points, click the Control Points button in the
MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box. From the list that
appears (the Select CONTROL POINTS list), select a control point file
to use. The Z-field units in this file must be consistent the depth units in
the velocity grid.
R2003.12.0
650
Landmark
Output Files
Optional: To create output files, click the Output Files button in the
MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box. Use the Name
OUTPUT files dialog box that appears for specifying a maximum of six
output files. Name each file and specify the MFD to use for storing it.
Output file names can have a maximum of 24 characters and can contain
internal blanks. You are asked for an output file name and output MFD
or OpenWorks for the following:
migrated nodes
migration vectors
unmigrated nodes
R2003.12.0
Type of Time From the Type of Time list, select ONE WAY
TIME or TWO WAY TIME. Select the option that is consistent
with the time horizon grid.
651
Landmark
To migrate a fault correctly, at least one vertex point must exist per
grid cell. However, in order to ensure proper fault migration, you
may need to use a higher sampling rate two, four or eight
vertices per cell. As a general rule, the smaller the grid interval, the
coarser the sampling rate.
The available fault file sampling rates are defined as follows:
COARSEST One vertex point per grid cell.
COARSE Two vertices per grid cell.
MEDIUM Four vertices per grid cell.
FINE Eight vertices per grid cell.
Control Point X-field
Optional: If you have specified a control point file, click the Control
Points X-field button in the MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION
dialog box. The Select X-FIELD for Control Point File list appears,
which shows all the appropriate fields in the selected control point file.
Select a field to use as the x field.
Control Point Y-field
Optional: If you have specified a control point file, click the Control
Points Y-field button in the MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION
dialog box. The Select Y-FIELD for Control Point File list appears,
which shows all the appropriate fields in the selected control point file.
Select a field to use as the y field.
Output Z-field
Optional: If you have specified a control point file to be migrated, you
must assign a name to the Z-field that contains the migrated control
points. The Select output Z-FIELD for Migrated Control Points list
appears, which shows the Z-fields in the selected control point file. To
overwrite one of these Z-fields, select that field. To create a new Z-field
for the migrated control points, select the Create a new Z-FIELD
option and enter the field name in the New Z-FIELD dialog box.
R2003.12.0
652
Landmark
Mistie Reduction
R2003.12.0
653
Landmark
Input Z-field
This is the name of the Z-field whose values are to be shifted to reduce
misties. The names of the Z-fields on your input seismic line data file
are displayed. Select the Z-field whose values you wish to check for
misties. The default Z-field is the first Z-field in the input seismic line
file.
Adjustment Desired?
This option enables you to select which Z-fields are shifted in the course
of reducing misties. When additional Z-fields are also shifted, their
Z-values are also shifted by the same amount as the value of the selected
Z-field.
Horizon Only
Only the Z-values on the present horizon (selected input Z-field) are
shifted.
Horizon & Shallower Horizons
This selection says to shift the Z-values of the reference horizon
(defined by the value of the Z-field on the seismic line data file you have
chosen as the Input Z-field) and all Z-fields that occur before the
selected Z-field in the seismic file.
Line Data Field Order is Important
Make sure the fields in the seismic line data field are in top-down
order before you begin Mistie Reduction.
If the fields are not in top-down order, use Field Operations to copy
them into a new seismic file in the correct top-down order before
running this Mistie Reduction process.
Horizon & Deeper Horizons
This selection says to shift both the Z values of the reference horizon and
of the horizons below the reference horizon, in other words, Z fields that
occur after the selected Z field in the seismic file.
All Horizons
This selection results in the shifting of Z values for all Z Fields in the
input seismic data file.
R2003.12.0
654
Landmark
Plot File This is the name of the output data file called Plot
File. The output data file contains line names, shotpoint numbers,
and other Mistie information intended for plotting or listing.
Select Line(s) from Input Data File This dialog box contains
an array of up to 10 entries containing the names of those seismic
lines which are not to be shifted during Mistie Reduction.
Line Name 110
From the list of items displayed when a line name popup menu
button is selected, you can choose the name of the line you want
held during Mistie Reduction.
Select Line(s) from Text File This option allows you to choose
a text file from this list which contains the line names of seismic
lines which are to be held fixed during Mistie Reduction.
Text File Creation
This selection does not create the text file. You must build the list in an
ASCII file, then import that file.
R2003.12.0
655
Landmark
X-filed
Y-filed
Shotpoint
filed
Yes
Segment
ID field
Line
Name
field
Window
data in the
file?
Horizon
Name
field
Area
Name
field
No
R2003.12.0
656
Landmark
contour data
fault data
cross-section data
You can limit thinning to:
one area
When you thin seismic data, the first and last shotpoints are always kept
in the resulting data file. In other words, they are never lost, no matter
what shotpoint you started with and what your thinning increment was.
When you thin well data, you specify a starting point and an increment.
In other words, you may want to start with the first well in a dataset and
keep every other well in the resulting file. Thinning simply goes through
the dataset with the well data and write every second well to the output
file.
Input File
Select the name of a data file to thin from the list that appears.
R2003.12.0
657
Landmark
Output File Name Enter the name of the file to be created. The
name can be up to 24 characters long and can contain internal
blanks. This file contains the thinned data and is stored on the
MFD.
R2003.12.0
658
Landmark
X Field
Select the field that you are using for X values in your dataset. This
defaults to the first field with X values in your data, so you do not need
to select this unless you have more than one X field.
R2003.12.0
659
Landmark
Y Field
Select the field that you are using for Y values in your dataset. This
defaults to the first field with Y values in your data, so you do not need
to select this unless you have more than one Y field.
Shotpoint Field
Select the field that you are using for the shotpoints in your dataset. This
defaults to the first field with shot point values in your data, so you do
not need to select this unless you have more than one shot point field.
This is necessary for seismic thinning, but you dont need this for well
data. Seismic thinning thins by shotpoint you select a starting
shotpoint and an increment to thin by.
Segment ID Field
Select the Segment ID field if you are thinning digitized line (vertex)
data such as coastlines, faults, or lease boundaries. Any points in a
vertex type file that have the same Segment ID are connected by a line
when the line is drawn. When a different Segment ID is reached, the
program interprets it as a separate line. Z-MAP Plus defaults to the first
field of this type in the dataset, so you would usually not need to select
this unless you have more than one Segment ID field.
Line Name Field
Select the field that you are using for the seismic line name in your
dataset. This defaults to the first line name field in your data, so you do
not need to select this unless you have more than one line name field.
Horizon Name Field
Select the field that you are using for horizon names in your dataset.
This defaults to the first field with horizon names in your data, so you
do not need to select this unless you have more than one horizon name
field. The horizon name would be the names of your seismic horizons
(events, or tops).
R2003.12.0
660
Landmark
R2003.12.0
661
Landmark
Scale line
Bias line
Scale area
Bias area
R2003.12.0
662
Landmark
Input File
From the list that appears, select the input file to scale (multiply) or bias
(add) a constant to.
Output File, Algorithm, Parameters
Typically, you use this dialog box to change the output file name and
output MFD. You can use this dialog box to specify the following input
values:
R2003.12.0
Scale/Bias Value Enter the number that you would like to have
multiplied or added to your field.
663
Landmark
R2003.12.0
field number for the isochrone data field (the zones time
thickness)
field number for the datum depth field Z(0) (the depth to the top of
the zone)
field number for the initial estimate for the normalized interval
velocity (NIV)
664
Landmark
R2003.12.0
665
Landmark
isochrone GRID
normalization depth
compaction parameter n
This is determined for each interval from crossplots of data from
velocity surveyed wells in the project area. The equation used is:
log ( ZM )
log ( VI ) = ---------------------- + log ( L A P )
n
where:VI = interval velocity
ZM = midpoint depth
L = lithology A = age P = pressure
Normalization depth is an arbitrary number in the range of the
depths being converted. If multiple zones are converted, then the
same number should be used for all zones so similar lithology can
be recognized between zones by comparing normalized interval
velocities (NIV)
For each interval where seismic times correlate with times in the
wells, plot the algorithm of interval velocity vs. the logarithm of
midpoint depth. Calculate this value for all surveyed wells in the
project area. Fit the points with a line. The slope of the best fit line
is 1/n for the interval.
Normalized Interval Velocity (Grid) calls the NIV-GRID macro. For
detailed information about parameters for this operation, select Help
Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the NIV-GRID topic.
R2003.12.0
666
Landmark
Faults
Fault operations help you condition faults to increase accuracy during
gridding. The example workflow that follows shows how to use several
operations to condition a fault file so it can be used with the Z-MAP Plus
non-opaque fault (faults with throws) gridding methods (Point Gridding
Plus, Line Gridding Plus, or Trendform Gridding).
.
Post the fault traces derived from the Shrinker process on a map.
Visually check the heave and vertical separation values using
Operations Faults Profiler.
Backfill the fault angle field in the fault file using
Operations Faults Calculate Fault Fields.
Examine the new fault angle fields using the Faults Profiler.
Using the Z-MAP Plus Edit Data Editor option,
edit the fault angle and vertical separation values.
R2003.12.0
Operations: Faults
667
Landmark
Balancer
The fault Balancer option helps to balance fault bifurcations to adjust
the throw values on fault traces that are in close proximity to each
bifurcation. Balancing means that the throws around each bifurcation
point add to zero. The Balancer operation:
removes small segments of the crossing faults that are not needed
extends (snaps) fault traces that almost touch another fault so that
the two faults meet
R2003.12.0
Operations: Faults
668
Landmark
If the throw sense is negative the angle is also negative. The angle field must be
specified in decimal degrees.
When regular fault files are output, they can require editing before you
process them further in Z-MAP Plus gridding methods. Once you have
edited the fields in a regular fault file, you can use the enhanced fault
processing available in Point Gridding Plus, Line Gridding Plus or
Trendform Gridding. The three field types used by these gridding
methods to create expanded faults are vertical separation, heave, and
fault dip angle.
When regular fault traces emerge from the Operations Fault
Shrinker option, the unedited fields usually do not have consistently
good vertical separation and heave values. In editing the regular fault
files, you get a good idea what the vertical separation values should be,
but a poor understanding of what the heaves should look like. Since
these heaves are used to produce the geometry of the expanded fault
polygon traces, they are the focus of the field value editing.
Fault Dip Angle Field
Point Gridding Plus does not presently use the fault angle in the regular fault
file. However, fault dip angle usually varies in a smooth and predictable fashion,
and you can concentrate on editing this field value. Then we use Operations
Fault Calculate Fault Fields to recalculate the heave field values.
You must input a regular fault file. This fault file must have vertical
separation, heave, and fault dip angle fields.
R2003.12.0
Operations: Faults
669
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Operations: Faults
670
Landmark
Migrator
The Migrator produces a set of centerline traces adjusted from their
current map position to the position they would have on a structure
surface either above or below the structure surface to which the faults
belong. Faults with small vertical separation at the ends are shortened
automatically.
You must input a fault file containing regular, centerline faults with dip
and vertical separation information. The isochore thickness (thickness
between the faults horizon and the horizon to which the faults are
migrated) may be encoded on the input fault file or input directly as a
constant value. You can specify rates of change of dip and vertical
separation (throw) to model the migration of listric faults.
The thickness field in the input fault file is normally created by
interpolating values from an unfaulted isochore grid that represents
thickness between the surface for which faults exist and the surface to
which the faults are migrated.
After migration, some minor editing is usually required to fix
bifurcations that may have separated and to remove or add faults that
die-out or start-up on the target structure surface. Balancer can aid in
this task.
You are asked to specify:
change in dip angle and vertical separation (throw) for depth unit
You must eliminate the isochore thickness value from the file before you can use
the output file for other fault processing utilities.
R2003.12.0
Operations: Faults
671
Landmark
Original Fault
R2003.12.0
Operations: Faults
672
Landmark
Profiler
This process creates a fault file and a vertex file which graphically
describe an attribute distribution along a centerline fault. The attribute
could be throw, heave or fault angle. The output, when displayed on a
map with the original faults, provides a visual representation of the
chosen attribute field in the fault file. The output can be thought of as a
cross-section profile of the attribute laid on its side. The input fault
traces are the baseline for the cross section and represent a value of zero
for the attribute on the section. Positive deviations from the centerline
faults (positive throws, for instance) appear by default on the upthrown
side of the fault, while negatives appear on the downthrown side. The
display of output from this process can be used to:
R2003.12.0
Operations: Faults
673
Landmark
Shrinker
Shrinker automatically converts fault polygons to regular, center-line
faults. If a seismic data file is also input, then the process can calculate
the vertical separations (called Throw in the parameter prompts),
heave, and dip angle at each point where the seismic lines cross the
newly created regular faults. If the faults are already regular faults, then
the process does not modify them but calculates vertical separation at
seismic crossings (heave is returned as zero and dip as ninety).
Centerline faults with vertical separation, created by this process are
standard inputs used by gridding methods that produce faults with
throws (non-opaque faults.
Only the X, Y, and ID fields are carried through from the input fault file to the
output fault file. All other fields (throw, dip and heave) are created by the
Shrinker.
The expanded fault file is not normally made but can be used as a check to see
how well the regular, center-line construction and heave calculation processes
have operated.
R2003.12.0
Operations: Faults
674
Landmark
Remaining Operations
In addition to the groups of similar operations, Operations includes 14
remaining options. These options are not grouped together on the
Operations main menu, but most of them lend themselves to
classification according to their intended functions. The remaining
operations are listed in alphabetical order, and include:
miscellaneous operations
R2003.12.0
675
Landmark
Cartographic Operations
Cartographic operations include:
Miscellaneous Operations
Miscellaneous operations include:
R2003.12.0
676
Landmark
Back Interpolation
Enter from Operations on
Z-MAP Plus window
Yes
Is output
field a new
field?
No
Select Z-value
R2003.12.0
677
Landmark
R2003.12.0
678
Landmark
R2003.12.0
679
Landmark
R2003.12.0
680
Landmark
File Conversion
Enter from Operations in
Z-MAP Plus window
DATA
FALT
CNTR
XSEC
VERT
WLOG
SSEC
TEXT
DWEL
Apply
Line
Segment
field
Line
Name
field
Horizon
Name
field
Shotpoint
field
R2003.12.0
681
Landmark
When converting control point data to contour data, you are also asked
to input the Separate distance and the Connect distance.
You can perform the following file conversions:
R2003.12.0
From
To
Contour File
Contour File
Fault File
Contour File
Vertex File
Contour File
Fault File
Data File
Fault File
Vertex File
Vertex File
Contour File
Vertex File
Data File
Vertex File
Fault File
682
Landmark
R2003.12.0
683
Landmark
DATA
CNTR (contour)
FALT (fault)
TEXT
The default option is CNTR.
Separate (DATA-CNTR)
Any two points in the X/Y/Z data file further apart than this distance are
considered to belong to different contours (even if their Z-values
match).
Connect (DATA-CNTR)
If the first and last point of a contour line are closer than this distance,
then the contour is closed.
Discontinuity Flags (SSEC-DATA)
This option allows you to choose how to treat the presence of
discontinuity codes during the file conversion process. The flags can be
either retained or omitted when converting cross-section data to data
files.
Discontinuity flags are a way of letting the program know that an
unconformity exists on a surface.
R2003.12.0
684
Landmark
X Field
A list of fields from your input file is presented. Select the one you want
to use.
Y Field
Select the Y-field you want from the list. Y-fields in this list were picked
from your input file.
Z Fields
Select the Z-field you want from the list. Z-fields in this list were picked
from your input file.
Line Segment Field
Select the Line Segment Field you want from the list. Line Segment
Fields in this list were picked from your input file.
Line Name Field
Select the Line Name Field you want from the list. Line Name Fields in
this list were picked from your input file.
Horizon Name Field
Select the Horizon Name Field you want from the list. Horizon Name
Fields in this list were picked from your input file.
Shotpoint Field
Select the Shotpoint Field you want from the list. Shotpoint Fields in
this list were picked from your input file.
R2003.12.0
685
Landmark
Coordinate Transformations
R2003.12.0
686
Landmark
Lat/Lon to X/Y
X/Y to Lat/Lon
Activate/deactivate projection
R2003.12.0
687
Landmark
R2003.12.0
1.
2.
688
Landmark
Spheroid
The earth is neither flat nor spherical but is an oblate-spheroid, flattened
at the poles and bulging at the equator (a flattening of about 1/300). This
oblate-spheroid is not perfect but is highly irregular due to variations in
material density and the affects of gravity and recent geologic activity
on that material. Defining and measuring position on this surface
requires that a definition of the spheroid (earth shape) be made.
Depending on where on the earth you are, one shape should match the
earth better than another. Also, depending on the size of the area,
different spheroids provide better results than others, therefore there are
many spheroid definitions. You must select the spheroid appropriate for
your area. Usually a company has a standard for each area it works in.
Once the shape of the earth is defined then latitude and longitude lines
are laid on that shape in their correct position.
Projection
The next problem is to unwrap the spheroid so that it can be viewed
as a flat map. This is, in fact, impossible to do with a sphere; however,
it can be done with a cone, cylinder or other shape representing a plane
that has been wrapped. Planes are sometimes used in the manner
described in the following text. So, rather than try to unwrap a sphere,
we run a cone, cylinder, plane, or other easily unwrapped geometric
form (projection surface) through the spheroid near the area we want to
map. All of the spheroid information is then projected mathematically
onto the geometric form. This usually involves moving the object from
the spheroid onto the projection surface following a line normal to the
projection surface, although other methods are used.
The point or line where the projection surface intersects the spheroid
does not have to be projected since the two forms have the same
position. Therefore, when the projection surface (cone, cylinder, etc.) is
unwrapped, that point or line is not distorted. Points not on this
intersection point or line are distorted by the process of projecting along
a normal to the projection surface. This can be visualized in the diagram
that follows.
R2003.12.0
689
Landmark
spheroid
R2003.12.0
690
Landmark
central meridian
standard parallel
scale factor
R2003.12.0
691
Landmark
output MFD
R2003.12.0
692
Landmark
R2003.12.0
693
Landmark
Projection Code
A list of projection codes is presented. Point and click the projection
code you want. Projections can be Cylindrical, Conic or Planar
Azimuthal. The available projections are shown in the following
illustration. For a complete description of each available projection, see
Map Projections on page 875.
Unlocking Parameters
R2003.12.0
694
Landmark
R2003.12.0
695
Landmark
Reference Spheroid
The Reference Spheroid is a theoretical geometric figure whose
dimensions closely approach the dimensions of the earth for a particular
area. As a result, there are a number of defined Reference Spheroids. For
a complete description of each of the following reference spheroids
including the dimensions for the semi-major axis and the semi-minor
axis. seeReference Spheroid on page 893. From these two
dimensions, the program calculates the ellipticity for you. Select the
desired reference spheroid from the popup menu. Selections include:
.
R2003.12.0
696
Landmark
Projection Parameters
This dialog box contains a list of the parameters required for the
specified projection. These parameters may include:
Unit Code
Unit Factor
Reference Latitude
Latitude Scale Factor
Reference Longitude
Longitude Scale Factor
False Northing and False Easting
Central Meridian
Mapping Across the Dateline
Unit Code
Unless you select to use a UTM projection where units are always
defined in meters, you have the option of projecting your data in eight
units of measurement. These include: user-supplied, meters, feet, yards,
inches, kilometers, nautical miles, statute miles.
Unit Factor (Units/Meter)
In order for this parameter to have effect, the Unit Code must be set to
user-defined. The unit factor provides the option of defining your own
units factor. User defined units are defined as units/meter.
Reference Latitude (Standard Parallel)
Reference Latitude, or Standard Parallel, is a parallel of latitude which
is used as a control line in the computation of a map projection.
Latitude Scale Factor
The Latitude Scale Factor is a multiplier for reducing a distance
obtained from a map by computing the scale to the actual distance on the
datum of the map. For example, applying a scale reduction along the
central meridian of a transverse Mercator projection creates two lines of
true scale on either side of the central meridian, optimally reducing the
distortion for a particular area. Reference Longitude, or Central
Meridian, is the line of longitude located at the center of a projection on
which the projection is generally based.
R2003.12.0
697
Landmark
R2003.12.0
698
Landmark
Units used by the NAD27 state plane projection system are in U.S. survey feet.
Units used by the NAD83 state plane projection system are in metric units.
When you click either NAD27 or NAD83, a list of all 50 states, as well
as Samoa, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands and the Old and New regions
for Michigan is presented. Point to and click the selection you want.
Select Region
A list of regions associated with the selected state is presented.
Depending on the state, regions are listed as East, West, North, South,
Central, or by number, i.e., Region 1, Region 2, Region 3, etc.
Activate Projection
Select this option to activate the currently defined projection
parameters. These parameters remain in effect until you select the
Deactivate Projection option or reactivate and change the current
projection parameters by reselecting the Activate Projection option.
Deactivate Projection
Select this option to deactivate a projection when you wish to generate
a picture using northing/easting parameters.
R2003.12.0
699
Landmark
In Coordinate Transformation, if you supply a file with the following fields: Lat,
Lon, Z, the process creates at file with the following fields: Lat, Lon, Z, X, Y
(where is X, Y are created by the process). For this example, assume these X,Y
fields are in UTM coordinate system. If you used the Coordinate
Transformation option to then transform the Lat, Lon, Z,X,Y fields into a pair
of Lambert XY coordinates, you would get the following fields: Lat, Lon, Z, X,
Y, X,Y. Multiple X,Y fields in a data file is unusable with many processes.
Coordinate Transformation is not able to overwrite existing fields. Transform
Coordinates (Overwrite Fields) performs the same transformations and allows
you to overwrite the original X,Y fields.
fields in the input data file to use as input for the projection
R2003.12.0
700
Landmark
DEG to DMS
Select
direction of
conversion
DEG to DMS
R2003.12.0
701
Landmark
R2003.12.0
702
Landmark
R2003.12.0
703
Landmark
Line Generalization
Enter from Operations in
Z-MAP Plus window
Horizon Name
field
Horizon Name
field
Horizon Name
field
Horizon Name
field
R2003.12.0
704
Landmark
coastline or other vertex files that contain more detail needed for
the chosen map scale
Increasing Generalization
As the map scale decreases the amount of generalization that can be performed
increases.
R2003.12.0
Points describing a line must smoothly cross through the x,y plane.
If you are trying to thin seismic data (for example, to keep every
10th shotpoint in the data file) use the operation Data Thinning
instead of line generalization. Generalization may throw out may
more points than you intended along straight line segments, since
it only tries to maintain the same line shape.
705
Landmark
R2003.12.0
706
Landmark
The last temporary point in each sequence is the only temporary point that is
actually included in the output curve.
LINE SEQUENCE
NUMBER
------------2
3
4
5
R2003.12.0
NUMBER OF
INPUT POINTS
-----------12
13
16
12
12
118
=
=
=
1
29
9
NUMBER OF
OUTPUT POINTS
------------12
12
14
12
707
Landmark
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
29
6
11
5
6
1
4
3
28
5
11
5
6
1
4
2
12
112
=
=
=
1
28
9
Partial Statistics displays the input file statistics and the output file
statistics without the print out for each line in the file.
Tolerance
The generalization tolerance is a user-defined threshold value that is
measured in the same units as the data. The distance between input curve
points and various algorithm baselines is compared to this threshold.
Data thinning is inversely proportional to the selected tolerance. A
tolerance that is only a very small fraction of the total X or Y range of
the data is usually appropriate for planimetric data. A tolerance that is a
very small fraction of the Z-range of the data is usually appropriate for
seismic data. Choosing a best tolerance can require several trial runs,
but most digitized cartographic data is so highly oversampled that a very
small tolerance produces immediate improvements.
R2003.12.0
708
Landmark
Z Field
A list of Z-fields is presented. A Z-field is usually depth or time values.
Point to and click the field you want. This input field is used when the
option executes. Fields in this list were picked from a previously
selected file.
Segment ID Field
Vertex points that have the same Segment ID are connected as a line.
When vertex data is digitized or input interactively, a Segment ID is
automatically assigned to each line input.
A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want. This
input field is used when the option executes. Fields in this list were
picked from a previously selected file.
Line Name Field
A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want. This
input field is used when the option executes. Fields in this list were
picked from a previously selected file.
Horizon Name Field
A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want. This
input field is used when the option executes. Fields in this list were
picked from a previously selected file.
R2003.12.0
709
Landmark
Line Resampling
R2003.12.0
710
Landmark
Line Resampling creates a new output dataset and does not change the
input dataset. The output dataset contains exactly those fields found on
the input dataset. Sort flags and projection information are preserved in
the output dataset.
Line Resampling allows choices and entries for the following:
Data Type
Files (Input)
Choose Field
DATA
CNTR (Contour)
FALT (Fault)
R2003.12.0
711
Landmark
Output MFD
From the popup menu, select the scratch file or MFD to use for saving
the output file.
Resampling and Propagation
You can use these options to specify whether you want to perform Line
Resampling, Attribute Propagation, or both. Clicking the Resampling
box causes Line Resampling to be performed on execution. Clicking the
Propagation box causes Attribute Propagation to be performed on
execution. Clicking both boxes causes Line Resampling and Attribute
Propagation to be performed on execution.
Resampling Parameters
R2003.12.0
Resampling Method
712
Landmark
Lines to Resample
Increment
Rectangular Increment: DISTINCXY
Arc Distance: DISTINCLL
Shotpoint Increment: SHINCREM and NMINCREM
Distance along Baseline: DISPLACE
Base: SHINCREM, NMINCREM, DISPLACE
Discontinuity Usage
Geographic Coordinate Technique: DISTINCLL
Geographic Arc Distance Units: DISTINCLL
Geographic Arc Units/Meter
3-D Line Divisor
Records to Retain
Resampling Tolerance
Distance Break
Shotpoint Break: SHINCREM and NMINCREM when Lines to
Resample = All
Ellipsoid Method: DISTINCLL
Spheroid: DISTINCLL
Semi Major Axis A: DISTINCLL when Ellipsoid Method =
ELLIPSD
Semi Minor Axis B: DISTINCLL when Ellipsoid Method =
ELLIPSD
Axis Units: DISTINCLL, Ellipsoid Specified
Axis Units/Meter
Resampling Method
Controls which resampling method is used to position new points along
the line. Possible choices for Resampling Method include:
DISTINCXY (Distance Increment X/Y). This is the Distance
Increment process for Resampling in a rectangular x,y coordinate
system. Line Resampling creates new points at a regular increment of
distance along the line. One parameter controls this process: Distance
Increment value, I.
Where Pj is the distance from the first point on the line,
Pj = jI, for j = 1,2,3
R2003.12.0
713
Landmark
R2003.12.0
714
Landmark
DISTINCXY
DISTINCLL
SHINCREM
NMINCREM
2D Seismic
X, Y
Lat, Lon
SP Number
numeric field,
SP Distance
3D Seismic
Bin Number,
Track Number
DWEL
X, Y
Lat, Lon
numeric field
FALT
X, Y
Lat, Lon
numeric field
VERT
X, Y
Lat, Lon
numeric field
SSEC
CNTR
Y
X, Y
XSEC
DATA
DISPLACE
X
X, Y
Lat, Lon
numeric field
Lines to Resample
Controls whether to resample all or some of the lines. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
All (default). Resample all the lines from the input file.
R2003.12.0
715
Landmark
Some. Resample only some of the lines from the input file. A mask
Line Identification Parameters dialog box appears to allow you to select
which lines are resampled. See Line Identification Parameters on
page 730 for a discussion of this dialog box. Before you select Some,
you should have selected the Choose Fields button on the main dialog
box; when you do (or if you havent) the Choose Fields dialog box
appears. See Choose Fields on page 728 for a discussion of this
dialog box. You should also have chosen a Primary Line Select Field
on the Choose Fields dialog box.
Increment
This option allows you to choose the resampling increment or distance
between successive new points on a line. The type of distance depends
on Resampling Method chosen. Increment is defaulted only if
Resampling Method is SHINCREM.
You can increase or decrease the value of the Increment by clicking the
up or down arrows on either side of the parameter window.
There are two main categories of resampling:
Rectangular Increment
If Resampling Method is DISTINCXY, then the Increment, or distance
between two new points on the line which is being resampled, is
rectangular distance. This distance is computed using the Pythagorean
Theorem. Line Resampling uses the first set of X- and Y-fields on the
dataset (unless the user specifies another set of X- and Y-fields using the
control parameters). Line Resampling fills all other fields in the dataset
with nulls, even other X and Y coordinate fields.
R2003.12.0
716
Landmark
Arc Distance
If Resampling Method is DISTINCLL, then the Increment, or distance
between two new points on the line which is being resampled, is
distance along an arc. With DISTINCLL, Line Resampling uses the first
set of Latitude and Longitude fields on the dataset (unless the user
specifies another set of Latitude and Longitude fields using the control
parameters). Line Resampling fills all other fields on the dataset with
nulls, even other Latitude and Longitude fields.
When Line Resampling uses geographical coordinates to resample the
dataset, it calculates the distance between new points along a line
(Increment) along a great circle joining the adjacent original points.
Line Resampling needs ellipsoid parameters to calculate the parameters
of the arc defining the great circle. In Z-MAP Plus, there are three ways
Line Resampling can get the ellipsoid parameters:
You may specify the name of the ellipsoid (for example, Clarke
1866).
Shotpoint Increment
When Resampling Method is SHINCREM, then the value is shotpoint
increment. The base shotpoint value could be a beginning shotpoint
value. Line Resampling creates new shotpoints at a specified interval.
With a base shotpoint number of 1127 and an increment of 50, the next
new point is 1177.
When the Resampling Method is NMINCREM, then the value is
numerical increment. The increment represents a constant value along a
numerical field, such as time or depth.
Distance Along Baseline
When the Resampling Method is DISPLACE, then the value is distance
along the baseline of a cross-section (XSEC) dataset.
You may enter the value in the box or click the up or down arrow to
increase or decrease the value in the box.
R2003.12.0
717
Landmark
Arc Distance
The Increment, or distance between two new points on the line which is
being resampled, is distance along an arc. With DISTINCLL, Line
Resampling uses the first set of Latitude and Longitude fields on the
dataset (unless the user specifies another set of Latitude and Longitude
fields using the control parameters). Line Resampling fills all other
fields on the dataset with nulls, even other Latitude and Longitude
fields.
When Line Resampling uses geographical coordinates to resample the
dataset, it calculates the distance between new points along a line
(Increment) along a great circle joining the adjacent original points.
Line Resampling needs ellipsoid parameters to calculate the parameters
of the arc defining the great circle. In Z-MAP Plus, there are three ways
Line Resampling can get the ellipsoid parameters:
You may specify the name of the ellipsoid (for example, Clarke
1866).
R2003.12.0
718
Landmark
Base
For computational purposes, the base is the starting value for three of the
Resampling Methods. The base is not necessarily the starting value of
the resulting line. For example, a 2D seismic line with original shotpoint
values of 7,9,11,13 that is resampled with SHINCREM and base = 0,
increment = 2, RETAIN=ENDPOINTS results in a line of 7,8,10,12,13.
(Not 0,2,4,6,7,8,10,12,13.)
This option allows you to choose the base value (defined in the
following text). It is needed if the Resampling Method is SHINCREM,
NMINCREM, or DISPLACE. You may enter the value in the box or
click the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the value in the box.
In the SHINCREM method, Base refers to the starting shotpoint
number.
In the NMINCREM method, Base refers to the starting value in some
specified numerical field, such as a time field or depth field.
In the DISPLACE method, Base refers to the starting value on the
baseline of a Cross-Section dataset. Line Resampling depends on the
X-EASTING field in the cross-section baseline to determine linear
displacement.
Discontinuity Usage
This option allows you to choose how to treat the presence of
discontinuity fields during the resampling process.
Discontinuity flags are a way of letting the program know that an
unconformity exists on a surface subject to resampling. Resampling
does not consider the geometry of the underlying surfaces when creating
new points at regular intervals along a line. If discontinuity flags are not
used, attribute propagation computes values at the new points for all the
attributes attached to the points.
Ignore. Ignore the discontinuity fields during the resampling process.
Some. Preserve any original point for which any of the propagation
discontinuity fields is positive.
All (default). Preserve any original point for which any of the
discontinuity fields in the dataset is positive.
R2003.12.0
719
Landmark
File
User-Supplied
Meters
International Feet
US Survey Feet
Yards
Inches
Kilometers
Nautical Miles
Statute Miles
File (default). Parameters are obtained from the history records of the
input file.
User Supplied. User supplies the units in Geographic Arc Units/Meter.
R2003.12.0
720
Landmark
R2003.12.0
721
Landmark
Distance Break
The Increment parameter, discussed above, has a more complete
discussion of the units of distance required by each of the Resampling
Methods.
You may wish to suspend line resampling between two points if the
distance between successive points on a line is too large. You may do so
by specifying a break distance.
If the distance between any adjacent points on the line is greater than the
break value, then no resampling occurs between these points. This
option allows you to choose the distance break value. Break value of 0.0
disables distance break checking. You may enter the value in the box or
click the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the value in the box.
For a definition/explanation of the units in which you can specify
distance break, see the Increment topic on page 716.
If Resampling Method is DISTINCXY, then Distance Break is assumed
to be in rectangular units (x,y units).
If Resampling Method is DISTINCLL, then Distance Break is assumed
to be arc distance (Lat, Long units).
If Resampling Method is SHINCREM, DISPLACE, or NMINCREM
and if the X-field and Y-field are specified by the user, then the
following rules apply. If the X- and Y-fields are rectangular coordinate
fields, then the Distance Break is assumed to be in rectangular units. If
the X- and Y-fields are geographic coordinate fields, then the Distance
Break is assumed to be arc distance in units specified by Geographic Arc
Distance Units.
Shotpoint Break
If the distance between any adjacent shotpoints on a line is greater than
break value, then no resampling occurs between these points. This
option allows you to choose the distance break value. Break value of 0.0
disables shotpoint break checking. You may enter the value in the box
or click the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the value in the
box.
Resampling Based on Geographic Coordinates
Line Resampling may resample lines based on either X/Y or Lat/Long
fields. The geographic distance along the line governs the frequency
with which Line Resampling inserts new points.
R2003.12.0
722
Landmark
Spheroid
The Spheroid defines the size of the semi-major and semi-minor axes.
You only need to define the Spheroid when the Ellipsoid Method is
Ellipsd. Each spheroid on this list has a semi-major and semi-minor axis
defined. The Reference Spheroid has dimensions which closely
approach the dimensions of the earth for a particular area of interest.
From these two dimensions, the program calculates the ellipticity for
you. Select the desired Reference Spheroid. For a complete description
of each of the following reference spheroids including the dimensions
for the semi-major axis and the semi-minor axis, see Reference
Spheroid on page 893.
Semi-Major and Semi-Minor Axis
This value must be entered when the Ellipsoid Method = Specified. If
you do not derive the value of the semi-major and semi-minor axes from
a projected data file or from a standard spheroid, you can enter the
values for the semi-major and semi-minor axes.
R2003.12.0
723
Landmark
Axis Units
Axis Units are required when the Resampling Method is DISTINCLL
and the Ellipsoid Method is user-specified. The units of the Semi-Major
and Semi-Minor Axis are converted into the units you select.
Choices for this parameter include:
File
User Supplied
Meters (default)
International Feet
Us Survey Feet
Yards
Inches
Kilometers
Nautical Miles
Statute Miles
File. Get the information from projection information in the input file
dataset.
User Supplied. You supply the units in Axis Units/Meter.
Axis Units/Meter
The Units/Meter parameter is in effect when the Ellipsoid Method is
User-specified. The Units/Meter number is a multiplier. If you have
specified the semi-major axis to 100,000, and the axis units/meter to 1.0,
the semi-major axis is 100,000 meters. if you have a semi-major axis of
100,000, and a units/meter factor of 0.5, then the semi-major axis is
50,000 meters.
You may either enter the number in the box or use the arrow to increase
or decrease the multiplier.
R2003.12.0
724
Landmark
Propagation Parameters
R2003.12.0
725
Landmark
R2003.12.0
726
Landmark
Mode
There are three mode buttons in the Mode dialog box: Append, Delete,
and Insert. These three buttons only affect the fields in the Fields to
Propagate list. You can add (append), delete, and change the order of
(insert) the fields in the Fields to Propagate list. Normally, the Append
button is the usual button to use when selecting fields to be propagated.
Append. To move a field from the Source List window to the Fields to
Propagate window, the Append diamond must be depressed. Simply
click the fields you want on the output file. If qualified, they appear in
the Fields to Propagate list.
Delete. You can delete any field in the Fields to Propagate list. With the
Delete diamond depressed, click the fields you wish to move back into
the Source List.
Insert. Insert allows you to move a field from the Source List to the
Fields to Propagate list. It inserts the selected field above a highlighted
item in the Fields to Propagate window.
Lines to Fill
You may choose whether to use Attribute Propagation for some of the
lines or all of them. Choices for this parameter includes:
All (default). Propagate all the lines from the input file.
Some. Propagate only some of the lines from the input file. A Line
Identification Parameters dialog box appears to allow you to define
which lines are propagated.
Methods
You may choose how to propagate each field. You must first choose
which method you want specified by clicking a diamond in the Method
dialog box. Afterward, click the Method window next to the Fields to
Propagate you want the method assigned to. Choices for this parameter
include:
Interpolate. Interpolate field value from the field value in the
surrounding records. Valid for numeric fields only.
Copy Prior. Copy field value from the field value in the previous
record.
Copy Post. Copy field value from the field value in the next record.
Copy Closest. Copy field value from the field value in the record
closest (by coordinate distance) to the present record.
R2003.12.0
727
Landmark
This dialog box allows you to select a field that is involved in the
Resampling and/or Propagation processes. The fields you can choose
from depend on the fields actually present in your input dataset.
There can be more than one field of a certain field type in the input file.
This dialog box allows you to define which field is the field type default.
Clicking the button next to the Field Type you want to define causes one
or more choices to appear in the Choices window. Click which field you
want to choose and it appears in the Chosen Field window next to the
chosen Field Type.
R2003.12.0
728
Landmark
Y/
Lat
DATA
2D
seismic
Line
Name
Shotpoint
Number/
Distance
Req.
Req.
DATA
3D
seismic
Survey
Name
3D
Shotpoint
Number
3D
Line
Name
Opt.
Req.
Req.
Segment
ID
Horizon
Name
DATA
other
Req.
Req.
CNTR
Req.
Req.
FALT
Req.
Req.
Req.
VERT
Req.
Req.
Req.
DWEL
Req.
Req.
Req.
SSEC
Req.
Req.
Req.
Req.
XSEC
Req.
Req.
Req.
Req.
R2003.12.0
Req.
729
Landmark
R2003.12.0
730
Landmark
R2003.12.0
731
Landmark
R2003.12.0
732
Landmark
Delete Selected
Clicking Delete Selected causes the mask you selected in Line
Identification Textual Mask A or B to be deleted.
Increment
Double-clicking one of the entries copies it to the Increment Entry boxes
where you may edit it. If more than seven entries are present, then a
scroll bar appears.
Note that both single and double clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Line
Identification Textual Mask B, Base, Distance Break, and Shotpoint
Break windows.
Increment Entry
Allows you to edit an Increment entry. Click Apply when you have
completed the edit.
Base
Double-clicking one of the entries copies it to the Base Entry boxes
where you may edit it. This window is inactive if Resample Method is
SHINCREM. If more than seven entries are present, then a scroll bar
appears.
Note that both single and double clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Line
Identification Textual Mask B, Increment, Distance Break, and
Shotpoint Break windows.
Base Entry
Allows you to edit a Base entry. Click Apply when you have completed
the edit.
Distance Break
Double-clicking one of the entries copies it to the Distance Break Entry
box where you may edit it. If more than seven entries are present, then
a scroll bar appears.
Note that both single and double clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Line
Identification Textual Mask B, Increment, Base, and Shotpoint Break
windows.
R2003.12.0
733
Landmark
R2003.12.0
734
Landmark
Surface Intersection
R2003.12.0
735
Landmark
R2003.12.0
736
Landmark
Macros
Overview
In addition to standard Z-MAP Plus commands, you can execute ZCL
macros from Z-MAP Plus. A macro is a collection of ZCL processes
packaged so you can call and execute them as a group. The macros are
fully described in the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.
You can execute only macros that have already been written: The
Macros menu does not have a dialog box for creating macros. The
directory used to store macros must be specified in the Directory Paths
for Macro Files (described on page 115). A macro can be executed only
if its name ends with .ZCLMAC.
Macros are organized into the following groups.
User Macros
Lists user created macros from the user macro directory.
When you select User Macros, the SELECT a MACRO Dialog box
appears. The SELECT a MACRO dialog box lists the macros located in
the directories specified in the Directory Paths: Macro dialog box. Only
macros whose names end with .ZCLMAC appear in the list.
R2003.12.0
Macros: Overview
737
Landmark
If no macros are found when you select the User Macros option, an
error message like the following one appears.
Quick-look
The Quick-look macros are shown in the following illustration:
R2003.12.0
Macros: Overview
738
Landmark
Graphics
The Operations macros are shown in the following illustration.
Operations
The Operations macros are shown in the following illustration.
R2003.12.0
Macros: Overview
739
Landmark
Geophysics
The Geophysics macros are shown in the following illustration.
Utilities
The Utilities macros are shown in the following illustration.
R2003.12.0
Macros: Overview
740
Landmark
Execute Macro
The EXECUTE MACRO dialog box allows you to supply all of the
parameter values required by the macro you selected and then to execute
that macro. Defaults set in the macro can be viewed when working with
the Macro Parameter menus. These dialog boxes are dynamically built
from information in the macro. Because of this, the order, names, and
information in the dialog boxes are directly related to the quality of
macro construction.
When you select a macro, the system window gives a brief description
of the macro, its input needs, and result, and the EXECUTE MACRO
dialog box appears.
R2003.12.0
741
Landmark
R2003.12.0
742
Landmark
CARM
Overview
The CARM (Computer Aided Reservoir Management) menu contains
the following items:
Volumetrics
Surface Correction
Area/Depth Plot
Volumetrics
Use volumetrics to compute areas and volumes from a grid. Volumes
are computed by intersecting the grid limits of the input grid with the
input polygons that define the areas for which volumes are calculated.
Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics
Lets you execute the ENVELOPE macro. This macro allows you to
produce net hydrocarbon pore thickness grids and to perform quick,
visual, reportable results for HC volumetrics for a prospect or field.
R2003.12.0
CARM: Overview
743
Landmark
Surface Correction
Executes the SURFCORRECT macro. SURFCORRECT offers a way
of correcting a surface or of conformably merging a surface with a set
of new well picks. Using residual correction techniques,
SURFCORRECT ties a grid to new well data. SURFCORRECT outputs
a corrected grid, optional quality control data files, and optional maps
and cross sections, all of which can be assembled into a presentation
quality montage (composite map).
Water Saturation Averaging
Create a grid depicting the average water saturation of a reservoir using
porosity information and the height of the reservoir above the oil water
contact.
Area/Depth Plot
Runs volumes by slice increment on a surface and converts the output
into a line suitable for plotting on a plot of area versus depth. Volumes
for each increment can also be plotted.
Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons)
Produces quick volumetrics printouts for each polygon/grid
combination.
Quick Volumetrics (40 Polygons)
Computes quick volumetrics for a full range of polygons and grids and
produces a set of printouts for each polygon/grid combination.
R2003.12.0
CARM: Overview
744
Landmark
Volumetrics
Volumetrics is designed to compute areas and volumes from a grid.
Input to this subtask is:
Volumes are then calculated between the grid and the base plane and in
each polygon.
Additional controls allow you to specify:
R2003.12.0
CARM: Volumetrics
745
Landmark
R2003.12.0
CARM: Volumetrics
746
Landmark
Volumetrics Report
VOLUMETRICS REPORT
22-SEP -90
13:43
R2003.12.0
CARM: Volumetrics
747
Landmark
R2003.12.0
CARM: Volumetrics
748
Landmark
Positive Area (Negative Area) Area of the grid as projected onto the
base plane that was not unrecoverable ZNON, was inside the property
polygon, within any restrictions related to constraint polygons or grids,
and that represents positive volumes (grid that is above the base plane).
(Negative Area) is a similar area but representing negative volumes
(grid that is below base plane).
Surface Area Area of the grid (the undulating or actual grid surface
area) that was not unrecoverable ZNON, was inside the property
polygon, and within any restrictions related to constraint polygons or
grids.
Positive Surface Area (Negative SA) Area of the grid (the
undulating or actual grid surface area) that was not unrecoverable
ZNON, was inside the property polygon, within any restrictions related
to constraint polygons or grids, and that represents positive volumes.
(Negative SA) is a similar area but representing negative volumes.
Positive Volume (Negative Volume) Volume of the grid that is
above the base plane, below the Input Grid, inside the property polygon,
and within any restrictions related to constraint polygons or grids.
(Negative Volume) Volume of the grid that is below the base plane,
above the Input Grid, inside the property polygon, and within any
restrictions related to constraint polygons or grids.
Net Volume Volume of the grid that is between the base plane and
the Input Grid (regardless of whether it is above or below either), inside
the property polygon, and within any restrictions related to constraint
polygons or grids.
R2003.12.0
CARM: Volumetrics
749
Landmark
Select Faults
If you are building surfaces cut by faults, select a fault file from the list
of fault files presented. If you use faults, grid nodes are calculated by
using only the data located on the same side of the faults as the node. To
be available for this subtask, a fault file must have been previously
constructed.
When faults are used, the mathematical surface model that is integrated
is calculated using only grid nodes located on the same side of the faults
as the cell for which the model is being defined. If the grid cell being
mathematically modeled straddles a fault then two models are built, one
for each side of the fault and each using appropriate grid nodes.
The original faulted structure surfaces used to derive the isochore
typically has faults with gaps between the up-side traces and low-side
traces. If nodes in those gaps are ZNON, the isochore in those areas are
also ZNON. This is undesirable and produces incorrect (low) volumes.
Try to get Z-values in the gaps that represent the fault plane (face).
Which Faults to Use
Often a different set of faults exists for the structure surface that bounds
the top of the isochore than for the surface that bounds the base of the
isochore. You have several options:
R2003.12.0
Use the upper surface faults if a lower fluid contact occurs above
all or most of the base surface and the upper fluid contact is above
most or all of the upper surface.
Use the lower surface faults if an upper fluid contact occurs below
all or most of the upper surface and the lower fluid contact is
below most or all of the base.
Merge the fault files from the upper and lower structure surfaces
and use the combined file. This often breaks the surface into areas
too small to be effectively handled by Volumetrics. It also takes a
long time to execute.
CARM: Volumetrics
750
Landmark
R2003.12.0
CARM: Volumetrics
751
Landmark
Field Name
X-COORDINATE
Y-COORDINATE
SURFACE NAME
POLYGON FILENAME
POLYGON INDEX
BASE PLANE
NET AREA
NET VOLUME
10
POSITIVE AREA
11
POSITIVE VOLUME
12
13
NULL AREA
14
SLICE THICKNESS
15
16
NEGATIVE VOLUME
17
NEGATIVE AREA
18
19
20
R2003.12.0
CARM: Volumetrics
752
Landmark
Area Scale
Enter a value that is used to multiply all areas by before they are written
to the screen or an output file. Before this scale factor is applied, the
areas is in terms of the Grids X-coordinate unit times the Y-coordinate
unit. For example, if the grids X and Y coordinates are measured in
feet, the areas before scaling are in square feet. To convert square feet
to acres, you would use an Area Scale of 2.295684E5. Following are
some commonly used Area Scales:
R2003.12.0
Input Units
Area Scale =
Output Units
Acre
4.046856E1
Hectare
Acre
4.356 E+4
Foot2
Acre
4.046856E+3
Meter2
Centimeter2
1.550003E1
Inch2
Centimeter2
1.076391E3
Foot2
Foot2
2.295684E5
Acre
Foot2
9.290304E+2
Centimeter2
Foot2
9.290304E2
Meter2
Foot2
1.44 E+2
Inch2
Foot2
9.290304E+4
Millimeter2
Hectare
1.0 E+4
Meter2
Hectare
2.471054E+0
Acre
Hectare
1.076391E+5
Foot2
Hectare
1.0 E+10
Millimeter2
Inch2
6.4516 E+0
Centimeter2
Inch2
6.4516 E4
Meter2
Inch2
6.4516 E+2
Millimeter2
Inch2
6.944444E3
Foot2
Millimeter2
1.076387E4
Foot2
Millimeter2
1.550003E3
Inch2
Mile2
6.4 E+2
Acre
Mile
2.589988E+6
Meter2
Meter2
2.471054E4
Acre
Meter2
1.550003E+3
Inch2
Meter2
1.076391E+1
Foot2
Meter2
1.195990E+0
Yard2
Yard2
8.361274E1
Meter2
CARM: Volumetrics
753
Landmark
Volume Scale
Enter a value to use for multiplying all volumes before they are written
to the screen or an output file. Before this volume factor is applied, the
volumes are in terms of the Grids X-coordinate unit, times
Y-coordinate unit, times Z-value unit. For example, if the grids X and
Y coordinates are measured in meters, and the Z-value is in feet, the
volumes before scaling are in meters squared feet. To convert this to
barrels, you would use a Volume Scale of 1.9171346E+0. This was
arrived at by:
(M2Ft)(2.471054E4 Acre/M2)(7.758368E+3 Acre-Foot) =
1.9171346E+0
The following table shows some commonly used Volume Scales:
R2003.12.0
Input Units
Volume Scale =
Output Units
Acre-Foot
7.758368E+3
Barrel (API)
Acre-Foot
4.356 E+4
Foot3
Acre-Foot
3.258515E+5
Gallon
Acre-Foot
1.233482E+3
Meter3
Barrel (API)
1.288931E4
Acre-Foot
Barrel (API)
1.589873E+5
Centimeter3
Barrel (API)
1.589873E+2
Liter
Barrel (API)
1.589873E1
Meter3
Barrel (API)
5.614583E+0
Foot3
Barrel (API)
4.2 E+1
Gallon
Barrel (API)
9.701999E+3
Inch3
Foot3
1.781076E1
Barrel (API)
Foot3
2.831685E+4
Centimeter3
Foot3
7.480520E+0
Gallon
Foot3
1.728 E+3
Inch3
Foot3
2.831685E+1
Liter
Foot3
2.831685E2
Meter3
Gallon (UK)
1.200950E+0
Gallon (US)
Liter
1.0 E+3
Centimeter3
Liter
1.0 E3
Meter3
Liter
6.289811E3
Barrel (API)
Liter
3.531466E2
Foot3
CARM: Volumetrics
754
Landmark
Input Units
Volume Scale =
Output Units
Liter
2.614720E1
Gallon
Liter
6.102373E+1
Inch3
Meter3
1.0 E+6
Centimeter3
Meter3
1.0 E+3
Liter
Meter3
8.107131E4
Acre-Foot
Meter3
6.289811E+0
Barrel (API)
Meter3
3.531466E+1
Foot3
Meter3
2.641720E+2
Gallon
Meter3
6.102376E+4
Inch3
Meter3
1.307951E+0
Yard3
R2003.12.0
Input Units
Length Scale =
Output Units
Foot
3.048 E1
Meter
Foot
3.048 E+1
Centimeter
Inch
2.540 E2
Meter
Inch
2.540 E+0
Centimeter
Yard
9.144 E1
Meter
1.609344E+3
Meter
1.609344E+0
Kilometer
5.280 E+3
Foot
Meter
3.937008E+1
Inch
Meter
3.280840E+0
Foot
Meter
1.093613E+0
Yard
Meter
6.213712E4
Kilometer
6.213712E1
CARM: Volumetrics
755
Landmark
Volume to Compute
Use the Volume to Compute to control which volumes are calculated.
These volumes are measured as being above or below the Base Plane
and between the Base Plane and the Input Grid. If your input grid is an
isochore and your Base Plane value is zero, the only volumes that make
sense to use are the Positive Volumes. Net Volumes are almost never of
any use. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Net Only Output only NET volumes. Net Volumes are the
volumes below the Base Plane and above the Input Grid (Negative
Volumes), subtracted from the volumes above the Base Plane and
below the Input Grid (Positive Volumes).
R2003.12.0
CARM: Volumetrics
756
Landmark
R2003.12.0
CARM: Volumetrics
757
Landmark
Slice Limit
Enter a value that represents the upper level to which slicing is to go.
The default value is 0. This must be changed in order for the Slice
Thickness parameter to have an effect. If this number is less than the
Base Plane value, Slicing causes the Base Plane to move downward.
Scroll up for figure.
Bound for Constraint Grid 1 or 2
Enter a value that represents the constraint contour level to use with
Constraint Grid 1 or 2. The portion of the grid above (within) this level
defines the area over which volumes are calculated. Areas in which the
Constraint grids node values are below this contour level are excluded
from the calculated volumes. The default value is zero.
How the Bound Level Is Used
The Volumetrics subtask can be thought of as contouring the constraint
grid at this level, saving that contour, turning the contour into one or
more polygons, and using the polygon(s) as constraints for limiting
volumes. If the contour intersects the edge of the grid, the edge is used
as part of the generated polygon.
Input Constraint Grid 1 or 2
Select a grid from the list presented. This input grid is used when the
subtask executes. This grid is used as Constraint Grid 1 or 2 when
Volumetrics executes. If you do not select a grid (None - use no file), no
grid constraint is applied. The default setting is no constraint grid.
Faults cannot be used with constraint grids. Constraint Grids must have
the same X and Y limits and increments as the Input Grid. If a ZNON
exists in the Constraint Grid, Volumetrics tries to calculate a
replacement value for the ZNON by using neighboring node values.
ZNONs can be replaced about one grid cell into ZNON areas, although
this depends on which of the surrounding nodes have values.
R2003.12.0
CARM: Volumetrics
758
Landmark
R2003.12.0
CARM: Volumetrics
759
Landmark
ENVELOPE
Macro Type
.ZCLMAC
Purpose
Description
The macro analyzes a two phase reservoir system using basic grid file
and numerical input. Quick turnaround and accurate results make this
work flow ideal for use in sensitivity analysis.
Results
The output of the macro consists of a montaged picture for each phase,
showing the following elements:
a Gross Rock Volume Isochore for each HC zone that can display
disconformities
R2003.12.0
760
Landmark
Surface Correction
Use the Surface Correction option to execute the SURFCORRECT
macro. This macro offers a way of correcting a surface or of
conformably merging a surface with a set of new well picks. Using
residual correction techniques, SURFCORRECT ties a grid to new well
data. SURFCORRECT outputs a corrected grid, optional quality control
data files, and optional maps and cross sections, all of which can be
assembled into a presentation quality montage (composite map).
For more information about this macro, select Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the SURFCORRECT
topic.
Macro Name
SURFCORRECT
Macro Type
.ZCLMAC
Description
You can restrict the area of the surface to be modified by the new well
data using one of four modes:
Results
R2003.12.0
Use default gridding to distribute the change in the surface over the
entire area (MMETHOD = DEFAULT GRIDDING).
Specify a radius of influence around the selected well data
(MMETHOD = SYNTHESIZED DATA + RADIUS).
Use one or more closed polygons to specify where you want to
change the surface grid (MMETHOD = SYNTHESIZED DATA +
POLYGON).
Use a correction grid that you build independently of the macros
execution (MMETHOD = INPUT GRID).
The primary output of this macro is a new grid that shows how the new
wells affect the surface. Optional output includes quality control data
files that you can save to an MFD of your choice. SURFCORRECT
also creates maps and cross sections of its results.
761
Landmark
3.
R2003.12.0
762
Landmark
name of the porosity curve data file that describes how the water
saturation of the formation varies with porosity and height above
the OWC. This file can be either a contour (CNTR) or a profile
(DATA) file
name of the output water saturation average grid and the target
MFD or OpenWorks to use for storing it
The input grid files that describe the structure and porosity of the
formation of interest must have the same area of interest (AOI) and
gridding parameters (XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, YMAX, XINC, YINC).
Units for Input Data
The porosity in the input porosity curve file and in the input porosity grid file
must be in the same units (either percentage or decimal).
The elevation of the formation top and bottom must be expressed as height,
increasing upward, or negative depth, NOT as positive depth, increasing
downward. I.e. 400 is below 500, and -900 is below -700.
R2003.12.0
763
Landmark
R2003.12.0
764
Landmark
Bottom
If you click the Bottom parameter, a list of grids in the attached MFDs
or OpenWorks appears. Select a grid to be the bottom grid of the
structure.
Formation Midpoint Grid Input Option
Use the Midpoint Grid option to select one midpoint grid from a list of
grids contained on the attached MFDs or OpenWorks. This method is
less precise than the Top/Bottom method.
Formation Porosity Grid
A Formation Porosity grid describes lateral porosity variations in the
formation. Porosity values may be input as percentages or as decimals.
If you click the Formation Porosity Grid parameter, a list of grids on the
attached MFDs or OpenWorks appears. Select a grid to use as the
formation porosity grid of the structure.
Porosity Curves
Porosity curve (J-curve) data may be stored on either a contour file or
a profile file. There are two acceptable formats for contour files. See
File Structures on page 851.
Profile files must contain:
R2003.12.0
765
Landmark
Examine this grid carefully to see if it models the water saturation as a function
of porosity and height to your satisfaction. The intermediate grid is essential to
achieve the results you need. If it is not satisfactory, try again, adjusting the
intermediate grids height and porosity increments.
R2003.12.0
766
Landmark
Area/Depth Plot
This option checks the results of the volumetrics task as compared to
volumetrics results arrived at by hand. This macro runs volumes by slice
increment on a surface and converts the output to a line suitable for
plotting on an area versus depth plot.
The input depth grid is scaled to a negative value, then biased by a value
you specify. The volume of the grid covered by the polygon area is then
calculated using the following values that you supply:
R2003.12.0
767
Landmark
This isochore grid is based on true triple point geometry from fault plane
models. The area bounded by the box is processed to generate the area
depth curve.
R2003.12.0
768
Landmark
a grid dataset
a vertex file containing up to two polygons
scaling factors
Keep Polygons Within Grid AOI
Quick Volumetrics calculates volume as the average height of the gridded area
with the polygon times the area of the polygon. If part of the polygon reaches
outside the AOI of the grid, this can bias the volume upward. Either clip the
polygons so they describe an area in the grid AOI, or use the full Volumetrics
feature if your polygons extend beyond the AOI to avoid inaccurate results.
This process trades off accuracy for speed. You can increase accuracy
by:
R2003.12.0
769
Landmark
a grid dataset
scaling factors
baseplane elevation
Keep Polygons Within Grid AOI
Quick Volumetrics calculates volume as the average height of the gridded area
with the polygon times the area of the polygon. If part of the polygon reaches
outside the AOI of the grid, this can bias the volume upward. Either clip your
polygons so they describe an area in the grid AOI, or use the full Volumetrics
feature if your polygons extend beyond the AOI to avoid inaccurate results.
This process trades accuracy for speed, but you can increase accuracy
by:
R2003.12.0
770
Landmark
Tools
Overview
Use the Tools menu options in the Z-MAP Plus window to perform the
following tasks:
R2003.12.0
Tools: Overview
771
Landmark
SPAWN-PROCESS
Macro Type
.ZCLMAC
Purpose
Description
You enter a system command. For example, the command could be ls,
cd, rm, mv, or ls - l on a Unix system.
Results
R2003.12.0
772
Landmark
System Window
The Z-MAP Plus System Window menu contains the following options:
Raise
Log Output
Always On Top
Raise
Raise moves the system window to the top or deiconifies it if it has been
iconified.
To execute the Raise option, select System Window Raise or click
the Raise System Window icon shown at the left.
Log Output
Log Output allows you to write system window output to a file.This
option is useful because it allows you to create a permanent record of the
output of a Z-MAP Plus process.
Always On Top
Always On Top allows you to set the system window so that it is
displayed on top of the Main Window.
R2003.12.0
773
Landmark
Process Logging
You can create a file (log) that keeps a record of what you do in a
Z-MAP Plus sessions. When Process Logging is turned on, all the
options you execute in Z-MAP Plus are written to a text file. They are
written as ZCL processes with all the parameters written for each
process. Only those Z-MAP Plus options that are executed are logged.
Therefore, if you Cancel a process, that process is not logged. Once
logging is turned on, it continues until you turn it off. If Process Logging
is turned on when you exit Z-MAP Plus, when you restart Z-MAP Plus
the logging continues to the same file. You can point to an old Process
Log file or any other text file and append more process information.
With modifications, the logged job stream can be executed as a ZCL
batch job. Of course, the job executes properly only if MFDs, ZGFs,
data files, and pictures used by the logged processes are available and
attached. The logged job stream can be edited like any text file in order
to modify parameter settings, delete processes, or add others.
Extra Parameters
When you create a process log in Z-MAP Plus, some parameters are created
that are not documented as ZCL parameters. These extra parameters affect only
the graphical interface. ZCL ignores the additional parameters.
R2003.12.0
774
Landmark
Logging Option
Controls whether Process Logging is turned on or off. Use this switch to
terminate logging, start logging to a new file, or start logging to an old
file. Possible choices for this parameter are:
R2003.12.0
775
Landmark
System Switches
You can control certain Z-MAP Plus settings (switches). These settings
control when parameter values are cleared out, whether messages or
pictures are automatically displayed, and the appearance of the picture
background (dark or light) etc. Once a switch is set, it remains set unless
you return to this panel and change it, or you select a Parameter File with
different System Switch settings.
This parameter has no effect in the newer, tabbed dialog boxes. To determine if
you are working in a newer dialog box, press Mouse Button 2. If the Locking/
Unlocking options appear in the MB2 menu, the dialog box is a newer style
dialog box.
R2003.12.0
776
Landmark
where the first line is the standard error message and the second line is
the diagnostic error message.
The values for the parameter are:
R2003.12.0
777
Landmark
The Graphics Background Mode is useful for previewing hardcopy to see if the
map colors look good against a white background.
None of the colors for items on the picture are changed. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
Units
The Units toggle affects picture and feature measurements, but no other
measurements. You can choose whether the program calculates and
reports distances in Metric units (centimeters) or English units (inches).
If you choose Metric, the UNITSPERINCH scale refers to units per
centimeter.
Confirm Exit
R2003.12.0
778
Landmark
OW Sort Order
OW Sort Order controls the order in which OpenWorks files are
displayed in input dialog boxes. OW Sort Order only affects the sorting
of OpenWorks dataset lists and does not affect the displaying of MFD
file lists.
R2003.12.0
779
Landmark
Sort By Date
Allows you to sort the by date. When you select Sort By Date the Source
List and Destination List fields become disabled and the Ascending and
Descending options change to Oldest First and Most Recent First, as
shown below.
R2003.12.0
780
Landmark
Appendix A.
Graphics Feature Codes
R2003.12.0
781
Landmark
Graphics
Feature
Number
BORDERS
Borders
CONTOURS
Contours
TEXT
Text
POLYGON LINES
Polygon lines
TITLE BLOCK
Title block
10
NORTH ARROW
North arrow
11
Cross-section traces
12
Cross-section labels
13
14
PERSPECTIVE FISHNET
Perspective fishnet
15
SEISMIC LINES
Seismic lines
16
FAULT TRACES
Fault traces
17
RESIN LATTICE
RESIN lattice
18
COLORFILLED CONTOURS
Colorfilled contours
19
PROFILES
Profiles
20
21
22
23
24
25
TOPOGRAPHIC DATA
Topographic data
26
PERSPECTIVE AXES
Perspective axes
27
SEISMIC SECTIONS
Seismic sections
28
DEVIATED WELLS
Deviated wells
29
R2003.12.0
782
Landmark
Graphics
Feature
Number
30
COLORFILLED POLYGONS
Colorfilled polygons
31
32
INDEX MAP
Index map
33
34
MAP LEGENDS
Map legends
35
36
37 - 39
Unassigned
40
GRAPHICS MENU
Graphics menu
41
PICTURE LIMITS
Picture limits
42
NTS BOUNDARIES
43
NTS LABELS
NTS labels
44
MAP SCALES
Map scales
45 - 55
Unassigned
56
Z-3D GRID
57
58
59
Z-3D ARROW
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68 - 100
Unassigned
101
LITHOLOGY COLUMNS
102
LOG CURVES
R2003.12.0
783
Landmark
Graphics
Feature
Number
103
LOG ANNOTATION
104
105
106
FAULT LINES
107
FAULT POINTS
108
GRID PROFILES
109
LOG LATTICES
110
ANALYSIS DATA
111
BASELINES ON BASEMAP
STRATVIEW baselines
112
HORIZON CROSSINGS
113
114
PROJECTION ARROWS
115
DATUM LINE
116
117
118
119
TOP LINES
120
COLORFILLED HORIZONS
121
122
123
CROSS-SECTION TITLE
124
125
KB ELEVATION CONNECTIONS
126
127
128
500-600
R2003.12.0
784
Landmark
Appendix B.
File and Field Codes
Description
Importable
GRID
Grid values
Yes
DATA
Yes
CNTR
Contour data
Yes
FALT
Fault traces
Yes
VERT
Line data
Yes
TEXT
Textual data
Yes
TRIA
Yes
XSEC
Cross section
Yes
SSEC
Seismic section
Yes
10
WLOG
Yes
11
DWEL
Yes
12
MCRO
Macro file
Yes
13
LSLT
Yes
14
LPST
Yes
15 - 19
R2003.12.0
File Type
Unassigned
20
SDEF
No
21
SVDR
No
22
LITH
No
23
CMMT
No
785
Landmark
File Code
Description
Importable
24
LOG
No
25
TABL
No
26
FTPT
No
27
CHEM
No
28 - 30
Unassigned
31
LATT
No
32
CELL
No
33
PCEL
No
34 - 35
R2003.12.0
File Type
Unassigned
786
Landmark
Data
Type
Code
FORTRAN
Data
Type
Description
Real
X (EASTING)
x coordinate
Real
Y (NORTHING)
y coordinate
Real
Z VALUE
Real
DZ/DX
Real
DZ/DY
Real
DZ2/DXDY
Real
X WEIGHT
Real
Y WEIGHT
Real
Z WEIGHT
10
Real
GRADIENT WEIGHT
11
Real
Z-VARIATION
12
Real
LATITUDE
13
Real
LONGITUDE
14
Real
SHOTPOINT NUMBER
15
Real
LINEAR DISPLACEMENT
16
Real
TEXT LOCMOD
17
Real
TEXT FONT
18
Real
TEXT SIZE
19
Real
TEXT ANGLE
20
Char*80
CHARACTER TEXT
South and west coordinates must be entered as negative numbers; minutes should be input as fractions of the
whole (for example, 7020E input as 70.3333). For degrees, minutes, seconds type of input, see Field Type
51 and 52. Latitude/Longitude coordinates cannot be used by most mapping processes; convert to x,y coordinates using the Coordinate Transformation operation.
Currently not used by Landmark geological programs.
Cannot import interactively in Z-MAP Plus.
R2003.12.0
787
Landmark
Data
Type
Code
FORTRAN
Data
Type
21
Real
22
Description
SYMBOL CODE
Char*80
LINE NAME
23
Char*80
AREA NAME
24
Char*4
RESHOT CHARACTER
25
Real
26
Char*80
27
Char*80
28
Char*80
29
Real
30
Real
X-FAULT JOINT
31
Real
Y-FAULT JOINT
32
Real
ZL-LEFT SIDE
33
Real
ZR-RIGHT SIDE
34
Real
DELTA Z-THROW
Fault throw
35
Real
SEG I.D.
36
Real
FAULT BANDWIDTH
37
Real
DIP ANGLE
38
Real
39
Real
VOLUME BASEPLANE
40
Char*80
41
HORIZON NAME
Real
COLOR
Color index
42
Real
43
Real
SHOTPOINT LOCATION
44
Real
45
Real
Type of depth:
1. True Vertical Depth, 2. Measured Depth, 3. True
Vertical Thickness, 4. True Stratigraphic Thickness
46
Real
47
Real
GRADS LATITUDE
48
Real
GRADS LONGITUDE
R2003.12.0
788
Landmark
Data
Type
Code
FORTRAN
Data
Type
49
Real
50
Description
AREA SYMBOL
Char*80
AREA IDENTIFICATION
51
Char*80
DMS-LATITUDE
52
Char*80
DMS-LONGITUDE
53
Real
HEAVE
54
Real
STANDARD DEVIATION
55
Real
DISCONTINUITY CODE
56
Char*8
FEATURE CODE
57
Real
3D LINE NUMBER
58
Real
3D SHOTPOINT NUMBER
59
Char*8
60
Real
SYMBOL ROTATION
61
Real
62
Real
I-COORDINATE
63
Real
J-COORDINATE
64
Real
VELOCITY
Seismic velocity
65
Real
DEPTH
66
Real
TIME
67
Real
THICKNESS
68
Real
DZ2/DX2
69
Real
DZ2/DY2
70
Real
DZ/DS
Gradient amplitude
71
Real
DZ/DS AZIMUTH
WELL STATUS
3D line identifier
3D shotpoint number
Character field containing well status information
South and west coordinates must be entered as negative numbers. These values can currently be converted to
decimal degrees in Operations.
Currently not used by Landmark geological programs.
Cannot import interactively in Z-MAP Plus.
R2003.12.0
789
Landmark
Data
Type
Code
FORTRAN
Data
Type
72
Description
Char*4
73
Char*80
3D SURVEY NAME
74
Char*80
DATABASE IDENTIFIER
75
Real
SYMBOL SIZE
76
Real
LINE WEIGHT
R2003.12.0
790
Landmark
Appendix C.
Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns
Introduction
Z-MAP Plus now uses the OpenWorks well symbol table. This appendix
begins with a description of the OpenWorks symbol set, then describes
the Z-MAP Plus fonts and line patterns.
If Z-MAP Plus cannot find a symbol ID, it substitutes symbol #1a plus sign
(+). To remove the substituted + symbols, change the symbol ID to a symbol
that is currently defined.
To see the edited symbol, restart Z-MAP Plus after you finish with the Well
Symbol Editor.
R2003.12.0
791
Landmark
SYMBOL Z41 41 0 1 1 0
Arc
5 0.000000 0.000000 0.400000 0.000000 360.000000 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0
Center X
Center Y
Radius
Start
Angle
Edge Color
Fill Edge
Pattern
Fill
End
Angle
Line
5 -0.000471 -0.400000 -0.000942 -0.799999 0 0
Line
5 0.000471 0.399999 0.000942 0.799999 0 0
Line Width
Start X
Start Y
End X
Line Style
End Y
Circle
5 0.000000 0.000000 0.040000 1 0 0 5 0 0 0 0
Color
Center Y
Center X
Radius
Fill
Edge
Fill
Pattern
Line Width
Edge Line Width
Line Style
Edge Color
Edge Line Style
To edit this type of file, use a text editing program (such as vi or emacs).
The following information lists the column order of each graphic
element. In the text files, columns are delineated by a blank space. In
this list, a comma is used to show column separation simply to make the
list easier to read.
R2003.12.0
792
Landmark
Arc
Color, Center X Position, Center Y Position, Radius, Start Angle, End Angle, Line Style, Line Width, Fill, Fill
Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width
Circle
Color, Center - X Position, Center - Y Position, Radius, Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge
Line Width, Line Style, Line Width
Disk
Color, Center X Position, Center Y Position, Radius, Inner Radius, Start Angle, End Angle, Line Style, Line Width,
Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width
Ellipse
Color, Center X Position, Center Y Position, Major Radius, Minor Radius, Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge
Line Style, Edge Line Width, Line Style, Line Width
Line
Color, Start Point X Position, Start Point Y Position, End Point X Position, End Point Y Position, Line Style, Line
Width
Polygon
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width, Number of
Points
Polyline
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Number of Points
Rectangle
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Fill Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width, Number of
Points
Spline
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Number of Points
Text
Color, Start Point X Position, Start Point Y Position, Character Width Legible, Character Height Legible,
Character Width WYSIWYG, Character Height WYSIWYG, Font, Mode, Angle, Justification, Path
R2003.12.0
793
Landmark
R2003.12.0
794
Landmark
R2003.12.0
795
Landmark
R2003.12.0
796
Landmark
R2003.12.0
797
Landmark
R2003.12.0
798
Landmark
R2003.12.0
799
Landmark
R2003.12.0
800
Landmark
Font Types
R2003.12.0
801
Landmark
Line Patterns
R2003.12.0
802
Landmark
Appendix D.
Color Editing
Introduction
In a color graphics terminal, Z-MAP Plus picture features appear in
different colors. The colors assigned to each feature or part of a feature
are stored in the pictures color table.
Each picture in a graphics file has a color table associated with it. If you
edit the color editing for a picture, previously generated pictures are not
affected.
Use the color editing options to display and modify the current color
table. You can perform these actions:
R2003.12.0
803
Landmark
Terminology
The following terms are important for understanding color table basics.
Color Index is a number assigned to a color in the color table.
Graphic Primitives are the lines, text, symbols, and polygons used to
generate a feature.
Graphics Features are graphic primitives that have been grouped into
map features, such as contours, seismic lines, and borders.
line strings
text
symbols
polygons
The RGB model describes the colors in ranges of 0 to 1, as evidenced in page 813. However, Z-MAP Plus
uses ranges of 0 to 100 in the interactive Color Table Edit.
R2003.12.0
804
Landmark
BLUE
(0, 0, 100)
WHITE
(100, 100, 100)
MAGENTA
(100, 0, 100)
E
AL
Y
RA
SC
GREEN
(0, 100, 0)
BLACK
(0, 0, 0)
YELLOW
(100, 100, 0)
RED
(100, 0, 0)
The RGB model describes the colors in ranges of 0 to 1, as evidenced in page 813. However, Z-MAP Plus
uses ranges of 0 to 100 in the interactive Color Table Edit.
A very dark color might have a low combined total, such as Index 94 (R<0.2, G=0, B<0.05, total<0.25) or
Index 122 (B<0.4, G<0.01, B=0, total<0.41). A very light color might have a high combined total, such as
Index 150 (R=1, B<1, G<0.9, total<2.9).
R2003.12.0
805
Landmark
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
60
120
180
240
300
WHITE
Saturation 100
100
Red 120
60 Magenta
Hue
Yellow 180
Green 240
0 Blue
Lightness
75
50
300 Cyan
25
BLACK
R2003.12.0
806
Landmark
HLS
COLOR
Red
Green
Blue
Hue
% Lightness
% Saturation
Blue
50
100
Magenta
60
50
100
Red
120
50
100
Yellow
180
50
100
Green
240
50
100
Cyan
300
50
100
Black
N/A
N/A
Gray
N/A
199*
White
N/A
100
N/A
The illustration below shows the settings as seen in the Display Color
Table Edit window for Color Index 119 for both the RGB and HLS
systems.
Color Table Edit RGB and HLS settings for Color Index 119
R2003.12.0
807
Landmark
Color Table
The Color Table defines 256 colors. The first eight default Z-MAP Plus
colors are:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
background (black/white) *
normal foreground (white/black) *
red
green
blue
cyan
magenta
yellow
An index number is assigned to each cell in the Color Table. The Color
Index Number of each cell in the Color Table can be determined by
adding the number on the left side of the row to the number at the top of
the column.
The background of the Z-MAP Plus window display area is independent of the RGB value associated with
color 0. The display depends on the System Switches Background setting, which toggles the display of color
indexes 0 and 1. Setting color 0 to red does not cause the display area background to be red, but may have
other unexpected results. It is advised that you not change the colors for indexes 0 or 1.
R2003.12.0
808
Landmark
These color associations are valid the first time you enter the program.
The color table used in future sessions is based on any changes you
make in the current session.
Printing Color
Z-MAP Plus comes with the graphics file COLORWHEEL.ZGF *. If
you plot the single picture on this graphics file on an electrostatic plotter,
you see a graphical representation of all the 256 color choices provided
by the color table. This representation also helps you understand the
logic behind the design of the color table, explained below.
Electrostatic plotters can render have significant differences in the way
colors are rendered even though the machines are given exactly the same
instructions for ink combinations. Differences can occur even on
machines made by the same manufacturer. Color variation can be
caused by many factors, including:
the source and batch number of the inks used on the machines
the source and batch number of the paper used on the machines,
and the humidity at which paper has been stored
The color table is optimized for use with Landmarks own 400 dpi
Versatec plotter. (This is why the picture in COLORWHEEL.ZGF is
named VERSATEC SAMPLE COLOR.) Color combinations are likely
to appear slightly different on other machines.
R2003.12.0
809
Landmark
R2003.12.0
810
Landmark
For a particularly complex map you may wish to use more than 100
distinct color indexes of your own design for different map features.
Assuming that you start with index 56 and use up indexes in order from
56, then 150 user-defined color indexes takes you to color index 205.
To provide maximum flexibility for such a power user, Landmark has
mapped the color wheels corresponding to 50% and 75% lightness into
indexes 206 to 230 and 231 to 255, respectively. For more information
about color representation, see page 813.
Color Index Section
In the Color Table, the Color Index Section has assigned distinct indexes
to graphic primitives (lines, text, symbols, polygons) for the most
commonly used graphics features (contours, map borders, seismic lines,
etc.) pointing into the first 55 indexes of the color table.
This has two advantages over assignments in the old color table.
First, the first 55 indexes are primary colors that can be reproduced
without resorting to dithering, so narrow lines for most features show up
well on a hardcopy plot.
Second, because different graphics features have distinct color indexes
for their primitive elements, you can safely change the color of one
primitive for one feature on a map by editing the color representation
section of the table, without worrying that the colors for other primitives
will change simultaneously. See Color Index Section on page 811, at
the end of this section.
R2003.12.0
811
Landmark
2.
3.
Hang a final version of the plot on the wall next to the terminal or
workstation where maps are made. You can choose a color from
the plot, knowing what it will look like on the hardcopy, regardless
of how it looks on the screen.
Default Changes
The default starting color index for colorfill contours is cell 56.
Remember that 56 through 93 are place-holders that you are expected to
change in order to develop a range of colors for a particular operation
such as deviated well posting or colorfilled contouring.
The two tables that complete this section show the RGB settings for all
256 color indexes (Color Representative Area) and the color indexes
associated with the four types of graphic primitives for each of the
graphics feature types (Color Index Section).
Select Write in the Display Color Table editing window to create an ASCII file of the color table. After
editing this file, select Read in the Color Table editing window to create a color table from the ASCII file.
R2003.12.0
812
Landmark
Index
R2003.12.0
Red
Green
Blue
Color
0.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Black (White)
1.000000
1.000000
1.000000
White (Black)
1.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Red
0.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Green
0.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Blue
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
1.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Magenta
1.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Yellow
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
0.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Green
10
1.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Red
11
0.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Blue
12
0.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Blue
13
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
14
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
15
0.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Blue
16
1.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Magenta
17
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
18
1.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Red
19
1.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Red
20
1.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Red
21
0.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Blue
22
1.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Magenta
23
1.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Red
24
1.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Red
25
0.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Green
26
0.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Green
27
0.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Blue
28
0.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Green
29
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
813
Landmark
Index
R2003.12.0
Red
Green
Blue
Color
30
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
31
0.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Blue
32
0.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Green
33
0.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Green
34
0.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Green
35
0.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Blue
36
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
37
1.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Magenta
38
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
39
1.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Magenta
40
0.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Green
41
0.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Blue
42
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
43
1.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Magenta
44
1.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Red
45
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
46
0.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Blue
47
1.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Magenta
48
0.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Green
49
1.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Magenta
50
1.000000
1.000000
1.000000
White
51
1.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Red
52
0.000000
1.000000
0.000000
Green
53
0.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Blue
54
0.000000
1.000000
1.000000
Cyan
55
1.000000
0.000000
1.000000
Magenta
56
0.000000
0.719453
0.859238
57
0.029326
0.709677
0.849462
58
0.049853
0.699902
0.829912
59
0.079179
0.689150
0.819159
60
0.109482
0.689150
0.809384
814
Landmark
Index
R2003.12.0
Red
Green
Blue
61
0.129032
0.679374
0.799609
62
0.159335
0.669599
0.789834
63
0.189638
0.659824
0.779081
64
0.219941
0.659824
0.769306
65
0.239492
0.649071
0.759531
66
0.269795
0.639296
0.739980
67
0.299120
0.629521
0.729228
68
0.319648
0.629521
0.719453
69
0.349951
0.619746
0.709677
70
0.379277
0.609971
0.699902
71
0.399805
0.599218
0.689150
72
0.429130
0.599218
0.679374
73
0.459433
0.589443
0.659824
74
0.479961
0.579668
0.649071
75
0.509286
0.569892
0.639296
76
0.539589
0.569892
0.629521
77
0.569892
0.559140
0.619746
78
0.589443
0.549365
0.609971
79
0.619746
0.539589
0.599218
80
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
81
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
82
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
83
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
84
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
85
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
86
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
87
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
88
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
89
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
90
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
91
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
Color
815
Landmark
Index
R2003.12.0
Red
Green
Blue
Color
92
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
93
0.649071
0.539589
0.589443
94
0.199413
0.049853
0.000000
Brown
95
0.000000
0.000000
0.000000
Same as Index 0
96
0.429130
0.429130
0.429130
Shades of Gray
97
0.599218
0.599218
0.599218
98
0.719453
0.719453
0.719453
99
0.829912
0.829912
0.829912
100
0.949169
0.949169
0.949169
101
0.000000
0.449658
0.539589
102
0.000000
0.719453
0.859238
103
0.179863
0.859238
1.000000
104
0.519062
0.919844
1.000000
105
0.839687
0.969697
1.000000
106
0.000000
0.000000
0.719453
107
0.159335
0.000000
0.639296
108
0.279570
0.000000
0.559140
109
0.479961
0.000000
0.479961
110
0.479961
0.000000
0.239492
111
0.499511
0.000000
0.179863
112
0.499511
0.000000
0.119257
113
0.519062
0.000000
0.059629
114
0.519062
0.000000
0.000000
115
0.539589
0.119257
0.000000
116
0.559140
0.269795
0.000000
117
0.579668
0.419355
0.000000
118
0.599218
0.579668
0.000000
119
0.429130
0.559140
0.000000
120
0.259042
0.499511
0.000000
121
0.109482
0.439883
0.000000
122
0.000000
0.399805
0.009775
Shades of Cyan
Spectrum of dark
colors not
represented on
colorwheel.zgf; good
for viewing
colorfilled contours
on screen
816
Landmark
Index
R2003.12.0
Red
Green
Blue
123
0.000000
0.399805
0.119257
124
0.000000
0.399805
0.239492
125
0.000000
0.399805
0.349951
126
0.000000
0.329423
0.399805
127
0.000000
0.309873
0.499511
128
0.000000
0.229717
0.559140
129
0.000000
0.139785
0.639296
130
0.319648
0.319648
0.319648
131
0.000000
0.000000
0.899316
132
0.299120
0.299120
1.000000
133
0.499511
0.499511
1.000000
134
0.699902
0.699902
1.000000
135
0.899316
0.899316
1.000000
136
0.639296
0.000000
0.319648
137
0.959922
0.000000
0.479961
138
1.000000
0.259042
0.629521
139
1.000000
0.559140
0.779081
140
1.000000
0.859238
0.929619
141
0.699902
0.000000
0.000000
142
1.000000
0.019550
0.019550
143
1.000000
0.299120
0.299120
144
1.000000
0.579668
0.579668
145
1.000000
0.859238
0.859238
146
0.799609
0.769306
0.000000
147
1.000000
0.969697
0.139785
148
1.000000
0.979472
0.379277
149
1.000000
0.989247
0.639296
150
1.000000
0.989247
0.879765
151
0.000000
0.539589
0.019550
152
0.000000
0.819159
0.029326
153
0.179863
1.000000
0.209189
Color
Spectrum of dark
colors (contd)
817
Landmark
Index
R2003.12.0
Red
Green
Blue
154
0.519062
1.000000
0.529814
155
0.839687
1.000000
0.839687
156
0.399805
0.399805
1.000000
157
0.469208
0.299120
1.000000
158
0.599218
0.199413
1.000000
159
1.000000
0.099707
1.000000
160
1.000000
0.099707
0.549365
161
1.000000
0.119257
0.439883
162
1.000000
0.139785
0.349951
163
1.000000
0.139785
0.239492
164
1.000000
0.159335
0.159335
165
1.000000
0.379277
0.179863
166
1.000000
0.589443
0.209189
167
1.000000
0.789834
0.229717
168
1.000000
0.969697
0.259042
169
0.809384
1.000000
0.189638
170
0.569892
1.000000
0.129032
171
0.279570
1.000000
0.059629
172
0.000000
1.000000
0.029326
173
0.000000
1.000000
0.299120
174
0.000000
1.000000
0.599218
175
0.000000
1.000000
0.879765
176
0.019550
0.829912
1.000000
177
0.119257
0.679374
1.000000
178
0.219941
0.539589
1.000000
179
0.319648
0.469208
1.000000
180
0.659824
0.659824
0.659824
Color
Spectrum of medium
bright colors (about
63% Lightness),
represented by the
second wheel up in
colorwheel.zgf; last
index of group is a
gray
818
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Index
Red
Green
Blue
Color
181
0.799609
0.799609
1.000000
182
0.819159
0.759531
1.000000
183
0.869990
0.739980
1.000000
184
1.000000
0.699902
1.000000
185
1.000000
0.699902
0.849462
Spectrum of pale
colors (about 87%
Lightness),
represented by fourth
wheel up in
colorwheel.zgf; last
index of group is a
gray
186
1.000000
0.699902
0.809384
187
1.000000
0.719453
0.789834
188
1.000000
0.719453
0.749756
189
1.000000
0.719453
0.719453
190
1.000000
0.799609
0.739980
191
1.000000
0.869990
0.739980
192
1.000000
0.929619
0.739980
193
1.000000
0.989247
0.759531
194
0.939394
1.000000
0.739980
195
0.859238
1.000000
0.719453
196
0.769306
1.000000
0.699902
197
0.679374
1.000000
0.689150
198
0.679374
1.000000
0.769306
199
0.659824
1.000000
0.859238
200
0.659824
1.000000
0.959922
201
0.679374
0.949169
1.000000
202
0.699902
0.889541
1.000000
203
0.739980
0.849462
1.000000
204
0.779081
0.829912
1.000000
205
0.889541
0.889541
0.889541
206
0.199413
0.199413
1.000000
207
0.309873
0.079179
1.000000
208
0.459433
0.000000
0.919844
209
0.799609
0.000000
0.799609
210
0.799609
0.000000
0.399805
211
0.819159
0.000000
0.299120
Spectrum of pale
colors (about 87%
Lightness),
represented by fourth
wheel up in
colorwheel.zgf; last
index of group is a
gray (contd)
Spectrum of bright
colors (about 50%
Lightness),
represented by
bottom wheel in
colorwheel.zgf; last
index in group is a
gray
819
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Index
Red
Green
Blue
212
0.839687
0.000000
0.209189
213
0.859238
0.000000
0.099707
214
0.879765
0.000000
0.000000
215
0.899316
0.209189
0.000000
216
0.939394
0.449658
0.000000
217
0.959922
0.689150
0.000000
218
1.000000
0.969697
0.000000
219
0.699902
0.919844
0.000000
220
0.419355
0.819159
0.000000
221
0.179863
0.739980
0.000000
222
0.000000
0.659824
0.019550
223
0.000000
0.659824
0.189638
224
0.000000
0.659824
0.389052
225
0.000000
0.659824
0.579668
226
0.000000
0.569892
0.679374
227
0.000000
0.519062
0.819159
228
0.229717
0.429130
0.699902
229
0.079179
0.279570
1.000000
230
0.539589
0.539589
0.539589
231
0.599218
0.599218
1.000000
232
0.649071
0.539589
1.000000
233
0.729228
0.459433
1.000000
234
1.000000
0.399805
1.000000
235
1.000000
0.399805
0.699902
236
1.000000
0.399805
0.619746
237
1.000000
0.419355
0.559140
238
1.000000
0.419355
0.489736
239
1.000000
0.439883
0.439883
240
1.000000
0.589443
0.459433
241
1.000000
0.719453
0.459433
Color
Spectrum of bright
colors (about 50%
Lightness),
represented by
bottom wheel in
colorwheel.zgf; last
index in group is a
gray
Spectrum of light
colors (about 75%
Lightness),
represented by the
center wheel in
colorwheel.zgf; last
index in group is a
gray
820
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Index
Red
Green
Blue
242
1.000000
0.849462
0.479961
243
1.000000
0.979472
0.499511
244
0.869990
1.000000
0.459433
245
0.719453
1.000000
0.419355
246
0.529814
1.000000
0.379277
247
0.339198
1.000000
0.359726
248
0.339198
1.000000
0.539589
249
0.319648
1.000000
0.729228
250
0.319648
1.000000
0.919844
251
0.339198
0.889541
1.000000
252
0.399805
0.779081
1.000000
253
0.479961
0.699902
1.000000
254
0.539589
0.639296
1.000000
255
0.769306
0.769306
0.769306
Color
Spectrum of light
colors (about 75%
Lightness),
represented by the
center wheel in
colorwheel.zgf; last
index in group is a
gray (cont)
821
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Text
Symbols
Poly
Graphics
Feature
Number
BORDERS
CONTOURS
10
11
12
TEXT
13
POLYGON LINES
14
15
16
17
16
NORTH ARROW
10
19
11
12
13
PERSPECTIVE FISHNET
14
20
20
20
17
15
18
FAULT TRACES
16
17
195
COLORFILLED CONTOURS
18
26
27
PROFILES
19
21
21
22
22
20
21
22
23
23
24
TOPOGRAPHIC DATA
25
PERSPECTIVE AXIS
26
10
10
SEISMIC SECTIONS
27
822
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Text
Symbols
Poly
Graphics
Feature
Number
28
28
DEVIATED WELLS
28
29
COLORFILLED POLYGONS
30
24
24
25
25
31
32
33
MAP LEGENDS
34
35
36
37
38
39
GRAPHICS MENU
40
PICTURE LIMITS
41
NTS BOUNDARIES
42
NTS LABELS
43
MAP SCALES
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
823
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Text
Symbols
Poly
Graphics
Feature
Number
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
824
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Text
Symbols
Poly
Graphics
Feature
Number
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
29
30
31
32
LITHOLOGY COLUMNS
101
33
33
LOG CURVES
102
LOG ANNOTATION
103
34
34
104
35
36
105
37
37
37
FAULT LINES
106
38
38
39
FAULT POINTS
107
40
40
40
GRID PROFILES
108
825
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Text
Symbols
Poly
Graphics
Feature
Number
41
41
LOG LATTICES
109
ANALYSIS DATA
110
42
42
42
BASELINES ON BASEMAP
111
43
43
43
HORIZON CROSSINGS
112
44
44
44
113
PROJECTION ARROWS
114
DATUM LINE
115
116
117
118
TOP LINES
119
120
121
45
122
46
CROSS-SECTION TITLE
123
124
47
47
47
KB ELEVATION CONNECTIONS
125
48
48
48
126
127
128
826
Landmark
Appendix E.
Import/Export
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
827
Landmark
Common Terms
The following terms are used to discuss file transfer.
Formatted Disk Files
A formatted disk file, such as ASCII, text or flat files, may be
transferred into or created from an MFD. These files reside on disks
(sometimes tapes) and have a very structured format; that is, values
representing a particular variable have a specific position on a specific
line of the file. Usually these files can be viewed and edited on a
computer terminal with a standard text editor. In general terms, Import
is the conversion from generic ASCII to the very specific binary MFD
format that Z-MAP Plus uses.
Physical Record
Each formatted disk file is composed of a number of lines of
information; each line is referred to as a physical record. Normally the
physical records are 80 characters (columns) long; however, the length
of the record may vary so that it is longer or shorter than 80 characters.
Logical Record
A group of related information that may extend to several lines (physical
records) of a formatted disk file is called a logical record.
For example, information brought into Z-MAP Plus is commonly tied to
an x,y location. Many measurements may be recorded at that x,y
location, such as top and base elevation of rock units, porosities, ore
grades, etc. This recorded information may take up several lines
(physical records) in the file. A logical grouping of information related
to one x,y position is followed by another logical grouping of
information related to another x,y position and so on. These logical
groups of related information, which may extend over several physical
records, are called logical records.
Limits for Records
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
828
Landmark
If multiple formats follow one another, you do not need to enter an end @ sign
until you enter the last format.
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
829
Landmark
Example
@GROUP 1
.
.
.
@GROUP 2
.
.
.
@
Comment Symbols
You can place comment lines anywhere in the format. You use another
special symbol to identify a comment line, typically an exclamation
point (!). Place the ! in the first column of each comment line.
History Symbols
You can store history information in a file created by the import
operation. History information consists of the date the file was created,
who created it, and other useful facts. To identify a line of history
information, another you use another special symbol, typically a plus
sign (+). Place the + in the first column of each history line. You can
include a maximum of 23 lines of historical information anywhere in the
format.
Example
You can build the basic form of the format with the three types of format
lines just described. The following example shows the types of format
lines in use.
@
!
! Date:
! Author:
! Purpose:
!
!
!
!
!
!
R2003.12.0
04 February, 1996
VAB
This Format Group demonstrates how
special symbols are used to define:
1) The Format Group "@"
2) Comments "!"
3) History information "+"
Appendix E. Import/Export
830
Landmark
+
+
+
+
!
@
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
831
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
832
Landmark
SSEC, 80, 1
DATA, 200, 4, HEADER
VERT, 80, 3
CELL, 80, 1
The name Alaskan Baseline would have to be referenced elsewhere with two
spaces in front and one behind.
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
833
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
834
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
835
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
836
Landmark
7 = Export
ZNON (missing data) Value (Parameter 8)
The ZNON value represents missing entries in the import field (null
values). The value is stored with the field and becomes the ZNON value
for this field on the MFD. If an operation (for example, gridding)
encounters the specified ZNON value, it ignores it.
Default Value:1.0+E30 (Import)
When exporting, this value is written when a ZNON is encountered. If
this parameter is blank, the export ZNON value is either:
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
837
Landmark
R2003.12.0
15, 7,
30, 7,
45, 7,
40, 3,
52, 12
67, 7,
1.0E+30,
1.0E+30,
9999,
-9999,
NULL,
,
,
,
1.0E+30, ,
15,
15,
15,
10,
7,
7,
7,
3,
0
0
0
0
15, 7, 0
Appendix E. Import/Export
838
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
839
Landmark
It includes the decimal point and places to the right and left of the
decimal. If the grid value is an integer, the value is right-justified in this
space. If the value has a decimal point, the decimal is positioned
according to your specification in the Number of Decimals parameter
(Parameter 4 of this line). This value must be at least 7 greater than the
Decimal Location (Parameter 4.)
Default Value:15
ZNON (missing data) Value (Parameter 2)
This number is used to represent missing grid values in the file being
imported. The value is stored with the grid and becomes the ZNON
(missing data) value for this grid in the MFD. Each time contouring or
another task encounters this ZNON value it is ignored.
Default Value:1.0E+30 (Import)
When exporting, this is the value written when a ZNON is encountered.
If this parameter is left blank, the export ZNON value is either:
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
840
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
841
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
842
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
843
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
844
Landmark
R2003.12.0
1, NOTUNIF,
2, UNIFORM,
7,
5,
7,
4,
43.11157
0.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
845
Landmark
R2003.12.0
1507823.750
0.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
846
Landmark
Format File
Many file formats referring to a variety of different datasets may be
stored in one file. The file is a standard formatted disk file built with a
text editor. The formats are stored one after the other with no extra lines
between them.
To use a format in a format file you must specify the format file name.
You must also specify the format in the format file.
The format file concept has been carried to the format that is placed at
the top of the actual data file. Sometimes it is desirable to read a file
using several different descriptions. For example, you may want to read
some of the fields in one transfer and other fields in another transfer.
Several formats can be placed on top of the file being transferred. To get
the description you want to use, specify the name of that format.
If several formats are at the top of a file and no format name is specified,
the first group is used when the data is transferred.
Examples
The examples in the following text illustrate the file and field
description parameters for non-grid and grid files.
Non-Grid Examples
Example 1: For a Data File
@
SKYPLUS
!
!
!
!
!
+
HISTORY
+
HISTORY
+
HISTORY
X-FIELD,
1,
Y-FIELD,
2,
TOPO,
3,
TOP-1,
4,
THICK-1,
5,
TOP -2,
6,
THICK-2,
7,
SYMBOL CODE,
8,
WELL ID,
9,
BIASED TOPO,
10,
@
R2003.12.0
HEADER, DATA,
80,
1
2
3
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
1,
16,
31,
46,
61,
1,
16,
31,
41,
53,
15,
30,
45,
60,
75,
15,
30,
40,
52,
67,
7,
7,
7,
7,
7,
7,
7,
3,
1
7,
0.1000000E+31,
0.1000000E+31,
9999.000,
9999.000,
9999.000,
9999.000,
9999.000,
0.1000000E+31,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
15,
15,
15,
15,
15,
15,
15,
10,
7,
7,
7,
7,
7,
7,
7,
3,
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.1000000E+31, , 15,
7,
Appendix E. Import/Export
847
Landmark
14,
14,
7,
7,
0
0
5,
5,
0,
0
0
0
R2003.12.0
JAN 26 88
23:55
, 14,
, 14,
7,
7,
0
0
, 14,
7,
Appendix E. Import/Export
848
Landmark
Grid Examples
Example 1:
@
TOPOLOGICAL GRID, GRID, 5
!
!
Date:
04 February, 1996
!
Author:
VAB
!
Purpose: This Format Group may be used for grid
!
formatted files
!
+ This file covers the Nomans Land Basin in Anywhere, Alaska.
+ It was obtained in May of 1985 from Crater Company.
!
15, 9999.0, , 5, 10
3, 2, 0.0, 9765.01, -400.32, 900.25
1000.0, 200.0, 200.0
@
Example 2:
@BASELINE GRID, GRID, 5
!
, , UNKNOWN
501, 301, 0., 10000., 0., 900
500.0, 0.0, 0.0
@
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
849
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Not all data that can be transferred into an MFD can be used
by the Z-MAP Plus program.
Some types of data may be input as more than one file type. For
example, you can bring in contour data as a contour file or a
control point file, depending on the data structure.
Some file structures are rigid; others are free format. Seismic
section data is an example of a rigid file structure, while contour is
an example of a free format structure.
Appendix E. Import/Export
850
Landmark
File Structures
Each of the charts in this section is dedicated to a different type of data.
The purpose of these charts is to:
column by column
top to bottom
left to right
Grids going from an MFD out to a disk file are written in the same
manner.
START
YMAX
YMIN
Z1,1
Z2,1
Z3,1
Z4,1
Z1,2
Z2,2
Z3,2
Z4,2
Z1,3
Z2,3
Z3,3
Z4,3
XMIN
XMAX
NCOLS = 4
NROWS = 3
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
851
Landmark
Contour Level
Y
Example:
0.1000E+31
1200.
1400.
0.1000E+31
1522
1568
1578
*
Contour Gridding
Contour Editing
Contour Digitizing
Contour Drawing
Comment:
9500
826.1
832.2
9600.
1000.
1200.
1400
Marker can be any value not found in the data. All subsequent records having this value is considered as divider
records. A file with the marker in the latitude or Y-field cannot be converted by the coordinate transformation
operation.
ZNON
Contour Level
X
ZNON
ZNON
Continuation
Flag
Y
Example:
0.1000E+31
9000.
585.6
600.0
686.4
800.0
914.4
1000.
1032.
0.1000E+31
9000.
1200.
1264.
1220.
1200.
1172.
1145.
1200.
-.1000E+31
R2003.12.0
CONTOUR Data
with a Minimum
of 2 Fields
Contour Editing
Contour Gridding
Contour Drawing
Comments:
0.1000E+31
1.2
1600.
1578.
1400.
1329.
1400.
1572.
1600.
0.1000E+31
1.4
1461.
1400.
1200.
1146.
1200.
1400.
1461.
-.1000E+31
Appendix E. Import/Export
852
Landmark
ZNON/Marker*
Y
Contour Gridding
Post Data/Grids
Example:
9500.
1200.
1400.
9600.
1522.
1568.
1578.
1593.
*
0.1000E+31
826.1
832.2
0.1000E+31
1000.
1200.
1400.
1600.
Marker can be any value not found in the data. All subsequent records having this value is considered as divider
records. A file with the marker in the latitude or Y-field cannot be converted by the coordinate transformation
operation
ZNON
X
Dummy
Y
Dummy
Z
Example:
0.1000E+3
1
1200.
1400.
1522.
1568.
1578.
Comments:
99999.
826.1
832.2
1000.
1200.
1400.
99999.
9500.
9500.
9600.
9600.
9600
Example:
1200.
1400.
1522.
1568.
1578.
1593.
1200.
1096.
R2003.12.0
Contour Gridding
Post Data/Grids
Comment:
826.1
832.2
1000.
1200.
1400.
1600.
826.1
800.0
9500.
9500.
9600.
9600.
9600.
9600.
9600.
9600.
Appendix E. Import/Export
853
Landmark
SEG ID
Example:
585.6
600.0
686.4
1200.
1264.
1220.
X
Comment:
1600.
1578.
1400.
1461.
1400.
1200.
Y
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
SEG ID
SYMBOL
CODE
Example:
584.6
600.0
686.4
1200.
1264.
1220.
Vertex Data
with 4 Fields or Lines
Comment:
1600.
1578.
1400.
1461.
1400.
1200.
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
24
24
24
24
24
24
Vertex files may also contain additional fields such as Color, Area Identification, etc.
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
854
Landmark
Xn
ZNON
X
Xm
Dummy
Y
Yn
Dummy
Y
Ym
Z1
Dummy
Z2
Z2
Example:
99999.
1.4000
2.7510
99999.
4.4750
5.8800
99999.
400.0
398.0
99999.
405.0
412.0
Contour Gridding
Post Data/Grids
SEG
ID
Example:
R2003.12.0
Comment:
0.1000E+3
1
7.6000
7.7500
0.1000E+3
1
7.7000
7.1500
7.6000
7.7500
7.7000
7.1500
6.4000
6.4500
6.8500
5.4920
4.4280
3.5090
2.4250
2.0500
Post Data/Grids
Comment:
1.4000
2.7510
4.4750
5.8800
6.1900
6.6100
0.3980
0
0.5560
0
1.3910
1.7900
1.4940
1.3000
400.00
398.00
405.00
412.00
413.00
414.00
406.00
409.50
416.00
423.00
430.00
434.00
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
855
Landmark
SEG
ID
DELTA
Z-THROW
DIP
ANGLE
HEAVE
Example:
585.6
600.0
686.4
1200.
1264.
1220.
X
1600.
1578.
1400.
1461.
1400.
1200.
Y
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
SEG
ID
10.5
10.7
10.2
10.9
11.3
11.1
85
82
87
81
78
77
3.0
2.9
2.7
3.5
3.6
3.8
Faults
with 4 Fields
BAND
WIDTH
1600.
1578.
1400.
1461.
1400.
1200.
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
10.0
25.0
10.0
10.0
25.0
10.0
Faults
with 3 Fields
SEG
ID
Example:
1600.
1578.
1400.
1461.
1400.
1200.
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
SEG
ID
R2003.12.0
Point Gridding
Plus
Point Gridding
Contour Gridding
Line Drawing
Comment:
585.6
600.0
686.4
1200.
1264.
1220.
Example:
Point Gridding
Comment:
Point Gridding
Plus
Line Drawing
Post Data/Grids
Comment:
Example:
585.6
600.0
686.4
1200.
1264.
1220.
Faults
with 6 Fields
Zleft
Zright
Faults
with 5 Fields
Contour Gridding
Line Drawing
Comment:
Appendix E. Import/Export
856
Landmark
1600.
1578.
1400.
1461.
1400.
1200.
ZNON
X1
Xn
ZNON
X1
Xm
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
25.0
27.0
28.0
27.0
26.0
27.0
0
Y1
Yn
0
Y1
Ym
36.0
30.0
37.0
35.0
36.0
37.0
Faults
(Faults with No
Bands)
Contour Gridding
Example:
0.1000E+31
1200.
1400.
1522.
1568.
1578.
1593.
0.1000E+31
R2003.12.0
0
826.1
826.2
1000.
1200.
1400.
1600.
0
Appendix E. Import/Export
857
Landmark
DEVIATED
WELL NAME
SEG ID
WELL TRACK
NAME (Optional)
A
A
A
A
A
A
WELL
WELL
WELL
WELL
WELL
WELL
1.000000
1.000000
2.000000
2.000000
3.000000
3.000000
5.000000
5.000000
6.000000
6.000000
7.000000
7.000000
DA-A
DA-A
DA-B
DA-B
DA-C
DA-C
DB-C
DB-C
DB-B
DB-B
DB-A
DB-A
LINE NAME
HORIZON NAME
LIN-001
LIN-001
LIN-001
LIN-001
LIN-001
LIN-001
LIN-001
FAULTA/LEFT
FAULTA/LEFT
FAULTA/LEFT
FAULTA/LEFT
FAULTA/RIGHT
FAULTA/RIGHT
FAULTA/RIGHT
Example:
1920060.
1919892.
1920060.
1919339.
1920060.
1921219.
1918564.
1918522.
1918564.
1918162.
1918564.
1918231.
43687.39
44213.71
43687.39
41996.05
43687.39
43323.96
39681.36
37217.57
39681.36
38766.77
39681.36
40737.25
DB
DB
DB
DB
DB
DB
Seismic Section
File Type: SSEC
Minimum No. of Fields = 4
Can be used by: File Conversions
X-FIELD
Y-FIELD
Example:
0.1000000E+31
22.71431
11.73763
0.1000000E+31
0.1000000E+31
17.57001
27.62594
0.0000000E+00
0.3432056
2.151490
0.0000000E+00
0.0000000E+00
2.205378
0.3503071
Comment:
The X-field is a non-integer shotpoint number and the Y-field measures time. However, the X- and Y-fields are used
instead of the shotpoint number field and the Z-field because it represents the x,y axes of a seismic section.
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
858
Landmark
Text
File Type: TEXT
Minimum No. of Fields = 3
Can be used by: All text processes
X-FIELD
Y-FIELD
TEXT FIELD
43947.
Example:
1913272.
Comment:
Text files may also define location mode, font, character size and orientation.
Cross Section
File Type: XSEC
Minimum No. of Fields = 4
Can be used by: (generated by) Z-CAP
X-FIELD
Y-FIELD
LINE NAME
HORIZON NAME
Example:
0.1000000E+31
18.81438
38.05873
57.27757
76.54882
93.91723
107.4618
124.8698
138.4157
153.8920
171.3008
190.5720
206.0497
221.4849
0.1000000E+31
0.0000000E+00
-9177.212
-9177.458
-9177.604
-9177.950
-9178.347
-9178.795
-9179.342
-9179.789
-9180.286
-9180.834
-9181.180
-9181.677
-9182.024
0.0000000E+00
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
BASEPLANE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
HORIZON
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
Comment:
The X-field represents linear displacement along the profile baseline, while the Y-field represents depth. However,
X- and Y-fields are used instead of the linear displacement field and the Z-field because it represents the x,y axes of
a cross section.
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
859
Landmark
Copy Files
OpenWorks
Grid File to MFD/OW
MFD
Copy Files
Import ASCII data into an MFD, then use the File Copy
Files option to transfer the data to OpenWorks.
You can use the ASCII (Import) option to save the following data in an
MFD or in OpenWorks:
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
860
Landmark
Other Tools
OpenWorks also contains tools you can use to load mapping data into
the OpenWorks database. These tools accessible from the OpenWorks
menu under Data Import. (For more information about these
options, see the OpenWorks Data Loading guide).
The following OpenWorks tools are of particular interest to
Z-MAP Plus users:
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
861
Landmark
Step 1:
Click the Output Name button in
the IMPORT FILES dialog box.
Step 2:
Select OpenWorks
from the Output
MASTER FILE
drop-down list. A
default Fault Set Name
appears in the Output
File Name box. Click
the OW button. The
OpenWorks Output
Specification dialog
box appears.
Step 3:
Review and change, if necessary,
the Fault Set Name and other
parameters. Click OK.
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
862
Landmark
Step 2:
Select OpenWorks for
the MFD to Contain the
Output Grid File. A
default map data set
name appears in the
Name of the Output
Grid File. Click the OW
button. In the OpenWorks
Output Specification
dialog box that appears,
make any needed
changes and click OK.
Step 3:
Review and change, if necessary,
the Map Data Set Name and the
other parameters. Click OK.
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
863
Landmark
After you complete these steps, the grid data is written to the
OpenWorks database and is accessible in Z-MAP Plus.
R2003.12.0
Appendix E. Import/Export
864
Landmark
Appendix F.
State Plane Codes
The State Plane codes in the following table are based on the API codes and
abbreviations. Occasionally, an additional character is required for a specific
state differentiation.
R2003.12.0
865
Landmark
No.
State/Territory
NAD 27
Zone
NAD 83
Zone
State Plane
Char. Code
Num. Code
Alabama
East
West
East
West
AL_E
AL_W
0101
0102
Alaska
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
Zone 6
Zone 7
Zone 8
Zone 9
Zone 10
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
Zone 6
Zone 7
Zone 8
Zone 9
Zone 10
AK_1
AK_2
AK_3
AK_4
AK_5
AK_6
AK_7
AK_8
AK_9
AK_10
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
5007
5008
5009
5010
Arizona
East
Central
West
East
Central
West
AZ_E
AZ_C
AZ_W
0201
0202
0203
Arkansas
North
South
North
South
AR_N
AR_S
0301
0302
California
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
Zone 6
Zone 7
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
Zone 6
CA_1
CA_2
CA_3
CA_4
CA_5
CA_6
CA_7
0401
0402
0403
0404
0405
0406
0407
Colorado
North
Central
South
North
Central
South
CO_N
CO_C
CO_S
0501
0502
0503
Connecticut
CT
0600
Delaware
DE
0700
Florida
North
East
West
North
East
West
FL_N
FL_E
FL_W
0903
0901
0902
10
Georgia
East
West
East
West
GA_E
GA_W
1001
1002
R2003.12.0
866
Landmark
No.
1
2
3
State/Territory
NAD 27
Zone
NAD 83
Zone
State Plane
Char. Code
Num. Code
11
Hawaii
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
HI_1
HI_2
HI_3
HI_4
HI_5
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
12
Idaho
East
Central
West
East
Central
West
ID_E
ID_C
ID_W
1101
1102
1103
13
Illinois
East
West
East
West
IL_E
IL_W
1201
1202
14
Indiana
East
West
East
West
IN_E
IN_W
1301
1302
15
Iowa
North
South
North
South
IA_N
IA_S
1401
1402
16
Kansas
North
South
North
South
KS_N
KS_S
1501
1502
17
Kentucky
North
South
North
South
KY_N
KY_S
1601
1602
18
Louisiana
North
South
Offshore
North
South
Offshore
LA_N
LA_S
LA_O
1701
1702
1703
East
West
East
West
ME_E
ME_W
1801
1802
MD
1900
19
Maine
20
Maryland
LA_SH
R2003.12.0
867
Landmark
No.
2
3
4
State/Territory
NAD 27
Zone
NAD 83
Zone
Mainland
Island
State Plane
Char. Code
Num. Code
MA_M
MA_O MA_I2
2001
2002
MI_E
MIO_C1
MI_W
2101
2102
2103
21
Massachusetts
Mainland
Island
22
Michigan (Old)
East
Central
West
23
Michigan (Current)
North
Central
South
North
Central
South
MI_N
MI_C
MI_S
2111
2112
2113
24
Minnesota
North
Central
South
North
Central
South
MN_N
MN_C
MN_S
2201
2202
2203
25
Mississippi
East
West
East
West
MS_E
MS_W
2301
2302
26
Missouri
East
Central
West
East
Central
West
MO_E
MO_C
MO_W
2401
2402
2403
27
Montana
North
Central
South
One Zone
MT2
MT_N
MT_C
MT_S
25003
2501
2502
2503
28
Nebraska
North
South
One Zone
NE2
NE_N
NE_S
26003
2601
2602
R2003.12.0
868
Landmark
No.
State/Territory
NAD 27
Zone
NAD 83
Zone
East
Central
West
East
Central
West
State Plane
Char. Code
Num. Code
NV_E
NV_C
NV_W
2701
2702
2703
29
Nevada
30
New Hampshire
NH
2800
31
New Jersey
NJ
2900
32
New Mexico
East
Central
West
East
Central
West
NM_E
NM_C
NM_W
3001
3002
3003
33
New York
East
Central
West
Long Island
East
Central
West
Long Island
NY_E
NY_C
NY_W
NY_LI
3101
3102
3103
3104
34
North Carolina
35
North Dakota
North
South
36
Ohio
37
NY_L2
NC
3200
North
South
ND_N
ND_S
3301
3302
North
South
North
South
OH_N
OH_S
3401
3402
Oklahoma
North
South
North
South
OK_N
OK_S
3501
3502
38
Oregon
North
South
North
South
OR_N
OR_S
3601
3602
39
Pennsylvania
North
South
North
South
PA_N
PA_S
3701
3702
40
Zone 1
Zone 2
One Zone
PR2
PR
VI4
52003
5201
5202
41
Rhode Island
RI
3800
42
Samoa
AS
5300
R2003.12.0
869
Landmark
No.
State/Territory
NAD 27
Zone
NAD 83
Zone
State Plane
Char. Code
Num. Code
43
South Carolina
North
South
One Zone
SC2
SC_N
SC_S
39003
3901
3902
44
South Dakota
North
South
North
South
SD_N
SD_S
4001
4002
45
Tennessee
TN
4100
46
Texas
North
North Central
Central
South Central
South
North
North Central
Central
South Central
South
TX_N
TX_NC
TX_C
TX_SC
TX_S
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
47
Utah
North
Central
South
North
Central
South
UT_N
UT_C
UT_S
4301
4302
4303
48
Vermont
VT
4400
49
Virginia
North
South
North
South
VA_N
VA_S
4501
4502
50
Washington
North
South
North
South
WA_N
WA_S
4601
4602
51
West Virginia
North
South
North
South
WV_N
WV_S
4701
4702
52
Wisconsin
North
Central
South
North
Central
South
WI_N
WI_C
WI_S
4801
4802
4803
53
Wyoming
East
East Central
West Central
West
East
East Central
West Central
West
WY_E
WY_EC
WY_WC
WY_W
4901
4902
4903
4904
R2003.12.0
870
Landmark
Appendix G.
Mapping and Cartographic Projections
Overview
Projections transform coordinates between geodetic format (latitude and
longitude) and projected format (northings and eastings).
A map projection may be associated with each picture you generate.
Once you project a picture, however, all data to be plotted in the picture
must be compatible with the pictures projection parameters. (This
applies to all picture data, such as contour, vertex, control point, and grid
data.). Before you can plot the picture data, geodetic coordinates must
also be transformed to northings/eastings by using the correct map
projections.
To set up a projection, you must perform these tasks:
R2003.12.0
871
Landmark
Map Properties
As a flat two-dimensional map cannot accurately represent the curved
surface of the earth, a compromise must be found in the resultant
distortion to satisfy the needs of each application. Cartographic
projections generally are classified by the properties preserved in
transforming the curved face of the earth to a flat map. Shape, area,
distance and direction are the most important properties that may be
retained by a map. A single map projection can at best only meet one or
two of these properties. Each is discussed below.
Shapes
If a map represents the true shape of each localized region on the earth,
it is said to be conformal. The shapes and angles of a local region are
preserved, along with the contours of boundaries, borders and
coastlines. Lines representing parallels and meridians always cross at
right angles. The three most common conformal projections are:
Areas
When a map accurately represents the relative proportions of different
areas of the earth, it is called an equivalent or equal-area map.
Consequently, a penny placed anywhere on the map covers the same
total surface area. Note that conformality (correct shapes) does not
imply equivalence (correct area proportions). For example, the Standard
Mercator projection correctly depicts the contours of both Greenland
and South America. However, it scales the surface area of Greenland as
almost equal to that of South America when in reality, Greenland is only
about one-ninth the size of South America.
As a rule, equivalent projections are considered only when working with
a very large area, such as world maps.
R2003.12.0
872
Landmark
Distances
Although the area scale of a map may be kept constant (equivalent), this
is usually not true for the scale distance between two points on a map.
The scale varies along a line between two locations, even if the scale
areas are in correct proportion. The optimal situation is one where true
scale is preserved on the map along a particular line on the earth. This
line is called a standard parallel or a central meridian.
Directions
Since the earth is globular, compass directions at a location bend in the
direction of the earths curvature and can actually overlap on the
opposite side of the earth. This may be illustrated by imagining a ship
headed toward the North Pole. Once the ship passes the pole it is then
headed south, opposite from its original direction. Thus, it is not
possible to obtain a true azimuth from one location to another simply by
measuring the apparent angle on a flat map. However, a special class of
projections allows the measurement of true azimuth from the reference
point at the center of the map to any other point on the map. Such maps
are called azimuthal projections. Unfortunately, azimuthal projections
suffer distortions in other important map properties such as shape, area,
and distance.
R2003.12.0
873
Landmark
Control Parameters
Input Dataset
Coordinate Transformations can be performed on control point, contour,
fault, vertex, and/or any other datasets having x and y coordinates.
Control point data need only consist of x,y fields where x is the
horizontal distance of the data point and y is the distance of that point
perpendicular to x.
Direction of Projection
Data may be transformed between geodetic and northing/easting
coordinate system, using either a forward or inverse projection.
Forward Projection
A forward projection translates latitude/longitude locations to
northing/easting locations given a set of map projection parameters.
Geodetic locations on a data file must first be projected before you can
display the information on a map.
Inverse Projection
An inverse projection recovers latitude/longitude coordinates from
northing/easting coordinates. This option is useful when the input data
comes from a projection that is incompatible with the desired map
projection.
R2003.12.0
874
Landmark
Map Projections
Most map projections are either geometric or semi-geometric so that
geographic features are projected onto a geometric surface that can be
laid flat like a map. The geometric surfaces employed in most
cartographic projections are the cone, the cylinder and the plane. The
position of points projected upon the surface may be determined by
constructing a straight line from the reference point of the projection
through the desired location on earth, and intersecting the projection
surface at a point. Imagine a line from the center of the earth passing
through New York City and intersecting a cylinder lying tangent at the
Equator. The location of New York City would be determined uniquely
on the cylinder, which could then be cut along its length and unrolled to
produce a rectangular map. The shape formed by numerous locations on
the earth produces the shape appearing on the map. Figure 1 exactly
describes the case of the Standard Mercator
.
Tangent Cone
Tangent Cylinder
F
R2003.12.0
Tangent Plane
F
875
Landmark
Secant Cylinder
F
Secant Plane
Secant Cone
Fi
In the case of planar projections, there are three ways to orient the plane.
It may be centered on the polar axis as shown in Figure 7, on the Equator
as seen in Figure 8, or in the oblique case (see Figure 9) at some latitude
in between.
Polar
Equatorial
F
Oblique
F
R2003.12.0
876
Landmark
Projections
The available projections are listed below. They have been organized
into two groups depending on their source of origin. The first group
contains the traditional Z-MAP Plus projections and the second group
contains projections obtained from Blue Marble. The groups are listed
below.
Z-MAP Plus projections
R2003.12.0
877
Landmark
Mercator
Transverse Mercator
Cassini-Soldner
Stereographic
Azimuthal Equidistant
Bonne
Equidistant Conic
Equidistant Cylindrical
IMW Polyconic
Miller Cylindrical
Mollweide
Orthographic
Polar Stereographic
Polyconic
Robinson
R2003.12.0
878
Landmark
Cylindrical Projections
Landmarks geological mapping programs support four cylindrical
projections.
Standard Mercator
Oblique Mercator
Transverse Mercator
R2003.12.0
180 to 174
177
174 to 168
171
168 to 162
165
162 to 156
159
156 to 150
153
150 to 144
147
144 to 138
141
138 to 132
135
132 to 126
129
10
126 to 120
123
11
120 to 114
117
12
114 to 108
111
13
108 to 102
105
14
102 to 96
99
15
96 to 90
93
16
90 to 84
87
17
84 to 78
81
18
78 to 72
75
19
72 to 66
69
20
66 to 60
63
21
60 to 54
57
22
54 to 48
51
23
48 to 42
45
24
42 to 36
39
25
36 to 30
33
26
30 to 24
27
879
Landmark
UTM Zone
Number:
R2003.12.0
27
24 to 18
21
28
18 to 12
15
29
12 to 6
30
6 to 0
31
0 to +6
32
+6 to +12
33
+12 to +18
15
34
+18 to +24
21
35
+24 to +30
27
36
+30 to +36
33
37
+36 to +42
39
38
+42 to +48
45
39
+48 to +54
51
40
+54 to +60
57
41
+60 to +66
63
42
+66 to +72
69
43
+72 to +78
75
44
+78 to +84
81
45
+84 to +90
87
46
+90 to +96
93
47
+96 to +102
99
48
+102 to +108
105
49
+108 to +114
111
50
+114 to +120
117
51
+120 to +126
123
52
+126 to +132
129
53
+132 to +138
135
54
+138 to +144
141
55
+144 to +150
147
56
+150 to +156
153
57
+156 to +162
159
58
+162 to +168
165
59
+168 to +174
171
60
+174 to +180
177
880
Landmark
Conic Projections
Landmark geological mapping programs support five conic projections.
Gnomonic
Stereographic
Orthographic
Other Projections
New Zealand Map Grid
R2003.12.0
881
Landmark
R2003.12.0
882
Landmark
STANDARD MERCATOR
When a Standard Mercator projection is applied, the map is conformal,
but has serious distortions in area proportions for regions located more
than a few degrees apart in latitude. Distance scale is constant along the
equator, which serves as the standard parallel, but becomes increasingly
distorted away from the equator approaching infinity at the pole. A
Standard Mercator projection is most accurate within 15 degrees of the
Equator, but may be used up to approximately 85 degrees latitude for
illustrative purposes. This projection is useful in navigation since, in its
spherical form, a straight line on the map represents a rhumb line or a
line of constant bearing.
SINGLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
This projection places the reference point at the center of the earth, and
projects to a cone aligned on the polar axis tangent at the standard
parallel. The map is conformal over very large areas, and offers
excellent equivalence within a few degrees of the standard parallel.
Exact scale distance is preserved along the standard parallel, with
distortion increasing away from the parallel. Directions are accurate
over fairly large areas. The map resembles a conic section that has been
cut and unrolled to produce a pie-shaped map. It is used to map areas
that run east and west at intermediate latitudes.
DOUBLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
This projection possesses all the desirable elements of the single
standard parallel projection, and improves all of them by using a cone
that is secant at the two standard parallels. Unlike the single standard
parallel, this projection diminishes overall distortions by reducing scale
slightly between the two parallels and enlarging it less beyond the
parallels. As this projection offers exceptionally good shape and
direction relationships, it is used where accuracy is desired for large
areas lying in an east-west direction.
R2003.12.0
883
Landmark
AZIMUTHAL GNOMONIC
This projection places the reference point at the center of the earth. The
map is not conformal. Distortion in area and shape grows quickly away
from the center of the map. Although distance scale is distorted, the
shortest distance between two points appears as a straight line on the
map. Chiefly used for obtaining azimuths, this projection may also be
used to preserve shapes, areas, and distances if the scale is large enough.
The Azimuthal Gnomonic, Stereographic and Orthographic projections
always provide an accurate azimuth from the center point of the map to
any other location on the map. While there are considerable distortions
for maps of large areas, azimuths from the reference remain true.
AZIMUTHAL STEREOGRAPHIC
This projection places the reference point on the surface of the earth,
opposite the center of the mapping plane. It is conformal for all
orientations. However relative areas and distance scale quickly distort
away from the center of the map, although not as quickly as in the
Gnomonic projection. It produces a near perfect map if used for circular
areas of a few degrees in size such as large islands, small countries and
continents, and polar areas. One of its notable properties is that any
circle on earth, unless it passes through the point opposite the origin of
projection, appears as a circle on the map. The Z-MAP Plus Azimuthal
Stereographic projection uses a spherical earth model.
AZIMUTHAL ORTHOGRAPHIC
This projection places the reference point at an infinite distance away
from the earth and is analogous to a plan or elevation view of the earth.
This projection produces the same distortion present when the earth is
viewed from outer space. This projection is not conformal. This
projection suffers severe distortions in other map properties far away
from the center of the projection plane, although this could be
considered a visual aid. An Orthographic projection is used when an
accurate pictorial view of the earth is desired, and is limited to the
hemisphere visible from space.
R2003.12.0
884
Landmark
MODIFIED POLYCONIC
In a polyconic projection, each parallel of latitude is constructed as
though it were the standard parallel of a true conic projection. Thus, a
complete projection requires an infinite number of cones, one for each
value of latitude, with cones successively flatter towards the pole.
In a rectangular polyconic projection, the parallels are evenly spaced,
and meridians and parallels meet at right angles. This projection is used
extensively to map north of the 80th parallel in Canada. The modified
rectangular polyconic projection is neither conformal, equivalent, or
azimuthal. However, it is possible to produce a map of a small region
with excellent properties since the user may alter the scale in a desired
manner by choosing both a central meridian and a standard parallel,
along with their respective scale errors.
ALBERS EQUAL AREA
This projection has parallels that are unequally spaced arcs of concentric
circles, more closely spaced at the north and south edges of the map. The
meridians are equally spaced radii of these circles, which are intersected
at right angles. The poles are also seen as concentric circles. There is no
distortion in scale or shape along the two standard parallels. This
projection is primarily used for maps with a predominant east-west
expanse; it is used extensively by the USGS for maps at scales of
1:2,500,000 and smaller.
AMERICAN POLYCONIC
This is a conic projection in which meridians are complex curves
concave toward a straight central meridian. Parallels are nonconcentric
circles except for a straight equator. This projection is used for areas
with a north-south orientation. Only along the central meridian does it
portray true shape, area, distance, and direction. Individual sheets of this
series can be edge-joined since they are drawn with straight meridians
for convenience. They cannot be mosaiced beyond a few sheets.
R2003.12.0
885
Landmark
OBLIQUE MERCATOR
This is a conformal cylindrical map projection. Points on the surface of
a sphere or spheroid, such as the earth, are conceived as developed by
Mercator principles on a cylindrical tangent along an oblique great
circle. This projection may be useful for plotting linear configurations
situated along a line oblique to the earths equator.
CASSINI-SOLDNER
This projection is similar to a polyconic map projection except that it
uses but one central meridian for a whole series. It is best adapted for
north-south belts and large-scale maps of small areas.
NEW ZEALAND MAP GRID
This is a conformal projection developed for New Zealand to give a
small range of scale variation over the land area of New Zealand.
BIPOLAR OBLIQUE CONIC CONFORMAL
Also called The Americas projection, this consists of two oblique
conformal conics designed to fit the shape of the continents of North and
South America in order to allow both continents to be on one map with
minimum distortion. It is used only for small scale maps.
VAN DER GRINTEN I
Used for maps of the entire globe, this projection is an attempt to
compromise between the areal distortion of a Mercator and the shape
distortion of an Equal-Area. It shows the entire globe mapped in a circle
and it is neither conformal nor equal area, with large distortion near the
poles. The area to be mapped (Map AOI) should not extend more than
180 degrees east or west of the central meridian.
R2003.12.0
886
Landmark
EQUIDISTANT CONIC
A conic projection with scale true in the north-south direction, but in the
east-west direction only along the two standard parallels. Neither
conformal nor equal area. This Projection provided by Blue Marble
Geographics.
STEREOGRAPHIC
This is like the Azimuthal Stereographic, but it uses a spheroidal model
of the earth rather than a spherical model.This Projection provided by
Blue Marble Geographics.
POLAR STEREOGRAPHIC
This is a special case of the Stereographic projection, with the center of
the projection at the pole. It is used mostly for mapping polar
regions.This Projection provided by Blue Marble Geographics.
ROMANIA STEREOGRAFICA
This is a custom projection promoted by the Romanian government for
the mapping of Romania. It is designed to product very low-distortion
maps of that region, and is not recommended for mapping anywhere
else. Because it is a custom projection, almost all of the parameters are
standard and users have to supply very few. This Projection provided by
Blue Marble Geographics.
NEDERLAND STEREOGRAFISCHE
This is a custom projection promoted by the government of the
Netherlands for the mapping within the Netherlands. It is designed to
product very low-distortion maps of that region, and is not
recommended for mapping anywhere else. Because it is a custom
projection, almost all of the parameters are standard and users have to
supply very few. This Projection provided by Blue Marble Geographics.
R2003.12.0
887
Landmark
R2003.12.0
888
Landmark
Lambert Conic
The Lambert Conic is often used for maps of countries and regions with
predominant east-west expanse. Its parallels are unequally spaced arcs
of concentric circles, more closely spaced near the center of the map.
Meridians are equally spaced radii of the same circles, thereby cutting
parallels at right angles. Scale is true along two standard parallels,
normally, or along just one. Pole in same hemisphere as standard
parallels is a point; other pole is at infinity.
Stereographic
This is like the Azimuthal Stereographic, but it uses a spheroidal model
of the earth rather than a spherical model.Hotine Oblique Mercator
(1 point and azimuth)
Albers Equal-Area Conic
Albers Equal-Area Conic projection is best suited for regions with
predominant east-west expanse. In particular, this projection is often
used for the United States. This projection is conic and equal area.
Azimuthal Equal Area
This projection was developed by Lambert in 1772 and is typically used
for mapping large regions like continents and hemispheres. It is an
azimuthal, equal area projection, but is not perspective. Distortion is
zero at the center of the projection, and increases radially away from this
point.
Azimuthal Equal Area (Polar Aspect)
This projection is the polar version of the Azimuthal Equal Area
projection.
Azimuthal Equidistant
The most noticeable feature of this azimuthal projection is the fact that
distances measured from the center (of the map) are true. Therefore, a
circle about the projection center defines the locus of points that are
equally far away from the plot origin. Furthermore, directions from the
center are also true. The projection, in the polar aspect, is at least several
centuries old. It is a useful projection for a global view of locations at
various or identical distance from a given point (the map center).
R2003.12.0
889
Landmark
R2003.12.0
890
Landmark
Equidistant Conic
A conic projection with scale true in the north-south direction, but in the
east-west direction only along the two standard parallels. Neither
conformal nor equal area.
Equidistant Cylindrical
Equidistant Cylindrical projection--probably the simplest of all map
projections to construct and one of the oldest, dating back more than
2000 years. It is now used primarily for maps covering small areas,
where distortion is less important than the ease of displaying special
information. This projection is cylindrical, and neither equal area nor
conformal
This projection is similar to a polyconic map projection except that it
uses but one central meridian for a whole series. It is best adapted for
north-south belts and large-scale maps of small areas.
Miller Cylindrical
Miller Cylindrical projection--basically a modified Mercator projection,
with a better balance between shape and area distortion. This projection
is cylindrical, and neither equal area nor conformal. Often used for
world maps this projection avoids some of the scale exaggerations of the
Mercator
Mollweide
The Mollweide projection is a pseudocylindrical projection that
resembles cylindrical projections in that parallel latitude lines are
straight, but lines of longitude are curved. The Mollweide is equal-area
and its central meridian is straight. The 90th meridians are circular arcs.
Parallels are straight, but unequally spaced. Scale is true only along the
standard parallels of 40:44 N and 40:44 S. Because of its shape, the
Mollweide is often used for world maps.
Orthographic
The orthographic azimuthal projection is a perspective projection from
infinite distance. It is therefore often used to give the appearance of a
globe viewed from space. As with Lamberts equal area and the
stereographic, only one hemisphere can be viewed at any time. The
projection is neither equal area nor conformal, and much distortion is
introduced near the edge of a hemisphere. The directions from the center
of projection are true. The projection was known to the Egyptians and
Greeks more than 2,000 years ago.
R2003.12.0
891
Landmark
Polar Stereographic
This is a conformal, azimuthal projection that dates back to the Greeks.
Its main use is for mapping the polar regions. In the polar aspect all
meridians are straight lines and parallels are arcs of circles.
Polyconic
Polyconic projectionbest suited for small regions. When used for a
small area, this projection preserves shapes, areas, distances, and
azimuths in their true relation to the surface of the earth. The Polyconic
projection is not suited for large areas, as gross exaggeration of details
occurs. This projection is neither equal area nor conformal.
Robinson
Uses tabular coordinates rather than mathematical formulas to achieve
a correct look. Better balance of size and shape for high-latitude areas
than Mercator. Van der Grinten or Mollweide. Directions are true along
all parallels and along central meridian Not conformal, equal area,
equidistant or perspective. Pseudocylindrical right appearing
projection.
R2003.12.0
892
Landmark
Reference Spheroid
The Reference Spheroid is a theoretical geometric figure that has
dimensions closely approaching the dimensions of the earth for a
particular area of interest.
Note that the reference spheroid may be user defined. In such instances,
you are asked to specify the semi-major and semi-minor axes.
The following Z-MAP Plus tasks use reference spheroids:
R2003.12.0
893
Landmark
R2003.12.0
894
Landmark
R2003.12.0
895
Landmark
R2003.12.0
896
Landmark
Introduction
This section describes how to create a customized logo in the title block
logo area.
R2003.12.0
Logo and Title Block shows how the logo relates to other title
block information (page 898).
897
Landmark
LOGO
XLOGO,YLOGO
TopHorz
XLL,YLL
WIDTH
Line Drawing of Title Block
Landmark Graphics Corporation
Houston, Texas
R2003.12.0
898
Landmark
Understanding LOGOFILEs
ZCL and Z-MAP Plus use an ASCII flat file to determine the
appearance and location of your customized logo. The table below
describes the structure of the LOGOFILE according to line numbers and
pre-defined areas in the file.
File Group
File Area
Fortran
Format
Variables Assigned
Header Info
First Line
(7X,F14.7,I7)
TopHorz, NameIncluded
Second Line
(I5,3F10.4)
NumPolys, XLOGO,
YLOGO, Height
(2I5)
NumVertices, Color
(2F14.7)
X, Y
The table below explains the purpose of each variable you can use in the
LOGOFILE.
Variable
Description
TopHorz
Allows you to specify the amount of space allowed for the logo area of the Title Block
(See Figure 1). Its value is expressed as a percentage of the Title Block Width. The
default value for TopHorz is 0.4. For reference, the overall height of the Title Block is
0.52.
NameIncluded
Allows you to specify whether the company name is digitized with the logo. If it is, this
value should be 1; otherwise specify 0.
NumPolys
XLOGO,
YLOGO
Specifies the X,Y coordinates of the lower-left corner of the logo (see Figure 1). These
values are expressed as a percentage of the Title Block Width.
Height
Allows you to specify the actual height of the logo. The value is expressed as a
percentage of the overall Title Block Width.
NumVertices
Specifies the number of vertices (lines in the file) in the polygon block.
Color
X,Y
Specifies the X,Y coordinates of a vertex in a polygon. The coordinates are expressed as a
percentage of the logo height. For example, if the X,Y coordinates were 0.0,0.0, the
vertex would be located at XLOGO,YLOGO. If the X,Y coordinates were 1.0,1.0, the
vertex would be located at (XLOGO + Logo height), (YLOGO + Logo height).
R2003.12.0
899
Landmark
Example LOGOFILE
The following shows a short sample LOGOFILE.
NumVertices
TopHorz
NumPolys
XLOGO
NameIncluded
YLOGO
Height
Color
0.3
1
0.1250
10 201
-0.3488372
0.1772093
0.1877907
0.1981395
0.2077907
0.2176744
0.2245349
0.2348837
0.2419767
-0.3488372
1
0.4100
0.2000
0.4813953
0.4813953
0.4639535
0.4488372
0.4290698
0.4093023
0.3930233
0.3709302
0.3465116
0.4813953
Header
Info
Polygon
Block
You can calculate the actual plotter locations of your polygon vertices
using the following equations:
Plotter X = X ( Height Width ) + ( XLOGO Width ) + XLL
Plotter Y = Y ( Height Width ) + ( YLOGO Width ) + YLL
A real LOGOFILE is in the /files area of the /ZMAPPlus directory. The
file is called COMPANY.LOGO.
Using LOGOFILEs
To use a LOGOFILE in Z-MAP Plus or ZCL, you need to set the
environment variable LOGOFILE to the path for the LOGOFILE. For
example, if the LOGOFILE is located in the following path:
/landmark/logofiles/LOGO.FILE
Execute the following command in the run scripts for ZCL and/or
Z-MAP Plus:
setenv LOGOFILE /landmark/logofiles/LOGO.FILE
R2003.12.0
900
Landmark
Appendix I.
Auxiliary Files
Auxiliary Files for Z-MAP Plus
This appendix describes files you may see in your home directory or
files in the programs /bin/files directory, which you share with the other
Z-MAP Plus users at your site. The information includes a simple
explanation about what the files do, and the relevance, if any, the files
have to you. Although some of these files have no impact on users,
Z-MAP Plus users have shown an interest in learning about them.
Do not delete .LCK files while you are running Z-MAP Plus or those MFDs will
be available to other users at the same time. Conflicting write operations may
destroy or corrupt MFDs.
R2003.12.0
901
Landmark
Another set of files present in the home directory make it easier for you
to save and resume your work on a project when you run your next
session of the program: the LASPRM.ZCL, LASPRM.ZCL2, and the
POSMEM4_0 files.
LASPRM The LASPRM files save all the parameter settings you
specified and saved in your most recent session. On startup, a new
Z-MAP Plus session uses the settings from the LASPRM files. For
example, the LASPRM.ZCL is responsible for remembering which
MFDs you attached during the most recent session, as well as which
gridding algorithm or system switch settings you chose before you last
ended the session.
Corrupt LASPRM Files
You can customize and save parameter files that are project- specific.
Z-MAP Plus can locate only those parameter files that have the
extension .ZCLPARMS.
POSMEM4_0 The POSMEM4_0 file remembers where you
placed the various menus and panels that appeared during your last
session. This enables you to position the panels according to your
personal preferences.
Two files may be created in connection with running processes that rely
on ZCL (Z-MAP Command Language): the ZMAPPARM file and the
TEMPMACRO.ZCL file.
R2003.12.0
902
Landmark
tmp. files
ZPLUS.ERR
ZPLUS.RHF
Tmp. files are scratch files. They contain various sorts of information
that the program usually only needs for part of your program run. For
example, you may decide to run the Point Gridding subtask on a dataset.
If you look in the home directory while the program is still running, you
see tmp. files:
> ls -l tmp.*
-rw-rw-r-- 1 usr
-rw-rw-r-- 1 usr
R2003.12.0
903
Landmark
If disk space in your home directory is scarce, you can redirect your tmp.* files
to another directory.
To re-route tmp.* files to another destination, enter a command of this form in
the home directory:
> setenv TMPDIR path/tmp
For example, you may run from zbig/tapes/20 but you want your tmp. files in a
scratch subdirectory:
> mkdir scratch
> setenv TMPDIR /zbig/tapes/20/scratch
Do not delete .tmp files in mid-session, or you will lose the Scratch.mfd and
other needed temporary files.
904
Landmark
Glossary
R2003.12.0
Glossary
905
Landmark
alphanumeric data
Data composed of alphabetic and/or numeric characters. Generally, any data that is keyed or
displayed directly to a computer terminal or printer is alphanumeric data. When alphanumeric
data are stored by the computer, each character occupies one byte (8 bits). The two standard
internal computer representations of alphanumeric data are called ASCII and EBCDIC. See
binary data.
altitude
The height above a reference plane, usually mean sea level.
annotation
Descriptive text, scales, legends, etc., that are drawn on a map to identify and locate features,
describe the function of the map or features, and generally make the map useful.
anomaly
A deviation from the uniform character of surrounding information. For example, an anomaly
might be a structure of interest or a feature that might be associated with petroleum
accumulations or mineral deposits.
API well number
A unique numbering system developed by the American Petroleum Institute to identify wells
drilled in the United States. The 12 digit number can be broken down as follows:
Digits 1-2: State code. Numbers 1-49 are alphabetical for states including the District of
Columbia. Alaska and Hawaii are 50 and 51 respectively.
Digits 3-5: County, parish, or offshore code.
Digits 6-10: Specific well code.
Digits 11-12: Codes for sidetracks, etc.
apparent dip
Any dip not measured at a right angle to the strike. It is always less than the true dip. Cross
sections, which cut a surface at any angle other than 90 degrees to the strike of the surface,
reveal the apparent dip.
application program
A program written by or for a user that applies to the user's work, for example, a mapping
application program.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
906
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Glossary
907
Landmark
baselap
A case of onlap where the bases of younger strata lap onto an older surface. In modeling
baselap, you would use one of the Merge operations. See onlap.
basemap
A map showing the names and locations of map data such as seismic lines, shotpoints, well,
culture, and other basic geographic data.
base plane
The two-dimensional x versus y plane used to display map data, contours, and other non-relief
map information. The base plane is defined so that the positive X-direction is east and the
positive Y-direction is north.
batch mode
A mode for executing computer programs when no operator intervention is required. Batch
processing is usually scheduled so that it does not interfere with interactive processing. Batch
processing is sometimes called background processing. Contrast with interactive mode.
binary data
A way of encoding numeric data to make best use of the computational and storage facilities
of computers. Numeric data are converted into binary data as they are loaded into the
computer. Most numeric data are converted to binary data unless they are strictly for display
purposes on a map or other type of graphics. Then they would be retained in alphanumeric
form.
blanking
The operation of changing valid Z-values within a designated area into null values so that it
appears there are no data within the area. Data blanking nulls a specified field of all x,y,z data
points within an area. Grid blanking nulls all the grid values of a specified grid within an area.
border ticks
Short lines drawn perpendicular to map border and used to divide the border into distance
intervals. Longer ticks are used to indicate major intervals while shorter ticks are used to
subdivide major intervals. Major ticks are usually labeled with their respective coordinates.
boundary
A line or closed curve that delineates one area from another. The line or curve is usually
represented by a series of x,y points at its vertices. Boundaries between private properties are
called property lines or lease lines.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
908
Landmark
boundary polygon
An enclosed multi-sided area that limits data processing, such as regridding, to either inside or
outside the marked area.
byte
Usually eight bits (binary positions) that are used to represent a character.
catalog
The listing of available information that is keyed to a well. Data must be cataloged prior to
manipulation and analysis. If data is not cataloged, the computer does not know it exists.
call
The action of bringing a computer program, a routine, or a subroutine into effect, usually by
specifying the entry conditions and jumping to an entry point.
centered symbol
See symbol.
CGM
Acronym for Computer Graphics Metafile. CGM files are a standard way of storing graphics
information. You can use the File Print CGM option in the Z-MAP Plus window to
save pictures as CGM files. You can use CGM files in graphics applications outside of
Z-MAP Plus.
character
Any one of approximately 100 different symbols that appear on a computer keyboard. Each
character occupies one byte of storage. See also ASCII.
character string
A series of characters such as a word or other useful text that might be used to annotate a map.
Clarke spheroid of 1866
A reference ellipsoid having the following approximate dimensions:
semimajor axis
semiminor axis
ellipticity
6,378,206.4 meters
6,356,583.8 meters
1/294.97
class
The color and display format for text items on a map.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
909
Landmark
class size
The number of elements grouped into each of the histogram bars.
clipping
The operation of limiting or truncating data that is beyond specified limits. Grid clipping is
performed to truncate grid values that exceed or fall below specified thresholds; values above
or below the threshold are set to the threshold. Data clipping of Z values is similar. Map
clipping cuts off all graphic information that would otherwise be drawn beyond a clipping
boundary, typically the map border.
closure
The property of a structure that means it is enclosed by a closed contour. In a structural trap,
vertical closure is the vertical distance between the lowest contour that closes and the highest
point on the feature. Areal closure is the area contained in the lowest closing contour.
color index
A number assigned to a color in the Z-MAP Plus Color Table.
column
A vertical arrangement of characters or other expressions. Contrast with row.
concatenate
To link two or more datasets into a single dataset, generally so the data from one precedes the
data from the next in the combined dataset.
conformable
An unbroken stratigraphic sequence in which the layers have been formed under conditions of
uninterrupted deposition.
conformal map projection
A map projection that preserves the shape of small areas on the surface of a globe when they
are projected onto a plane. All angles around any point are correctly preserved.
conic map projection
A map projection that is equivalent to projecting geographic latitude and longitude lines onto
a cone or cones, tangent to or intersecting the surface of a spheroid, then unfolding the cone to
a plane. Generally employed for mapping mid-latitude areas.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
910
Landmark
constant
A fixed or invariable value or data item.
contour interval
The difference in value between two adjacent contour lines. Generally, the contour interval is
constant across a map; however, the interval may be decreased in flat areas or increased in
high-slope areas to maintain a fairly uniform density of contours across a map.
contour line
A line separating all points that are higher than the contour value from points of lower value.
Alternatively, the contour line is the locus of all points on the surface having the same value as
the contour value. Computer drawn contours are approximations of true contours. They are
produced by computing closely spaced points along the true contour and connecting them by
line segments.
control grid
An existing grid that is used to control how a new grid is generated. In gridding, the most
frequent uses of control grids are to: 1) default the gridding control parameters for the new
grid to match those of the control grid, 2) limit gridding to locations where the control grid is
null, or 3) limit gridding to locations where the control grid is not null. Control grids also
provide the second and third functions during filtering.
control points
Known points on a surface that are used to control the interpretation of the surface. Control
points minimally contain x,y,z information, where x,y is the horizontal location of some
measured information represented by z such as depth or time values. Control point files can
also contain other Z values, textual descriptions about the data, symbol codes, and other types
of measured information. Control point files are used to store well data, seismic data, and other
types of data that are recorded at discrete locations. A typical control point file may be of the
form
X, Y, symbol, API, top 1, top 2
where symbol denotes the symbol used to spot the well on a map, API is a text string, and top
1 and top 2 are subsea elevations.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
911
Landmark
conversion factors
Scale factors used to convert one set of units to another. The following is a table of useful scale
factors for mapping work.
Starting Units
Scale Factor
Converted Units
meters
39.37
inches
meters
3.280833
feet
feet
0.3048006
meters
kilometers
0.6213699
statute miles
statute miles
1.609347
kilometers
nautical miles
6076.103
feet
nautical miles
1.851999
kilometers
square feet
2.295684E-5
acres
square miles
640
acres
square miles
2.589998
sq. kilometers
hectare
2.471
acres
square kilometers
100
hectares
cubic feet
7.4805
U.S. gallons
cubic feet
2.295684E-5
acre feet
cubic feet
5.61
barrels
barrels
0.15899
cubic meters
barrels
42
U.S. gallons
acre feet
7758
barrels
acre feet
1233.5
cubic meters
coordinates
Numbers that identify a location on the display.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
912
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Glossary
913
Landmark
data field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store numeric or textual data. Data fields are
qualified by the type of information in the field, the position of the field within the data record,
the range of values for information stored in the field, and the null value for the data in the
field. The position of a specific data field must be the same for all records in a dataset.
data record
The grouping of all data fields for each independent item (control point, vertex, fault trace
point, etc.) in a specified order. The format (contents and order) of the data record is defined
by the specifications for each data field in the record.
data reduction
The process of removing unnecessary or redundant data from the dataset.
dataset
A collection of data records. Typical mapping datasets include x,y,z control point data, grids,
polygons, profiles, fault traces, and map text.
datum (datum level)
A reference used to make other measurements, such as an elevation, typically sea level, used
as a reference for determining elevations in a dataset.
decimation
A controlled deletion of data entities or posted attributes. For example, the Post Seismic Data
(New) process under Add Features, Post Data/Grids allows for decimation of shotpoints,
shotpoint labels, and Z-Attribute labels. Seismic lines can be selectively eliminated from 3D
seismic surveys.
default value
Any automatically assigned value/answer to a process control question. It is displayed on the
screen in the response field for the parameter or question to which it applies. Default values
are appropriate for many standard mapping tasks. Static default values are the same from run
to run. Dynamic default values depend on other parameters, processing steps, process results,
or combinations of these. Default values are sometimes called defaults or standard values.
delimiters
Key names (lease or part of lease), or numbers (part or all of API number or well number) that
limit the number of wells retrieved during a well search.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
914
Landmark
derivative map
A map of one of the derivatives of a surface, usually the second vertical derivative of a
potential surface. The objective of a derivative map is to areally emphasize small anomalies.
dialog
In an interactive system, a series of interrelated inquires and responses. A dialog is composed
of programs and panels that together provide an interaction between the computer and the user
of that application.
dialog manager (dm)
The dialog manager provides the interface between the user dialog boxes and the applications.
digitize
The process of converting documents (such as maps or graphs) into datasets for mapping. For
example, to digitize contours, a map is taped to a digitizer and registered, then each curve is
followed manually with a special stylus or a cross hair device. The path the stylus follows is
automatically converted into x,y locations. Additional information is entered at a keyboard,
such as Z values or text.
dip
The angle of inclination from the horizontal of any planar surface. True dip or full dip is
measured at 90 degrees from the strike of the surface. Measurement at any other angle is
apparent dip. The term dip normally refers to true dip.
dip vector
An arrow on a map pointing in the direction of the dip. The length of the arrow may be
proportional to the magnitude of the dip.
display area
The part of the terminal screen used to show the picture.
display attribute
A particular property that is assigned to all or part of a display; for example, low intensity,
green color, and blinking.
downdip
The direction of the surface dip vector from higher to lower surface values.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
915
Landmark
downlap
Downdip termination of strata against an unconformity at the base of a depositional unit. In
modeling downlap, you would use one of the Merge operations.
downward continuation
The process of inferring the shape of a deep surface using the more reliable shape of a shallow
surface and the nature of the interval between the two surfaces.
drift
The deviation of a borehole from the vertical. The drift angle is the angle between the borehole
axis and the vertical; the drift azimuth is the angle between a vertical plane through the
borehole and north.
dual grid operations
Mathematical operations such as addition, multiplication, etc. that can be performed on two
grids to create a grid.
dynamic
Occurring at the time of execution.
editor
A Z-MAP Plus task used to edit data or text.
element
A single member of an array.
engineering units
The units for measuring the source data, such as feet, meters, miles, or seconds. Engineering
units are not plotter units or other special units used by a computer program.
equatorial projection
Any cylindrical map projection with the polar axis vertical and the center point at the equator.
The Mercator Projection is the most well known example.
exaggeration
1) The use of a vertical scale that is larger than the horizontal scale to make subtle structural
detail more evident. 2) The ratio of the vertical to horizontal scale factors in the aspect ratio.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
916
Landmark
extrapolate
A mathematical procedure to estimate surface values in areas beyond the spatial limits of the
data. How the data are extrapolated is dependent on the specific algorithm chosen to model the
data.
exploration mapping
The use of mapping procedures in the search for commercial deposits of useful minerals,
hydrocarbons, geothermal sources, etc.
extension
The part of a file name that follows the last period and is used by Z-MAP Plus when filtering
for a type of file at the system level.
external file assignment
The process IBM/MVS systems use to attach master files (.MFDs) before entering the specific
Landmark geological software program.
facies
The composite properties of a sedimentary rock that relate to the conditions of its origin and
distinguish it in relationship to adjacent rock within a stratigraphic unit.
fault
A displacement of rocks along a shear surface. The surface along which the displacement
occurs is the fault face or fault plane. The dip of the fault face is the angle it makes with the
horizontal. The fault throw is the vertical displacement of a surface across the fault face. The
heave is the horizontal separation of a surface across the fault. The trace of the fault is the
curve formed by the intersection of the fault face and the surface that is faulted. The fault zone
on any surface is the area enclosed by the fault trace. See merge operations.
fault data
A data file type, signified with the FALT extension, that graphically represents a fault.
field
On a panel, a specific input, output, or test area used for a particular named data item.
filtering
A mathematical process to remove certain types of surface information from a gridded
surface. In many applications, filters are used to smooth a surface, which is equivalent to
removing rough character. Filters can also be designed to remove trends and leave the local
variation. In general, grid filters are implemented by convolving the grid with a set of weights.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
917
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Glossary
918
Landmark
function pool
A collection of variables that are known only within the currently active function. See also
profile pool, shared pool, and variable.
geodetic coordinates
The quantities that define the horizontal position of a point on a spheroid with respect to a
specific geodetic datum. This datum is usually expressed as latitude and longitude. The
elevation of a point is also a geodetic coordinate and may be referred to as a height above sea
level.
geoid
The undisturbed, mean sea level equipotential surface to which the direction of gravity is
everywhere perpendicular. An oblate ellipsoid (spheroid) that approximates the geoid is the
reference for geodetic latitude determinations.
gradient vector
A vector on a surface that always points in the direction of most rapid increase. The gradient
vector is composed of two components: the slope in the X direction and slope in the Y
direction. The magnitude of the gradient vector is the square root of the sum of the two
squared slopes. The direction of the gradient vector is the arc tangent to the ratio of the
Y-slope to the X-slope. The gradient vector can also be expressed in terms of the dip angle and
the direction of dip. (Note: The direction of dip is at right angles to the strike angle.) The
magnitude of the gradient vector is the tangent of the dip angle and the direction of the
gradient vector is the direction of dip.
graphics file
A disk file that contains individual picture files. Also referred to as a ZGF (the graphics file
extension) and as a Z-MAP graphics file.
graphics primitives
The lines, text, symbols, and polygons used to generate a feature. See also logical graphics
block.
grid
A set of surface values located at the intersections of grid lines that span a rectangular area and
that run parallel to the sides of the rectangle. The grid line spacing is called the grid increment.
Usually the increment is constant across the entire grid. The grid line intersections are called
grid nodes. The smallest areas enclosed by grid lines are called grid cells. The surface values
of a grid are called grid values. Since the grid covers a rectangle, the grid limits are given by
the coordinates of the lower left and upper right corners of the area.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
919
Landmark
gridding
The mathematical process used to estimate values at the grid nodes from control points,
digitized contours, shotpoints, etc. The result of gridding is a grid.
grid increment ticks
See reference crosses.
hachured line
A line or curve such as a contour formed by drawing short and equally spaced line segments
perpendicular to the curve. The line segments are typically about 0.1 inch long and 0.5 inch
apart. Hachured contours are used to indicate the dip direction, closed low areas, elevated
areas, or steep slopes depending on the conventions established for the map.
hardcopy
A paper or other tangible media copy of a map or other types of graphic products as opposed
to an image of the map on a graphics screen.
header
Information that is inserted at the beginning of a dataset to identify the data and assist in
loading the data into the computer program.
herringbone
A systematic distortion in contours made from roughly parallel seismic or flight line data. The
distortion is caused when a line is mislocated or has a systematic bias relative to the other
lines. The result is a herringbone pattern in the contours as they bend away from their
predictable trend to cross the corrupted line.
hexadecimal code
A numeric code with a base of 16, in which the digits 0 through 9 and the letters A through F
represent the numbers.
horizon
The surface at the intersection of two different rock layers or a surface associated with a
seismic reflection when the reflector covers a large area.
hydrocarbon saturation
The fraction of the pore volume filled with hydrocarbons as opposed to water saturation.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
920
Landmark
inclination
The angle between a surface and the horizontal. See dip.
index map
A reference map, usually of a large scale, showing the location of another small-scale map. An
index map is frequently drawn in the margin of a small-scale map near the map title block.
initial dip
The slope angle of bedding surfaces at deposition.
input file name
Name given a file that contains data to be entered into a process such as the gridding task.
interactive mode
A mode for executing computer programs where the operator must respond immediately to
requests for information and decisions in the order they are presented by the program.
Operator responses and instructions are entered at a computer keyboard.
Contrast with batch mode.
interpolation
A mathematical process for estimating surface values at locations where the surface values are
not known. The estimates are made from known data, such as control point datasets. Grids are
produced by interpolating control points. The interpolation procedure employed to grid a
dataset should be selected to best fit the characteristics of the data and the specific application.
inverse projection
A mathematical scheme for converting northing and easting coordinates into latitude and
longitude coordinates.
irreducible water saturation
The fraction of the pore volume occupied by water in a reservoir at maximum hydrocarbon
saturation.
isochore
1) The vertical thickness of a rock unit. 2) A contour map of vertical thickness for a rock unit.
isochron
1) The difference of two time horizons. 2) A contour map of the reflection time differences for
two time horizons.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
921
Landmark
isofacies map
A map that uses pattern symbols to show areas of distributions of a rock type, facies, or other
areally distributed features.
isogram
A contour line.
isolith
A line connecting points of similar lithology.
isopach
1) The stratigraphic thickness of a rock unit (measured perpendicular to the top and base of a
unit). Isopach thickness is less than or equal to isochore thickness. 2) A contour map of
stratigraphic thickness for a rock unit.
iteration
The repeated execution of a sequence of operations. Some mapping algorithms such as
filtering iterate or repeat a sequence of steps to produce their results.
justify
To align characters horizontally to fit the positioning constraints of a required format.
kelly bushing (k.b. or KB)
A part of a rotary drilling rig that is near the top of a well. The elevation at the top of the
bushing is used as the datum for well logs, depths and other measurements.
Lambert azimuthal equal area projection
An azimuthal map projection that places the pole of the projection at the center of the map.
The great circles radiate from the center of the projection. As the name states this map
projection produces maps where the areas are equally proportioned.
Lambert conformal conic projection
A map projection where the longitude lines are straight lines that meet at a common point
outside the map. Latitude lines are arcs or circles that have the common point as their center.
The meridian and parallels intersect at right angles and angles on the earth are correctly
represented. Used to map elongated areas and for navigational applications.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
922
Landmark
kriging
A geostatistical method of modeling a surface that takes into account the inherent variability in
the data being mapped. According to Jones, Hamilton, and Johnson, Kriging is a complex
weighted average that takes into account spatial relationships between data points and from
them to the grid node.
latitude
The distance measured north or south of the Equator. Latitude is usually expressed in degrees
ranging from 0 at the Equator to 90 degrees at the North Pole and 90 degrees at the South
Pole.
least squares fit
An approximation of a set of data such that the sum of the squared deviations between the
approximation and the data is minimized.
library
A collection of related files.
line of section
A map line indicating the location of a profile or cross section.
line resampling
1) Creates points at regular intervals along the lines in a dataset.
2) Through attribute propagation, finds the value for a given field of an intermediate point by
using the known values of the points on either side.
lithofacies map
A map showing the variation in some property of a rock unit. Examples include percent of an
element or fossil in a given geologic unit.
logical graphics blocks (LGB)
Graphics primitives that have been grouped into many features, such as contours, seismic
lines, borders, etc. Also referred to throughout Landmark geological products interchangeably
as: picture feature, picture segment, graphics feature.
longitude
The distance measured east or west from the Central Meridian. Longitude is usually expressed
in degrees ranging from 0 at the Central Meridian to 180 degrees east or 180 degrees west.
The central meridian is an internationally recognized line that passes through Greenwich,
England.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
923
Landmark
magnetic declination
The angle between magnetic and geographic meridians.
magnetic meridian
At any point, the direction of the horizontal component of the earths magnetic field.
map grid
Geographic grid lines that are drawn on a map to provide spatial references for other map
features. Map grid lines can be latitude and longitude lines, northing and easting lines, or other
types of geographic grids.
map projection
A mathematical procedure for mapping latitude and longitude grid lines on the surface of the
earth onto a plane surface, such as a map that enables the systematic transformation of
spherical coordinates into planar coordinates and vice versa.
map scale
The ratio of the distance between any two points on the map to the distance between the same
two points on the earth. Map scales are expressed as 1:2000, 1:10000, etc.
map symbol
See symbol.
masking grid
See control grid.
master file
A disk file that contains a collection of datasets. Master files are used by Landmark geological
mapping systems and often have the extension .MFD.
maximum contour level
The largest contour value found in a mappable dataset.
mean value
The average of all data values. Null values are not included in the mean.
menu
A list of options that are displayed by a computer program.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
924
Landmark
Mercator projection
A cylindrical type of conformal map projection where meridian lines are parallel to the
equator line and are spaced according to their distance apart at the equator. The latitude lines
are parallel to the equator. This is a conformal map projection, thereby maintaining the true
shape of the land masses. It is more often employed when mapping large areas.
merge operations
A general class of dual grid operations that act to combine intersecting and sometimes
unrelated surfaces, such as unconformities, onlap, faults, etc. The hybrid surface resulting
from such a combination usually serves to define a geologically distinct body of rock. The
operations involved are MIN, MAX, CMIN, CMAX, MERGE LOW and MERGE HIGH. See
the Operations section in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual to determine which operation
best fits the specific circumstances.
meridian
A longitude line. See longitude.
message
A comment that provides special information to the user. It may alert the user about what to
expect next, confirm that a user-requested action is in progress, or provide a report of some
error condition.
metafile
A special graphics file that is used to drive various output devices (i.e., plotter, monitor).
minimum contour level
The smallest contour value found within a set of mappable Z-values.
missing value
See null value and ZNON.
mis-tie
The difference of values at identical points on intersecting seismic lines.
modeling
The use of computer programs and available data to develop a more complete understanding
of the data source. For example, a reservoir model can be constructed from seismic and well
data to estimate reserves or predict future production.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
925
Landmark
modulation
A process of varying a graphics feature to reflect a variation in the value of a field. Modulation
tables for symbol and label size and symbol color can be built using Post Seismic Data (New).
NADCON
A geodetic conversion process. A geodetic datum is a direct measurement of the earths
surface in a given geographical area. The NADCON acronym stands for North American
Datum Conversion. NADCON is currently available in Z-MAP Plus as a macro. NAD27 was
the reference system of measurement for latitude/longitude coordinates in North America.
Improvements in measurement equipment and techniques have resulted in the development of
a new datum for North America, NAD83. NADCON allows for conversion in either direction
between NAD27 and NAD83.
negative volume
Volume bounded by a surface and a datum plane when the surface is below the datum.
Negative volume is a measure of the amount of fill required in a cut and fill computation.
See positive volume and net volume.
net volume
The difference between positive and negative volumes.
normalization
A means of transforming from one value range to another using linear regression techniques.
notation
A set of symbols and rules for their use, for the representation of data.
null area
That portion of the gridded area where valid grid values were not computed, generally because
of insufficient data.
null value
A special number that is encoded in the place of Z-values to indicate that the Z-values are
missing or unknown. The null value must be different than any possible Z-value it replaces.
Typical null values are 999, 9999, 1.0E+30, etc. Null values are used to indicate areas where
grid values cannot be determined and when Z-values in a control point dataset are missing.
Landmark geological products call the null value ZNON.
numeric character
A digit from 0 to 9.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
926
Landmark
oblique projection
A conformal map projection that is centered on either the equator or a pole.
offset
The number of measuring units from a starting point in a record or other area to some other
point.
onlap
Successive landward termination of strata at the base of a depositional unit. In modeling onlap,
you would use one of the Merge operations. See also baselap.
operand
An entity to which an operation is applied; that which is operated upon. An operand is usually
identified by an address part of an instruction.
operations
Mathematical or logical (Boolean) operations that are performed on grids or other types of
datasets. See dual grid operations and single grid operations.
output dataset
The dataset produced by gridding or some of the other mathematical operations.
overlay
The process of taking a set of graphics, such as contours, and superimposing them onto
another set, such as a map.
pad
To fill a field with dummy data, usually zeros or blanks. Padding is usually performed with
zeros at the left of a numeric field and with blanks at the right of an alphanumeric field.
paleo section
A cross section showing attitudes of bedding and structure as it is assumed to have been at
some past time. The cross section may have been constructed by flattening one of the
structures and applying the same shifts to deeper structures.
parallel
A latitude line. See latitude.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
927
Landmark
parameter
A number, text string, or other information that is required to control a process. Parameters are
the values assigned to variables within a computer program.
perspective display
A 3D display of a surface that is geometrically similar to how the surface would appear if it
could be photographed. The display is constructed relative to a specified viewing point that
must be some distance from the surface just as a camera must be away from the surface to
make a photograph. The dimensions of surface features are decreased with distance from the
viewing point.
picture
A generic term for a map, cross section, or other type of display that can be produced by a
mapping system. A picture is a named collection of graphic features. It can be recalled by its
name, displayed and edited.
planimeter
A mechanical or digital instrument used to compute areas and volumes of mapped features
manually. The instrument consists of a small wheel and a counter. Revolutions are converted
directly into distances when the wheel follows a contour or other closed figure.
plotter units
Units of distance used to specify plotting locations as opposed to actual data units. Most
plotters manufactured in the United States use inches, while most foreign plotters use
centimeters. The plotter units are given relative to the lower left corner of the picture and
include space for map margins.
point to point
Method of selecting wells to be displayed on a cross section. User is required to pick (one at a
time) the desired wells.
polygon
A closed planar figure with three or more sides. Polygons are used to specify property
ownership boundaries, areas where special grid operations such as grid blanking are to be
performed, the horizontal limits for volume calculations, and other map data.
pool
A storage place for names and values of variables.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
928
Landmark
porosity
Pore volume per gross volume of rock. Porosity is determined from cores or from neutron or
resistivity logs.
positive volume
The volume formed between a surface and a datum plane when the surface is above the datum.
Generally the volume is limited to a bounded area.
posting data
Placing data on a map on its correct geographic position. In some programs, posting data is
referred to as spotting data. See spotting data for additional information.
process window
A computer terminal screen display used to list process control parameters and their current
values or processing options. The Z-MAP Plus process window is known as the Status/Report
window.
profile
A file stored on disk that contains variable names and values to be used in future Dialog
Manager sessions.
profile pool
A collection of variables that are contained in the application profile and automatically
retained from one session to another for the user. See also function pool, shared pool, and
variable.
projection
A planar representation of the Earth's surface made by passing lines from points on the surface
to the intersection with the plane.
prompt
In an interactive program, a message from the program that requires a response from the
operator. The type of response should be evident from the message.
range
1) The interval between two numbers or coordinates. 2) The designation for the north-south
sections of a township. The north-south boundary between townships is called a range line.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
929
Landmark
record
A logical set of data for one item in a dataset. Each record is partitioned into two or more data
fields, all records within the dataset must have the same number of fields, and all records must
have their fields in the same order. When the records are constructed, all fields must contain
their appropriate values or the null value.
reference crosses
Also called grid increment ticks. Crosses (+) that are drawn on a map so that it can be overlaid
and aligned with other maps. Reference crosses are usually drawn at the intersections of major
geographic grid lines. They are drawn large enough (approximately 1 inch) to be distinguished
from other types of posted data.
reference spheroid
A theoretical figure whose dimensions loosely approach the dimensions of a geoid.
refinement passes
Recalculation passes on a grid that have the effect of smoothing contours. The calculation
interval becomes smaller and smaller with an increasing number of passes and the processing
time increases.
reserved word
A word that is defined in a programming language for a special purpose, and that must not
appear as a user-declared identifier.
residual
The small scale regional variation of a surface. The residual is used to locate important surface
detail that might be obscured by large scale surface trends. See trend analysis.
return code
A value that indicates the outcome of preceding instructions.
row
A horizontal arrangement of characters or other expressions. Contrast with column.
scalar
A quantity characterized by a single number. Contrast with array.
scaling factor
A multiplicative factor used to alter the values of a specific curve.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
930
Landmark
scratch file
A disk file that is automatically attached to each Z-MAP Plus program run. All intermediate
files created during the run are stored on the scratch file and deleted when you terminate the
run, unless you specify otherwise.
scrolling
In computer graphics, vertically or horizontally moving a display image in a manner such that
new data appears at one edge as old data disappears on the opposite edge.
search radius
The radius of the data collection circle that is constructed around each grid node during
gridding. The circle defines the area from which data can be collected to be used to interpolate
the grid value. Data outside the circle are not used to interpolate the grid value.
selection panel
A type of panel that presents a list of options (a menu) to the user, who must then make a
selection to proceed in the dialog.
semi-variogram
The statistical tool employed by the gridding method called Kriging. The semi-variogram
relates variation to distance. The semi-variogram assumes that we expect nearby data points
on a surface to be more similar than distant points.
set points
Positions on the display marked by the user using function keys [F9] and [F10]. These
positions are marked to provide reference points for some subsequent function to be
performed by the SDF Program.
shared pool
A collection of variables accessible to different functions belonging to the same application.
See also function pool, profile pool, and variable.
shotpoint (SP)
For mapping purposes, the shotpoint is the location where seismic reflection times are
recorded.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
931
Landmark
spotting data
The process of drawing data locations and data values on a map. The dataset can be either grid
or control point data. The data locations are indicated by special centered symbols while data
values are written in designated locations around the symbol. The data values may be numeric
or text strings. See posting data.
standard cross section
One of three available cross-section types. The standard cross-section display has true relative
horizontal and vertical scales, with two user-selected log curves. Logs may be hung either
structurally or stratigraphically. Wells not falling exactly on the line of section are projected in
at right angles.
standard deviation
The square root of the variance.
strike
The direction of a contour of a surface; the horizontal direction at right angles to the dip.
structure
1) The general disposition, attitude, arrangement, or relative position of the rock masses of an
area. 2) Any physical arrangement of rocks such as an anticline that may involve the
accumulation of oil or gas. 3) A subsurface area with a closed high.
substitute American Petroleum Institute number (API number)
A number to be used as the unique identifier for cataloging information when the real API # is
not available.
support data
Frequently used in conjunction with control points or grids, support data includes fault traces,
polygons, digitized curves, etc.
symbol
One of 964 different graphics symbols that can be drawn on a map at designated x,y locations.
The symbols are constructed so their centers are positioned at x,y. Symbols range in graphic
complexity from a simple plus sign to complex combinations of shaded circles and lines. The
different designs are used to indicate different types of data or states of the data. Any of the
symbols can be used to spot a dataset.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
932
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Glossary
933
Landmark
unique identifier
A number (the API number or its last 5 digits) used to establish the uniqueness of a well.
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)
An internationally recognized map projection with the following attributes. The globe is
divided into sixty 6-degree zones starting at 180 degrees and increasing towards the east (i.e.,
zone 1 extends from 180 degrees west to 174 degrees west). The center of the zone (177
degrees for zone 1) is the line of tangency for the projection. By mathematically joining the
adjacent zones a large area may be mapped with a minimum of distortion. The UTM
projection is used to map areas between 84 degrees N and 80 degrees S.
unwindow one level
The opposite of window. The display is restored to the viewing window that was selected prior
to the current window. Window may be used to make progressively smaller viewing windows.
Unwindow One Level steps backward by restoring the viewing windows in the reverse order
they were selected. See window.
value to shift
The amount to be added or subtracted from a curve. Results in an overall shift of the curve
values.
variable
A character or group of characters that refers to a value in a computer program; a quantity that
can assume any of a given set of values.
variance
The average of the squared distances from the data values to the mean of the data values.
When the variance is small relative to the mean then the data are clustered around the mean
value. When the variance is large, the data are scattered away from the mean.
vertex
An x,y point where two line segments of a digitized curve join.
volumetrics
A mathematical procedure for computing the volume between two surfaces. The volumetrics
module also computes planar and surface areas.
water saturation
See irreducible water saturation.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
934
Landmark
weighting function
A mathematical equation that is used in gridding to decrease the significance of control point
data with increasing distance from the grid node being interpolated. The justification for a
weighting function is that the similarity in surface characteristics at any two arbitrary points
typically decreases with increasing distance between the points. Weighting function equations
are designed to approximate the way that similarity decreases.
wildcard
A designated character such as * or % used to set up a search or a mask. Usually the wildcard
is used in the middle or at the end of a partial string. For example, AUS* searches for any
character string beginning with AUS. Wildcards are used in Z-MAP Plus to construct textual
masks for selective posting, as well as for file extensions and directory path definitions.
window
1) A rectangular portion of a graphics display that is extracted from the current display and
enlarged to the full viewing area of the display. Windows are used to examine portions of a
map or other type of graphic display in greater detail. A window is defined by using the
graphics cursor to mark two opposite corners of the rectangle. The terms windows and zoom
windows are functionally the same. 2) A rectangular area that is used to extract a subset of a
dataset by selecting only the data located in the window. See unwindow one level.
worm's eye map
A map showing the view one would have looking up at the bottom of a surface. Also a map
depicting progressive transgressions or sediment overlap.
X-coordinate
1) The horizontal (left-right or east-west) component of a rectangular cartesian coordinate
system used in mapping. The x coordinate increases to the right or the east. 2) The first
component of a 3-dimensional rectangular system.
X-field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store the x coordinate. See data field.
Y-coordinate
1) The vertical (up-down or north-south) component of a 2-dimensional rectangular cartesian
coordinate system. The y coordinate increases to the north. 2) The second component of a
3-dimensional rectangular system.
Y-field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store the y coordinate. See data field.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
935
Landmark
Z-field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store a Z-value. See data field.
ZNON
A name for the null value. See null value.
zoom
The process of displaying a small area of a picture so that small features are made visible. See
window and unwindow one level.
Z-value
1) The third component of a 3-dimensional coordinate system of x,y,z points.
2) A measured or computed value for a surface at a corresponding x,y location. Z-value is used
to refer to grid values or the numeric data components in control point datasets. Measured or
computed values of elevation, thickness, porosity, pressure, and seismic time are typical
Z-values.
ZGF
Z-MAP Graphics File. See graphics file.
R2003.12.0
Glossary
936
Landmark
Index
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Numerics
2D Seismic option (Features menu) 321-337
3D Fishnet Plot option (Features menu) 246
3D Seismic option (Features menu) 338-362
3D Time-to-Depth Conversion macro
shown on menu 740
3D Velocity Grid (Time Slice) macro
shown on menu 740
A
ABS (absolute value) function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
adding
AOI/projection information 369
DLS data (Create & Post) 366
DLS data (Township/Section/Range) 367
DLS/NTS lines/labels on a map 365
DLS/NTS survey data 365
fault dip symbols 670
fields (Data Operations) 633
grid node symbols/values 275-276
lines to map 252-270
logo to title block 899
NTS data (Post National Topo) 368
NTS data to map 366
points to lines (Line Resampling) 675
polygons to map 277-279
text to map 271-274
Advanced tab
Point Gridding Plus window 413
A-format, defined 905
Albers Equal Area projections
Blue Marble 889
Z-MAP Plus 885
Albers projection, defined 905
R2003.12.0
algorithms
also see: gridding algorithms
Carter-Good Iterative Depth 664, 665
Douglas Poiker (curve thinning) 706
Extended Fault Contouring 238
Profile Contouring 238
Williams (curve-scanning) 706
alias, defined 905
Altitude Of Sun setting
Shaded Relief dialog box 248
Always On Top option (System Window) 773
American Petroleum Institute (API)
substitute numbers defined 932
well number defined 906
American Polyconic projections
Z-MAP Plus 885
Antilog Base 10 (from Data) operation 569
Antilog Base 10 (from Grid) operation 548
antilogarithm see: Antilog Base 10
AOI
adding (Projection Box option) 369
definition 907
DLS/NTS maps 364
resetting with resample grid 552
source for dual grid 548
specifying AOI type for new map 36
specifying for new map (from file data) 37
specifying for new map (from user input) 38
Append X-Y to Seismic Time File
Operations: Geophysical Operations 647
area of interest see: AOI
Area/Depth Plot option
used in volumetrics 767
areas
Edit Area dialog box 173
Scale Area option 663
Scale/Bias Line or Area operation 662
volume scale 753
Index
937
Landmark
ASCII data
creating from ZGF data 74
exporting grids to OpenWorks 863
File menu options, overview 31
importing .DAT file (File menu) 120
importing to MFD/OpenWorks 860-864
limitations of import file format 118
listing printing formats (File: Info) 97
previewing before importing 123
Save As option (File menu) 70
workflow for importing 117
ATAN (arctangent) function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 541
attaching
Attach MFDs icon 48
Attach ZGFs icon 49
new ZGF attached automatically 34
X,Y values to seismic time file 647
attributes
color assignments 804
color attribute of primitives 208
modeling with Trendform Gridding 475
propagating (Line Resampling) 710
Auto Display option
redrawing display automatically 383
auxiliary files for Z-MAP Plus 901
Azimuth Of Sun setting
Shaded Relief dialog box 248
azimuthal projections
Azimuthal Equal Area (Blue Marble) 889
Azimuthal Equal Area (Polar Aspect - Blue
Marble) 889
Azimuthal Equidistant (Blue Marble) 889
Azimuthal Equidistant (Polar Aspect - Blue
Marble) 890
Azimuthal Gnomic (Z-MAP) 884
Azimuthal Orthographic (Z-MAP) 884
Azimuthal Stereographic (Z-MAP) 884
Orthographic (Blue Marble) 891
R2003.12.0
B
back interpolation
Back Interpolation (Operations) 677-680
summary 676
using in Calculator 538
background display color
setting as black/white 778
Balancer option (Operations: Faults) 668
base plane value
Volumetrics dialog box 757
baselapping surface intersections
Surface Intersection operation 735
baseline files
constructing a cross section 226
Basemap Features dialog box 223-225
activating tabs/fields 223
buttons 225
Basemap option (File: New): workflow 35
basemaps see: maps
bathymetric surveys
using in Line Gridding 487
Bias (Trend) ratio: Point Gridding Plus 415
BIAS function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
Bias mode
biasing a line/area 663
bifurcations
Balancer option (Faults) 668
Biharmonic filters
described (Point Gridding) 445
shown in flexing workflow 520
template described 521
using in Contour Gridding 461, 485
using in Flexing 524
using in Line Gridding 497
using in Point Gridding Plus 413
Bipolar Oblique Conic Conformal projections
Z-MAP Plus 886
Index
938
Landmark
blanking
Blank Data (Data Operations) 570-572
Blank Grid (Grid Operations) 549-551
definition 908
inside/outside polygon 572
BLANKMAX function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 541
BLANKMIN function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 541
block averaging (Trend Fit Gridding) 506
Blue Marble map projections 888-892
Bonne projections (Blue Marble) 890
Boolean Grid (Modeling) 515
briefly described 386
borders
adding to map/picture 223
Bounded Range gridding algorithm
Boundary Tolerance parameter 435
Compression Factor parameter 435
Point Gridding 434
Point Gridding Plus 406
Break & Extend option (Data Editor) 189
brightness grids
Shaded Relief dialog box 247
C
Calculate Fault Fields (Operations: Faults)
669-670
Calculator (Operations menu) 536-538
Equations/Input panels illustrated 537
saving equation as ZEQ file 538
Single Grid Operations (listed) 541
using (basic steps) 538
Calculator icon 536
Canadian surveys 363-368
CARM (Computer Aided Reservoir
Management) 743-770
Carter-Good Iterative Depth (IDA) algorithm
Normalized Interval Velocity Data 664
Normalized Interval Velocity Grid 665
Cartesian coordinate system
using for new map AOI type 36
R2003.12.0
cartographic features
reducing points (Line Generalization) 704
cartographic operations 676
cartographic projections
setting up a projection 871-896
Cassini-Soldner projections
Blue Marble 888
Z-MAP Plus 886
CEIL function
Single Data Operations 562
centerline faults
converting from polygon 398
Profiler option (profiling attributes) 673
using in Point Gridding Plus 396
centerlines
moving with Migrator option 671
central meridian
False Easting (projection parameters) 43
map projection setting 43
CGM files
briefly defined 909
printing 131-139
saving 136
Change Internal MFD Name macro
shown on menu 740
CLIPMAX function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 541
CLIPMIN function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 541
clipping
definition 910
extending seismic lines over border 355
Close Polygons in Vertex File macro
shown on menu 740
closed polygons
using in Profiler 673
Closest Point gridding algorithm
Point Gridding 434
Point Gridding Plus 405
Trendform Gridding 473
closing
MFDs 48
ZGF 49
CNTR files see: contour files
Index
939
Landmark
codes
data field types 787
data file type codes 785
State Plane projection 865
Color Scale option (Features)
adding color scale bar to map 251
Color Table dialog box 808-826
Edit Color Table dialog box 212
color table files
accessible in File Manager 60
creating 216
loading 216
required extensions for file names 115
color tables
copying colors 214
defining spread (Interpolate option) 214
directory paths/file naming conventions 115
displaying 209
displaying all colors 214
effect: overlaying pictures (ZGF Viewer) 235
loading existing (Read option) 216
saving as files 216
saving changes 217
setting RGB/HLS mode 213
Color-filled Border macro
shown on menu 739
colorfilled contours
Color-filled Contour Intervals macro 739
Curve Drawing & Labeling Parameters 245
colors
color index defined 804
Color Indices option 218
Color Table option 209-217
Curve Drawing & Labeling Parameters 245
Delete Fill Area (Graphics Editor) 173
Edit Area dialog box 173
Edit Lines dialog box 167
Edit Markers dialog box 169
Edit Text dialog box 165
editing 803-826
editing color index 213
editing indexes in ASCII 81
editing text 166
Graphics Background mode 778
R2003.12.0
colors continued
overview 208
updating dynamically/on demand 217
variation of plotter color 809
COLORWHEEL.ZGF, described 809
commenting
comment symbols (import/export files) 830
out log file lines 774
compaction equation
Normalized Interval Velocity Data 665
Normalized Interval Velocity Grid 666
compass orientation
calculating in DIPAZM function 542
complex text, illustrated 801
compressing
Compress menu (File) 153-156
MFDs 153
ZGF/MFD in File Manager 65
ZGFs 155
Compression Factor parameter
Isopach/Bounded Range algorithms 435
Computer Graphics Metafiles see: CGM files
computing grid area/volume see: Volumetrics
concatenating
Concatenation option (Merge Data) 621
concave hulls
using to initialize grid node values 390-391
console window
switch to iconify when macro executes 779
constant grids
Constant Grid modeling 516
Constant Grid modeling, described 386
constants
setting nodes to constants (CLIPMIN) 541
Contour (Old) option (Features) 240-245
contour files
creating 198
creating a subset of 575
editing (Contours, Faults, Lines option) 185
editing data (Data Editor) 174
reducing file size (Line Generalization) 705
Contour Gridding 451-466
briefly described 385
Extrapolation Distance parameter 392
purpose of flexing described 393
Index
940
Landmark
contour labels
Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters
dialog box 244
contour levels
constraints (Contour Gridding) 463
contour maps
adding perspective with 3D fishnet 246
Contour Map macros (on menu) 738
creating 238-251
Contour To Grid macro
Regrid option (Data Editor) 201
Contouring icon 238
Contouring options (Features menu) 238-251
Contour option 239-240
contours
adding lines to 252-270
Break & Extend option 189
breaking a line into parts 187
creating data file 198
Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters
dialog box 244
curve sampling density rates 242
Edit Lines dialog box 167
editing (Contours, Faults, Lines option) 185
extending lines 188
file structure 852
removing wobble in Line Gridding 499
Reshape Contours option 185
Shaded Relief dialog box 247
using a profile to control 465
using to blank grids 550
control grids 911
using to initialize grid nodes 389
control point files
adding fields with IDA 664
Area Edit option 176
Create Data option 198
Create Point option (Data Editor) 179
editing data 175
editing data (Data Editor) 174
output by Migration/Reverse Migration 649
R2003.12.0
Index
941
Landmark
CPS-1 files
converting MFD data to 73
File menu options, overview 31
importing to MFD 131
listing contents of SAVE file 107
Create a new Z-FIELD dialog box
Migration, Reverse Migration 652
creating
color table file 216
cross section 45-47
map 34-44
map with DLS data 366
map with DLS/NTS AOI 364
map with NTS data 366
MFD 33
session 32
ZGF 34
Cross Section Features dialog box 226-232
cross section files
creating a subset of 575
reducing file size (Line Generalization) 705
Cross Section Map Features dialog box 232
Cross Section menu
Cross Section Features 226-232
Map Features 232
cross sections
adding well data 230
creating 45-47
creating data file from 198
Delete Fill Area (Graphics Editor) 173
displaying automatically (System Switches)
777
displaying cross section 49
displaying file information 105
displaying headers (File: Info) 106
displaying information (File Manager) 67
File menu options, overview 31
partially regridding (Data Editor) 201
Picture Assembly (Features) 370-374
Rename Pictures option (File: Rename) 148
specifying features 226-232
workflow 45
working with (File Manager) 60
CTOG see: contour gridding
R2003.12.0
D
dashed lines, pattern illustrated 802
data
also see by data type
Antilog Base 10 (from Data) operation 569
Blank Data operation 570-572
codes for data fields 787
converting data types (File Conversion) 675
converting to/from decimal degrees 701
Data Distribution Statistics (Point Gridding)
448
Data Selection (Data Operations) 573-616
Data Statistics dialog box 104
Dual Data Operations 565-568
editing 174
editing selected data 205
Grid to Data operation 572
importing from/exporting to Stratamodel 27
importing from/exporting to TDQ 28
importing/exporting methods (overview) 22
Single Data Operations 560-564
thinning seismic data 657
Update Files setting (Data Editor) 206
using PetroWorks data 29
Index
942
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Index
943
Landmark
dip
reflected in Trend Fit Gridding 502
dip angle
calculating in DIPAZM function 542
used in Calculate Fault Fields 669
Dip Symbol Generator (Operations: Faults)
670-671
Dip Vector Map macros 739
DIPAZM function
Single Grid Operations 542
DIPMAG (angle tangent) function
Single Grid Operations 542
Directory Paths (File menu) 108-115
color tables 115
data files 112
format files 114
importance of file name extensions 109
macro files 115
MFDs 110
overview of options 31
session/parameter files 112
workflow 108
ZGFs 111
discontinuity codes/fields
discontinuity fields (line thinning) 607
Discontinuity Flags (file conversion) 684
setting flags (line resampling) 719
Disk File to ZGF option (Import) 130
DISPLACE (Displacement)
Line Resampling method 715
display area
separating from menu bar 778
displaying
Auto Display option (View menu) 383
Display List option (View menu) 376
fault dip symbols 670
file information: workflow 93
Full Display option (View menu) 382
grid statistics (File: Info) 105
Re-display option (View menu) 381
statistics for .data file 104
View menu options 375-384
ZGF information 105
Distance gridding algorithm
Point Gridding 434
Point Gridding Plus 405
R2003.12.0
distances
Distance-to-Vertex Grid macro 467
Distance-to-Vertex Grid macro (menu) 740
DISTINCLL (Distance Increment
Latitude/Longitude)
Line Resampling method 714
DISTINCXY (Distance Increment X/Y)
Line Resampling method 713
distortion in projections, explained 689
DMS (Degree-MInute-Second)
converting data to/from 701
Dominion Land Survey (DLS)
adding DLS data to map 367
adding DLS lines/labels 365
using DLS AOI to create map 364
using DLS data to create/post map 366
dotted lines, pattern illustrated 802
double parallel Lambert projections
Z-MAP Plus 883
Douglas Poiker algorithm 706
downdip
using in DIPAZM function 542
drag-and-drop operations
in the File Manager 64
drawing
curves (Contouring) 243
hacured lines in polygons 279
lease polygons 278
lines 252-270
polygons 277-279
DTS files
importing, creating .dts Z-MAP files 57
Dual Data Operations 565-568
Operation options listed 567
Dual Grid Operations 544-548
Operation options listed 545
duplex text, illustrated 801
DX function (Single Grid Operations) 542
DX2 function (Single Grid Operations) 542
DY function (Single Grid Operations) 542
DY2 function (Single Grid Operations) 542
dynamic, defined 916
DZ/DX field (Point Gridding) 448
DZ/DY field (Point Gridding) 448
Index
944
Landmark
E
easting
adding labels to map 223
Edit menu 157-218
Color Indices option 218
Color Table option 209-217
Data Editor option 174-207
Graphics Editor option 158-173
icon button counterparts illustrated 6
overview of options 157
Edit/Create Data 174
canceling edit 207
contours, faults, lines 185
creating data files 198
grid nodes 194
points 175
regridding 201
selecting data 205
editing
breaking a line (Break option) 187
Cancel Edit (Data Editor) 207
color index 213
deleting elements (Graphics Editor) 160
deleting features (Graphics Editor) 159
deleting text (Graphics Editor) 166
Edit All Features option 173
Edit Area dialog box 173
Edit Lines dialog box 167
Edit Markers dialog box 169
Edit Selected Features (Graphics Ed.) 161
Edit Text dialog box 165
extending lines (Data Editor) 188
files 575
polygons 277-279
removing wobble in Line Gridding 499
Reshape Contours option 185
using wildcards in Range Edit 609
editor, defined 916
elements
deleting elements of features 160
English units
setting with system switches 778
enlarging
area of map (Window option) 379
Zoom In option (View menu) 377
R2003.12.0
Index
945
Landmark
F
False Easting value: projection parameter 43
False Northing value: projection parameter 43
FALT files see: fault files
Fast Contour option (Features) 246
fault angles
used in Calculate Fault Fields 669
fault files
creating 198
creating a subset of 575
editing (Contours, Faults, Lines option) 185
editing data (Data Editor) 174
fault polygons
honored in Point Gridding Plus 396
fault traces, described 228
fault-cut line files 478
faulted line data grids 479
faults
also see: centerline faults
balancing bifurcations 668
Break & Extend option (Data Editor) 189
breaking a line into parts 187
calculate dip, heave or separation 669
Calculate Fault Fields command 669
creating data file 198
drawbacks of treating faults as opaque 400
editing (Contours, Faults, Lines option) 185
extending lines 188
FALT data file type 917
Fault Locator Circles utility 399
Fault Shrinker utility 398
file structure 856
in Trendform gridding 470
Migration/Reverse Migration algorithm 649
movement terminology 396
moving centerlines (Migrator option) 671
Point Gridding Plus: processing faults 400
shrinking from polygon to centerline 674
used in volumetrics 750
R2003.12.0
Index
946
Landmark
fields
adding to control point files with IDA 664
Calculate Fault Fields command 669
copying/adding (Data Operations) 633
data type field codes 787
deleting: workflow 644
description parameters (import/export files)
829-846
FORTRAN format 639
overwriting transformed coordinates 700
parameter options 127
renaming: workflow 641
File Conversion (Operations menu) 681-685
file description parameters
for import/export file formats 831-833
file formats
import files for MFDs 850-859
File Manager 60-67
drag-and-drop operations 64
File Manager icon illustrated 60
selecting multiple files (File Manager) 63
File menu 31-156
Compress 153-156
Copy options 140-145
Delete 150-152
Directory Paths 108-115
Exit 156
Import 116-131
Info 89-107
Manager 60-67
New options 32-47
Open options 48-59
Open options: overview 48
Print 131-139
Rename 146-149
Save As option 70-88
Save Session As 68-69
file names
importance of extensions 109
R2003.12.0
file structures
contours 852
deviated wells 858
fault files 856
grids 851
LOGOFILE 899
profile data 855
seismic section 858
text 858
vertex files 854
file types
codes for data files 785
converting file types 682
File: Import: ASCII (Import) menu
ZMAP+ data preview window 123
File: Import: Disk File to ZGF option 130
File: Info menu
Graphics File Summary option 107
Grid Listing option 101
File: New menu
Basemap option 34-44
Basemap option: workflow 35
Cross Section option 45-47
Master File (MFD) option 33
File: Open menu 48-59
MFD Open/Close option 48
overview of options 48
Picture Open option 49
SeisWorks option 50
Session option 48
ZGF Open/Close option 49
files
Copy Files (Copy menu) 140
copying file history (Copy File) 141
deleting (File: Delete) 150
descriptors for file types 785
displaying file types in MFD 92
editing data 174
File Conversion option (Operations) 675
File menu options, overview 31
format of imported/exported files 829-846
history 645
Index
947
Landmark
files continued
importing/exporting 827-864
limitations on Cut 62
listing file information: workflow 93
Master File Directory utility 90
overwriting coordinate fields 700
renaming 146
saving grid as SeisWorks horizon 85
filter operator grid
Polynomial Grid 519
filtering see: flexing
filters
User-Defined Filter described 387
fishnet plot maps
creating with Fast Contour feature 246
FIX function
Single Data Operations 562
flexing
definition 918
flexing pass defined 918
parameters: smoothing 525
Point Gridding Plus Smoothing 413
purpose of flexing described 393
Flexing option (Modeling menu) 520-530
Bias/Multiplier parameters 527
briefly described 387
Cutoff 525
Flexing Type parameter
Contour Gridding 461, 485
Point Gridding Plus 413
FLOOR function
Single Data Operations 562
FMT files see: format files
fonts
Edit All Features option 173
editing 166
options illustrated 801
types of 166
form grids
contouring tips 474
defined 468
examples 475
using Trendform Gridding for 467-476
R2003.12.0
G
GC (Great Circle) geographic coordinates
using in line resampling 720
General Transverse Mercator projections
Z-MAP Plus 882
Generalized Cartographic Transformation
System (GCTS) projection, setting
(Coordinate Transformations) 693
Geo Name 15
Geo Type 15
geodetic coordinates
converting to/from projected coordinates 686
setting up a projection 871-896
Geographical Sorting macro
shown on menu 740
Index
948
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Index
949
Landmark
gridding algorithms
Bounded Range (Point Gridding Plus) 406
Bounded Range (Point Gridding) 434
Closest Point (Point Gridding Plus) 405
Closest Point (Point Gridding) 434
Closest Point (Trendform Gridding) 473
Distance (Point Gridding Plus) 405
Distance (Point Gridding) 434
Isopach (Point Gridding Plus) 405
Isopach (Point Gridding) 434
Kriging (Point Gridding Plus) 406
Least Squares (Point Gridding Plus) 404
Least Squares (Point Gridding) 433
Least Squares (Trendform Gridding) 473
Line Gridding 489
Linear Trend (Point Gridding) 434
Moving Plate (Point Gridding) 435
Point Density (Point Gridding Plus) 406
Projected Slopes (Point Gridding Plus) 405
Projected Slopes (Point Gridding) 433
Random Closest (Point Gridding Plus) 408
Weighted Average (Point Gridding Plus) 405
Weighted Average (Point Gridding) 433
Weighted Average (Trendform Gridding) 473
gridding methods
Boolean Grid 515
Constant Grid 516
Contour Gridding 451-466
Flexing 520-530
Line Gridding 487-500
Line Gridding Plus 477-486
Point Gridding 430-450
Point Gridding Plus 394-429
Polynomial Grid 517-518
Trend Fit 501-506
Trend Surface Gridding 507-514
Trendform Gridding 467-476
User-Defined Filter (Polynomial Grid) 519
Gridin1/Gridin2
as source for area of interest 548
R2003.12.0
grids
back interpolating X,Y positions 677
Blank Grid (Grid Operations) 549-551
blanking 549
computing area/volume see: Volumetrics
creating with IDA 665
data distribution in grid (Point Gridding) 448
displaying statistics (File: Info) 105
Dual Grid Operations 544-548
file format 851
filter operator (Polynomial Grid) 519
importing from/exporting to Stratamodel 27
listing information (File: Info) 101
operations using Calculator 536
overview of flexing 520
OWC 515
photographic representation of surface 247
reducing interval (Refinements) 393
Resample Grid (Grid Operations) 552-555
saving as SeisWorks horizon 85
saving to merged SeisWorks project 88
Single Grid Operations 540-543
H
hachured lines
adding fault dip symbols 670
filling polygons with 279
pattern illustrated 802
specifying on contour map 244
headers
displaying information (File Manager) 67
records
in ZGF flat files 75
heave
SeisWorks heave computation 57
used in Calculate Fault Fields 669
high tension surfaces
effects of Laplacian flexing 522
history
of a file 645
symbols for import/export file format 830
Index
950
Landmark
I
iconifying
console window when macro executes 779
icons
Attach MFDs 48
Attach ZGFs 49
Basemap Features 223
Calculator 536
Color Indices option 218
Color Table 209
Contouring 238
Display List 376
File Manager 60
Full Display 382
Master File Directory 90
overview of graphical toolbar 6
Pan 380
Picture Open 49
Point Gridding Plus 395
Raise System Window 773
Redisplay 381
Redo Last Feature 159
Toggle Background Color 778
Undo Last Feature 159
Window 379
workflow overview 7
Zoom In 377
Zoom Out icon 378
R2003.12.0
Index
951
Landmark
interpreters
column heading (Grid Statistics dialog) 15
definition (OpenWorks) 21
described 20
project access levels (OpenWorks) 21
interrupting
redrawing process 377
intersections
Surface Intersection operation 735
Intrinsic hypothesis
kriging in Point Gridding Plus 408
Isopach Contouring (Profiles) macro
shown on menu 739
Isopach gridding algorithm
Compression Factor parameter 435
Point Gridding 434
Point Gridding Plus 405
isopach grids
using from StratWorks 467
italic text, illustrated 801
iterative depth algorithm (IDA) 664, 665
J
J-curve data
storing (Water Saturation Averaging) 765
K
key field 779
key text 273
kriging
defined 923
hypotheses (Point Gridding Plus) 408
included in Point Gridding Plus 397
parameters 425-429
semivariograms (Point Gridding Plus) 426
Kriging gridding algorithm
Point Gridding Plus 406
R2003.12.0
L
labels
adding DLS/NTS labels to map 365
adding to contour map 243
adding to map 223
Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters
dialog box 244
Lambert Conic projections
Blue Marble 889
Lambert projections
double parallel (Z-MAP Plus) 883
single parallel (Z-MAP Plus) 883
Laplacian filters
described (Point Gridding) 445
shown in flexing workflow 520
template described 521
using in Contour Gridding 461, 485
using in Flexing 524
using in Line Gridding 497
using in Point Gridding Plus 413
LASPRM files, described 902
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees option
Operations menu 701-703
latitude
adding labels to map 223
converting to Y 692
Latitude Scale Factor (projection setting) 42
Reference Latitude (projection setting) 42
using to define new map AOI 36
LATLONGPROJECTED AOI type
specifying for new map 36
LCK files see: lock files
leases
drawing lease polygons 278
least squares fit, defined 923
Least Squares gridding algorithm
Point Gridding 433
Point Gridding Plus 404
Trendform Gridding 473
LGBNAMES.DAT files, described 904
Index
952
Landmark
R2003.12.0
lines continued
patterns illustrated 802
reducing file size (Line Generalization) 705
Scale Line option 663
Scale/Bias Line or Area operation 662
thinning seismic data (Data Operations) 602
listing
contents of CPS-1 SAVE file 107
LN (natural log) function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
location editing
Select-Area Limits from Data File 598
sorting source data 604
lock files
caution about deleting 901
deleting 901
described 901
log files
commenting out lines 774
creating 774
LOG10 (log base 10) function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
logging
Log Output option (System Window) 773
session events 774
logical graphics blocks (LGB), defined 923
logical records
defined 828
field description parameters for 834
LOGOFILE, described 899
logos
adding a logo to a title block 899
longitude
adding labels to map 223
converting to X 692
Longitude Scale Factor option 43
Reference Longitude (projection setting) 43
using to define new map AOI 36
Index
953
Landmark
M
macro files
inaccessible in File Manager 60
setting directory paths for 115
macros
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA 569
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID 548
APPEND-XY 647
Area/Depth Plot (on menu) 739
AREA-DEPTH 768
Bubble Map Posting macro (on menu) 739
COLOR-BAR 251
Color-filled Contours macro (on menu) 739
CTOG 201
ENVELOPE 760
ENVELOPE (reservoir envelope volumetrics)
760
EVALUATE-CONGRID 516
EVALUATE-POLYN 517
EXPORT-CPS-FILE 73
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE 74
FASTCONTOURMAP 246
FAULT-BACKFILL-F 670
FAULT-BALANCER 668
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL 671
FAULT-MIGRATION 672
FAULT-PROFILE 673
FAULT-SHRINKER 674
FISHNET-PLOT 246
GRID-LT-EQ-GT 515
GRID-TO-SEISMIC 648
IMPORT-CPS-FILE 131
IMPORT-GRID 129
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE 130
LINEGRIDPLUS 477
LIST-CPS-FILE 107
NADCONV: calling via command 367
NIV-DATA 664
NIV-GRID 665
overview (Macros menu) 737
PIC-POST-DLS: calling via command 366
PIC-POST-NTS: calling via command 366
POST-DLS: calling via command 367
POST-NTS: calling via command 368
POST-NTS-DLS 364
R2003.12.0
macros continued
POST-NTS-DLS: calling via command 365
POST-PIC-STATS 369
QUICKVOL-FORTYPOLS 770
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS 769
SPAWN-PROCESS 772
SURFCORRECT 761
TRANSFORM-COORDS 700
TREND-ANAL-GRID 507
using ZCLMAC extension for 737
VERT-TO-DGRID (Distance-to-Vertex Grid)
467
ZGF-SUMMARY 107
Macros menu 737-742
Execute Macro dialog box 741
Geophysics options 740
Graphics options 739
Operations options 739
Quick-look options 738
User Macros option 737
Utilities options 740
main window, described 4
mantissa
changing to .0 562
map projections see: projections
map scales
Scale Type option (new map) 37
maps
adding 2D seismic surveys 321-337
adding 3D seismic surveys 338-362
adding AOI/projection information 369
adding color scale bar 251
adding control point symbols 280-290
adding features/labels/border 223
adding grid node symbols/values 275-276
adding lines 252-270
adding text 271-274
adding/editing polygons 277-279
Contouring options 238-251
creating a map 34-44
creating data file from 198
Delete Fill Area (Graphics Editor) 173
deleting (Delete Pictures) 151
displaying automatically (System Switches)
777
Index
954
Landmark
maps continued
displaying file information 105
displaying header information 67
displaying headers (File: Info) 106
displaying map 49
Edit Area dialog box 173
editing: Wrong Item Found option 164
Mapping Across the Dateline option 43
Overlay Pictures option 233-237
partially regridding (Data Editor) 201
Picture Assembly (Features) 370-374
properties 872
redisplaying portion of 381
reference spheroid list 41
Rename Pictures option (File: Rename) 148
setting background color 776
setting projection parameters 39-44
Shaded Relief dialog box 247
specifying projection codes 40
specifying State Plane projection 43
viewing current color settings 172
workflow for creating 35
working with (File Manager) 60
markers
Edit Markers dialog box 169
masking grids
described 530
Output Grid Name, Mask Use dialog 523
Master File Directory icon 90
master file directory see: MFDs
Master File Directory utility 90
Maximum-Relative-Change value
used in flexing 525
MCF files
importing SeisWorks MCF file data 58
measurement units
setting with system switches 778
Mercator projections
Blue Marble Mercator 888
cylindrical: table of zones 879
General Transverse (Z-MAP) 882
Oblique Mercator (Z-MAP Plus) 886
Standard (Z-MAP Plus) 883
Transverse Mercator (Blue Marble) 888
Universal Transverse (Z-MAP) 882
R2003.12.0
Index
955
Landmark
minutes
converting data to/from minutes format 701
Mistie Reduction
Geophysical Operations 653-655
mistie, defined 925
Modeling menu 385-530
Boolean Grid option 515
Constant Grid option 516
Contour Gridding option 451-466
Flexing option 520-530
Line Gridding option 487-500
Line Gridding Plus option 477-486
Point Gridding option 430-450
Point Gridding Plus option 394-429
Polynomial Grid option 517-518
Trend Fit Gridding option 501-506
Trend Surface Gridding option 507-514
Trendform Gridding option 467-476
User-Defined Filter option 519
Modified Polyconic projections
Z-MAP Plus 885
Modulation Parameters options (3D Seismic)
Symbol Size Range Creation Parameters
360-362
Molleweide projections
Blue Marble 891
monitors
setting system switches 776
Switch Screen option (View menu) 384
moving
fault centerline (Migrator option) 671
files/pictures (File Manager) 62
map/cross section in graphic display 380
text (Edit menu) 162
text (Graphics Editor) 165
Moving Plate gridding algorithm
Point Gridding 435
Multi-Surface Map macro
shown on menu 739
R2003.12.0
N
NAD state plane projections
for new map 43-44
NAD 27-NAD 83 Datum Shift 367
using in Coordinate Transformations 698
Name Output dialog (Merge Data) 620-623
Name Output files dialog box
Migration, Reverse Migration 651
naming conventions
color tables 115
for data files 112
format files 72, 114
imported SeisWorks files 58
National Topographic Survey (NTS)
adding NTS data (Post National Topo) 368
adding NTS lines/labels 365
using NTS AOI to create map 364
using NTS data to create/post map 366
Nederland Stereografische projections
Z-MAP Plus 887
net pay
importing data from PetroWorks 29
New Map Creation dialog box 34-44
AOI from Grid, Data, Picture or Contours 37
AOI from user input, Offsets, and Scale 38
Picture Name, AOI & Scale Type 36
Projection Parameters option 39-44
New menu 32-47
New Zealand Map Grid projections
Z-MAP Plus 886
NIV see: normalized interval velocity
NMINCREM (Numerical Increment)
Line Resampling method 714
node see: grid nodes
non-opaque faults
processing in Point Gridding Plus 400
NORM function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 541
Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the
Residuals Graph (for trend surface grid)
510
Index
956
Landmark
O
Oblique Mercator projections
Z-MAP Plus 886
oil water contact (OWC) 515
opaque faults
drawbacks of treating faults as opaque 400
opening
MFDs 48
picture (map/cross section) 49
SeisWorks horizon file 50
session file 48
ZGF 49
OpenVision 3D Viewer
briefly described 22
R2003.12.0
OpenWorks
column heading definitions 15
connection overview 13
data source/interpreter defined 21
data you can import 22
files sort order 779
importing grid files to 129
importing SeisWorks .hor files 50
importing/exporting Stratamodel data 27
importing/exporting TDQ data 28
loading ASCII grid 863
location of data loading tools 861
selecting project/interpreter 20
starting initial session 19
starting Z-MAP Plus from 14
well symbol table 791
OpenWorks files
working with (File Manager) 60
operations
building with Calculator 536
Operations menu 531-736
Back Interpolation option 677-680
Calculator option 536-538
Coordinate Transformations 686-699
Data Operations option 558-645
Data Operations overview 532
Faults option 667-674
Faults overview 534
File Conversion option 675, 681-685
Geophysical Operations option 646-666
Geophysical Operations overview 533
Grid Operations overview 532
Grid option 539-557
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees 701-703
Line Generalization option 704-709
Line Generalization, Line Resampling 675
Line Resampling option 710-734
overview 531-535
remaining operations 675-736
remaining operations (overview) 534
Surface Intersection option 735-736
Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields)
option 700
Index
957
Landmark
P
Pan icon 380
parameter files see: session files
parameters
changing for text (Edit menu) 162
map features: Edit All Features option 173
resetting by opening session file 48
unlocking automatically 776
pasting
files/pictures (File Manager) 62
Patch-grid Posting macro
shown on menu 739
patterns
line patterns illustrated 802
perspective maps
creating 246
PetroWorks
description of 23
importing data from 29
photographic representation of grid 247
physical records, defined 828
Picture Assembly (Features) 370-374
Picture Name, AOI & Scale Type dialog box
using to specify name for new map 36
Picture Statistics macro
shown on menu 740
pictures see: maps and cross sections
plain text, illustrated 801
planar projections
polar, equatorial, oblique 876
planimetric data
setting line generalization tolerance for 708
R2003.12.0
Index
958
Landmark
polygons
color attribute (overview) 208
converting to centerline fault 674
drawing/editing 277-279
filling polygons with hachured lines 279
rotated 578
Select- Polygons from File dialog 593
used to blank data 571
used to edit files 577
using closed polygons in Profiler 673
using to blank grids 550
using to subset data (Select dialog) 573
polylines
creating data file 198
Polynomial Grid 517-518
briefly described 386
examples of polynomial degrees 518
polynomial trend grids
Trend Fit Gridding briefly described 386
pore pressure
Normalized Interval Velocity Data 664
porosity curve data
storing (Water Saturation Averaging) 765
using in Water Saturation Averaging 762
POSMEM files, described 902
Post Line macro, shown on menu 739
Post Seismic Line Data dialog (2D) 321-337
Post Seismic Line Data dialog (3D) 338-362
Post Z-field Star macro, shown on menu 739
posting see: adding
POWER function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
previewing
ASCII data to import 123
primitives
changing color (Color Indices option) 218
color attribute 804
graphic features codes 781-784
graphic primitives defined 804
record types saved in ASCII 79
Print menu (File) 131-139
printing
CGM files 132
File menu options, overview 31
Other option 137
R2003.12.0
Index
959
Landmark
projections continued
specifying parameters for new map 39-44
State Plane 865
State Plane Coordinate System 896
tangent projections 875
using NAD27/NAD83 for new map 43-44
Z-MAP Plus 882-887
pseudocylindrical projections
Robinson projection (Blue Marble) 892
Q
Quality Assurance (Data, Grid) macro
shown on menu 739
Quick Volumetrics (2 polygons) 769
Quick Volumetrics (40 polygons) 770
Quick-look options (Macros menu)
menu illustrated 738
R
raising
Raise option (Tools: System Window) 773
Raise System Window icon 773
Random Closest gridding algorithm
Point Gridding Plus 408
Range Edit Equations Display dialog box
deleting equations 575
range editing (Data Selection)
Select dialog box 573
Select-Range Edit Equation Input 614
Select-Range Edit Equations Display 612
sorting source data 604
wildcards 609
Range Editing (Operations: Data Operations)
624-628
Read option
Edit Color Table dialog box 216
RECIPRCL (reciprocal) function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 542
R2003.12.0
records
deleting: Range Editing (Data Operations)
625
field description parameters (logical) 834
format for ZGF data exported to ASCII 74
group 79
logical records defined 828
logical/physical records described 118
modal 83
non-command types 84
physical records defined 828
primitives 79
Rotate Data (Data Operations) 628
Select-Range Edit Equation Input 614
Select-Range Edit Equations Display 612
Sort Data (Data Operations) 631
thinning (Select dialog box) 573
ZGF flat file headers 75
REDFZNON (redefine ZNON) function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 542
redisplaying
Re-display option (View menu) 381
Redo Last Feature icon 159
redrawing
digitized contours (Contour) 239
Full Display option (View menu) 382
portion of display 381
reducing
enlarged part of map (Zoom Out) 378
execution time/search radius 392
grid interval with Refinements 393
Reduce Text Posting macro (menu) 739
redundant points
removing from files with lines 675
Reference Latitude (projection setting) 42
Reference Longitude (projection setting) 43
reference spheroids
described 893
list of options 41
specifying (Coordinate Transformations) 696
Refinements parameter, described 393
Index
960
Landmark
R2003.12.0
S
Save As option (File menu) 70-88
Save Session As option (File menu) 68-69
saving
changes in color table 217
color table as file 216
grid as horizon (merged SeisWorks project)
88
session files 68
system window output 773
scale bars 223
SCALE function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
Scale Type option (File: New: Basemap) 37
Scale/Bias Line or Area
Geophysical Operations 662-664
Scale Area option 663
Scale Line option 663
scratch files
compared to MFDs 49
definition 931
examples 903
Master File Directory utility 90
warning about creating MFD 33
Search Radius parameter
using for intitializing node values 392
secant planar projections
cylinder, cone, plane 876
secondary rock properties
Random Closest (Point Gridding Plus) 408
seconds
converting data to/from minutes format 701
Index
961
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Index
962
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Index
963
Landmark
R2003.12.0
T
TAN (tangent) function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 541
tangents
projections (cone/cylinder/plane) 875
tangent to dip angle (DIPMAG) 542
TBL files see: color table files
TDQ
briefly described 22
importing/exporting data 28
templates
Biharmonic/Laplacian templates 521
TEMPMACRO files, described 902
temporary files, described 903
text
adding control points to map 280-290
adding to map 271-274
adding to map from file 272
adding to map with keyboard 273
color attribute (overview) 208
Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters
dialog box 244
deleting (Graphics Editor) 166
Edit Text dialog box 165
file structure of 858
key text 273
moving/copying (Graphics Editor) 165
setting color for 166
symbol parameters 280
text files
Select-Thinning Edit-Random Data File 602
thinning
3D seismic lines 353
data (Select dialog box) 573
editing seismic line data 602
posted 2D shotpoints 324
posted 3D shotpoints 357
seismic data 657
Seismic Data Thinning operation 656-661
Select-Area Limits from Grid File 600
Select-Thinning Edit Line Data File 603
shotpoints 657
sorting source data 604
Wildcards 610
Index
964
Landmark
throw values
adjusting with Balancer command 668
time horizon grids
Migration/Reverse Migration algorithm 649
time slice increment setting
Volumetrics report 748
title blocks
adding a logo 899
Basemap Features dialog box 223
customizing 897-900
tmp files see: temporary files
Toggle Background Color icon 778
Tools menu 771-780
icon button counterparts illustrated 6
System Window options 773
township/section range data
adding to map 367
tracklines see: polylines
Transform Coordinates (Operations: Coordinate
Transformations) 692-699
Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields)
option 700
transition zone modeling
water saturation averaging overview 762
Transverse Mercator projections
Blue Marble 888
Trend (Bias) ratio: Point Gridding Plus 415
Trend Fit Gridding 501-506
briefly described 386
trend polynomial grids
creating (Constant Grid) 517-518
Trend Surface Gridding 507-514
briefly described 386
determining accuracy of trend fit 510
Trendform Gridding 467-476
purpose of flexing described 393
troubleshooting
drag-and-drop limitations 64
effect of overlaying pictures: color 235
importance of color table file extension 115
importance of file name extensions 109
recovering from abnormal session end 901
using correct DATA file extension 112
using correct extension for ZGFs 156
R2003.12.0
U
UID files, defined 904
Undo Last Feature icon 159
units see: measurement units
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)
using in Coordinate Transformations 691
Z-MAP Plus 882
unlocking parameters automatically 776
Update Files option (Data Editor) 206
Update picture dynamically option
Edit Color Table dialog box 217
updating graphic display
Process Interrupt icon 377
User Macros option (Macros menu) 737
User-Defined Filter
briefly described 387
gridding method 519
users
definition/access levels (OpenWorks) 21
Utilities options (Macros menu)
menu illustrated 740
UTM see: Universal Transverse Mercator
V
Van der Grinten I projections
Z-MAP Plus 886
vector files
output by Migration/Reverse Migration 649
velocity data
Migration, Reverse Migration 650
Normalized Interval Velocity Data 664
Velocity-function Time-to-Depth macro
shown on menu 740
VERT files see: vertex files
Index
965
Landmark
vertex files
creating 198
creating a subset of 575
cross section baseline 46
editing data (Data Editor) 174
reducing file size (Line Generalization) 705
structure of 854
using to blank grids 550
vertical separation data
required for Point Gridding Plus 396
used in Calculate Fault Fields 669
View menu 375-384
Auto Display option/icon 383
Display List option/icon 376
Full Display option/icon 382
icon button counterparts illustrated 6
Pan option/icon 380
Switch Screens option 384
Window option/icon 379
Zoom Out option 377, 378
volume scale 754
VOLUMES.OUT files, described 903
Volumetrics 745-759
Base Plane setting 757
constraints 758
Quick Volumetrics (2 polygons) 769
Quick Volumetrics (40 polygons) 770
report fields 752
Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics 760
Slice Thickness setting 757
volumetrics defined 934
R2003.12.0
W
Water Saturation Averaging
overview 762
Water Saturation Averaging dialog 766
WDFILE files, described 904
Weighted Average gridding algorithm
Point Gridding 433
Point Gridding Plus 405
Trendform Gridding 473
weighting function, defined 935
Well Overposting macro
shown on menu 739
Well Symbol Editor 791-792
Well-penetration Coordinates macros
shown on menu 739
wells
adding deviated wells 291-320
importing well data from Stratamodel 27
merging surface/picks (Surface Correction)
761
OpenWorks symbols 791
wildcards
used with thinning editing 610
using to create data subset 609
Williams algorithm 706
Window option (View menu) 379
Windowed Contour Map macro
shown on menu 739
workflow icons see: icons
workflows
blanking a grid 549
comprehensive 17
creating a cross section 45
creating a map 35
Faults (Operations menu) 667
Grid Listing (File: Info) 101
integrating w/other Landmark products 23
SeisWorks/Z-MAP Plus integration 24
setting directory paths 108
Write option
Edit Color Table dialog box 216
Wrong Item Found (Graphics Editor) 164
Index
966
Landmark
X fields
converting to longitude 692
X gridding increment
Line Gridding Plus 480
X scale formula
AOI of new map 38
X,Y values
back interpolating from grid location 677
X,Y,Z Point Data (Features) 280-290
XMin, XMax, YMin,YMax parameters
Point Gridding Plus 411
XMin,XMax
Line Gridding Plus parameters 481
xterm window
described 4
XY AOI type
specifying for new map 36
XYPROJECTED AOI type
specifying for new map 36
Y
Y fields
converting to latitude 692
Y gridding increment
Line Gridding Plus 480
Y scale formula
AOI of new map 38
YMin,YMax
Line Gridding Plus parameters 481
R2003.12.0
Index
967
Landmark
R2003.12.0
Index
968